KR102165542B1 - Front illumination device comprising a film-based lightguide - Google Patents

Abstract

The light emitting device disclosed in the present specification includes an array of combined light guides that are continuous with a light guide region of a light guide formed from at least one light source and a film, a light extraction feature, a cladding layer of the light emitting region of the film, and a stack of combined light guide The area percentage of the light input surface including the light input surface defined by the defined bounding edge and including the core region is at least 98 percent. In another embodiment, light from the at least one light source is not directly coupled to the cladding layer at the light input surface. In a further embodiment, the total thickness of the combined light guides at the light input surface is less than n times the light guide area of the light guide and n is the number of combined light guides.

Description

Front lighting device with film-based lightguide {FRONT ILLUMINATION DEVICE COMPRISING A FILM-BASED LIGHTGUIDE}

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is filed on April 16, 2010 in US Provisional Application No. 61/325,266 entitled “Replaceable illuminated signage system for cooler doors”; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,252 entitled “Manufacturing device for ultra-low profile film lightguide” filed on April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,269 entitled "Processing method for optical film lightguide and coupling system," filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,271 entitled "Method and apparatus for aligning lightguides in a coupling system," filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,272 entitled "Center aligned lighting configuration for ultra-thin LED backlight system for LCDs," filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,275 entitled “Low profile battery powered lightguide” filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,277 entitled "Method and apparatus for enhanced LCD backlight", filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,280 entitled "Film coupling system with light propagation modifications" filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,282 entitled "Heatsinking methods for compact film light guide systems", filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,262, filed April 16, 2010, entitled "Lamination method for a multi-layer optical lightguide film"; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,270 entitled "Edge-enhancement for film coupling technology", filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/325,265 entitled "Colored surface illumination by mixing dyes and scattering features into ink," filed April 16, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/347,567 entitled "Light emitting device comprising a film-based lightguide" filed May 24, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/363,342 filed July 12, 2010, entitled "Film lightguide with light redirecting elements"; US Provisional Application No. 61/368,560, filed July 28, 2010, entitled "Light emitting device with optical redundancy"; US Provisional Application No. 61/377,888 entitled "Light emitting device comprising a lightguide film" filed on August 27, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/381,077 entitled "Light emitting device with externally or internally controlled output" filed September 9, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/415,250 entitled "Light emitting device comprising a lightguide film and light turning optical element" filed on November 18, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/425,328 entitled "Light emitting device comprising a removable and replaceable lightguide" filed December 21, 2010; US Provisional Application No. 61/441,871 entitled "Front illumination device comprising a film-based lightguide" filed on February 11, 2011; And US Provisional Application No. 61/450,711 entitled "Illumination device comprising a film-based lightguide" filed on March 9, 2011, and the entire contents of each of the documents are incorporated herein by reference. .

The inventive subject matter disclosed in this application relates generally to light-emitting devices such as lighting fixtures, backlights, frontlights, luminescent signs, passive displays, and active displays, and components thereof and a method of manufacturing.

Conventionally, to reduce the thickness of displays such as backlights, edge-like configurations using fixed lightguides are used to receive light from the edge of a wider outer surface and direct the light to a wider face. These types of light emitting devices are typically housed in relatively thick, fixed frames that do not account for component or device flexibility and require a long lead type for design changes. The volume of these devices is large and sometimes includes thick or large frames or bezels around the device. Thick light guides (typically 2 millimeters (mm) and more) limit design configurations, production methods, and lighting methods.

The ability to further reduce the thickness and overall volume of light emitting devices in this field is limited by the ability to couple sufficient luminous flux into a thin lightguide. Typical LED light sources have a light emitting area dimension of at least 1 mm, and it is often difficult to control the light that enters, travels through, and combines a 2 mm lightguide to meet design requirements. Displays incorporating 2 mm lightguides are typically limited to displays with a 33 line centimeter (cm) or small diagonal dimension. Many systems are thick because of designs that use large light sources and large input coupling optics or methods. Some systems that use one lightguide per pixel (such as fiber-based systems) require large volumes and have small alignment errors. In production, thin lightguides are limited to coating on fixed wafers for integrated optical components.

It is included in the content of the present invention.

In one embodiment, the reflective display includes a reflective spatial light modulator and a frontlight. The front light includes a lightguide formed from a film having opposing faces having a thickness no greater than about 0.5 millimeters therebetween. The lightguide contains an array of coupling lightguides in succession with the lightguide region of the lightguide, each coupling lightguide terminated at a bounding edge, and each coupling The light guide is folded in a fold region so that the bounding edges are stacked. At least one light source is arranged to emit light to the stacked bounding edges. Light travels from the combined light guides to the light guide area of the light guide, merges with light from each combination light guide within the light guide area, and undergoes total reflection. A plurality of light extraction features interfere with the light that is totally reflected within the light guide area, so that the light is directed toward the reflective spatial light modulator in the light emitting region of the film. And exit the light guide. A cladding region is optically coupled on the first side of the light guide, and light from at least one light source travels to the cladding region. The light extracting region is operatively coupled to the cladding region on the second side of the cladding region opposite the light guide, and a portion of the light in the cladding region is extracted by the light extraction region.

In another embodiment, the reflective display includes a reflective spatial light modulator and a frontlight. The front light includes a lightguide formed from a film having a thickness not greater than 0.5 millimeters. The light guide includes an array of coupling lightguides extending from a lightguide region of the lightguide. The array of combined lightguides is folded in a fold region and stacked to form a light input surface. A light source is arranged to emit light at the light input surface. Light travels to the light guide area within the array of combined light guides, merges with light from each combination light guide of the combination light guides array within the light guide area and totally reflects. A plurality of light extraction features are operatively coupled to the film and configured to impede light that is totally reflected within the light guide area, so that the light is directed to the light emitting region. ), exit the frontlight toward the reflective spatial light modulator. The cladding region is optically coupled to the light guide. The light extracting region is optically coupled to the cladding region on the first side of the cladding region opposite to the light guide, and at each coupled light guide at a first angle from the total internal reflection interface. The traveling light travels at a larger angle after the folded area in the combined lightguide and is extracted from the cladding area by the light extraction area.

In a further embodiment, a method of producing a display includes each of an array of combined lightguides from a lightguide region of a film comprising a core region and a cladding region. A step of forming an array of the coupling lightguides by separating the coupling lightguides from each other, wherein each coupling lightguide is continuous with the lightguide region and bound at an end of the coupling lightguide. Forming an array of the combined light guides, including a bounding edge; Folding the array of combined light guides so that the bounding edges are stacked by folding the array of combined light guides; Positioning of a light source that directs light to the stacked bounding edges, wherein the light is formed by the array of the combined light guides and the light in the core region by total internal reflection. Determining a position of the light source proceeding through the guide area; Forming a plurality of light extraction features on or in the core layer in a light emitting region of the light guide region; Arranging a light extracting region on the cladding region in the light mixing region of the light guide region between the array of combined light guides and the light emitting region Optically coupling to the cladding region; and positioning the light emitting region adjacent to a reflective spatial light modulator.

It is included in the content of the present invention.

1 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including an optical input coupler disposed on one side of a light guide.
2 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an optical input coupler having combined light guides folded in the -y direction.
3 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having three light input couplers on one side of a light guide.
4 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having two light input couplers disposed on opposite sides of a light guide.
5 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having two light input couplers disposed on the same side of a lightguide in which the optical axes of the light sources are directed substantially relative to each other.
6 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a light emitting device having a substantially planar light input surface consisting of planar edges of a combined lightguide arranged to receive light from a light source.
Figure 7 is an embodiment of a light emitting device having a light input coupler with a light input surface with refractive and flat surface features on the light input surface where light is totally reflective on some outer surfaces similar to a hybrid refractive-TIR Fresnel lens. It is a cross-sectional side view of an example.
8 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device in which coupling light guides and a light input surface are optically coupled to a light source.
9 is a light emitting device in which the combined lightguides are held in place by a sleeve and the edge surfaces are effectively flattened by an optical adhesive or material such as a gel between the ends of the combining lightguides and a sleeve having a flat outer surface adjacent to the light source. It is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of.
10 is a plan view of an embodiment of a backlight emitting red, green, and blue lights.
11 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light-emitting device including a light input coupler and a light guide having a reflective optical element disposed adjacent a surface.
12 is a region of an embodiment of a reflective display including a frontlight having protruding light extraction surface features protruding from the film-based lightguide on the side of the film-based lightguide closest to the reflective spatial light modulator. It is a cross-sectional side view.
13 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of an embodiment of a reflective display including color filters and a front light disposed between light modulating pixels.
14 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of an embodiment of a reflective display including front lights disposed over light modulating pixels on a substrate.
FIG. 15 is a region of an embodiment of a reflective display including a frontlight including a film-based lightguide disposed between a cladding layer and a low refractive index adhesive region including diffusive domains. Is a cross-sectional side view.
FIG. 16 is a light guide region comprising light extraction features formed from an air gap between a first lightguide layer having protruding surface features and a second lightguide layer having recessed features. Is a cross-sectional side view of the area of one embodiment of a reflective display including a frontlight having a front light.
17 is an area cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a reflective display including a front light having red, green, and blue film-based light guide core areas.
18 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device comprising two light input couplers with light sources on the same edge in an intermediate region directed in opposite directions.
FIG. 19 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including one light input coupler having combined light guides folded toward a -y direction and then folded toward a single light source in a +z direction.
20 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emitting device comprising a film-based light guide and a light reflective optical element, which is also a light collimating optical element and a light blocking element.
21 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a spatial display including a film-based lightguide frontlight optically coupled to a reflective spatial light modulator.
22 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a spatial display including a front-lit film light guide disposed adjacent to a reflective spatial light modulator.
23 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a spatial display including a front-illuminated lightguide optically coupled to a reflective spatial light modulator having light extraction features on one side of the lightguide closest to the reflective spatial light modulator. .
Figure 24 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a spatial display including a front-lit film light guide disposed in a reflective spatial light modulator.
25 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light input coupler disposed adjacent to a light source having collimating optical elements.
26 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source and light coupling light guides oriented at an angle to the x, y, and z axes.
27 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a reflective display including a frontlight with light extraction features protruding from a film-based lightguide.
28 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a reflective display including a frontlight with light extraction features in a film-based lightguide disposed between two cladding layers.
FIG. 29A is a perspective view of an embodiment for manufacturing a light input coupler including an array of combined light guides in substantially the same plane as the light guide and the combined light guides are regions of a light-transmitting film including two linear folded regions .
FIG. 29B is a perspective view of an embodiment for manufacturing an input coupler and a light guide including translating one of the linear fold regions of FIG. 29A.
29C is a perspective view of an embodiment for manufacturing an input coupler and a light guide including translating one of the linear folding regions of FIG. 29B.
FIG. 29D is a perspective view of an embodiment for manufacturing an input coupler and a light guide including translating one of the linear folding regions of FIG. 29C.
FIG. 29E is a perspective view of an embodiment for manufacturing an input coupler and a light guide including translating one of the linear folding regions of FIG. 29D.
30 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device in which the combination light guides are optically coupled to the surface of the light guide.
31 is a plan view of an embodiment of an input coupler and a light guide in which an array of combined light guides has non-parallel regions.
FIG. 32 is a plan perspective view of a portion of the input coupler and light guide of FIG. 31 with combined light guides folded.
33 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light input coupler and a light guide including a relative positioning element disposed closest to a linear fold area.
FIG. 34 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light input coupler and lightguide including bundles of combined lightguides folded twice and recombined in a plane substantially parallel to a film-based lightguide.
FIG. 35 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light input coupler and light guide including bundles of combined light guides coupled in a stack substantially perpendicular to the plane of the film-based light guide and folded upward (+z direction).
FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of the area of FIG. 35A including upwardly facing folds of combined light guides.
37 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device capable of simultaneously functioning as a display and a lighting fixture.
38 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device in which the combination light guides are optically coupled to the edge of the light guide.
39 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having an unfolded light guide including folded regions.
FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the light emitting device of FIG. 39 with a folded light guide.
FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the light emitting device of FIG. 39 folded with a light guide including overlapping the folded regions.
FIG. 42 is a view of a film-based lightguide comprising a first light emitting region disposed to receive light from a first set of combined lightguides and a second light emitting region disposed to receive light from a second set of combined lightguides. It is an elevated cross-sectional view of an embodiment.
43 is an elevated cross-sectional view of the film-based light guide of FIG. 42 with combined light guides folded.
FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device with optical redundancy including two light guides stacked in the z direction.
45 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having a first light source and a second light source thermally coupled to a first heat transfer element.
FIG. 46 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including coupling lightguides having a plurality of first reflective surface edges and a plurality of second reflective surface edges within each coupling lightguide.
47 is an enlarged perspective view of the input ends of the combined light guides of FIG. 46;
48 is a cross-sectional side view of a light source and combination light guides in an embodiment of a light emitting device including index matching areas disposed between core areas of the combination light guides.
49 is a plan view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide including an array of tapered combined light guides.
50 is a plan perspective view of a light emitting device of an embodiment including the film-based light guide and a light source of FIG. 49.
FIG. 51 is a top perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device comprising the light emitting device of FIG. 50 with tapered coupling light guides and a light source folded behind a light emitting area.
FIG. 52 is a plan view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide including an array of angled, tapered combination light guides.
FIG. 53 is a top perspective view of an embodiment light emitting device including the film-based lightguide of FIG. 52 with a light source that does not extend beyond the lateral sides of the film-based lightguide and folded combined lightguides.
FIG. 54 is a plan view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide including first and second arrays of angled, tapered combination lightguides.
55 is a plan perspective view of a light emitting device of an embodiment including the film-based light guide of FIG. 54;
56 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light guide, combined light guides, and a curved mirror.
FIG. 57 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light guide, combined light guides, and a curved mirror having two curved regions.
FIG. 58 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light guide and two light input couplers comprising a combined light guide folded behind a light emitting area of the light emitting device.
59 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light guide having combined light guides on two orthogonal sides.
FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of a light emitting device of an embodiment in which a low contact area cover includes a light input coupler and a light guide physically coupled to the light input coupler.
61 shows an enlarged portion of FIG. 60 of a region of the light guide in contact with the low contact area cover.
62 is a side view of a portion of a light emitting device of an embodiment including a light input coupler and a light guide protected by a low contact area cover.
FIG. 63 is a perspective view of a portion of a film-based light guide of an embodiment including coupling light guides including two flanges on one side of the end region of the coupling light guides.
FIG. 64 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide including a light guide including an optical input coupler and a light guide including a relative position maintaining element disposed closest to a linear fold area.
65 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a relative positioning element comprising circular angled edge surfaces.
66 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a relative positioning element including circular angled edge surfaces and a circular tip.
67 is a perspective view of a portion of a film-based light guide of an embodiment including coupling light guides including two flanges on one side of an end region of the coupling light guides.
68 is a perspective view of a part of the light emitting device of the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 62;
69 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having two light input couplers, a first light source, and a second light source disposed on opposite sides of a light guide.
FIG. 70 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light guide, a light input coupler, and a light reflective film disposed between the light input coupler and the light emission region.
FIG. 71 is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source and a stack of combined light guides arranged to receive light from a light collimating optical element.
72 is a cross-sectional side view of the embodiment shown in FIG. 71.
73 is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a stack of combined light guides physically coupled to a collimating optical element.
74 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source adjacent to a light turning optical element optically coupled to a stack of combined lightguides.
75A is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source disposed adjacent to the lateral edge of the combined lightguides of one stack having light turning optical edges.
75B is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source disposed adjacent a light input surface edge in an extended region of the combined lightguides of one stack having light turning optical edges.
76 is a view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source arranged to couple light into two light turning optical elements optically coupled to the coupling light guides of the two stacks using an optical adhesive. It is a top view.
FIG. 77 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source disposed to couple light with a bidirectional light turning optical element that is optically coupled to the combination lightguides of two stacks.
FIG. 78 is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including two light sources arranged to couple light with a bidirectional light turning optical element that is optically coupled to the combination lightguides of two stacks.
FIG. 79 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source arranged to couple light into combination lightguides of two stacks with light turning optical edges.
FIG. 80 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source arranged to couple light into combined light guides of two overlapping stacks with light turning optical edges.
FIG. 81 is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source that is arranged to couple light into a stack of combining light guides with light turning optical edges in which the combining light guides have tabs with alignment holes.
FIG. 82 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source disposed to couple light into a stack of combined lightguides with registration holes and light turning optical edges in a low light flux density region.
83 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a light source arranged to combine light into a stack of combined light guides having a light source overlay tab region for light source registration.
84 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide including combined light guides having optical turning optical edges.
FIG. 85 is a plan view of one embodiment of a light emitting device including the light guide of FIG. 84 having the combined light guides folded such that the combined light guides extend past a lateral edge.
86 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide including an unfolded combined light guide.
87 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including the light guide of FIG. 86 in which the combined light guides are folded.
FIG. 88 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide including combined light guides having optical collimating optical edge regions and optical turning optical edge regions.
FIG. 89 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including the film-based light guide of FIG. 88 in which the combined light guides are folded.
FIG. 90 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide including combined light guides having extended areas.
FIG. 91 is a plan view of one embodiment of the light guide of FIG. 90 with combined light guides folded.
FIG. 92 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide including an unfolded combined light guide and combined light guides having light turning optical edges that turn light in two directions.
FIG. 93 is a top perspective view of one embodiment of a light emitting device including the film-based lightguide of FIG. 92 with combined lightguides from each side end grouped together.
FIG. 94 is a top perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including the film-based lightguide of FIG. 92 with combined lightguides from sides interleaved into a stack.
FIG. 95 is a plan view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide including combined light guides having optical turning optical edges extending in an inverted shape along a first direction.
FIG. 96 is a perspective view of a light guide including the embodiment of the light guide of FIG. 95 folded to form a combined light guide of two stacks.
FIG. 97 is a plan view of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide including combined lightguides having light turning optical edges, light collimating optical edges, and light source overlay tab regions including alignment cavities.
FIG. 98 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including the film-based light guide of FIG. 97 that is folded into a stack of combined light guides positioned through a light source and guided in the z direction by an alignment guide.
Fig. 99 is a side view of the light emitting device embodiment of Fig. 98 in a region near the light source.
FIG. 100 is a side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device with coupling light guides having alignment cavities that do not extend to fully fit through the alignment guide.
101 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device including combined light guides with inner light directing edges.
FIG. 102 is a cross-sectional side view of a light emitting display including a film-based light guide front light and a reflective spatial light modulator attached to a flexible display connector.
103 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light-emitting display including a light guide serving as a top substrate for a reflective spatial light modulator.
104 is an embodiment of a light emitting device including a film-based light guide serving as an additional function as a top substrate for a reflective spatial light modulator having a light source disposed on a circuit board physically coupled to a flexible connector It is a perspective view.
105 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including a reflective spatial light modulator and a film-based light guide physically coupled to the flexible connector with a light source physically coupled to the flexible connector.
FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light-emitting display including the light-emitting device of FIG. 104 further including a flexible touchscreen.
107 is a perspective view illustrating an embodiment of a light emitting device having a flexible touch screen disposed between a film-based light guide and a reflective spatial light modulator.
FIG. 108 is a perspective view illustrating an exemplary embodiment of a reflective display including a flexible display drive connector and a flexible film-based light guide front light.
FIG. 109 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a reflective display including a flexible film-based light guide front light having a light source disposed on a flexible touch screen film and a flexible display drive connector.
110 is a top view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide including an array of combined light guides, each combined light guide further comprising a sub-array of combined light guides.
FIG. 111 is a perspective top view of an embodiment of a light emitting device including the film-based light guide shown in FIG. 110, and the combined light guides are folded.
FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguides having core regions comprising vertical light turning optical edges.
FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a stacked array of coupling lightguides having core regions including vertical light turning optical edges and vertical light collimating optical edges.
FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device comprising a stacked array of coupling light guides having a cavity and core regions comprising vertical light turning optical edges and vertical light collimating optical edges.
115 is a perspective view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguides disposed within an alignment cavity of a thermal transfer element.
FIG. 116 is a side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device including a stacked array of coupling light guides disposed within an alignment guide having an extended alignment arm and alignment cavity.
117 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a reflective display including a reflective spatial light modulator and a film-based light guide having a light extraction layer optically coupled to a cladding layer of the light guide.
118 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a method of producing a display.

Features and other details of several embodiments will now be described in more detail. It will be understood that the specific embodiments described in this application are shown by way of example and not limitation. Key features may be used in various embodiments without departing from the scope of any particular embodiment. All parts and percentages are by weight unless otherwise specified.

DEFINITIONS

"Electroluminescent sign" is defined in this application as a means for displaying information, wherein a legend, message, image or indicia is formed by an electrically excitable light source thereon or It is made more clearly by this light source. This includes irradiated cards, transparency, pictures, printed graphics, fluorescent signs, neon signs, channel letter signs, light box signs, bus stop signs, irradiated advertising signs. Fields, EL (electroluminescent) signs, LED signs, edge-type signs, advertising displays, liquid crystal displays, electrophoretic displays, point-of-purchase advertising displays, directional signs, illuminated pictures, and other information Includes display signs. Electroluminescent signs can be self-illuminating (emission type), back-illumination (rear-type), front-illumination (front-type), edge-irradiation (edge-type), waveguide scanning or other configurations, and the light from the light source can be used as images or display Oriented through static or dynamic means to generate (indicia).

"Optically coupled" as defined in this application means that the luminance of light passing from one area to the other is caused by Fresnel interfacial reflections due to differences in refractive indices between the areas. It refers to a combination of two or more regions or layers that are not substantially reduced. “Optical bonding” methods include methods of combining two regions having similar refractive indices to be bonded together or using an optical adhesive having an index of refraction that is substantially similar or between the refractive indices of the regions or layers. Examples of “optical bonding” include lamination using an index matched optical adhesive, coating one area or layer onto another area or layer, or pressure applied to bond two or more layers or areas having substantially close refractive indices. It includes without limitation hot lamination using Thermal transferring is another method that can be used to optically connect two regions of a material. Forming, altering, printing, or applying a material on the surface of another material are other examples of optically bonding two materials. “Opticalally coupled” also includes forming, adding, or removing regions, features, or materials of the first index of refraction within the volume of the second index material such that light proceeds from the first material to the second material. . For example, white light scattering inks (such as titanium dioxide in methacrylate, vinyl, or polyurethane-based binders) are polycarbonate by inkjet printing the ink onto the surface. Alternatively, it may be optically bonded to the surface of a silicon film. Likewise, a light scattering material such as titanium dioxide in a solvent applied to the surface will enable the light scattering material to penetrate or adhere within a material contact proximate the surface of a polycarbonate or silicone film such that it is optically bonded to the film surface or volume. I can.

"Light guide" or "Waveguide" refers to an area limited by the condition that rays traveling at an angle greater than a critical angle reflect and remain within the area. In the light guide, the light will be reflected or totally internally reflected (TIR) if the angle α satisfies the condition.

의 굴절률을 갖는 에어이지만, 고 및 저굴절률 물질들은 라이트가이드 영역들을 획득하는데 이용될 수 있다. 라이트가이드는 반사 필름들과 같은 반사 컴포넌트들, 알루미늄 코팅들, 표면 릴리프 특징부들, 및 광을 방향전환 또는 반사할 수 있는 다른 컴포넌트들을 포함할 수 있다. 라이트가이드는 기판들과 같은 비산란 영역들을 포함할 수도 있다. 광은 측면들 또는 아래로부터 라이트가이드 영역 상에 입사될 수 있고 영역 내의 표면 릴리프 특징부들 또는 광 산란 도메인들, 페이즈들 또는 엘리먼트들은 그것이 전반사되도록 하는 큰 각도로 또는 광이 라이트가이드를 탈출하도록 하는 작은 각도로 광을 지향시킬 수 있다. 라이트가이드는 라이트가이드로서 간주되는 그의 컴포넌트들 모두에 광학적으로 결합될 필요가 없다. 광은 도파로 영역의 임의의 면(또는 계면 굴절률 경계)으로부터 진입될 수 있고 동일한 또는 다른 굴절률 계면 경계로부터 전반사될 수 있다. 영역은 두께가 관심 광의 파장보다 길기만 하면 본 출원에서 예시된 목적들을 위한 도파로 또는 라이트가이드로서 기능할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 라이트가이드는 필름의 5 마이크론 영역 또는 층일 수 있거나 광 투과 폴리머를 포함하는 3 밀리미터 시트일 수 있다.Here, n ₁ is the refractive index of the medium in the light guide and n ₂ is the refractive index of the medium outside the light guide. Typically, n ₂ is

Although air has a refractive index of, high and low refractive index materials can be used to obtain light guide areas. The lightguide may include reflective components such as reflective films, aluminum coatings, surface relief features, and other components capable of redirecting or reflecting light. The light guide may also include non-scattering regions such as substrates. Light can be incident on the lightguide area from the sides or from below and the surface relief features or light scattering domains, phases or elements within the area are at a large angle that allows it to be totally reflected or small that allows the light to exit the lightguide. You can direct the light at an angle. The lightguide need not be optically coupled to all of its components to be considered as a lightguide. Light may enter from any side (or interfacial index of refraction boundary) of the waveguide region and may be totally reflected from the same or different index of refraction boundary. The region can function as a waveguide or light guide for the purposes illustrated in this application as long as the thickness is longer than the wavelength of the light of interest. For example, the lightguide may be a 5 micron area or layer of a film or may be a 3 millimeter sheet comprising a light transmitting polymer.

"In contact" and "disposed on" are generally used to describe that two items are adjacent to each other so that the entire item can function as required. This could mean that, as long as the item can function as required, additional substances can exist between adjacent items.

As used herein, “film” refers to a thinly extended area, membrane, or layer of material.

As used in this application, "bend" refers to a deformation or transformation in shape, for example by movement of a first region of an element relative to a second region. Examples of bends include bending of a rod of garments when heavy garments are hung on a rod or rolling up a paper document to fit it into a cylindrical mailing tube. "Fold" as used in this application is a type of bending and refers to bending or placing of an area of the element on the second area such that the first area covers at least a portion of the second area. Examples of folding include bending the letter and forming folds to put it in an envelope. Folding does not require all areas of the element to overlap. Bending or folding may be a change of direction in a first direction along the surface of the object. The fold or bend may or may not have corrugations and the bend or fold may occur in one or more directions or planes, such as 90 degrees or 45 degrees. Bending or folding can be lateral, vertical, torsional, or a combination thereof.

LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light guide comprising a first light source, a light input coupler, a light mixing region, and a light emitting region having a light extraction feature. In one embodiment, the first light source has a first light source emitting surface, and the light input coupler receives light from the first light source and transmits light passing through the light input coupler by total reflection through a plurality of coupling light guides. Includes the placed input surface. In this embodiment, the light exiting the combined light guides is recombined, mixed in the light mixing area, and directed within the light guide or light guide area through total reflection. Within the lightguide, a portion of the incident light is directed into the light extraction area by the light extraction features provided that the angle of light is less than the threshold for the lightguide and the directed light exits the lightguide through the lightguide emitting surface.

In a further embodiment, the lightguide is a film having light extraction features below the light emitting device output surface in the film and the film is such that they form a light input coupler having a first input surface by a set of edges of the coupling lightguides. It is separated into combined light guide strips that are folded.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device has an optical axis defined in this application as the direction of peak luminous intensity for light emitted from the light emitting surface or region of the device for devices of output profiles with one peak. Whereas optical output profiles with one or more peaks and the output being symmetric about the same axis as the “batwing” type profile, the optical axis of the light emitting device is the axis of symmetry of the light output. In light emitting devices with angular intensity optical output profiles having one or more peaks that are not symmetric around the axis, the light emitting device optical axis is the angular weighted average of the intensity output. For non-planar output surfaces, the light emitting device optical axis is found in two orthogonal output planes and can be a constant direction at varying angles within the first output plane and within the second output plane orthogonal to the first output plane. For example, light emitted from a cylindrical light-emitting surface may have a peak angular luminance (hence the light-emitting device optical axis) in the light output plane that does not include the curved output surface profile and the angle of luminous intensity includes the curved surface profile. It can be substantially constant around the axis of rotation around the cylindrical surface in the output plane, so the peak angular intensity is a range of angles. When the light-emitting device has a light-emitting device optical axis in a range of angles, the optical axis of the light-emitting device includes a range or an angle selected within the range of angles. The optical axis of the lens or element is a direction in which there is a certain angle of rotational symmetry within at least one plane and corresponds to the mechanical axis as used in this application. The optical axis of the area, surface, area, or set of lenses or elements may be different from the optical axis of the lens or element, and as used in the present application in the case of off-axis illumination of the lens or element. As such, it depends on the incident light angle and spatial profile.

LIGHT INPUT COUPLER

In one embodiment, the light input coupler includes a plurality of combined light guides arranged to receive light emitted from a light source and transmit light to the light guide. In one embodiment, the plurality of combined lightguides are strips cut from the lightguide film so that they are not cut on at least one edge, but substantially from the lightguide to couple light through at least one edge or surface of the strip. Can be independently rotated or positioned (or translated). In another embodiment, the plurality of combined light guides are optically coupled individually to the light source and the light guide without being cut from the light guide film. In one embodiment, the light input coupler includes at least one light source optically coupled to combined light guides connected together in the light mixing region. In another embodiment, the light input coupler is a combination of strip sections cut from an area film arranged in a group such that light can enter through the edge of the group or array of strips. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light input coupler comprising a cladding region or cladding layer of a cladding material having a lower refractive index than the core material on at least one side or edge of the core material and the core material. . In another embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a plurality of combined light guides that direct a portion of light from a light source incident on the surface of at least one strip to the light guide so that it travels in a waveguide condition. The optical input coupler may include at least one selected from the group: a strip folding device, a strip holding element, and an input surface optical element.

LIGHT SOURCE

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a fluorescent lamp, a cylindrical cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a flat panel fluorescent lamp, a light emitting diode, an organic light emitting diode, a field emission lamp, a gas discharge lamp, a neon lamp, a filament lamp, an incandescent lamp, an electroluminescent lamp. , Radiofluorescent lamp, halogen lamp, incandescent lamp, mercury vapor lamp, sodium vapor lamp, high pressure sodium lamp, metal halide lamp, tungsten lamp, carbon arc lamp, electroluminescent lamp, laser, photonic bandgap based light source, quantum dot based light source , A high-efficiency plasma light source, and a microplasma lamp: at least one light source selected from the group. The light emitting device comprises a plurality of devices arranged in an array on opposite sides of the lightguide, on orthogonal sides of the lightguide, on three or more sides of the lightguide, or substantially on four sides of the planar lightguide. Light sources may be included. The array of light sources can be a linear array with individual LED packages comprising at least one LED die. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a plurality of light sources in a package arranged to emit light towards a light input surface. In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, or 10 or more light sources. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises an organic light emitting diode arranged to emit light as a light emitting film or sheet. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes an organic light emitting diode arranged to emit light with a light guide.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least one broadband light source that emits light in a wavelength spectrum greater than 100 nanometers. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes at least one narrowband light source that emits light in a narrow bandwidth of less than 100 nanometers. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least one broadband light source that emits light in a wavelength spectrum greater than 100 nanometers or at least one narrowband light source that emits light in a narrow bandwidth less than 100 nanometers. In one embodiment, the light emitting device is 300nm to 350nm, 350nm to 400nm, 400nm to 450nm, 450nm to 500nm, 500nm to 550nm, 550nm to 600nm, 600nm to 650nm, 650nm to 700nm, 700nm to 750nm, 750nm to 800nm, and 800 nm to 1200 nm: contains at least one narrowband light source having a peak wavelength within a range selected from the group. The light sources collectively have a color gamut range of 70% NTSC, 80% NTSC, 90% NTSC, 100% NTSC, and the visible CIE u'v'gamut of a standard viewer when used in a light emitting device used as a display. 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95% of: can be selected to match the spectral quality of red, green and blue to be at least one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the at least one light source is a white LED package comprising red, green, and blue LEDs.

In another embodiment, at least two light sources of different colors are arranged to couple light to a light guide through at least one light input coupler. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least three light input couplers, at least three light sources with different colors (eg red, green and blue) and at least three light guides. In another embodiment, the light source further comprises at least one selected from the group: reflective optics, reflectors, reflector cups, collimators, primary optics, auxiliary optics, collimating lenses, complex parabolic collimators, lenses, reflective areas and input coupling optics. . The light source may include an optical path folding optic, such as a curved reflector, that allows the light source (and possibly a heat sink) to be directed along different edges of the light emitting device. The light source includes a photonic bandgap structure, nanostructure, or other three-dimensional arrangement that provides an angle FWHM less than one selected from the group: 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80 degrees, 60 degrees, 40 degrees, and 20 degrees. You may.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is 150 degrees, 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80 degrees, 70 degrees, 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, and 10 degrees: an angle less than one selected from the group It includes a light source that emits light at full-width at half maximum (FWHM) intensity. In another embodiment, the light source further includes at least one selected from the group: a primary optic, a secondary optic, and a photonic bandgap region, and the full width at half of the light source is 150 degrees, 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80 degrees, and 70 degrees. Is less than one selected from degrees, 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, and 10 degrees.

LED Array

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a plurality of LEDs or LED packages, wherein the plurality of LEDs or LED packages comprises an array of LEDs. Array components (LEDs or electrical components) may be physically (and/or electrically) coupled to a single circuit board or they may or may not be physically coupled directly to a plurality of circuit boards (i.e. the same circuit board). (Such as non-phase). In one embodiment, the array of LEDs is an array comprising at least two selected from the group: Red, Green, Blue, and White LEDs. In this embodiment, variations in white point or component variations due to manufacturing can be reduced. In another embodiment, the LED array includes at least one cool white LED and one red LED. In this embodiment, the CRI, or color rendering index, is higher than a cool white LED light alone. In one embodiment, a light emitting region, a light emitting surface, a lighting fixture, a light emitting device, a display driven in a white mode comprising a light emitting device, and a sign: at least one CRI selected from the group is 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, and 99: greater than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, a light emitting area, a light emitting surface, a light fixture, a light emitting device, a display driven in a white mode including a light emitting device, or a sign: at least one NIST Color Quality Scale (CQS) selected from the group ) Is greater than one selected from the group: 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, and 99. In another embodiment, a display comprising a light emitting device has a color gamut greater than 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, 105%, 110%, 120%, and 130% gamut of the NTSC standard. Has. In another embodiment, the LED array includes white, green, and red LEDs. In another embodiment, the LED array comprises at least one green and blue LED and two types of red LEDs, one type having a lower luminous efficiency or lower wavelength than the other type of red LED. As used in the present application, the white LED may be a phosphor converted blue LED or a phosphor converted UV LED.

In another embodiment, the input array of LEDs may be arranged to compensate for non-uniform absorption of light through a long versus short lightguide. In another embodiment, the absorption is compensated for by directing more light to a light input coupler corresponding to the long coupling light guides or the long light guides. In another embodiment, the light in the first wavelength band is absorbed in more lightguides than the light in the second wavelength band and the light input in the first wavelength band divided by the radiant beam coupled to the optical input coupler in the second wavelength band. The first ratio of the radiation luminous flux coupled by the coupler is greater than the second ratio of the radiation luminous flux emitted from the light emission region in the first wavelength band divided by the radiation luminous flux emitted from the light emission region in the second wavelength band.

LASER

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises one or more lasers arranged to couple light to the surface of one or more light input couplers or one or more coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the divergence of the one or more light sources is less than one selected from the group: 20 milliradians, 10 milliradians, 5 milliradians, 3 milliradians, and 2 milliradians. In another embodiment, the light mixing region comprises a light scattering or light reflecting region that increases the angular FWHM of light from one or more lasers in the light mixing region prior to entering the light emitting region of the light guide or the light emitting surface region of the light emitting device. do. In a further embodiment, the light scattering area in the light mixing area is 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees when measured perpendicular to the large area surface of the film in the area of a 532 nm laser diode with a divergence less than 5 milliradians. , 10 degrees, 5 degrees, and 2 degrees: volume or surface light scattering area with an angle FWHM of transmitted light less than one selected from the group. In a further embodiment, the haze of the diffuser in the light mixing area is 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10% when measured perpendicular to the large area surface of the film (such as parallel to the light emitting surface). , 5%, and 2%: less than one selected from the group.

COLOR TUNING

In one embodiment, the light-emitting device comprises two or more light sources and the relative output of the two or more light sources is an area of light output on the light-emitting device comprising a light emitting area of the light guide or a plurality of light guides overlapping within the area Is adjusted in order to obtain the desired color. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device includes red, green, and blue LEDs arranged to couple light to a light input surface of a stack of combining light guides. The light is mixed within the light guide and is output from the light emitting region of the light guide. By turning on the red and blue LEDs, for example, a purple color light emitting area can be obtained. In another embodiment, the relative light output of the light sources is adjusted to compensate for non-uniform spectral absorption in the optical element of the light emitting device. For example, in one embodiment, the milliwatt output of the blue LED is increased to a level greater than the milliwatt red output to compensate for more blue light absorption in the lightguide (or blue light scattering) so that the light emitting area is It has a substantially white light output in the area.

LED ARRAY LOCATION

In one embodiment, the plurality of LED arrays are arranged to couple light into a single light input coupler or more than one light input coupler. In a further embodiment, a plurality of LEDs disposed on a circuit board are arranged to couple light into a plurality of light input couplers that direct the light toward a plurality of sides of a light emitting device comprising a light emitting region. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises an LED array and a light input coupler folded behind the light emitting area of the light emitting device so that the LED array and light input coupler are not visible when viewed as the chief of the light emitting area at an angle perpendicular to the surface. . In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a single LED array arranged to couple light to at least one light input coupler arranged to direct light from a lower region of the light emitting device to a light emitting region. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first LED array and a second LED array arranged to couple light to each of a first light input coupler and a second light input coupler, wherein the first light input coupler and the second light input coupler The light input coupler is arranged to direct light from each of the upper and lower regions of the light emitting device to the light emitting region. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first optical input coupler, a second optical input coupler, and a third optical device arranged to direct light from each of the lower region, the left region, and the right region of the light emitting device to the light emitting region. And a first LED array, a second LED array, and a third LED array arranged to couple light to each of the input couplers. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a first optical input coupler, a second optical input coupler, and a second optical input coupler arranged to direct light from each of the lower region, the left region, the right region, and the upper region of the light emitting device to the light emitting region. A first LED array, a second LED array, a third LED array, and a fourth LED array arranged to couple light to each of the three light input couplers and the fourth light input couplers.

WAVELENGTH CONVERSION MATERIAL

In another embodiment, the LED is a blue or ultraviolet LED combined with a phosphor. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light source having a first activation energy and a wavelength converting material that converts a first portion of the first activation energy into a second wavelength different from the first portion. In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a fluorophore, a phosphor, a fluorescent dye, an inorganic phosphor, a photonic bandgap material, a quantum dot material, a fluorescent protein, Fusion proteins, specific functional groups (amino groups (such as active esters, carboxylate, isothiocyanate, hydrazine), carboxyl groups (carbodiimide), thiols (maleimide, acetyl bromide), azide (click chemistry fluorophores, quantum dot fluorophores, small molecule fluorophores, aromatic fluorophores, either via chemistry or non-specifically (glutaraldehyde))) (aromatic fluorophores), conjugated fluorophores, fluorescent dyes, and other wavelength converting materials: at least one wavelength converting material selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the light source comprises a semiconductor light emitter, such as an LED, and a wavelength converting material that converts a portion of the light from the emitter to short or long wavelengths. In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group is wavelength conversion: light input coupler, cladding region, coupling light guide, input surface optic, coupling optic, light mixing region, light guide, light extraction feature or region, and light emitting surface. Contains substances.

LIGHT INPUT COUPLER INPUT SURFACE

In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide includes an array of combined lightguides that couple the lightguides and the film includes bounding edges along its periphery. In one embodiment, the optical input coupler comprises a set of coupling light guides and a plurality of bounding edges forming the optical coupler input surface. In another embodiment, an optical element is disposed between the light source and at least one coupling lightguide, wherein the optical element receives light from the light source through an optical coupler input surface. In some embodiments, the input surface is substantially polished, flat, or optically smooth so that the light is not scattered forward or backward from pits, protrusions or other rough surface features. In some embodiments, the optical element provides light redirection as an input surface (when optically coupled to at least one coupling lightguide) or as an optical element separate from or optically coupled to at least one coupling lightguide. It is arranged between the light source and the at least one combined lightguide so that more light is redirected to the lightguide at angles greater than the threshold within the lightguide than if it had no optical element or had a flat input surface. In another embodiment, the input surface is curved to refract more light received from the light source at angles within the lightguide that are greater than the critical angle within the lightguide than occurs at the flat input surface. In another embodiment, the optical element includes radial or linear Fresnel lens features that refract incident light. In another embodiment, the optical element comprises a refractive-TIR hybrid Fresnel lens (such as having a low F/# of less than 1.5). In a further embodiment, the optical element is a reflective and refractive optical element. In one embodiment, the light input surface is mechanized, cut, polished to create a smooth, curved, circular, concave, convex, rigged, grooved, microstructured, nanostructured, or predetermined surface shape. It can be formed by shaping, shaping, or by differently removing or adding material to the light guide couplers. In another embodiment, the light input coupler includes an optical element designed to collect light from the light source and increase uniformity. Such optical elements may include fly eye lenses, microlens arrays, integral lenses, lenticular lenses, holographic or other diffusing elements with microscale features or nanoscale features regardless of how they are formed. have. In another embodiment, the light input coupler is optically coupled to at least one light guide and at least one light source. In another embodiment, the optical element is a diffractive element, a holographic element, a lenticular element, a lens, a planar window, a refractive element, a reflective element, a waveguide coupling element, an antireflective coating element, a planar element, and a coupling light guide, an optical adhesive, UV curing adhesive, and pressure sensitive adhesive: at least one formed part or region selected from the group: at least one selected from the group. The optical coupler or element may be composed of at least one light transmitting material therein. In another embodiment, the element, lens or surface of the light input coupler or light input window is a silicone material, wherein ASTM D1003 luminous transmittance due to exposure to 150° C. for 200 hours is 0.5%, 1%, 2%, 3% , 4%, and 5%: less than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the input surface of the combination light guides, the combination light guides, or the window optically coupled to the input surface is an optical window, a light source, an external surface of the LED, a light collimating optical element using a light transmitting optical adhesive. , A light turning optical element, a light turning optical element, an intermediate lens, or a light transmitting optical element: optically coupled to one or more selected from the group.

When light traveling in air is incident on a planar light input surface of a light-loss material with a refractive index greater than 1.3 at angles from the normal to the interface, for example, much light is reflected from the air input surface interface. . One way to reduce the loss of light due to reflection is to optically couple the input surface of the light input coupler to the light source. Another way to reduce this loss is to use collimation optics or optics that direct a portion of the light output from the light source at angles close to the light source's optical axis. The collimating optic, or optical element, can be optically coupled to a light source, coupling lightguides, adhesive, or other optical element so that it directs more light to the coupling lightguides in total reflection conditions within the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the light input surface comprises a recessed cavity or a recessed area such that the percentage of light from a light source disposed adjacent to the cavity or recessed area reflected from the input surface is 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%. , 5%, 3%, and 2%: less than one selected from the group.

In another embodiment, the total input area defined as the total area of the input surface of all of the light input couplers of the light emitting device receiving at least 5% of the total light flux from any light source divided by the total light emitting surface areas of the light sources. The ratio is greater than one selected from the group 0.9, 1, 1.5, 2, 4, and 5:. In another embodiment, the ratio of individual input areas, defined as the input surface area of the light input coupler of the light-emitting device that receives at least 5% of the total light flux received from the light source divided by the light-emitting surface area of the light source, is 0.9, 1, 1.5, 2, 4, and 5: greater than one selected from the group. The individual input area ratios of the light emitting device for different input couplers may be varied and the individual input area ratio for a particular input coupler may be greater or less than the total input area ratio.

INPUT SURFACE POSITION RELATIVE TO LIGHT SOURCE

In one embodiment, the distance between the outer surface of the light source and the input surface of the light input coupler is just before energizing the light source at a maintained ambient temperature for the light emitting device of 20° C. and during the substantially steady state junction temperature of the light source. Less than one selected from the group: 3 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, 0.5 millimeter, and 0.25 millimeter over a period between time.

In one embodiment, to store mechanical energy, the elastic object is arranged such that the outer surface of the light source is in contact with the input surface of the light input coupler or at a predetermined distance. In one embodiment, the elastic object is a tension spring, an extension spring, a compression spring, a torsion spring, a wire spring, a coiled spring, a flat spring, a cantilever spring, a coil spring, a spiral spring, a conical spring, a compression spring, a volute spring, Hair spring, balance spring, leaf spring, V-spring, Belleville washer, Belleville spring, static load spring, gas spring, main spring, rubber band, spring washer, torsion bar twisted under load, torsion spring, negator spring, And wave spring: one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the elastic object is disposed between a light source or LED array and another element such as a housing or heat transfer element so that a force is applied to the light source or the LED array so that the external light emitting surface of the light source or LED array and the input of the light input coupler The relative distance between the surfaces remains within 0.5 millimeters of the fixed distance over the period between just before energizing the light source at a maintained ambient temperature for the light emitting device of 20° C. and the time during the substantially steady state junction temperature of the light source.

In a further embodiment, the spacer comprises an input surface of at least one of at least one light input coupler and a physical element that substantially maintains a minimum separation distance of the at least one light source. In one embodiment, the spacer is a component of a light source, a region of a film (such as a white reflective film or a low contact area cover film), a component of an LED array (such as a plastic protrusion), a component of a housing, a component of a thermal transfer element, Component of holder, component of relative positioning element, component of light input surface, component physically coupled to light input coupler, light input surface, at least one combined light guide, window for combined light guide, light guide, light emitting device Of the housing or other components: one selected from the group.

In a further embodiment, film, light guide, light mixing region, light input coupler, and combination light guide: at least one selected from the group has a relative distance between the external light emitting surface of the light source or the LED array and the input surface of the light input coupler. Maintaining a relative position that remains within 0.5 millimeters of a fixed distance over the period between immediately before energizing the light source at a maintained ambient temperature for the light emitting device of 20° C. and during the substantially steady state junction temperature of the light source. Includes mechanisms. In one embodiment, the relative positioning mechanism is a pin in a component (such as a heat transfer element) physically coupled to the light source and an aperture in the light guide. For example, pins in a thin aluminum sheet heat transfer element physically coupled to the light source may be used to maintain a distance between the input surface of the light input coupler and the light emitting surface of the light source. Components) are registered. In another embodiment, the relative position maintaining mechanism is a guide device.

STACKED STRIPS OR SEGMENTS OF FILM FORMING A LIGHT INPUT COUPLER

In one embodiment, the optical input coupler is the region of the film that includes the light guide and the optical input coupler includes strip sections of the film forming the combined light guides grouped together to form the optical coupler input surface. Combined lightguides can be grouped together so that the edges opposite to the lightguide area are joined to form an input surface consisting of their thin edges. The planar input surface to the light input coupler can provide an advantageous refraction to divert a portion of the input light from the surface at angles so that it travels at angles greater than the threshold for the lightguide. In another embodiment, the substantially planar light transmitting element is optically coupled to the group edges of the coupling lightguides. One or more of the edges of the bonding lightguides may be polished, melted, bonded with an optical adhesive, solvent welded, or optically bonded differently along the area of the edge surface such that the surface is substantially polished, smoothed, or Flatten, or substantially flattened. This polishing may assist in reducing light scattering, reflection, or refraction at angles less than the critical angle within the combined lightguides or towards the rear of the light source. The light input surface may comprise a surface of an optical element, a surface of an adhesive, a surface of more than one optical element, a surface of an edge of one or more coupling lightguides, or a combination of one or more of the aforementioned surfaces. The light input coupler may comprise an optical element with an opening or window, wherein a portion of the light from the light source may pass directly to the coupling lightguides without passing through the optical element. The light input coupler or element or region may comprise a cladding material or region therein.

In another embodiment, the cladding layer is formed of a material from which a portion of the cladding layer can be removed under at least one selected from the group: heat, pressure, solvent, and electromagnetic radiation. In one embodiment, the cladding layer has a glass transition temperature less than the core region and the pressure applied to the coupling lightguides near the light input edges is 10%, 20%, 40% of the thickness of the cladding regions before the pressure is applied. %, 60%, 80% and 90%: reduce the overall thickness of the cladding to be less than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the cladding layer has a glass transition temperature less than that of the core region and the heat and pressure applied to the coupling lightguides near the light input edges is 10% of the thickness of the cladding regions before heat and pressure is applied, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 90%: reduce the overall thickness of the cladding regions to be less than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the pressure sensitive adhesives function as a cladding layer and the bonding lightguides are folded so that the pressure sensitive adhesive or component on one or both sides of the bonding lightguides holds the bonding lightguides together and at least the thickness of the pressure sensitive adhesive 10% is removed from the light input surface by applying heat and pressure.

GUIDE DEVICE FOR COUPLING THE LIGHT SOURCE TO THE LIGHT INPUT SURFACE OF THE LIGHT INPUT COUPLER

The light input coupler may include a guide including mechanical, electrical, manual, guides, or other systems or components to facilitate alignment of the light source with respect to the light input surface. The guide device may include an opening or a window and includes a light source (or a component physically attached to the light source) of the light emitting device, a light input coupler, a combined light guide, a housing, and electrical, thermal, or mechanical elements: Can be physically or optically combined together. In one embodiment of this device, the optical element comprises one or more guides arranged to physically couple or align a light source (such as an LED strip) to the optical element or combination light guides. In another embodiment, the optical element includes one or more guide regions disposed to physically couple or align the optical element to the light input surface of the input coupler. The guides can include grooves and ridges, holes and pins, male and corresponding female components, or fasteners. In one embodiment, the guide is a batten, button, clamp, clasp, clip, clutch (pin fastener), flange, grommet, anchor, nail, pin, nail, clevis pin, cotter pin, linch Pin, R-clip, retaining ring, circlip retaining ring, e-ring retaining ring, rivet, screw anchor, snap, staple, stitch, strap, tack, thread fastener, captive thread Fasteners (nuts, screws, studs, thread inserts, thread rods), ties, toggles, hook and loop strips, wedge anchors, and zippers: a fastener selected from the group. In another embodiment, the one or more guide regions are arranged to physically couple or align one or more films, film segments (such as coupling lightguides), thermal transfer elements, housing or other components together of the light emitting device. .

LIGHT REDIRECTING OPTICAL ELEMENT

In one embodiment, the light redirecting optical element is arranged to receive light from at least one light source and redirect the light to a plurality of combined light guides. In another embodiment, the light redirecting optical element is an auxiliary optic, a mirror element or surface, a reflective film such as aluminum PET, and giant birefringent optical films such as a Vikuiti™ enhanced specular reflector film by 3M Inc. film), curved mirror, total reflection element, beam splitter, and dichroic reflective mirror or film: at least one selected from the group.

In another embodiment, a first portion of light from a light source having a first wavelength spectrum is directed to a plurality of combined lightguides by reflection by a wavelength selective reflective element (such as a dichroic filter). . In another embodiment, a first portion of light from a light source having a first wavelength spectrum is directed to a plurality of combined lightguides by reflection by a wavelength selective reflective element (such as a dichroic filter) and a second wavelength spectrum A second portion of light from a second light source having a is transmitted through a wavelength selective reflective element to a plurality of combined lightguides. For example, in one embodiment, red light from an LED that emits red light is reflected by a first dichroic filter directed at 45 degrees and reflects the light to a set of combined lightguides. Green light from the LED emitting green light is reflected by a second dichroic filter directed at 45 degrees and passes through a first dichroic filter with a set of combined lightguides. The blue light from the blue LED is directed and passed through the first and second dichroic filters with combined light guides. Combining outputs from multiple light sources into different combinations of light couplings or input surfaces or apertures is known in the field of projection engine design and a method for merging light outputs from color LEDs onto apertures such as microdisplays. Includes them. These techniques can be readily adapted to embodiments where a microdisplay or spatial light modulator is replaced by the input surface of the combined lightguides.

LIGHT COLLIMATING OPTICAL ELEMENT

In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a light collimating optical element. The optical collimating optical element receives light from a light source having a first full-width half-width intensity in at least one input plane and redirects a portion of the incident light from the light-source so that each full-half width intensity of light is reduced in the first input plane. In one embodiment, the light collimating optical element is one or more of the following: a light source primary optic, a light source auxiliary optic, a light input surface, and an optical element disposed between the light source and at least one coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, the optical collimating element is one or more of the following: an injection molded optical lens, a thermoformed optical lens, and a crosslinked lens made of a mold ( cross-linked lens made from a mold). In another embodiment, the optical collimating element reduces the angular full-width at half (FWHM) intensity within the input plane and in a plane orthogonal to the input plane.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light input coupler and a film-based light guide. In one embodiment, the light input coupler receives light from the light source and one or more light sources and is 60 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, and 10 degrees from the optical axis of the light exiting the light collimating optical element: from a group. And a light collimating optical element arranged to provide light output in either a first output plane, a second output plane orthogonal to the first plane, or both output planes with each half-width intensity in air less than the selected one.

In one embodiment, the collimation or reduction of the angular FWHM intensity of light from the light collimating element is substantially symmetric about the optical axis. In one embodiment, the optical collimating optical element has a substantially symmetrical angle FWHM intensity around an optical axis greater than one selected from the group 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, and 130 degrees. Receives light from the light source and provides an angular FWHM intensity of less than one selected from the group: 60, 50, 40, 30, and 20 degrees from the optical axis to the output light. For example, in one embodiment, the light collimating optical element receives light from a white LED having an angular FWHM intensity of about 120 degrees symmetric about its optical axis and outputs an angular FWHM intensity of about 30 degrees from the optical axis. To provide.

In another embodiment, the collimation or reduction of the angular FWHM intensity of light from the light collimating element is substantially symmetric about the optical axis. In one embodiment, the optical collimating optical element has a substantially symmetrical angle FWHM intensity around an optical axis greater than one selected from the group 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, and 130 degrees. 60, 50, 40, 30, and 20 degrees in a first output plane receiving light from a light source: an angle FWHM intensity less than one selected from the group and 100, 90 in a second output plane substantially orthogonal to the first output plane. , 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, and 30 degrees: Provides an angular FWHM intensity greater than one selected from the group to the output light. For example, in one embodiment, the light collimating optical element receives light from a white LED having an angular FWHM intensity of about 120 degrees symmetric about its optical axis and is applied to the extended film surfaces of the stack of coupling lightguides. An angular FWHM intensity of about 30 degrees in a first plane that is orthogonal and an angular FWHM intensity of about 80 degrees in a second plane parallel to the elongated film surfaces of the stack of coupling lightguides is provided to the output light. In one embodiment, the first output plane is substantially parallel to the elongated film surfaces of the coupling lightguides in the stack of coupling lightguides arranged to receive light from the optical collimating optical element.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light input coupler and a film-based light guide, wherein light traveling within the light guide is 60 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, and 20 degrees from the optical axis of the light traveling from the light guide. , And 10 degrees: each has a full width at full width less than one selected from the group In another embodiment, each half-width intensity of light traveling in one or more regions of the combined light guides, light mixing regions, light guide regions, or light emitting regions is reduced by each bandwidth reduction method. In one embodiment, the light emitting device collimates the incident light using an optical collimating optical element, and uses tapered or arcuate lateral edges of one or more combination light guides or regions of the combination light guides. Collimating the light in, reducing the radius of curvature of the bend of one or more coupling lightguides in one or more bend regions, reducing the refractive index difference between the core region and the cladding region, reducing the thickness of the cladding region And one or more angular FWHM intensity reduction methods including, without limitation, increasing the refractive index of the cladding region.

Each half-width intensity of light traveling within the light guide is measured by measuring the output of each wave field intensity of the light guide from the optical quality end cut perpendicular to the film surface, and calculating and adjusting the refraction at the air light guide interface. Can be determined. In another embodiment, the average full-width at half intensity of light extracted from one or more light extraction features of a film-based lightguide or light extraction regions including light extraction features is 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, and 20 degrees. Degrees, 10 degrees, and 5 degrees: less than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the peak angular intensity of light extracted from the light extraction feature is within 50 degrees of the surface perpendicular to the lightguide in the area. In another embodiment, the entire full-width at half-width intensity of the extracted light from the light emission region of the film-based light guide is 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, and 5 degrees: one selected from the group The smaller and peak angular intensity is within 50 degrees of the surface perpendicular to the lightguide in the light emitting area.

LIGHT TURNING OPTICAL ELEMENT

In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a light turning optical element arranged to receive light from a light source having a first optical axis angle and redirect the light to having a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angle. Include. In one embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects the light by about 90 degrees. In another embodiment, the optical turning optical element turns the optical axis of the incident light in at least one plane to an angle selected from within the range of 75 degrees and 90 degrees. In another embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects the optical axis of the incident light to an angle selected from within 40 degrees and 140 degrees. In one embodiment, the light turning optical element is optically coupled to the light input surface of the light source or coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the light turning optical element is separated in the optical path of light from the light input surface of the light source or coupling lightguides by an air gap. In another embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects light from two or more light sources having first optical axis angles for light having second optical axis angles different from the first optical axis angles. In a further embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects a first portion of light from a light source having a first optical axis angle relative to light having a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angle. In another embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects light from a first light source having a first optical axis angle with respect to light having a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angle and It redirects light from a second light source having a third optical axis angle relative to light having a different fourth optical axis angle.

Bi-DIRECTIONAL LIGHT TURNING OPTICAL ELEMENT

In another embodiment, the light turning optical element redirects the optical axis of light from one or more light sources in two different directions. For example, in one embodiment, the intermediate coupling lightguide of the optical input coupler is an unfolded coupling lightguide and the light input ends of two arrays of stacked folded coupling lightguides are directed towards the intermediate coupling lightguide. The bidirectional light turning optical element is disposed above the intermediate coupling lightguide such that a first portion of the light from the light source enters the intermediate coupling lightguide, and a second portion of the light from the light source is a combination of the coupling lightguides folded by the two way light turning optical element. Directed in a first direction parallel to and towards the input surface of the first stacked array, and a third portion of the light from the light source is parallel to the input surface of the second stacked array of coupled lightguides folded by a bidirectional light turning optical element. And it is directed in the second direction toward it. In this embodiment, the light source may be placed between the light emitting area or the lateral edges of the light emitting device and the unfolded combined lightguide eliminates other dark areas (if there is insufficient space for the folded combined lightguide). It removes the requirement for multiple bends in combined lightguides that can introduce further light loss and increase volume requirements.

In one embodiment, the bidirectional light turning optical element divides and turns the optical axis of one light source in two different directions. In another embodiment, the bidirectional light turning optical element rotates the optical axis of the first light source in a first direction and rotates the optical axis of the second light source in a second direction different from the first direction. In another embodiment, an optical element, such as an injection molded lens, includes more than one light turning optical element and a light collimating element configured to receive light from more than one light source. For example, an injection molded lens comprising a linear array of optical light turning surfaces and light collimating surfaces can be arranged to receive light from a strip comprising a linear array of LEDs such that the light is provided by a plurality of light input couplers. Or directed to stacks of combined lightguides. By forming a single optical element that performs light turning and light collimating for a plurality of light sources, fewer optical elements are required and costs can be reduced. In another embodiment, the bidirectional light turning element may be optically coupled to a light source, coupling lightguides, or a combination thereof.

LIGHT TURNING AND LIGHT COLLIMATING OPTICAL ELEMENT

In another embodiment, the light turning optical element turns the optical axis of light from the light source in a first plane within the light turning element and collimates the light in a first plane, a second plane orthogonal to the first plane, or a combination thereof. In another embodiment, the light turning optical element includes a light turning region and a collimating region. In one embodiment, by collimating the input light in at least one plane, the light will travel more efficiently within the lightguide and reduce losses in the bend regions and reduce the input coupling losses with the coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, the light turning optical element is an injection molded lens designed to divert light from a first optical axis angle to a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angle. The injection molded lens may be formed of a light-transmitting material such as poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA), polycarbonate, silicone, or any suitable light-transmitting material. In a further embodiment, the light turning element is substantially directing light from a first optical axis angle to a second optical axis angle in a first plane while substantially maintaining an optical axis angle in a second plane perpendicular to the first plane. It may be a planar element. For example, in one embodiment, the optical turning optical element is a 1 millimeter (mm) thick lens with a curved profile in one plane cut from a 1 mm sheet of PMMA using a carbon dioxide (CO ₂ ) laser cutter.

In one embodiment, the light input coupler is a light turning optical element with light turning edges that allows the light source to be disposed between the extended bounding regions of the sides of the light emitting surface adjacent to the input side of the light from the light source to the light guide area, or Includes combined light guides. In this embodiment, the turning optical element or light turning edges allow the light source to be disposed on the light input side area of the light guide area without substantially extending beyond either side. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light source can be folded behind the light emitting region of the light guide so that the light source does not extend substantially beyond the edge of the light emitting region or the outer surface of the light emitting device comprising the light emitting region. In another embodiment, the light source is oriented substantially with its optical axis directed toward the light emitting area and the edges of the turning optical element or combination lightguides allow the light to be turned so that it is substantially opposite the input side of the lightguide area. It is possible to enter a stacked array of combined lightguides stacked parallel and substantially orthogonal to the light source optical axis.

LIGHT COUPLING OPTICAL ELEMENT

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light coupling optical element arranged to receive light from a light source and transmit a larger beam of light with coupling lightguides than would occur without the light coupling element. In one embodiment, the light coupling element refracts a first portion of the incident light from the light source so that it is incident on the input surface of one or more coupling lightguides or sets of coupling lightguides at a low angle of incidence from the vertical so that more light flux is transmitted to the coupling light. Combined into sets of guides or combined lightguides (less light is lost due to reflection). In another embodiment, the light coupling optical element is optically coupled to at least one selected from the group: a light source, a plurality of coupling light guides, a plurality of sets of coupling light guides, a plurality of light sources.

LIGHT BLOCKING ELEMENT

In one embodiment, the light input coupler comprises a light blocking element that blocks external light from reaching the light guide or light guide area, or blocks light emitted from the area of the light emitting device from escaping the device viewed by the viewer. Include. In one embodiment, the light blocking element prevents a significant portion of the incident light from exiting or entering the light input coupler through absorption, reflection, or a combination thereof. For example, in one embodiment, an aluminum reflective tape is adhered around the coupling light guides of the light input coupler. In another embodiment, the low refractive index cladding or air region is disposed between the light absorbing or reflective light blocking elements so that the total reflected light in the combined light guide or core layer of the light guide is prevented from It is not absorbed or scattered. In another embodiment, the light blocking element is a substantially specular reflective element and is optically coupled to one or more combined lightguides or lightguides. In another embodiment, for example, the housing of the light input coupler is black and substantially absorbs light that escapes from the edges of the coupling lightguides and prevents this light from being diverted from the visual appearance of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the light blocking element is an area disposed on or physically or optically coupled to the low contact area cover. In another embodiment, the light blocking element maintains a relative position of the combination light guides with respect to each other, or maintains a relative position between the combination light guide and the light guide area, light mixing area, or light source. For example, in one embodiment, the partially specular reflective aluminum film includes an adhesive (aluminum tape), wraps around the bonding lightguides, and is also adhered to the lightguide in the light mixing area. In one embodiment, the light blocking element has an ASTM D790 flexural modulus of greater than one selected from the group 1.5, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 15 Gigapascals (GPa).

THERMAL STABILITY OF OPTCIAL ELEMENT

In another embodiment, the light coupling optical element or light turning optical element comprises materials having a volume average glass transition temperature that is higher than the volume average glass transition temperature of the materials contained within the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the glass transition temperature of the coupling lightguides is less than 100°C and the glass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element or the light turning optical element is greater than 100°C. In a further embodiment, the glass transition temperature of the coupling lightguides is less than 120° C. and the glass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element or the light turning optical element is greater than 120° C. In a further embodiment, the glass transition temperature of the coupling lightguides is less than 140°C and the glass transition temperature of the light coupling optical element or the light turning optical element is greater than 140°C. In a further embodiment, the glass transition temperature of the bonding lightguides is less than 150° C. and the glass transition temperature of the light bonding optical element or the light turning optical element is greater than 150° C. In another embodiment, the light redirecting optical element or light coupling optical element comprises polycarbonate and the coupling light guides comprise poly(methyl methacrylate). In another embodiment, at least one of the light redirecting optical element and the light coupling optical element is thermally coupled to a thermal transfer element or housing of the light emitting device.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the combined light guide is a region in which light in the region proceeds under a waveguide condition and a part of the light input to the surface or region of the combined light guides can pass through the combined light guide toward the light guide or the light mixing region. . In one embodiment, the combined lightguides are defined by “leg” areas extending from the “body” (lightguide area) of the film. In one embodiment, light traveling in a waveguide condition within the combined lightguide is reflected from the outer surfaces of the combined lightguide and thus is totally reflected within the volume of the combined lightguide. In another embodiment, the combined lightguide includes a cladding area or other area optically coupled to the core area of the combined lightguide. In this embodiment, a portion of light in the combined lightguide may travel through the core region, or a portion of light in the combined lightguide may travel through the cladding region or other region, or the light may be in a waveguide condition (or near the input surface, It can travel through both regions in the vicinity of the light extraction layer on the cladding or other area, or in non-waveguide conditions near the bending region). The combined light guide may, in some embodiments, serve to geometrically transform a part of the flux from the first shaping area to a second shaping area different from the first shaping area. In the example of this embodiment, the optical input surface of the optical input coupler formed from the edges of folded strips (combining lightguides) of flat film has rectangular dimensions of 3 millimeters to 2.7 millimeters, and the optical input coupler has 40.5 millimeters to 0.2 millimeters. It combines the light into a planar section of the film within the light mixing region having cross-sectional dimensions of In one embodiment, the input area of the light input coupler is substantially equal to the cross-sectional area of a light guide or a light mixing area arranged to receive light from one or more combined light guides. In another embodiment, the total light input surface of the light input couplers receiving at least 5% of the light flux from a light mixing area arranged to receive light from the combined light guides or a light source divided by the total cross-sectional area of the light guide area. The total conversion ratio, defined as the area, is 1 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1, 0.8 to 0.9, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.5 to .999, 0.6 to 0.999, 0.7 to 0.999, less than 1, 1 Greater than, equal to 1: The selected one from the group. In another embodiment, the input surface area of each light input coupler corresponding to the edges of the combined light guides arranged to receive light from the light source is a light mixing region arranged to receive light from each of the corresponding combined light guides or It is substantially the same as the cross-sectional area of the light guide area. In another embodiment, a single light input of an optical input coupler (corresponding to the edges of the combined lightguides) divided by the total cross-sectional area of the light guide or a light mixing region arranged to receive light from the corresponding combined lightguides. Individual conversion ratios, defined as the total light input of the surface, are 1 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1, 0.8 to 0.9, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.5 to .999, 0.6 to 0.999, 0.7 to 0.999, 1 Less than, greater than 1, equal to 1: The selected one from the group.

In another embodiment, the combined lightguide receives light from at least one input surface having a first input surface longest dimension, and provides a light emitting surface longest dimension greater than the first input surface longest dimension to the lightguide in the light emitting surface. It is arranged to penetrate. In another embodiment, the combination lightguide is arranged to collect light from at least one light source through the edges or surfaces of the combination lightguides and direct light to a surface, edge, or area of the lightguide including the light emitting surface. It is a plurality of light guides. In one embodiment, the combined lightguides provide optical channels whereby the light flux entering the combined lightguides within a first cross-sectional area is in a second cross-sectional area different from the first cross-sectional area in the light output area of the optical input coupler. Can be redirected. The light exiting the light input coupler or light mixing region can then travel to the light guide or light guide region, which may be the isolation region of the same element (such as the isolation region of the same film). In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes light from a light guide region having a light source and light extraction features, a plurality of sources, light input couplers, or light that is mixed before entering the light guide region. It includes a film that is treated to form a mixed region. The combined lightguides, light mixing region, and light extraction features may all be formed in the same film, on this film, or within this film and they may be interconnected to each other through one or more regions.

In one embodiment, at least one combination lightguide is arranged to receive light from a plurality of light sources of at least two different colors, wherein the light received by the combination lightguide is reflected through the combination lightguide at an angle. Luminescence measured on a 1976 u', v'UCS (Uniform Chromaticity Scale), premixed spatially, or both and described in the VESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standard version 2.0 (Appendix 201, page 249) of June 1, 2001. The 9-spot sample spatial color non-uniformity (Δu'v') of the light emitting surface of the device is 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 as measured using a spectrometer based spot color meter: Is less than one selected from the group.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDE FOLDS AND BENDS

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light mixing region disposed between the cut strips or segments to form the lightguide and the combined lightguides, whereby the set of edges of the strips or segments is from the light source. Are bonded together to form a light input surface of a light input coupler arranged to receive light. In one embodiment, the optical input coupler comprises a coupling lightguide, wherein the coupling lightguide comprises at least one folded or bent in one plane such that at least one edge overlaps another edge. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguide comprises a plurality of folds and bends, wherein the edges of the coupling lightguide may be abutted together in a region such that the region forms the light input surface of the light input coupler of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light input coupler that includes at least one coupled light guide that is bent or folded, so that light traveling in a first direction in the light guide before bending or folding is a first direction in the light guide after bending or folding. Proceed in a second direction different from.

In one embodiment, at least one combined lightguide includes a strip or segment bent or folded to a radius of curvature less than 75 times the thickness of the strip or segment. In another embodiment, the at least one combined lightguide includes a strip or segment bent or folded to a radius of curvature greater than ten the thickness of the strip or segment. In another embodiment, the at least one combination lightguide is bent or folded such that the longest dimension in the cross section through the combination lightguide or the light emitting device in the at least one plane is less than that of folding or no bending. The segments or strips can be bent or folded in more than one direction or area and the directions of folding or bending can be different between the strips or segments.

OPTICAL EFFICIENCY OF THE LIGHT INPUT COUPLER

In an embodiment, the optical efficiency of the optical input coupler, defined as the percentage of the original luminous flux from the light source passing through the optical input coupler and from the optical input coupler to the mixed region, light guide, or light emitting surface is 50%, 60%. , 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%: greater than the one selected from the group. The degree of collimation can affect the optical efficiency of the optical input coupler.

COLLIMATION OF LIGHT ENTERING THE COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the light source and the combined light guide, the shape of the combined light guide, the shape of the mixed region, the shape of the optical input coupler, and the shape of the element or region of the optical input coupler: a light source disposed between at least one selected from the group , Light collimating optical element, light source primary optic, light source auxiliary optic, light input surface, optical element: at least one selected from the group is less than 80 degrees, less than 70 degrees, less than 60 degrees, less than 50 degrees, 40 walking All less, less than 30 degrees, less than 20 degrees, less than 10 degrees, between 10 degrees and 30 degrees, between 30 degrees and 50 degrees, between 10 degrees and 60 degrees, and between 30 degrees and 80 degrees: The full width at half maximum selected from the group It provides light in the combined light guide. In some embodiments, light that is highly collimated (FWHM less than or equal to about 10 degrees) is not spatially mixed within the lightguide area with light extraction features, so there may be dark bands or areas of non-uniformity. However, in this embodiment, the light will be efficiently coupled around curves and bends in the lightguide for less collimated light, and in some embodiments, a high degree of collimation will result in the light input coupler and final It enables small radii of curvature and small volumes for folding or bending in light emitting devices. In another embodiment, a significant portion of the light from a light source with a low degree of collimation (approximately 120 degrees FWHM) within the combined light guides is reflected at angles so that it is near bends or folds with a small radius of curvature. Exit the combined lightguides in the areas. In this embodiment, the spatial light mixing (providing a uniform color or luminance) of light from the combined lightguides in the lightguide within the areas of the light extraction regions is high and the light extracted from the lightguide has a more uniform angle or space. It will appear to have angular or spatial color or luminance uniformity.

In one embodiment, light from the light source is collimated in a first plane by a light collimating optical element and light is collimated in a second plane orthogonal to the first plane by light collimating edges of the combining lightguide. do. In another embodiment, a first portion of light from the light source is collimated by a light collimating element in a first plane and a first portion of light is orthogonal to the first plane by collimating the edges of one or more coupling lightguides. It is further collimated in the second plane, the first plane, or a combination thereof. In a further embodiment, a first portion of light from the light source is collimated by a light collimating element in a first plane and a second portion of light or a first portion of light from the light source collimates the edges of one or more combined lightguides. Thereby collimating in a second plane orthogonal to the first plane, a first plane, or a combination thereof.

In another embodiment, one or more combined lightguides are bent or folded and the optical axis of the light source is directed to the light emitting device optical axis at a first turning angle and a second direction perpendicular to the light emitting device optical axis at a second turning angle And oriented in a third direction and a second direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light-emitting device at a third turning angle. In another embodiment, the first turning angle, the second turning angle, or the third turning angle is 0 degrees, 45 degrees, 90 degrees, 135 degrees, 180 degrees, 0 to 90 degrees, 90 to 180 degrees, And 0 to 180 degrees: approximately one selected from the group.

Each light source can be directed at a different angle. For example, two light sources along one edge of a film with a strip type light input coupler can be directed directly towards each other (optical axes are 180 degrees apart). In another example, the light sources may be placed at the center of the edge of the film and directed away from each other (optical axes are also 180 degrees apart).

The segments or strips can be folded once, for example with the strips oriented along one side of the film and in contact with each other so that the light source optical axis is in a direction substantially parallel to the film plane or light guide plane. The strips or segments may for example be folded twice so that the light source optical axis is substantially perpendicular to the film plane or perpendicular to the waveguide.

In one embodiment, the fold or bend in the coupling lightguide, region or segment of the coupling lightguide, or in the light input coupler has a corrugation or radius center of the bend in a direction at the bending angle with respect to the light source optical axis. In another embodiment, the bending angle is one selected from the group: 0 degrees, 45 degrees, 90 degrees, 135 degrees, 180 degrees, 0-90 degrees, 90-180 degrees, and 0-180 degrees.

The bend or fold may also be a unidirectional bend (such as a vertical type, horizontal type, 45 degree type or other single angle) or the bend or fold may be multi-directional, such as a twisted type in which a strip or segment is twisted. In one embodiment, the strip or segment is twisted by bending simultaneously in a strip, segment or two directions of a combined lightguide.

In another embodiment, the light input coupler comprises at least one light source arranged to input light to the edges of the strips (or combined lightguides) cut into film, wherein the strips are twisted and form an input surface. And the light source output surface area is substantially parallel to the edge of the combined light guide, light guide, light guide area, or light input surface, or the optical axis of the light source is combined light guide, light guide, light guide area, or It is substantially perpendicular to the edge of the light input surface. In another embodiment, a plurality of light sources are arranged to couple light to a light input coupler including strips cut into a film, so that at least one light source is a light guide edge, a combined light guide lateral edge, or a closest edge of the light guide area. Has an optical axis substantially parallel to In another embodiment, the two groups of combined lightguides are individually folded towards each other so that the separation between the ends of the strips is substantially the thickness of the center strip between the two groups and the two or more light sources are It is arranged to direct the light in substantially opposite directions. In one embodiment, two groups of combined lightguides are individually folded towards each other and then both are folded in a direction away from the film so that the edges of the combined lightguides are arranged to receive light from at least one light source. They are joined to form the input surface. In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light source may be substantially perpendicular to a planar film-based lightguide.

In one embodiment, two opposing stacks of bonding lightguides from the same film are folded and recombine at some point away from the end of the bonding device. This can be achieved by dividing the film into one or more sets of two bundles that are folded towards each other. In this embodiment, bundles can be folded at an additional tight radius and recombined into a single stack. The stack input may be further polished to be a flat single input surface or may be optically coupled to the flat window and arranged to receive light from the light source.

In one embodiment, the combination of the two film stacks is configured to reduce the overall volume. In one embodiment, the film is folded or bent with a radius of curvature greater than 10X of the film thickness order to maintain sufficient total reflection for the first portion of light traveling within the film.

In another embodiment, the optical input coupler comprises at least one coupling lightguide, wherein the coupling lightguide comprises an arcuate reflective edge and in a folding direction substantially parallel to the lightguide edge or the nearest edge of the lightguide area. Multiple folds and multiple folds are used to join sections of the edge to form a light input surface with small dimensions. In another embodiment, the light coupling lightguide, strips, or segments have collimating sections cut from the coupling lightguide directing light substantially more parallel to the optical axis of the light source. In one embodiment, collimating sections of the combined lightguide, strips or segments direct light substantially more parallel to the optical axis of the light source in at least one plane substantially parallel to the lightguide or lightguide area.

In a further embodiment, the light input coupler comprises at least one coupling lightguide having an arc, a segmented arc, or other light turning edge cut into a film, and the light input coupler is a spiral or It includes an area of the film that is rolled until it forms a concentric circular light input edge.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDE LATERAL EDGES

In one embodiment, the lateral edges are defined in this application as edges of the combined lightguide that do not substantially receive light directly from the light source and are not part of the edges of the lightguide. The lateral edges of the combined lightguide substantially only receive light from the light traveling within the combined lightguide. In one embodiment, the lateral edges are at least one selected from the group: uncoated, coated with a reflective material, disposed adjacent to the reflective material, and cut into a specific cross-sectional profile. The lateral edges may be coated with, bonded to, or disposed adjacent to, a specularly reflecting material, a partially diffusely reflecting material, or a diffusely reflecting material. In one embodiment, the edges are coated with a specular reflective ink comprising nanosized or micron sized particles or flakes that substantially reflect light in a specular manner when the coupling light guides are joined as folded or bent. In another embodiment, a light reflective element (such as a multilayer mirror polymer film having reflectivity) is disposed near the lateral edge of at least one area of the disposed combined lightguide, and the multilayer mirror polymer film having high reflectivity is from the edge. It is arranged to receive light and direct it back to the light guide. In another embodiment, the lateral edges are circular and the percentage of incident light diffracted in the lightguide from the edge is reduced. One way to achieve circular edges is to use a laser to cut strips, segments or a combined lightguide area from the film and edge to become circular through control of the processing parameters (cutting speed, cutoff frequency, laser power, etc.) will be. Other methods for creating circular edges include mechanical sanding/polishing or chemical/vapor polishing. In another embodiment, the lateral edges of the area of the combined lightguide are tapered, angular serrated, or otherwise cut or formed so that light from a light source traveling within the combined lightguide is reflected from the edge so that it is in the optical axis of the light source. It is directed at a close angle, towards the folded or bent area, or towards the light guide or light guide area.

WIDTH OF COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the dimensions of the combined lightguides are substantially equal to the width and thickness of each other such that the input surface areas for each edge surface are substantially the same. In another embodiment, the average width w of the combined lightguides is determined by the equation:

w=MF*W _LES /NC,

Where W _LES is the total width of the light guide area receiving light from the combined light guide or the light emitting surface in a direction parallel to the light entry edge of the light guide, and NC is the light guide area or light receiving light from the combined light guide. It is the total number of combined light guides in a direction parallel to the light entry edge of the guide, and MF is the magnification factor. In one embodiment, the magnification factor is one selected from the group: 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 0.7-1.3, 0.8-1.2, and 0.9-1.1. In another embodiment, the combined light guide width, the maximum width of the combined waveguide, the average width of the combined light guides, and the width of each combined light guide: at least one selected from the group is 0.5mm-1mm, 1mm-2mm, 2mm-3mm , 3mm-4mm, 5mm-6mm, 0.5mm-2mm, 0.5mm-25mm, 0.5mm-10mm, 10-37mm, and 0.5mm-5mm: selected from the group. In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: the combined light guide width, the maximum width of the combined waveguide, the average width of the combined light guides, and the width of each combined light guide is less than 20 millimeters.

In one embodiment, the ratio of the average width of the combined light guides arranged to receive light from the first light source to the average thickness of the combined light guides is 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 100, 150, and 200: greater than one selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the width of the outer coupling lightguide in the array of coupling lightguides or both outer coupling lightguides in the array of coupling lightguides is wider than the average width of the inner or other coupling lightguides in the array. In another embodiment, the width of the outer coupling lightguide in the array of coupling lightguides or both outer coupling lightguides in the array of coupling lightguides is wider than both inner or other coupling lightguides in the array. In a further embodiment, the width of the outer coupling lightguides in the array of coupling lightguides or the width of both outer coupling lightguides in the array of coupling lightguides may be internal or It is wider than the average width of the inner or other combined lightguides in the array by an amount substantially greater than the thickness of the other combined lightguides. In a further embodiment, the ratio of the width of the outer coupling lightguide in the array of coupling lightguides or the width of both outer coupling lightguides in the array of coupling lightguides to the average width of the inner or other coupling lightguides is greater than 0.5, greater than 0.8. , Greater than 1, greater than 1.5, greater than 2, greater than 3, between 0.5 and 3, between 0.8 and 3, between 1 and 3, between 1 and 5, between 1 and 10: is one selected from the group. In another embodiment, a wide externally coupled lightguide on one side of the array has a region of the coupled lightguide extending past the other coupled lightguides in the width direction, such as dust, TIR interference light out coupling (uncoupled), scratches. Allows folding towards the lateral edges of other coupling lightguides to provide a protective barrier such as a low contact area cover from the back. In another embodiment, the elongated combined lightguide region is on the lateral edges of one or more combined lightguides on one side, lateral edges and one surface of the lower combined lightguide in the array, on opposite sides of the one or more combined lightguides. Lateral edges, lateral edges on opposite sides of the inner or other coupling lightguides in the array, lateral edges on opposite sides of the inner or other coupling lightguides in the array, and the outer surface of the other end coupling lightguide in the array: It may extend around one or more selected from the group. For example, in one embodiment, an array of 10 combined light guides including 9 combined light guides having a width of 10 millimeters is arranged at one lateral edge above the outer tenth combined light guide having a width of 27 millimeters. Stacked and aligned, each combined lightguide is 0.2 millimeters thick. In this embodiment, a 17 mm area of the outer coupling lightguide extending beyond the edges of the stacked nine coupling lightguides is wrapped around the stack of nine coupling lightguides and overlaps itself to protect the inner coupling lightguides. It is attached in place (for example by means of an adhesive or a clamping mechanism). In another embodiment, the stacked array of combined lightguides comprises 2 externally coupled lightguides having a width of 15 millimeters between within 8 combined lightguides having a width of 10 millimeters, wherein each combined lightguide is 0.4 mm It is thickness. In this embodiment, the upper outer coupling light guide is folded together with lateral edges on one side of the stack array of coupling light guides, and the lower outer coupling light guide is folded with opposite side edges on the opposite side of the stack array of coupling light guides. Folded together. In this embodiment, each folded section contributes to the protection of the lateral edges of the combined lightguides. In another embodiment, the low contact area film is disposed between the combined lightguide and the lateral edges and the folded section. In another embodiment, the folded section includes low contact area surface features that provide protection without significantly coupling light from the lateral and/or surface areas of the combined lightguides. In another embodiment, the bonded lightguide includes an adhesive disposed between the two regions of the bonded lightguide so that it adheres to itself and wraps around a stack of bonded lightguides.

GAP BETWEEN THE COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the two or more combined lightguides comprise a gap between the lightguides in the lightguide area, the lightguide area, or the area to which they are connected to the light mixing area. In another embodiment, the light guides are formed by a manufacturing method in which gaps between the light guides are generated. For example, in one embodiment, the light guides are formed by a die cutting the film and the combined light guides have a gap between each other. In one embodiment, the gap between the coupling lightguides is greater than one selected from the group: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 10 millimeters. If the gap between the combined light guides is very large with respect to the combined light guide width, then the uniformity of the light emitting area is in the light guide because the light guide has areas (gap areas) where light does not enter the light guide area. It can be reduced if it is not long enough in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the traveling light (for luminance or color uniformity). In one embodiment, the light guide includes two light guides, wherein the combined light guides are in the light mixing area or in the area combining the light guide area, divided by the width of the gap between the combined light guides. The average of the widths of the light guides is greater than one selected from the group: 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 6, 10, 20, 40, and 50. In another embodiment, the lightguide includes large gaps between the combined lightguides and a sufficiently long light mixing area to provide the desired level of uniformity. In another embodiment, the light guide comprises two light guides, wherein the combined light guides are divided by the average of the widths of the two combined light guides in the light mixing area or the area combining the light guide area. The width of the gap between them is greater than one selected from the group: 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 6, 10, 20, 40, and 50.

SHAPED OR TAPERED COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

The width of the combined light guides may be changed in a predetermined pattern. In one embodiment, the width of the coupling lightguides is centered from a large width within the centered lightguide as shown when the light input edges of the coupling lightguides are placed together to form the light input surface on the light input coupler. The light guides away from the light guides change to a small width within them. In this embodiment, a light source having a substantially circular light output aperture can be combined into a combination lightguides that are combined into small width strips that are light at high angles from the optical axis to the edge of the lightguide or lightguide area. The uniformity of the light-emitting surface parallel to the input edge of the light guide area arranged to receive light from the light guides and combined is greater than one selected from the group 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% and 95%.

Other shapes of stacked combined lightguides such as triangles, squares, rectangles, ellipses, etc. are conceivable to provide input areas matched to the light emitting surface of the light source. The widths of the combined lightguides may be tapered so that they redirect a portion of the light received from the light source. The light guides may be tapered in the vicinity of the light source, within an area along the combined light guide between the light source and the light guide area, in the vicinity of the light guide area, or some combination thereof.

In some embodiments, one light source will not provide sufficient luminous flux to enable a desired luminance or light output profile for a particular light emitting device. In this example, more than one light input coupler and light source may be used along the edge or side of the light guide region or the light guide mixing region. In one embodiment, the average width of the coupling light guides for the at least one light input coupler is 1 to 3, 1.01 to 3, the maximum width of the light output surface of the light source in the direction of the light guide coupler width at the light input surface, 1.01 to 4, 0.7 to 1.5, 0.8 to 1.5, 0.9 to 1.5, 1 to 2, 1.1 to 2, 1.2 to 2, 1.3 to 2, 1.4 to 2, 0.7 to 2, 0.5 to 2, and 0.5 to 3 times: There is one first width range selected from the group.

In one embodiment, one or more of the combined light guides taper to a wide width within the light guide area or the area of the combined light guides adjacent to the light mixing area. By tapering outward, light from the combined light guides can extend into a large spatial area before entering the light guide area (or other area) of the film. This can improve the spatial uniformity near the side of the light input. Further, in this embodiment, by tapering the combined light guides to the outside, fewer combined light guides are required to illuminate the side of the light guide area. In one embodiment, tapered combination lightguides allow for a thick lightguide, a small output area light source, or the use of fewer combination lightguides using more than one stack of combination lightguides as a specific light source. In one embodiment, the ratio of the average width of the combined lightguides over their length to the width in the area where they couple light to the light mixing area or lightguide area is 1, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3 , 0.2, and 0.1: less than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the ratio of the width of the coupling lightguides at the light input surface to the width at the region where they couple light to the light mixing region or lightguide region is 1, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3 , 0.2, and 0.1: less than one selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the combined lightguide dimension ratio, the width of the combined lightguide (width is measured as the average dimension orthogonal to the general direction of travel within the combined lightguide towards the light mixing area, lightguide, or lightguide area) The ratio of the combined light guide thickness (thickness is an average dimension measured in the direction perpendicular to the light travel plane in the combined light guide) is 5:1, 10:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30 :1, 40:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, and 100:1: greater than one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the thickness of the combined lightguide is less than 600 microns and the width is greater than 10 millimeters. In one embodiment, the thickness of the combined lightguide is less than 400 microns and the width is greater than 3 millimeters. In a further embodiment, the thickness of the combined lightguide is less than 400 microns and the width is greater than 10 millimeters. In another embodiment, the thickness of the combined lightguide is less than 300 microns and the width is less than 10 millimeters. In another embodiment, the thickness of the combined lightguide or light transmitting film is less than 200 microns and the width is less than 20 millimeters. Imperfections at the lateral edges of the coupling lightguides (eg deflections from the perfectly planar flat surfaces due to cutting of the strips) can increase the loss of light through the edges or surfaces of the coupling lightguides. By increasing the width of the combined lightguides, the light in the combined lightguide is less from the later edge surfaces (which interact less with the surface) in a wider combined lightguide than a narrow combined lightguide for a certain range of angles of light propagation. It is bounced (reflected) so that the effects of edge imperfections can be reduced. The width of the combined light guides is a factor that affects the light guide area, the light mixing area, or the spatial color or luminance uniformity of the light entering the light guide, and the width of the combined light guide is the width of the light emitting area (in the same direction). When compared to, then spatially uneven areas may occur.

In another embodiment, the width of the light emitting surface area arranged to receive at least 10% of the light emitted from the group of combined light guides forming the optical input coupler in a direction parallel to the width of the combined light guides versus the average of the combined light guides Width ratios are 5:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 40:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, 100:1, 150:1, 200: 1, 300:1, 500:1, and 1000:1: greater than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the ratio of the total width to the average combined lightguide width of the total light emitting surface arranged to receive light emitted from all of the combined lightguides directing light towards the light emitting region or surface along the width is 5 :1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 40:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, 100:1, 150:1, 200:1, 300:1 , 500:1, and 1000:1: greater than one selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the width of the combined light guide is greater than one of the following: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.8, 2, 3 of the width of the light output surface of the light source arranged to couple light with the combined light guide, 4, and 5 times. In another embodiment, a large combined lightguide width relative to the width of the light output surface of the light source allows a high degree of collimation (lower full-width at half intensity) by the optical collimating edges of the combined lightguides.

LIGHT TURNING EDGES OF THE COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the one or more combination light guides have an edge shape that optically turns a portion of light in the combination light guide by total reflection, so that the optical axis of light in the combination light guide is different from the first optical axis angle from the first optical axis angle. The angle of the second optical axis is changed. More than one edge of the one or more combined lightguides may have a shape or profile for turning light within the combined lightguide and the edges may provide collimation for portions of light traveling within the combined lightguides. For example, in one embodiment, one edge of the stack of combined lightguides is curved so that the optical axis of light traveling within the lightguide is rotated by 90 degrees. In one embodiment, the rotation angle of the optical axis by one edge of the combined light guide is greater than one of: 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 40 degrees, 45 degrees, 60 degrees, 80 degrees, 90 degrees, and 120 degrees. In another embodiment, the rotation angle of the optical axis by more than one edge area of the combined light guide is 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 40 degrees, 45 degrees, 60 degrees, 80 degrees, 90 degrees, 120 degrees, 135 degrees, and 160 degrees: greater than either. By using more than one particularly curved edge, the light can be rotated over a wide range of angles. In one embodiment, the light in the combined lightguide is redirected in a first direction (+ theta direction) by a first edge profile and in a section direction (+ theta 2) by a second edge profile. Rotated. In another embodiment, the light in the combined lightguide is redirected from the first direction to the second direction by the first edge profile and further rotated back toward the first direction by the second edge profile region along the combined lightguide. . In one embodiment, the light turning edges of the combined light guide are near the light source, near the light input surface of the combined light guides, near the light mixing area, near the light guide area, between the light input surfaces of the combined light guides, near the light mixing area It is disposed in one or more areas including, without limitation, in the vicinity of the area between the combined light guides and the light guide area, and the vicinity of the light guide area.

In one embodiment, one lateral edge near the light input surface of the combined lightguide has a light turning profile and the opposite lateral edge has a light collimating profile. In another embodiment, one lateral edge near the light input surface of the coupling lightguide has a light turning profile continuing to the light collimating profile (direction of light away from the light input surface in the coupling lightguide). propagation)).

In one embodiment, two arrays of stacked combined lightguides are arranged to receive light from the light source and rotate the optical axis of the light in two different directions. In another embodiment, a plurality of combined light guides with light turning edges may be folded and stacked along the edge of the light guide area so that light from a light source directed toward the light guide area enters the stack of folded combined light guides. And the optical turning edges redirect the optical axis of the light in a first direction substantially parallel to the edge, and folds in the stacked combined lightguides redirect the light in a direction substantially facing the lightguide area. In this embodiment, the second array of stacked folded combined lightguides can be stacked above or below (interleaved with) the first array of folded combined lightguides stacked along the same edge of the lightguide area. Light from the same light source directed towards the guide area enters a second array of stacked folded combined lightguides, and the light turning edges of the second array of stacked folded combined lightguides are substantially parallel to the edge (and Opposite to the first direction) the optical axis of the light is redirected in the second direction and the folds in the stacked combined light guides redirect the light in a direction substantially facing the light guide area. In another embodiment, combined lightguides from two different arrays along the edge of the lightguide area may be stacked one after the other. The stack arrangement may be predetermined, random, or change thereof. In another embodiment, the first stack of folded combined lightguides from one side of the unfolded combined lightguide is disposed adjacent to one surface of the unfolded combined lightguide and folded combined lights from the other side of the unfolded combined lightguide The second side of the guides is disposed adjacent to the opposite surface of the unfolded combined lightguide. In this embodiment, the unfolded combined lightguide may be aligned to receive the central (high flux) area of light from the light source when there are equal numbers of combined lightguides on the top and bottom surfaces of the unfolded combined lightguide. . In this embodiment, the unfolded combined lightguide can have high transmission (less light loss) since there are no folds or bends, and thus more light reaches the lightguide area.

In another embodiment, the optical turning edges of one or more combined lightguides direct light from two or more light sources having first optical axis angles for light having a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angles. Convert. In a further embodiment, the optical turning edges of the one or more combined lightguides redirect a first portion of light from a light source having a first optical axis angle relative to the portion of light having a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angle. Let it. In another embodiment, the optical turning edges of the one or more combined lightguides redirect light from a first light source having a first optical axis angle to light having a second optical axis angle different from the first optical axis angle and The light is redirected from a second light source having a third optical axis angle with respect to light having a fourth optical axis angle different from the three optical axis angle.

In one embodiment, the optical turning profile of one or more edges of the combined lightguide has a curved shape when viewed substantially perpendicular to the film. In another embodiment, the curved shape has one or more conical, circular arc, parabolic, hyperbolic, geometric, parametric, or other logarithmic curved regions. In another embodiment, the shape of the curve is the bending loss (increased reflection) of the specific light input profile for the combined lightguide, the light input surface, light profile modifications before the curve (such as collimating edges), Improving through a combined lightguide by minimizing the refractive indices of the wavelengths of interest for the combined lightguide material, the surface finish of the edge, and the type of coating or cladding at the curved edge (e.g., low refractive index material, air, or metallization) It is designed to provide improved transmission. In one embodiment, the light loss from the light turning profile of one or more edge regions of the combined lightguide is less than one of: 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5%.

VERTICAL LIGHT TURNING EDGES

In one embodiment, the vertical edges of the coupling lightguides (edges touching the large film surface) or the core regions of the coupling lightguides have a non-vertical cross-sectional profile that rotates the optical axis of the portion of the incident light. In one embodiment, the vertical edges of the one or more combined lightguides or the core regions of the combined lightguides comprise a curved edge. In another embodiment, the vertical edges or core regions of one or more of the combined lightguides comprise an angled edge, wherein the angle to the surface perpendicular to the combined lightguide is 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degrees. Greater than one of: degrees and 60 degrees. In one embodiment, the use of the vertical light turning edges of the core regions or coupling lightguides is a coupling lightguide to the film surface where it is typically easy to obtain an optical finish as it may be an optically smooth surface of the film. Allows light to enter into the furnace. In another embodiment, the combined lightguides (or core regions of the combined lightguides) are brought into contact and the vertical edges are cut at an angle to the vertical surface. In one embodiment, the angled cut creates a smooth continuous angled vertical light turning edge on the edges of the combined lightguides. In another embodiment, angled, curved, or a combination of vertical light turning edges thereof are obtained by one or more of: laser cutting, polishing, grinding, die cutting, blade cutting or sliding, and hot blade cutting or slicing. In one embodiment, vertical light turning edges are formed when the combined light guides are cut into a light guide film and the combined light guides are aligned to form a vertical light turning edge.

In another embodiment, the light input surface of the combined lightguides is the surface of one or more combined lightguides and the surface is one or more surface relief profiles (embossed Fresnel lens) that turns, collimates or redirects a portion of light from the light source. embossed Fresnel lenses, microlens arrays, or prismatic structures). In a further embodiment, a light collimating element, a light turning optical element, or a light coupling optical element is disposed between the light source and the light input film surface of the coupling lightguide (non-edge surface). In one embodiment, the surface of the light input film is the surface of the cladding region or the core region of the combined lightguide. In a further embodiment, the light collimating optical element, light turning optical element, or light coupling optical element is optically coupled to the core region, cladding region, or intermediate light transmitting region between the optical element and the coupling lightguide.

VERTICAL LIGHT COLLIMATING EDGES

In one embodiment, the vertical edges of the combined lightguide (edges touching the large film surface) or core regions of the combined lightguides have a non-specific cross-sectional profile collimating a portion of the incident light. In one embodiment, the vertical edges of one or more combined lightguides or core regions of the combined lightguides comprise a curved edge that collimates a portion of the incident light. In another embodiment, vertical edges or core regions of one or more combined light guides include angled edges, and the edge for a surface perpendicular to the combined light guide is 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degrees. And 60 degrees: greater than one of.

NON-FOLDED COUPLING LIGHTGUIDE

In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguide comprises an unfolded combined lightguide arranged to receive light from the light input surface and direct light toward the lightguide without turning the light. In one embodiment, the unfolded lightguide is used with one or more light turning optical elements, light coupling optical elements, coupling lightguides with light turning edges, or coupling lightguides with collimating edges. For example, a light turning optical element may be disposed above or below an unfolded coupling lightguide such that a first portion of the light from the light source substantially maintains the orientation of its optical axis while passing through the unfolded coupling lightguide and light turning Light from the light source received by the optical element is turned to enter the stacked array of combined lightguides. In another embodiment, the stacked array of combined light guides includes folded combined light guides and unfolded combined light guides.

In another embodiment, the unfolded combined lightguide is disposed near the edge of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the unfolded combined light guide is disposed in the middle area of the edge of the light guide area. In a further embodiment, the unfolded combined lightguide is disposed along the side of the lightguide area in the area between the lateral sides of the lightguide area. In one embodiment, the unfolded combined light guide is disposed in various areas along one edge of the light guide area, wherein a plurality of light input couplers are used to direct light to the side of the light guide area.

In another embodiment, the folded combined lightguides have optical collimating edges, substantially linear edges, or optical turning edges. In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: an array of folded coupling lightguides, a light turning optical element, a light collimating optical element, and a light source: is physically coupled to an unfolded coupling lightguide. In another embodiment, the folded bonded light guides are physically bonded to each other and bonded to the unfolded bonded light guides by a pressure-sensitive adhesive cladding layer, comprising an unconstrained light guide film and an array of bonded light guides including a light emitting area. The thickness is less than one of: 1.2 times, 1.5 times, 2 times, and 3 times the thickness of the array of combined lightguides. By bonding the folded combined lightguides to themselves only, the combined lightguides (when not constrained) are typically bent upward and the thickness of the array due to the folded combined lightguides that are not physically bonded to a fixed or relatively constrained area. Increase By physically bonding the folded bonded lightguides to the unfolded bonded lightguides, the array of bonded lightguides is physically bonded to the separation area of the film, which increases stability and thus reduces the ability of elastic energy from released bending. .

In one embodiment, the unfolded combined lightguide includes one or more of: optical collimating edges, optical turning edges, angled linear edges, and curved optical turning edges. Combined unfolded lightguides or folded combined lightguides may include curved areas near bend areas, turning areas, or collimating areas so that stress (such as due to twisting or lateral bending) is It is focused at the sharp corner and does not increase the likelihood of cracking. In another embodiment, curved regions that are combined with the light guide region or the light mixing region of the film-based light guide are disposed.

In another embodiment, a combined non-folding light guide, a folding combined light guide, a light collimating element, a light turning optical element, a light turning optical element, a light coupling optical element, a light mixing region, a light guide region, and one or more elements. Cladding area: at least one selected from the group is physically coupled to the relative positioning element. By physically coupling the coupling lightguides directly or indirectly to the relative positioning element, the elastic energy stored from bending in the coupling lightguides is retained within the coupling lightguides and the combined thickness of the coupling lightguides unconstrained (e.g. Not constrained by the outer housing).

INTERIOR LIGHT DIRECTING EDGE

In one embodiment, the inner region of the one or more combined lightguides includes an inner light directing edge. The inner light turning edge may be formed by cutting or otherwise removing the inner region of the combined lightguide. In one embodiment, the inner light directing edge redirects the first portion of the light within the combined lightguide. In one embodiment, the inner light turning edges provide an additional level of control to direct light within the combination lightguides to obtain a predetermined light output pattern (such as high uniformity or high fluxer in a specific area). And provide light flux redistribution within the combined lightguide and within the lightguide area.

CAVITY REGION WITH THE COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the one or more combination light guides or the core region of the combination light guides includes at least one cavity. In another embodiment, the cavity is arranged to receive the light source and the vertical edges of the core regions of the combined lightguides are vertical light collimating optical edges. In one embodiment, a high luminous flux is coupled within the cavity and the combination lightguides in at least one combination lightguide than is combined into the combination lightguides without a cavity. This is for example a combination of light guides (>90% transmittance) before and after filling the cavity with a high transmittance (>90% transmittance) light-transmitting material (with a light source placed adjacent to the surface of the corresponding material) index matched with the core area. When cut off) or from a light emitting device having an integrating sphere. In another embodiment, the cavity region provides for the registration or alignment of the combined light guides with a light source and increased light flux that are combined into the combined light guides. In one embodiment, an array of cavities and coupling lightguides with vertical light collimating edges alleviates the need for a light collimating optical element.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDE COMPRISING COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES, including combined lightguides

In one embodiment, at least one combination light guide includes a plurality of combination light guides. For example, the combined light guide may be further cut to include a plurality of combined light guides connected to the edge of the combined light guide. In one embodiment, a film of thickness T includes a first array of N number of combined light guides each including a sub array of M number of combined light guides. In this embodiment, the first array of combined light guides is folded in a first direction so that the combined light guides are aligned and stacked, and the sub-array of the combined light guides is folded in a second direction so that the combined light guides are aligned and stacked. . In this embodiment, the light input edge surface comprising a sub-array of coupling lightguides has the same width as each of the narrower coupling lightguides, and the light input surface has a height defined by H = T x N x M (H ). This may allow the use of thin light guide films used in light sources with much larger light output surface dimensions, for example. In one embodiment, the thin film-based light guides may be used, for example, when the film-based light guide is an irradiating element of a front light disposed on a touch screen in a reflective display. The thin lightguide in this embodiment provides a more accurate responsive touchscreen (such as with capacitive touchscreens, for example) when the user touches the lightguide film. Alternatively, light sources with large light output surface dimensions can be used with specific light guide film thicknesses.

Another advantage of using combined light guides comprising a plurality of combined light guides is, for example, that the light source can be placed in the area between the side edges of the light guide area and thus the display when the light source and light input coupler are folded behind the light emitting surface. Or it does not extend beyond the edge of the light emitting area.

NUMBER OF COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES IN A LIGHT INPUT COUPLER

In one embodiment, the total number (NC) of the combined light guides in a direction parallel to the light guide area or the light entry edge of the light guide that receives light from the combined light guide

NC=MF*W _LES /w,

Where W _LES is the total width of the light-emitting surface in a direction parallel to the light guide area or the light entry edge of the light guide that receives light from the combined light guide, w is the average width of the combined light guides, and MF is the magnification factor. . In one embodiment, the magnification factor is one selected from the group: 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 0.7 to 1.3, 0.8 to 1.2, and 0.9 to 1.1. In another embodiment, the number of combined light guides in the optical input coupler or the total number of combined light guides in the light emitting device is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 20, 30, 50, 70, 80, 90, 100, 2 to 50, 3 to 50, 4 to 50, 2 to 500, 4 to 500, greater than 10, greater than 20, greater than 30, greater than 40, greater than 50, greater than 60, Greater than 70, greater than 80, greater than 90, greater than 100, greater than 120, greater than 140, greater than 200, greater than 300, greater than 400, greater than 500: selected from the group.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES DIRECTED INTO MORE THAN ONE LIGHT INPUT SURFACE

In a further embodiment, the combining lightguides do not collectively combine light into a light mixing region, a lightguide, or a light mixing region in an adjacent manner. For example, all other combination lightguides may still provide strips or combination lightguides along one or more edges, but can be cut from a film-based lightguide while not continuously combining light into the lightguide regions. By using fewer lightguides, the set of light input edges can be reduced in size. This reduction in size may be for example merging multiple sets of combined lightguides optically coupled to different regions of the same lightguide or different lightguides, better matching the light input surface size to the light source size, or It can be used to use a small light source, or to use a thick light guide film in a specific light source, where the dimensions of the set of adjacently coupled light guides in the thickness direction are the light source in the thickness direction when arranged to couple the light to the light input surface. It will be one selected from the group: 10%, 20%, 40%, 50%, and 100% greater than the light emitting surface of.

In a further embodiment, the combined lightguides from the first area of the lightguide have light input edges aggregated into two or more light input surfaces. For example, odd combination lightguides can be directed to a first white light source and even combination lightguides can be coupled to red, green, and blue light sources. In another embodiment, the combined lightguides from the first area of the lightguide are coupled to a plurality of white light sources to reduce the visibility of color changes from the light source. For example, even-coupled lightguides can combine light from a white light source at a first color temperature, and odd-coupled lightguides can combine light from a white light source with a second color temperature higher than the first color temperature, so that the light emitting surface The color non-uniformity (Δu'v') along the direction parallel to the edge of the light guide area along the line is less than one selected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004.

Similarly, three or more light input surfaces may be used to couple light from one, two, three or more light sources. For example, all alternating first, second, and third combined lightguides from the first area of the lightguide are directed to first, second, and third light sources of the same or different colors.

In a further embodiment, the combined lightguides from the first area of the lightguide have light input edges aggregated into two or more light input surfaces arranged to couple light into the lightguide for different modes of operation. For example, a first light input surface may be coupled to at least one light source suitable for a daylight compatible output and two light input surfaces may be coupled to at least one light source for an NVIS compatible light output.

The order of the combined lightguides directed to more than one light input surface need not be alternating and may be of any predetermined or random configuration. For example, combined lightguides from the upper and lower regions of the lightguide can be directed to a different light input surface than the intermediate region. In a further embodiment, the combined lightguides from the area of the lightguide are disposed together into a plurality of light input surfaces each comprising more than one light input edge, arranged in an array, to couple light from a set of light sources. Disposed, disposed within the same housing, disposed such that the light input surfaces are disposed adjacent to each other, disposed in an alternating order to receive light from a set of light sources, and the neighboring light input surfaces are light guides, light guide areas, or It is arranged in a non-adjacent arrangement that does not couple light to neighboring regions of the light mixing region.

In a further embodiment, a plurality of sets of combined lightguides are arranged to provide a plurality of sets of light input surfaces along the same side, edge, back, front or within the same housing area of the light emitting device, wherein the plurality of light input The surfaces are arranged to receive light from one or multiple LEDs.

ORDER OF COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the combination lightguides are placed together at the light input edge forming the light input surface so that the order of the strips in the first direction is the order of the combination lightguides as they direct light to the lightguide or lightguide area. . In another embodiment, the order of the strips in the first direction as the combined light guides are interleaved is not the same as the order of the combined light guides since they direct light to the light guide or light guide area. In one embodiment, the combination light guides are interleaved to receive light from a first light source of a first color, and at least one combination light guide receives light from a second light source having a second color different from the color of the first light source. It is disposed between the two combined light guides in a light guide area or an area near the light mixing area. In one embodiment, color non-uniformity (Δu'v') along a direction parallel to the edge of the light guide region along the light-emitting surface is less than one selected from the group: 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004. In another embodiment, at least one pair of coupling light guides adjacent to each other in an output region of a light mixing region, a light guide, or an optical input coupler in the vicinity of the light guide region by interleaving the coupling light guides is near the input surface of the optical input coupler. Are not adjacent to each other. In one embodiment, the interleaved combined light guides are arranged so that each non-uniform output profile is more uniform in the output of the optical input coupler by distributing the combined light guides, so that the output from the optical input coupler is reduced to each non-uniformity of the light source. It cannot be spatially replicated. For example, the strips of the light-input coupler are merged at the light-input surface so that the middle area does not have a very high luminance light-emitting surface area, which typically corresponds to a high intensity from the light source at 0 degrees or along its optical axis. It can be alternated among four different areas.

In another embodiment, the combination light guides are interleaved so that at least one pair of combination light guides adjacent to each other in the light mixing area, the light guide, or in the vicinity of the light guide area is at least one of the same light source, the same light input coupler, and the same mixed area. It does not receive light from one. In another embodiment, the combination light guides are interleaved so that at least one pair of combination light guides adjacent to each other in the vicinity of the light input surface is the same light input coupler, the same light mixing area, the same light guide, the same light guide area, the same film, It does not couple light to at least one of the same light output surfaces. In another embodiment, the combined light guides are interleaved at the light input surface in a two-dimensional arrangement so that at least two adjacent combined light guides vertically, horizontally or in different directions from the input surface are the same light input coupler, the same light mixing region, Same light guide, same light guide area, same film, and same light output surface: does not couple light to at least one neighboring area selected from the group.

In a further embodiment, the combined light guides optically coupled to the light guide area, the light mixing area, or the light emitting area near the first input area are 30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degrees, 60 degrees, and the like in the first edge area. 70 degrees, 80 degrees and 85 degrees: arranged together in a holder disposed substantially along or in the vicinity of a second edge area disposed along an edge direction greater than one selected from the group. For example, the light input couplers combine light from a first light source and a combination light guide holder disposed along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display, and of a light guide disposed along the side of the display directed about 90 degrees to the lower edge of the display. You can direct the light to the area. Combined lightguides can direct light from a light source disposed along the top, bottom, or both to one or more sides of the display so that the light travels substantially parallel to the bottom and top edges within the lightguide area.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES BONDED TO THE SURFACE OF A LIGHTGUIDE REGION

In one embodiment, the combined lightguides are not segmented (cut off) regions of the same film comprising the lightguide or the lightguide region. In one embodiment, the bonding light guides are optical adhesives, bonding methods (solvent welding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic welding, laser welding, hot gas welding, freehand welding, speed tip welding, extrusion welding, contact welding, hot plate welding, High frequency welding, injection welding, friction welding, spin welding, welding rod), and adhesives or bonding techniques suitable for polymers: formed using at least one selected from the group and physically applied to the light guide, light mixing area, or light guide area. Or optically attached. In one embodiment, the combined light guides are formed and optically coupled to the light guide, the mixed region, or the light guide region so that a significant portion of the light from the combined light guides is caused by the mixed region, the light guide region, or the waveguide condition in the light guide. Is sent to. The combined light guide may be attached to the light mixing area, the light guide area, or the edge or surface of the light guide. In one embodiment, the coupling light guides are disposed within the first film, wherein the second film including the light guide region is extruded onto the region of the first film so that the coupling light guides are optically coupled to the light guide region. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides taper in the area optically coupled to the lightguide. By separating the fabrication of the combined light guides from the fabrication of the light guide area, materials with different properties have different optical transmission properties, flexural modulus, impact strength (notched izod), flexural stiffness, impact resistance, mechanical properties, and physical properties. And materials with different optical properties. In one embodiment, the combined light guides comprise a material having a flexural modulus of less than 2 gigapascals and the light guide or light guide area comprises a material having a flexural modulus greater than 2 gigapascals measured according to ASTM D 790. . In one embodiment, the light guides are a relatively rigid polycarbonate material and the bonding light guides comprise a flexible elastomer or polyethylene. In another embodiment, the light guide is an acrylic material and the combined light guides comprise a flexible fluoropolymer, elastomer or polyethylene. In one embodiment, the average thickness of the light guide area or the light guide is 0.1 mm or more thicker than the average thickness of at least one combined light guide.

In one embodiment, at least one coupling lightguide is optically coupled to at least one selected from the group: an input optical coupler, a light mixing region, a lightguide region, and a surface, edge, or inner region of the lightguide. In another embodiment, a film comprising parallel linear cuts along the direction of the film is bonded to the surface of the film in an extrusion process so that the strips are optically bonded to the lightguide film and the cut areas "free" the strips. They can be cut in the transverse direction so that they can be bonded to form the light input surface of the light input coupler.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDE BONDED TO EACH OTHER

In one embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides are substantially bonded to themselves in one or more areas. In another embodiment, the array of combined light guides includes 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, and 80% of the area where the combined light guides are adjacent to each other: group At least one selected from is optically coupled to each other. In one embodiment, the combined lightguides are between adjacent combined lightguides in one or more areas near the light input surface, within an array of combined lightguides, along the length and edge of the lightguide or lightguide area, or They are optically bonded to each other by the original surface adhesion behind the light guide area. In another embodiment, two or more combined lightguides are optically coupled, operatively coupled, or attached to each other in one or more areas.

COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES ENDING WITHIN THE LIGHTGUIDE REGION

In one embodiment, the film comprising parallel linear cuts along the machine direction of the film is guided between two extruded layers or coatings such that the ends of the strips are effectively inside the other two layers or regions. In another embodiment, one or more edges of the coupling lightguide are optically coupled to a layer or coating (such as an adhesive) within the lightguide to reduce scatter and increase light coupling to the lightguide. This can be done in single steps or in sequential steps. By allowing the strips or combination lightguides to terminate within the lightguide, lightguide area, or light mixing area, the edges are effectively combined optically into the light mixing area, lightguide area or volume of light-transmitting material forming the lightguide. Because single surface bonding becomes feasible, there are fewer back reflections from the air end edge interface (material near the edge flows or deforms around the edge or other materials are used to promote optical bonding of the edge and potentially surfaces. (Assuming something like glue).

STRIP OR COUPLING LIGHTGUIDE REGISTRATION OR SECURING FEATURE

In one embodiment, at least one strip near the central region of the optical input coupler is used to align or guide the coupling strips or connect the coupling lightguides to the light guide or housing. In a folding design in which the combined lightguides are folded towards the center of the light input coupler, the center strip or lightguide cannot be folded to receive light from the light source due to geometric limitations in which the center strip or combination lightguide cannot be folded. This central strip or combination lightguide is intended to align the optical input coupler or housing to the strips (or lightguides), tighten the folds of the strips or combination lightguide stack to reduce volume, and the location of the optical input coupler housing. To align, secure or lock down, providing a lever or arm for pulling the components of a folding mechanism that bends or folds a combination lightguides, a combination lightguides, a lightguide or another element for one of the aforementioned elements. Things: Can be used for one selected from the group.

TAB REGION

In one embodiment, one or more of the strips or combination lightguides aligns the position of the strip or combination lightguide with respect to the housing, folder, holder, lightguide, light source, light input coupler, or other element of the light emitting device, or Includes tabs or tab areas used to align or secure. In another embodiment, the at least one strip or combination lightguide includes pins, holes, cutouts, tabs, or other features useful for positioning, aligning, or securing the strip or combination lightguide. In one embodiment, the tapped region is disposed in one or more light sources when the light source is disposed to couple light with a combined light guide. In a further embodiment, the tab area may be removed after tearing, for example a stack of combined lightguides. For example, the combined lightguides may have openings or aperture cuts in the combined lightguides that are aligned to form a cavity in which the light emitting area of the light source can be placed so that light from the light source is transmitted to the light input surfaces of the combined lightguides. Is oriented. After physically constraining the combined lightguides (e.g. by gluing them to each other or to another element, or by mechanical clamping, alignment guides or other means), all or part of the tapped area is arranged to receive light from the light source. It can be removed by tearing without reducing the optical quality of the input surface. In another embodiment, the tapped region includes one or more perforations or cut regions that promote tearing or removal of the tapped region along a predetermined path.

In another embodiment, the tapped region or region or alignment openings or openings of the combination light guides including registration are stacked so that the openings or openings are optical turning optical elements, optical collimating optical elements, optical coupling elements, light sources, light sources. The light input surfaces of the coupling lightguides are arranged on a registration pin or post disposed on or physically coupled to a circuit board, relative positioning element, light input coupler housing, or other element of the light input coupler, so that the light input surfaces of the coupling lightguides receive light from the element or light source Aligned and placed to receive.

The tab region may include registration openings or openings on either side of the openings or openings forming a cavity in the coupling lightguide so that the registration pins aid in alignment and relative positioning of the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, one or more of the combined lightguides (folded and unfolded) include low light loss registration openings or openings in the low light flux region. Low light loss registration openings or openings in the low luminous flux regions of the combined lightguides should be less than one of 2%, 5%, 10% and 20% of the luminous flux from the light source, either directly or indirectly opening or opening in the combined lightguide. Is the ones that reach. This can be measured by filling the openings or openings with a black light absorbing material, such as a black latex paint, and measuring the loss of light output from the light emitting area using an integrating sphere.

In another embodiment, the tapped regions of the combined lightguides allow the light input surface of the stacked array of combined lightguides to be formed after stacking the combined lightguides so that an improved optical finish of the light input surface can be obtained. For example, in one embodiment, the array of combination lightguides is stacked with a tab area extending from the input area of the combination lightguides. The stacked array is then cut (and optionally mechanically, thermally, chemically or otherwise polished) in the tab area to provide a continuous smooth input surface.

Maintaining the position of the combined light guide to the light source or optical element

In another embodiment, the tab area can be cut to provide a physical confinement mechanism for the optical element or light source. For example, in one embodiment, the tab area of the combined light guides includes one or more arms or ridges when the combined light guides are stacked in an array, the arms or ridges substantially direct the optical element or light source in at least one direction. Form a constraining groove or cavity to keep it. In another embodiment, the stacked array of coupling lightguides forms a cavity that allows the extended ridge of the optical collimating optic to be positioned within the cavity so that the optical collimating optic substantially maintains its position relative to the coupling lightguides. do. Various shapes of grooves, ridges, interlocking shapes, pins, openings, openings and other constraining shapes are used to constrain the element or light source when placed in an interlocking shape (optical turning optical element or optical collie). Such as mating optical elements) or a light source (or a housing of a light source) and a shape cut into combined light guides.

EXTENDED COUPLING LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides are extended so that the coupling lightguides can be folded in an organized manner by using a relative positioning element. By extending the combined light guides, the relative position and order of the combined light guides can be maintained during the alignment and stacking process so that the combined light guides can be stacked and aligned in an organized manner. For example, in one embodiment, the combined lightguides extend in an inverted shape so that they are mirrored along the first direction. In one embodiment, the folding operation creates two stacked arrays of combined lightguides that can be used to form two different light emitting devices or two illuminated areas that are illuminated by the same light source. In another embodiment, the first relative position maintaining element substantially maintains the relative positions of the combined light guides in the vicinity of the first light guide area, and the second relative position maintaining element substantially maintains the relative positions of the extended regions of the combined light guides. (Can form a second light emitting device or combined lightguides of the region).

Variable combined lightguide thickness

In one embodiment, at least one combined light guide or strip is changed in a thickness direction along a path of light traveling through the light guide. In one embodiment, at least one combined light guide or strip is changed in a thickness direction substantially perpendicular to the path of light traveling through the light guide. In another embodiment, the dimensions of the at least one combined lightguide or strip are varied in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light-emitting device along the path of light traveling through the lightguide. In one embodiment, the thickness of the combined light guide increases as light travels from the light source to the light mixing area, light guide, or light guide area. In one embodiment, the thickness of the combined light guide decreases as light travels from the light source to the light mixing area, light guide, or light guide area. In one embodiment, the thickness of the combined light guide in the first area divided by the thickness of the combined light guide in the second area is 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 20, 40, 60, and 100: selected from the group Greater than one

Light turning optical elements or edges for light source placement

In one embodiment, the light turning optical elements or the light turning coupling light guide edges may be used to position the light source on the same side of the light guide area as the coupling light guides. In another embodiment, the light turning optical elements or light turning coupling lightguide edges may be used to position the light source within the extended boundaries of the coupling lightguides so that the light source is It cannot extend past edges, light guide areas or bevels. For example, a film-based lightguide in which the combined lightguides are folded along one edge may have angled edges or areas of the lightguide area directly from the combined lightguide to position the light source within the area constrained by the edges of the lightguide area You can prevent it from being investigated. Alternatively, a stack of combined light guides along one edge may have light turning edges near the light source ends so that the light source may be placed with the light directed toward the light guide area. This may allow light to be turned and directed into the combined lightguides and when the light source is folded behind the display, the light source does not extend past the outer display edges.

LIGHT MIXING REGION

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light mixing region disposed in the optical path between the light input coupler and the light guide region. The light mixing zone provides an area for light output from individual combined light guides that are mixed together and within the light guide or light emitting area or surface of the light emitting device or within the area of the output, spatial luminance uniformity, spatial color uniformity, and angle. At least one of color uniformity, angular luminance uniformity, angular luminance uniformity, or any combination thereof can be improved. In one embodiment, the width of the light mixing area is selected from a range from 0.1 mm (for small displays) to a meter greater than 3.048 (for large billboards). In one embodiment, the light mixing region is a region disposed along the optical path near the end regions of the coupling light guides, in which light from two or more coupling light guides is mixed, and then the light emission region of the light guide You can proceed with In one embodiment, the light mixing region is formed of the same component or material as at least one of the light guide, the light guide region, the light input coupler, and the combined light guide. In another embodiment, the light mixing region includes a material different from at least one selected from the group: light guides, light guide regions, light input couplers, and combination light guides. The light mixing area may be a rectangular, square, or other shaping area or it may be a peripheral area surrounding all or part of the light emitting area or light guide area. In one embodiment, the surface area of the light mixing region of the light emitting device is less than 1%, less than 5%, less than 10%, less than 20% of the total outer surface area or light emitting surface area of the light emitting surface from which light is emitted. Less than, less than 30%, less than 40%, less than 50%, less than 60%, less than 70%, greater than 20%, greater than 30%, greater than 40%, greater than 50%, less than 60% Greater than, greater than 70%, greater than 80%, greater than 90%, 1 to 10%, 10 to 20%, 20 to 50%, 50 to 70%, 70 to 90%, 80 to 95%: selected from the group Is one.

In one embodiment, the film-based light guide includes a light mixing region having a lateral dimension longer than the width of the combined light guide and the combined light guides do not extend from the entire edge region corresponding to the light emitting region of the light guide. In one embodiment, the width of the gap along the edge without the combined light guide is greater than one of: 1, 2, 3, or 4 times the average width of neighboring combined light guides. In a further embodiment, the width of the gap along the edge without the combined lightguide is greater than one of: 1, 2, 3, or 4 times the lateral width of the light mixing region. For example, in one embodiment, the film-based lightguide has a width of 2 centimeters disposed along a light mixing area 4 centimeters long in a lateral direction, excluding a central area with a 2 centimeter gap without extending the combined light guide. Includes combined lightguides (such as what could easily be the case where the light mixing area folds behind a reflective display for a film based frontlight). In this embodiment, light in the neighboring combined light guides is diffused into the gap area of the light mixing area that is not directly irradiated by the combined light guide and can be mixed together, so that the light in the light emitting area is sufficiently uniform. In a further embodiment, the light mixing region includes two or more gaps without coupling lightguides extending therefrom. In a further embodiment, the light mixing region includes alternating gaps between the coupling lightguide extensions along the edge of the film-based lightguide.

CLADDING LAYER

In one embodiment, at least one of the light input coupler, the coupling light guide, the light mixing region, the light guide region, and the light guide includes a cladding layer that is optically coupled to at least one surface. The cladding region, as used in this application, is a layer optically bonded to a surface, wherein the cladding layer comprises a material having a refractive index (n _clad ) less than the refractive index (n _m ) of the material on the surface to which it is optically bonded. Include. In one embodiment, n _m -n _clad is 0.001 to 0.005, 0.001 to 0.01, 0.001 to 0.1, 0.001 to 0.2, 0.001 to 0.3, 0.001 to 0.4, 0.01 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.5, 0.1 to 0.3, 0.20. 5, greater than 0.01, greater than 0.1, greater than 0.2, and greater than 0.3: is one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the cladding is one selected from the group: a methyl-based silicone pressure sensitive adhesive, a fluoropolymer material (applied with a coating comprising a fluoropolymer substantially soluble in a solvent), and a fluoropolymer film. . The cladding layer is applied to the core or core of the lightguide area to reduce undesirable out-coupling from the core or core area of the lightguide (e.g., obstructing the total reflected light by touching the film with an oily finger). It can be integrated to provide a separation layer between the core portion and the outer surface. Components or objects such as additional films, layers, objects, fingers, dust, etc. that are in direct or optical contact with the core or core region of the light guide, combine light from the light guide, absorb light, or total reflection into a new layer. Light can be transmitted. By adding a cladding layer having a lower refractive index than the core, a portion of the light will be totally reflected at the core cladding layer interface. The cladding layers also provide the benefit of at least one of increased stiffness, increased flexural modulus, increased impact resistance, anti-glare properties, and provide a tie layer or base or substrate for an anti-reflective coating, optical components such as polarizers, liquid crystal materials, Provides an intermediate layer for merging with other layers, as in the case of cladding that functions as a substrate for increased scratch resistance, and provides additional functionality (low viscosity adhesives for bonding lightguide regions to other elements, window "tack type" films such as It can be used to provide high plasticized PVC). The cladding layer may be an adhesive such as a low refractive index silicone adhesive optically bonded to another element of the device, a light guide, a light guide region, a light mixing region, a light input coupler, or a combination of one or more of the aforementioned elements or regions. . In one embodiment, the cladding layer is optically coupled to a rear polarizer in a backlit liquid crystal display. In another embodiment, the cladding layer is a frontlet display such as an electrophoretic display, an e-book display, an e-reader display, a MEMs type display, an electronic paper display such as an E-ink® display by E Ink Corporation. , A reflective or partially reflective LCD display, a cholesteric display, or a polarizer or outer surface of another display that may be irradiated from the front surface. In another embodiment, the cladding layer is a component such as a substrate (glass or polymer), an optical element (such as a polarizer, retarder film, diffuser film, brightness enhancing film), a protective film (such as a protective polycarbonate film), a light emitting device. It is an adhesive that bonds the light guide or light guide region to the light input coupler, coupling light guides, or other element of the light. In one embodiment, the cladding layer is separated from the lightguide or lightguide area core layer by at least one additional layer or adhesive.

In one embodiment, the region of the cladding material is removed or absent in the light guide layer or in the region where the light guide is optically coupled to another region of the light guide, wherein the cladding is removed or absent so that the light is interposed between the two regions. Can be combined. In one embodiment, the cladding covers the area near the edge of the light guide, the light guide area, the strip or area cut from the light guide area, or the light silver area that is removed or missing from the combined light guide and is near the edge of the light guide. It can again be redirected by folding or bending over the area of the lightguide, where the cladding has been removed when the areas are optically joined together. In another embodiment, the cladding is removed or absent in the area disposed between the light guide areas of two combined light guides arranged to receive light from the light source or near the light input surface. By removing, applying or disposing the cladding in the area between the input ends of two or more combined light guides arranged to receive light from the light source, the light is not directly coupled to the cladding area edge.

In one embodiment, the cladding region is optically coupled to one or more surfaces of the light mixing region to prevent decoupling of light from the lightguide when it is in contact with another component. In this embodiment, the cladding also allows the cladding and light mixing regions to be physically coupled to other components.

CLADDING LOCATION

In one embodiment, the cladding area is a light guide, a light guide area, a light mixing area, one surface of the light guide, two surfaces of the light guide, a light input coupler, combined light guides, and an outer surface of the film: Optically coupled to at least one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the cladding is disposed in optical contact with a lightguide, a lightguide region, or a layer or layers optically coupled to the lightguide and the cladding material is disposed on one or more combined lightguides. In one embodiment, the combined lightguides do not include a cladding layer between the light input surface or the core regions in the region near the light source. In another embodiment, the core regions may be pressed or held together and the edges may be cut and/or polished after stacking and assembly to form a light input surface or light turning edge that is flat, curved or a combination thereof. In another embodiment, the cladding layer is a pressure sensitive adhesive and a release liner for the pressure sensitive adhesive is selectively removed from the area of one or more bonding lightguides stacked or aligned together in an array such that the cladding is relative to each other. It helps to maintain the position. In another embodiment, a protective linear is removed from the inner cladding regions of the coupling lightguides and left on one or both outer surfaces of the outer coupling lightguides.

In one embodiment, the cladding layer is disposed on one or both opposite surfaces of the light emitting area and not between two or more coupling lightguides at the light input surface. For example, in one embodiment, a mask layer is applied to a film-based lightguide corresponding to the end regions of the coupling lightguides forming the light input surface after cutting (and possibly coupling lightguides) and the film is It is coated on one side or both sides with a low refractive index coating. In this embodiment, when the mask is removed and the coupling lightguides are folded (e.g., using a relative positioning element) and stacked, the light input surface can include core layers without cladding layers and the light emitting area is cladding. It may comprise a layer (the light mixing region may include a cladding and/or a light absorbing region), which is beneficial to optical efficiency in cases where cladding may be required in the light emitting region (light is transferred from the input surface to the cladding. Oriented) is beneficial for reflective or transflective displays in applications such as film based frontlights.

In another embodiment, the protective liner on the outer surface of at least one of the outer coupling lightguides is removed so that the coupling lightguides can be bonded to one of the following: a circuit board, an unfolded coupling lightguide, an optical collimating optical element, Light turning optical element, light coupling optical element, flexible connector or substrate for display or touch screen, second array of stacked coupling light guides, light input coupler housing, light emitting device housing, thermal transfer element, heat sink, light source, alignment A guide, a registration guide or component comprising a window for the light input surface, and any suitable element disposed and/or physically coupled to the light input surface or element of the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the combined lightguides do not include a cladding area on either plane side and optical loss in bends or folds in the combined lightguides is reduced. In another embodiment, the coupling light guides do not include a cladding area on either side of the plane and the light input surface input coupling efficiency is light having a high concentration of the light guide receiving surface for the light guide having at least one cladding. Increased due to the input surface area. In a further embodiment, the light-emitting area has at least one cladding area or layer and the percentage of the light input surface area of the combined light guides arranged to transmit light through a light guide portion of the combined light guides is greater than one of the following: 70% , 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98% and 99%. The cladding may only be on one side of the lightguide or the light emitting device has a plastic PVC film (n=1.53) (or other low viscosity material) that is temporarily adhered to the glass window (n=1.51), as in the case of the case. It can be designed to be optically coupled to a material having a lower refractive index than a light guide.

In one embodiment, the cladding on at least one surface of the lightguide is applied (eg coated or co-extruded) and the cladding on the combined lightguides is then removed. In a further embodiment, the cladding is applied on the surface of the lightguide (or the lightguide is applied on the surface of the cladding) so that the regions corresponding to the combined lightguides have no cladding. For example, the cladding material may be extruded or coated on a lightguide film in a central region, where the outer sides of the film will comprise coupling lightguides. Similarly, the cladding may not be on one or more light sources or on the combined lightguides in an area disposed in close proximity to the light input surface.

In one embodiment, two or more core regions of the combined lightguides are 1 millimeter, 2 millimeters, 4 millimeters, and 8 millimeters from the edge of the light input surface of the combined light guides. There is no cladding region between the core regions in the region. In a further embodiment, two or more core regions of the combined lightguides are 10%, 20%, 50 of the combined thicknesses of the cores of the combined lightguides arranged to receive light from a light source at the light input surface edge of the combined lightguides. %, 100%, 200%, and 300%: do not include cladding areas between core areas within the area of the combined lightguide disposed within a selected distance from the group. In one embodiment, coupling lightguides in an area proximate the light input surface may include cladding between the core regions (but may include cladding on the outer surfaces of the collection of the coupling lightguides). The guides are optically bonded together with an index matching adhesive or material or the combined light guides are optically bonded, melted, or thermo-mechanically welded together by applying heat and pressure. In a further embodiment, the light source is placed at a distance of the light input surface of the combined light guides less than one selected from the group: 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 4 mm, and 6 mm and parallel to the thickness direction of the combined light guides. The dimension of the light input surface in one first direction is greater than one selected from the group: 100%, 110%, 120%, 130%, 150%, 180%, and 200% of the dimension of the light emitting surface of the light source in the first direction. . In another embodiment, arranging an index matching material between the core regions of the coupling lightguides or optically coupling or bonding the coupling lightguides together in an area close to the light source is substantially the light input edge of the coupling lightguide. Optically couples at least one selected from the group: 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, and 50% more light with combined lightguides than with combined lightguides with extending cladding regions. In one embodiment, the index matching adhesive or material has a refractive index difference from the core region of less than one selected from the group: 0.1, 0.08, 0.05, and 0.02. In another embodiment, the index matching adhesive or material has an index of refraction as large as less than one selected from the group: 0.1, 0.08, 0.05, and 0.02 of the refractive index of the core region. In a further embodiment, the cladding region is disposed between the first set of core regions of the coupling lightguides to the second set of coupling lightguides and the index matching region is disposed between the core regions of the coupling lightguides or they melt together. do. In a further embodiment, the combined lightguides arranged to receive light from the geometric center of the luminous area of the light source within a first angle of the optical axis of the light source have cladding regions disposed between the core regions, and greater than the first angle. The core regions at angles have index matching regions disposed between the core regions of the combined lightguides or they are melted together. In one embodiment, the first angle is selected from the group: 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 30 degrees, 40 degrees, 50 degrees, and 60 degrees. In the above-described embodiments, the cladding region may be a low refractive index material or air. In a further embodiment, the total thickness of the combined light guides in the area arranged to receive light from the light source to be combined into the combined light guides is less than n times the thickness of the light guide area, where n is the number of combined light guides. . In a further embodiment, the total thickness of the combined light guides in an area arranged to receive light from a light source to be combined into the combined light guides is substantially equal to n times the thickness of the light guide layer in the light guide area.

Cladding thickness (CLADDING THICKNESS)

In one embodiment, the average thickness of one or both cladding layers of the lightguide is 100 microns, 60 microns, 30 microns, 20 microns, 10 microns, 6 microns, 4 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.8 microns, 0.5 microns , 0.3 microns, and 0.1 microns: less than one selected from the group.

In the condition of total reflection, the penetration depth (λ _e ) of Ebenecent wave light from a dense area to a sparse medium at an interface where the amplitude of light in the sparse medium is 1/e is given by the equation at that boundary:

Where λ ₀ is the wavelength of light in the vacuum, n _s is the refractive index of the dense medium (core region), n _e is the refractive index of the sparse medium (cladding layer), and θ _i is the angle of incidence to the interface in the dense medium. The equation for penetration depth illustrates that for many angular ranges greater than the critical angle, light traveling within the lightguide does not have to have a very thick cladding thickness to maintain the lightguide condition. For example, light in the visible wavelength range of 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers traveling within a fluoropolymer cladding material having a refractive index of 1.33 and a silicon film-based core region having a refractive index of 1.47 has a critical angle at about 65 degrees and has a critical angle of 70 degrees and 90 degrees. Light traveling between degrees has a 1/e penetration depth (λ _e ) less than about 0.3 microns. In this example, the cladding region thickness may be about 0.3 microns and the lightguide will maintain significant visible light transmission under lightguide conditions of about 70 degrees and 90 degrees from normal to the interface. In another embodiment, the ratio of the thickness of the core layer to the one or more cladding layers is greater than one selected from the group 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 30, 40, and 60:1. In one embodiment, a high core-to-cladding layer thickness ratio that extends across the light-emitting area and the combined lightguides allows more light to be transferred to the core at the light input surface as the cladding areas exhibit a low percentage of the surface area at the light input surface. Allows to be combined in layers.

In an embodiment, the cladding layer comprises an adhesive such as a silicone-based adhesive, an acrylate-based adhesive, an epoxy, a radiation curable adhesive, a UV curable adhesive, or other light transmitting adhesive. The cladding layer material may include light scattering domains and may anisotropically or isotropically scatter light. In one embodiment, the cladding layer is an adhesive such as those described in US Pat. No. 6,727,313. In another embodiment, the cladding material comprises domains of less than 200 nm in size and low refractive index, such as those described in US Pat. No. 6,773,801. Other low refractive index materials, fluoropolymer materials, polymers and adhesives such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,887,334 and 6,827,886 and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 11/795,534 may be used.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, and 10 degrees at the core-cladding interface perpendicular within the light guide: 1/e for an angle θ selected from the group 0.1 to 10, 0.5 to 5, 0.8 to 2, 0.9 to 1.5, 1 to 10, 0.1 to 1, and 1 to 5 times the penetration depth (λ _e ): at least one of the light guides having a thickness within one selected from the group A light guide with cladding on the side; The light output coupler or light extraction region (or film) is arranged to couple a first portion of incident light from the light guide when in optical contact with the cladding layer. For example, in one embodiment, a removable and replaceable light extraction film comprising high refractive index light scattering features (such as TiO ₂ or high refractive index glass particles, beads, or flakes) has a thickness (λ _e ) Is disposed on the cladding layer of the lightguide in a lighting fixture comprising a polycarbonate lightguide having an amorphous fluoropolymer cladding. In this embodiment, regions of the removable and replaceable light extraction film with scattering features, light may be obstructed from the light guide and exit the light guide. In this embodiment, the light extraction region or film may be used with a light guide having a cladding region to couple light from the light guide. In this embodiment, the cladding region provides the light guide (e.g. scratches when in contact with the surface, unintended) while still making it possible for the removable and replaceable light extraction film to allow user configurable light output characteristics. Can help protect against interference or absorption of total reflection. In another embodiment, a light output coupling film, a distribution light guide, and a light extraction feature: at least one film or component selected from the group is optically coupled to, disposed on, or formed within the cladding region, It combines the light guide and the first portion of the light from the cladding area. In one embodiment, the first portion is 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 30%, 50%, and 70 of the flux within the lightguide or within the area comprising the thin cladding layer and film or component. %: greater than one selected from the group.

In one embodiment, a light input surface arranged to receive light from a light source does not have a cladding layer. In one embodiment, the ratio of the cladding area to the core layer area at the light input surface is greater than 0 and less than one selected from the group: 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.02, and 0.01. In another embodiment, the ratio of cladding area to core layer area in regions of the light input surface receiving light from a light source having at least 5% of the peak luminosity at the light input surface is greater than 0 and 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2 , 0.1, 0.05, 0.02, and 0.01: less than one selected from the group.

Cladding layer materials

Fluoropolymer materials can be used in low refractive index cladding materials and can be broadly classified into one of two basic classes. The first class comprises its amorphous fluoropolymers comprising hybrid polymerized units derived from vinylidene fluoride (VDF) and hexafluoropropylene (HFP) and optionally tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) monomers. Examples of such are Dyneon™ fluoroelastomers FC 2145 and FT 2430 commercially available from 3M Corporation. Additional amorphous fluoropolymers that may be used in the examples are, for example, VDF-chlorotrifluoroethylene copolymers. One such VDF-chlorotrifluoroethylene copolymer is commercially known as Kel-F™ 3700 available from 3M Corporation. As used in the present application, amorphous fluoropolymers are materials that do not inherently contain any crystallinity or possess any significant melting point, as determined, for example, by differential scanning calorimetry (DSC). For the purposes of this discussion, a copolymer is defined as a polymeric material resulting from the simultaneous polymerization of two or more different monomers and a homopolymer is a polymeric material resulting from the polymerization of a single monomer.

The second important class of fluoropolymers useful in the examples is their homo based on fluorinated monomers such as TFE or VDF comprising a crystalline melting point such as polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF commercially available from 3M Corporation as Dyneon™ PVDF). And copolymers, or more preferred thermoplastic copolymers of TFE based on the crystalline microstructure of TFE-HFP-VDF. Examples of such polymers are those available from 3M under the trade name Dyneon™ Fluoroplastics THV™ 200.

General descriptions and preparations of fluoropolymers of these classes are Encyclopedia Chemical Technology, Fluorocarbon Elastomers, Kirk-Othmer (1993), or in Modern Fluoropolymers, J. Scheirs Ed, (1997), J Wiley Science, Chapters 2, 13, and 32. (ISBN 0-471-97055-7).

In one embodiment, the fluoropolymers are constituent monomers known as tetrafluoroethylene ("TFE"), hexafluoropropylene ("HFP"), and vinylidene fluoride ("VdF", "VF2,"). These are copolymers formed by The monomer structures for this configuration are represented by the following (1), (2) and (3):

TFE: CF 2 〓CF 2(1)

VDF: CH 2 〓CF 2(2)

HFP: CF 2 〓CF―CF 3(3)

In one embodiment, a preferred fluoropolymer is composed of at least two of the constituent monomers (HFP and VDF), and more preferably all three of the constituent monomers in varying molar amounts. Additional monomers not previously expressed but that may be useful in the examples include perfluorovinyl ether monomers of the general structure: CF 2? It may be a roalkyl radical and may itself contain additional heteroatoms such as oxygen. Specific examples are perfluoromethyl vinyl ether, perfluoropropyl vinyl ether, and perfluoro(3-methoxy-propyl) vinyl ether. Additional monomeric examples are found in WO00/12754 to Worm, assigned to 3M, and in US Pat. Other fluoropolymer materials may be used, such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 11/026,614.

In one embodiment, the cladding material is birefringent and the index of refraction in at least the first direction is less than the index of refraction of the lightguide region, lightguide core, or material to which it is optically coupled.

Collimated light traveling through the material may decrease in intensity after passing through the material due to scattering (scattering loss factor), absorption (absorption factor), or a combination of scattering and absorption (attenuation factor). In one embodiment, the cladding is less than one selected from the group: 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. And a material having an average absorption coefficient for mated light. In another embodiment, the cladding is less than one selected from the group: 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. And a material having an average scatter loss coefficient for mated light. In another embodiment, the cladding is less than one selected from the group: 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. And a material having an average attenuation coefficient for mated light.

In a further embodiment, the lightguide includes a hard cladding layer that substantially protects the soft core layer (such as softened silicone or silicone elastomer).

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a core material having a durometer Shore A hardness (JIS) less than 50 and at least one cladding layer having a durometer Shore A hardness (JIS) greater than 50. In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a core material having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 2 MPa at 25° C. and at least one cladding layer having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of greater than 2 MPa. In another embodiment, the lightguide comprises a core material having an ASTM D638 -10 Young's modulus of less than 1.5 MPa at 25° C. and at least one cladding layer having an ASTM D638 -10 Young's modulus of greater than 2 MPa. In a further example, the lightguide comprises a core material having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 1 MPa at 25° C. and at least one cladding layer having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of greater than 2 MPa.

In one embodiment, the light guide includes a core material having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 2 MPa at 25° C. and the light guide film has an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 2 MPa. In another example, the lightguide includes a core material having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 1.5 MPa at 25° C. and the lightguide film has an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 2 MPa. In one embodiment, the light guide includes a core material having an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 1 MPa at 25° C. and the light guide film has an ASTM D638-10 Young's modulus of less than 2 MPa.

In another embodiment, the cladding includes a material having a smaller effective refractive index than the core layer due to microstructures or nanostructures. In another embodiment, the cladding layer comprises a porous region comprising air or other gas or material having a refractive index less than 1.2 such that the effective index of refraction of the cladding layer is less than that of the material around the porous regions. For example, in one embodiment, the cladding layer is an aerogel or array of nanostructured materials disposed on the core layer creating a cladding layer having an effective refractive index less than the core layer. In one embodiment, the nanostructured material is selected from the group: 1000, 500, 300, 200, 100, 50, 20, 10, 5, and 2 nanometers in a plane parallel to or perpendicular to the core layer surface. It includes fibers, particles, or domains having an average diameter or dimension less than one. For example, in one embodiment, the cladding layer is a nanostructure comprising polymeric materials including, without limitation, cellulose, polyester, PVC, PTFE, polystyrene, PMMA, PDMS, or other light-transmitting or partially light-transmitting materials. It is a coating containing fibers. In another embodiment, too much light is usually scattered (such as HDPE or polypropylene) in bulk form (such as HDPE or polypropylene) used as a core or cladding material for lightguide lengths greater than 1 meter. % Scattering) substances are used in the form of nanostructures. For example, in one embodiment, in bulk solid form (such as a 200 micron thick homogeneous film formed volumetrically under film processing conditions designed to substantially minimize haze or without mechanically formed physical structures on a surface). ), the nanostructured cladding material on the film-based lightguide has an ASTM haze of greater than 0.5%.

In a further embodiment, the microstructured or nanostructured cladding material comprises a structure that “wet-out” or optically couples light to light extraction features disposed in a material contact with the microstructured or nanostructured cladding material. do. For example, in one embodiment, the light extraction features include nanostructured surface features that couple light from the cladding area when in close proximity or contact with the nanostructured cladding area. In one embodiment, the microstructured or nanostructured cladding material has structures complementary to light extraction feature structures, such as male-female moieties or other single or complex complementary structures, such that the effective refractive index in the region containing the two structures is Larger than that of the cladding area without light extraction features.

REFLECTIVE ELEMENTS

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: a light source, a light input surface, a light input coupler, a combination light guide, a light guide region, and a light guide: is optically coupled to, disposed adjacent to, or receiving light from it. A reflective element or surface arranged to receive, wherein the reflective area is a specular reflective area, a diffuse reflective area, a metal coating on the area (such as an ITO coating, aluminum PET, silver coating, etc.), a multilayer reflector dichroic reflector, multilayer Polymer reflector, giant birefringent optical films, enhanced specular reflector films, reflective ink or particles in a coating or layer, and titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, and voids: a white reflective film comprising at least one selected from the group: Group It is one selected from. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light guide, a light recycling element, a specular reflective tape having a diffuse reflectance greater than 70% (with the specular component included), a retroreflective film (corner cube film or glass beads). A white reflective film, such as a base retroreflective film, and an aluminum housing: at least one light reflective material selected from the group is a light guide arranged to receive light from the light guide and redirect the first portion of the light back to the light guide. Is disposed near at least one edge region of or optically couples this region. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light guide, wherein a light absorbing tape having a diffuse reflectance of less than 50% (with a specular component included), a region comprising a light absorbing dye or pigment, and carbon black particles A region comprising, a region comprising a light absorbing ink, paint, films or surfaces, and a black material: at least one light absorbing material selected from the group receives light from the lightguide and converts the first portion of the light back to the lightguide. It is disposed near at least one edge area of the light guide disposed to redirect or optically couples this area. In a further embodiment, the light reflecting material and light absorbing material of the above types are at least one of the light guides to receive light from the light guide and redirect the first portion of the light back to the light guide and absorb a second portion of the incident light. It is placed near the edge area of or optically couples this area. In one embodiment, the light reflecting or light absorbing material is in the form of a line of ink or tape adhered on the surface of the light guide film. In one embodiment, the light reflective material is a specular reflective tape adhered to an upper surface, an edge, and a lower surface of the light guide near the edge of the light guide. In another embodiment, the light absorbing material is a light absorbing tape adhered to the upper surface, the edge, and the lower surface of the light guide near the edge of the light guide. In another embodiment, the light absorbing material is a light absorbing ink or paint (such as black acrylic paint) adhered to at least one selected from the group: an edge of the light guide film, an upper surface near the edge, and a lower surface near the edge. .

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a backlight that illuminates a display or other object to be illuminated and the light emitting area, light guide, or light guide area is disposed between the reflective surface or element and the object to be illuminated. In another embodiment, the reflective element is a void, such as a white PET film TETORON ^® film UX series from TEIJIN (Japan). In one embodiment, the reflective element or surface is 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%: diffuse reflectance d with a specular component measured with a Minolta CM508D spectrometer greater than one selected from the group. /8 (DR-SCI, diffuse reflectance d/8 with the specular component included). In another embodiment, the reflective element or surface is 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%: diffuse reflectance d with a specular component excluded as measured with a Minolta CM508D spectrometer greater than one selected from the group. /8 (DR-SCE, diffuse reflectance d/8 with the specular component excluded). In another embodiment, the reflective element or surface has a specular reflectance greater than one selected from the group 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. Specular reflectance as defined in this application is the percentage of light reflected from a surface irradiated by a 532 nanometer laser within a 10 degree (full angle) cone centered around the optical axis of the reflected light. This can be measured using an integrating sphere, where the opening opening to the integrating sphere is located at a distance from the reflection point so that the angular range of the captured light is 10 degrees full angle. Percent reflection is measured for reflectance standards, reflectance standards, films, or objects with extremely low levels of scattering with known specular reflectance.

The light reflecting optical element is also a second element (LIGHT REFLECTING OPTICAL ELEMENT IS ALSO A SECOND ELEMENT)

In addition to reflecting incident light, in one embodiment, the light reflecting element also includes at least a light blocking element, a low contact area covering element, a housing element, a light collimating optical element, a light turning optical element and a heat transfer element: It is one second element. In another embodiment, the light reflective optical element is a second element in the region of the light reflective optical element. In a further embodiment, the light reflective optical element comprises a bend region, a tap region, a hole region, a layer region, or an extended region, ie, forms its component, a second element. For example, a diffuse light reflective element comprising a void PET diffuse reflective film can be placed adjacent to the light guide area to provide diffuse reflection and the film is bent and an extension of the film that functions to collimate incident light from the light source. It may further include a specular metallized coating on the area. In another embodiment, the second element or second region of the light reflective optical element is in contact with one or more regions of the light reflective optical element. In a further embodiment, the light reflective optical element is a region, coating, element, or layer that is physically coupled to the second element. In another embodiment, the second element is a region, coating, element or layer that is physically coupled to the light reflective optical element. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflective optical element is a metallized PET film adhered to the back side of a transparent low contact area film comprising polyurethane and a surface relief profile, wherein the film combination is one or more combined light guides. It extends from underneath the light guide area to enclose them. In a further embodiment, the light reflective optical element is physically and/or optically coupled to the film-based lightguide and cut during the same cutting process to generate the combined lightguides and the light reflective optical element is a light collimating optical element or Angled, curved or consequently angled or cut into curved regions to form an optical turning optical element. The size, shape, quantity, orientation, material and position of the tapped regions, the light reflective regions or other regions of the light reflective optical element are optical ( Efficiency, optical collimation, optical redirection, etc.), mechanical (rigidity, connection to other elements, alignment, ease of manufacture, etc.), or system (reduced volume, increased efficiency, additional functionality such as color mixing) benefits Can be changed as required to provide them. For example, the tapped regions of a light reflective optical element that specularly reflects incident light may comprise a parabolic, polynomial or other geometric cross-sectional shape such that the angular FWHM intensity, luminous flux, directivity, uniformity, or light profile is controlled. For example, the curved cross-sectional shape of one or more tab regions may be that of a composite parabola concentrator. In another embodiment, the reflective optical element comprises alignment, positioning, adhesion, physical coupling, and optical coupling with the second element or component of the light emitting device: other elements of the light emitting device to facilitate at least one selected from the group. Hole regions, tab regions, adhesive regions or other alignment, physical coupling, optical coupling, or positioning regions corresponding to the shape, size, or position of the. For example, the light reflective optical element may be a specular or preformed metallized PET disposed substantially below the planar light emitting area, extending and folded in an area near the light source and optically on at least one outer surface of the light collimating element. It includes extended tabs or fold regions to be engaged. In this embodiment, the light reflective optical element is also a component of the light collimating optical element. In another embodiment, the light reflective optical element is a specular metallized PET film that is optically bonded to the unfolded bonding light guide using a pressure sensitive adhesive and extends toward the light source, so that the extended area is optically applied to the light reflective optical element. Optically coupled to the angular surface of a light collimating optical element collimating a portion of the light from the light source in a plane perpendicular to the plane containing the surface of the unfolded coupling lightguide joined by.

In one embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a light blocking element, wherein the light reflecting element is a light input coupler, a combined light guide, a light source, a light redirecting optical element, a light collimating optical element, a light mixing area, a light guide area. Block the first part of the light to escape. In another embodiment, the light reflecting element prevents stray light, undesired light, or a predetermined area of luminescence or visibility of the turning surface from reaching the viewer of the display, sign, or light emitting device. For example, the metallized specular PET film reflects light from one side of the light guide area back to the light guide, and also bonds the metallized PET film to the stack, escapes from the combined light guide and blocks visible stray light. A PSA optically coupled to the guides (which may be a cladding layer for the light guides) may be used to extend and be disposed to surround the stack of the combined light guides.

In one embodiment, the light reflective element is also a low contact area covering. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflective element is a metallized PET film comprising a methacrylate-based coating comprising surface relief features. In this embodiment, the light reflective element can wrap the stack without significantly extracting light from the combined lightguides when air is used as the cladding area. In another embodiment, the reflective element has non-planar areas such that the reflective surface is not flat and the contact area between the light reflective film and one or more combined lightguides or lightguide areas is a low percentage of the exposed surface area.

In another embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a housing element. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflective element is a reflective coating on the inner surface of the housing for the coupling lightguides. The housing may have reflective surfaces or reflect light from inside (such as an inner reflective layer or material). The light reflecting element may be a component of a light emitting device or a housing for a light guide region or other light guide.

In a further embodiment, the light reflecting element is also a light collimating optical element arranged to reduce each half-width intensity of light from the light source before the light enters one or more combined light guides. In one embodiment, the light reflective optical element is disposed on one side of the light emitting area of the light guide film and receives light from the light source and reflects and collimates the light toward the input surface of one or more combined light guides. It is a specularly reflective multilayer polymer film (such as a giant birefringent optical film) extending in a direction toward the light source having bends or curved regions that are bent or folded to form curved shapes. More than one folded or curved area can be used to provide different different shapes or directions of light reflecting surfaces for different areas arranged to receive light from a light source. For example, a reinforced specular multilayer polymer film (such as a giant birefringent optical film) placed in the light guide area of a film-based lightguide and optically coupled using a low refractive index PSA cladding layer extends toward the light source and protects stray light and It may further include an extended area including a first extended area surrounding the cladding area to block and including two folded tabs and a cavity, wherein a light source may be disposed so that light from the light source in the first plane is Collimated by the extended area taps. In one embodiment, the use of a light reflective element physically coupled to another component in a light emitting device (such as a film-based lightguide or combined lightguides) aligns the light collimating optical element tabs or reflective areas of the light reflective element. Provides anchor or registration assistance for doing so.

In a further embodiment, the light reflecting element is a light turning optical element arranged to redirect the optical axis of light in the first plane. In one embodiment, the light reflective optical element is disposed on one side of the light emitting region of the light guide film, receives light from the light source, and reflects and redirects the optical axis of incident light toward the input surface of one or more combined light guides. It is a specularly reflective multilayer polymer film (such as a giant birefringent optical film) extending in a direction toward the light source having folds or curved regions that are bent or folded to form angular or curved shapes. More than one folded or curved area may be used to provide different shapes or directions of light reflecting surfaces for different areas arranged to receive light from a light source. For example, using a low refractive index PSA cladding layer, a specular multilayer polymer film disposed in the light guide area of the film-based light guide and optically coupled is a first extension that extends toward the light source and surrounds the cladding area to protect and block stray light. And an extended area including two tabs and a cavity that is folded and includes a folded area, and a light source may be disposed so that the optical axis of light from the light source in the first plane in the first direction is different from the first direction. The direction is changed by the area taps extending in the second direction. In one embodiment, the use of a light reflective element that is physically coupled to another component in a light emitting device (such as a film-based lightguide or combined lightguides) is used to align the light turning optical element tabs or reflective areas of the light reflective element. Provides anchor or registration assistance for

In a further embodiment, the light reflective element is also a heat transfer element that transfers heat away from the light source. For example, in one embodiment, the light reflective element is disposed on one side of the light guide area and extends to a circuit board thermally coupled to the light source and is a reflective aluminum housing that is thermally coupled so that the heat from the light source is aluminum. Becomes thermotransfer In another example, the light reflective optical element is a high reflectivity polished area of an aluminum sheet further comprising (or thermally bonded to) an extruded area with fins or heat sink extensions. In another embodiment, the heat transfer element is an aluminum extrusion comprising a coupling lightguide in an inner region, wherein the inner surface of the extrusion is arranged to reflect light received from the coupling lightguides back towards the coupling lightguides. It is a reflective optical element. In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element is an aluminum extrusion comprising coupling lightguides in an interior region, wherein the extrusion further comprises a light collimating reflective surface arranged to collimate light from the light source.

PROTECTIVE LAYERS

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: light input surface, light input coupler, coupling light guide, light guide region, and light guide: is optically coupled to it, physically coupled to it, or disposed adjacent to it, And a protective element or layer disposed between it and the light emitting surface of the light emitting device. The protective film element comprises at least one selected from the group: light input surface, light input coupler, combined light guide, light guide area, and light guide from scratches, impacts, dropping of the device, and interaction with sharp objects. It may have a high scratch resistance, high impact resistance, a hard coat layer, a shock absorbing layer or other layer or element suitable for protection. In another embodiment, at least one outer surface area (or layer thereof) of the lightguide comprises a removable protective film or masking film. For example, in one embodiment, the film-based lightguide includes removable protective polyethylene films that are physically bonded to the cladding regions on either side of the core region. In another embodiment, one of the cladding regions is an adhesive and the protective polyethylene film prevents contamination of the adhesive before the film adheres to the window, for example the other cladding region is a "hardcoat" with a pencil hardness greater than 2H. Including a coating, the protective polyethylene film prevents scratches prior to installation of the light emitting device.

Combination of light to the surface of the combined light guide

In one embodiment, the light input surface of the light input coupler is at least one surface of at least one combined lightguide. In one embodiment, light is combined into a combined lightguide so that it is on at least one surface or lens, prism lens, prism film, diffraction grating, holographic optical element, diffractive optical element, diffuser, anisotropic diffuser, refractive surface relief feature. Parts, diffractive surface relief features, volume light redirecting features, micro-scale volume or surface relief features, namo-scale volume or surface relief features, and total reflection volume or surface features: at least comprising an optical region selected from the group Remain in the light guide for multiple total reflections by at least one optical element or feature optically coupled to one surface. The optical element or feature may be integrated on one or several combination light guides in a stacked or predetermined physically arranged distribution of the combination light guides. In one embodiment, the optical elements or features are spatially arranged in a pattern within or on or across multiple combined lightguides. In one embodiment, the coupling efficiency of the optical element or feature is 350 nm to 400 nm, 400 nm to 700 nm, 450 nm to 490 nm, 490 nm to 560 nm, and 635 nm to 700 nm: 50% for a wavelength range selected from one selected from the group, 60 %, 70%, 80%, and 90%: greater than one selected from the group. The coupling efficiency as defined in the present application is combined with at least one coupling light guide arranged to receive light from a light source remaining in the coupling light guide at an angle greater than the critical angle further along the region of the light guide immediately past the light input surface region. Percentage of incident light from a light source arranged to direct light onto at least one combined lightguide. In one embodiment, two or more coupling lightguides are stacked or bundled together, wherein they each have an optical element or feature arranged to couple light into a coupling lightguide, and the optical element or feature is 350nm to 400nm, 400nm to 700nm. , 450 nm to 490 nm, 490 nm to 560 nm, and 635 nm to 700 nm: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% for a wavelength range selected from one selected from the group: has a binding efficiency less than one selected from the group . By stacking a group of combined lightguides, for example, a lower portion of the incident light can be passed through the first combined lightguide onto the second combined lightguide to enable the light to be combined into the second combined lightguide. Combined efficiencies can be used. In one embodiment, the coupling efficiency is gradually changed or changed in the first direction through the array of coupling light guides, and the light reflecting element or region reflects a portion of the incident light again through the coupling light guides. Placed on opposite sides of the array.

Coupling light into two or more surfaces (COUPLING LIGHT INTO TWO OR MORE SURFACES)

In one embodiment, light is coupled to at least two surfaces or surface regions of at least one lightguide through light input couplers, coupling lightguides, optical elements, or a combination thereof in the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the light coupled through the light guide or the surface of the light guide region is the same or different from the light coupled through the second surface or the second surface region of the light guide or light guide region of the light emitting device. It is directed by the light extraction features in an angular range different from that of the light directed by the extraction features. In another embodiment, the first light extraction region includes first light turning features or light extraction features for directing incident light through the first surface or edge in a range of first angles when exiting the light emitting surface of the light guide. And the second light extraction region comprises a second light redirection or set of light extraction features that direct incident light through the second surface or edge in a range of second angles upon exiting the light emitting surface of the lightguide Include. Variations in light redirecting features include, but are not limited to, feature height, shape, orientation, density, width, length, material, angle of the surface, and position in the x, y, and z directions. Domains, grooves, pits, micro-lenses, prism elements, air cavities, hollow microspheres, dispersed microspheres, and other known light extraction features or elements. In another embodiment, the light emitting device is arranged to couple light through at least one light guide and a first light source disposed to couple light through a surface of the at least one light guide and an edge of at least one light guide A second light source, wherein the coupling mechanism is optical input couplers, optical elements, coupling lightguides, optical components or coupling lightguides optically coupled to a surface or edge, diffractive optics, holographic optical element, diffraction At least one selected from the group: grating, Fresnel lens element, prism film, light turning optics and other optical elements.

Optical input couplers placed near more than one edge of the light guide

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a plurality of light input couplers arranged to couple light to the light guide from at least two input regions disposed near two different edges of the light guide. In another embodiment, two light input couplers are disposed on opposite sides of the light guide. In another embodiment, the light input couplers are disposed on three or four sides of the film type lightguide. In a further embodiment, more than one light input coupler, housing, or light input surface is arranged to receive light from a single light source, a light source package, an array of light sources, or a light source strip (such as a substantially linear array of LEDs). For example, two housings for two light input couplers arranged to couple light to two different areas of the lightguide are arranged to receive light from a substantially linear array of LEDs. In another embodiment, a first input surface including a first collection of coupling light guides optically coupled to a first region of the light guide and a coupling light optically coupled to a second region of the light guide different from the first region A second input surface comprising a second collection of guides is the same light source, a plurality of light sources, light sources in a package, an array or collection of light sources, a linear array of light sources, one or more LEDs, an LED package, a linear array of LEDs, And multiple colors of LEDs: arranged to receive light from one selected from the group.

STRIP FOLDING DEVICE

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes frame members that support folding or holding of at least one of combined lightguides or strips. Methods for folding and holding combined lightguides, such as film-based lightguides using frame members, are International (PCT) entitled "ILLUMINATION VIA FLEXIBLE THIN FILMS" filed January 26, 2010 by Anthony Nichols and Shawn Pucylowski. Publication Nos. WO 2009/048863 and PCT applications, U.S. Provisional Patent Serial Nos. 61/147,215 and 61/147,237, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In one embodiment, the combined lightguide folding (or bending) and/or holding (or housing) element is a rigid plastic material, black colored material, opaque material, translucent material, metal foil, metal sheet, aluminum sheet, and aluminum. Foil: formed from at least one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the folding or holding material has a flexural stiffness (or flexural modulus) that is at least twice the flexural stiffness (or modulus) of the film or bonded lightguides on which it is folded or held.

Housing or holding device for optical input coupler

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a housing or holding device that holds or contains at least a portion of the light input coupler and a light source. The housing or holding device includes a light input coupler, a light source, combined light guides, light guides, optical components, electrical components, heat sinks or other thermal components, attachment mechanisms, registration mechanisms, folding mechanisms devices, and Frames: At least one selected from the group may be housed or included therein. The housing or holding device may comprise a plurality of components or any combination of the components described above. The housing or holding device protects against dust and debris contaminants, provides an airtight seal, provides a waterproof seal, houses or contains components, provides a safety housing for electrical or optical components, Supporting folding or bending of combined light guides, supporting alignment or holding of light guides, light sources or light input couplers relative to other components, maintaining placement of combined light guides, recycling light (reflective Providing attachment mechanisms for attaching a light emitting device to an external object or surface), as with inner walls), providing an opaque container so that stray light does not escape through certain areas, displaying indicia and Providing a translucent surface for the light emitting device to illuminate an object from the outside, including a connector for release and the interchangeability of components, and providing a latch or connector to connect with other holding devices or housings Doing: Can perform one or more functions selected from a group.

In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides terminate inside the housing or holding element. In another embodiment, the inner surface of the housing or holding element has a specular or diffuse reflectance greater than 50% and the inner surface looks white or mirror-like. In another embodiment, the outer surface of the housing or holding device has a specular or diffuse reflectance greater than 50% and the outer surface looks white or mirror-like. In another embodiment, at least one wall of the housing or holding device has a specular or diffuse reflectance of less than 50% and the inner surface looks like a gray, black or very dark mirror. In another embodiment, at least one wall or surface of the housing or holding device is opaque and has a luminous transmittance measured according to ASTM D1003 of less than 50%. In another embodiment, at least one wall or surface of the housing or holding device has a luminous transmittance measured according to ASTM D1003 of greater than 30% and the light exiting the wall or surface from a light source inside the housing or holding device is For displaying active displays, such as providing lighting for components, lighting for objects externally to a light emitting device, or backlit lighting for signs, indicia, passive displays, secondary displays or indicia, or LCDs Provides surface illumination.

In one embodiment, the housing or holding device comprises connectors, pins, clips, latches, adhesive areas, clamps, joining mechanisms, and other connecting elements or light guides, mating light guides, films, strips, cartridges, removable components or Components, windows or automobiles, light sources, external surfaces such as electronic or electrical components, circuit boards for light sources such as electronics or LEDs, heat sinks or other thermal control elements, frames of light emitting devices, and housings in other components of the light emitting device Or mechanical means for connecting or holding the holding device: at least one selected from the group.

In another embodiment, the input ends and output ends of the coupling lightguides are magnetic grips, mechanical grips, clamps, screws, mechanical adhesives, chemical adhesives, dispersible adhesives, diffusible adhesives, electrostatic adhesives, vacuum holding, Or adhesive: maintaining material contact with the relative positioning element by at least one selected from the group.

Curved or flexible housing (CURVED OR FLEXIBLE HOUSING)

In another embodiment, the housing includes at least one curved surface. The curved surface may allow non-linear shapes or devices or may facilitate incorporating non-planar or curved lightguides or combined lightguides. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a housing having at least one curved surface in which the housing is curved or includes curved coupling lightguides. In other embodiments, the housing is flexible and thus can be bent temporarily, permanently or semi-permanently. By using a flexible housing, for example, the light emitting device can be bent so that the light emitting surface is curved with the housing, and the light emitting area can be curved around a bend in a wall or corner, for example. In one embodiment, the housing or lightguide can be temporarily bent so that the original shape is substantially restored (eg bending the elongated housing to obtain it through the door). In other embodiments, the housing or lightguide can be permanently or semi-permanently bent so that the bent shape is substantially supported after releasing (e.g., it is desired to have a curved light emitting device to provide a curved sign or display. As in the case).

HOUSING INCLUDING A THERMAL TRANSFER ELEMENT

In one embodiment, the housing includes a heat transfer element arranged to transfer heat from a component inside the housing to an outer surface of the housing. In other embodiments, the heat transfer element is a heat sink, a metal or ceramic element, a fan, a heat pipe, a synthetic jet, an air jet generating actuator, an active cooling element, a passive cooling element, a metal core, or the rear of another conductive circuit board. Minor, thermally conductive adhesive, or other component known to conduct heat: selected from the group. In one embodiment, the heat transfer element is 0.2, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 3, 5, 50, 100, 120, 180, 237, 300, and 400: greater thermal conductivity (W/(m K)). In another embodiment, the frame that supports the film-based lightguide (such as holding tension in the film to maintain its flatness) is a heat transfer element. In one embodiment, the light source is an LED and the LED is thermally coupled to a heat transfer element, a ballast or frame. In a further embodiment, the frame or ballast is used to thermally transition away from the light source and is also a hydrating for light emitting devices.

Size of housing or combined light guide holding device

In one embodiment, the sizes of two small dimensions of the housing or combination lightguide holding device are 500, 400, 300, 200, 100, 50, 25, 10, and 5 times the thickness of the lightguide or combination lightguides: Smaller than the one selected from the group. In another embodiment, at least one dimension of the housing or lightguide holding device is smaller due to the use of one or more light input couplers disposed along the edge of the lightguide. In this embodiment, the thickness of the housing or holding device can be reduced due to a fixed number of strips or combination lightguides, and they can be placed inside a plurality of smaller stacks instead of a single larger stack. . It also allows more light to be coupled inside the light guide by using a plurality of light input couplers and light sources.

LOW CONTACT AREA COVER

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is disposed between the at least one combined light guide and the exterior of the light emitting device. A low contact area cover or wrap provides a low surface area of the contact area and contact area of the light guide or combined light guide and protects from fingerprints, dust or air contaminants, moisture, and one or more combined light guides. Protection from internal or external objects that decouple or absorb more light than the low contact area cover when in contact with one or more areas, providing a means for holding or containing at least one combined lightguide, one or more Holding the relative position of the coupling lightguides, and preventing the coupling lightguides from bending into a larger volume or from contacting a surface that decouples or absorbs light: can further provide at least one selected from the group. have. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is disposed substantially around one or more combination lightguide stacks or arrays and reduces dust build-up on the combination lightguides, wherein the one or more combination lightguides transmit different light. Or to prevent total reflection or absorption that is disturbed by contact with the absorbent material, and to prevent or limit scratches, cuts, recesses, or deformation from material contact with other components or assemblers and/or users of the device. Things: Provides one or more functions selected from a group.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is disposed between the outer surface of the light emitting device and the areas of the combined light guides disposed between the folded or bent area and the light guide or light mixing area. In a further embodiment, the low contact area cover is disposed between the areas of the combined light guides and the light input surface or the light mixing area of the light guide and the outer surface of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover comprises a portion of the area of the combined light guides not surrounded by a housing, protective cover, or other component disposed between the combined light guides and the outer surface of the light emitting device It is placed between the surfaces. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is a housing, a relative positioning element, or a relative position holding a portion or element of the housing. In another embodiment, a low contact area cover or wrap is disposed substantially around the light emitting device.

FILM-BASED LOW CONTACT AREA COVER

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is an external material of a low contact area cover and a surface relief pattern or a combined light guide disposed near the structure on the surface of the film-based low contact area cover disposed near at least one combined light guide. It is a film having at least one refractive index lower than the refractive index of. In one embodiment, the low contact area comprises convex or protruding surface relief features disposed near at least one outer surface of the at least one coupling lightguide and having an outer surface and surface relief features of the coupling lightguide. The average percentage of the area placed close to the light guide, which is a material contact, is less than one of the following 70%, 50%, 30%, 10%, 5%, and 1%. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover includes surface relief features proximate the area of the film-based lightguide and a film-based lightguide (or light guide) when a uniform plane pressure of 7 kilopascals is applied to the low contact area cover. The percentage of the area of the surface relief features in contact with the area of the mixing area or coupling guides) is less than one of the following 70%, 50%, 30%, 10%, 5%, and 1%. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is a film-based lightguide (or light mixing area, a film-based lightguide (or light mixing area) proximate to and in physical contact with the area of the film-based lightguide and including surface relief features therein and in contact with the low contact area cover). Or combined lightguides) is less than one of the following 70%, 50%, 30%, 10%, 5%, and 1%.

In one embodiment, the convex surface relief profile designed to have a low contact area with the surface of the coupling lightguide is to extract, absorb, disperse, and otherwise have a lower percentage of light propagating inside the coupling lightguide than a flat surface of the same material. Change of intensity or direction of: At least one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the surface relief profile is random, semi-random, ordered, regular one or two directions, holographic, ordered, compact cones, truncated polyhedra, truncated hemispheres , Truncated cones, truncated pyramids, pyramids, prisms, point shapes, round tipped shapes, rods, cylinders, hemispheres, and other geometric shapes: at least one selected from the group . In one embodiment, the low contact area cover material or film is transparent, translucent, opaque, light absorbing, light reflective, substantially black, substantially white: at least one selected from the group, and a diffuse reflectance comprising greater than 70%. Has a specular component, has a diffuse reflectance comprising less than 70% has a specular component, has an ASTM D1003 luminous transmittance less than 30%, has an ASTM D1003 luminous transmittance greater than 30%, and absorbs less than 50% of the incident light And has an electrical sheet resistance less than 10 ohms per square, and an electrical sheet resistance greater than 10 ohms per square. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is di/0 according to ASTM E 1164-07 and ASTM E 179 greater than those selected from the group 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, and 95%. It has a diffuse reflectance measured by geometric formation.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is a film having a thickness less than that selected from the group: 600 microns, 500 microns, 400 microns, 300 microns, 200 microns, 100 microns, and 50 microns.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover comprises a material having a smaller effective refractive index than the core layer due to microstructures and/or nanostructures. For example, in one embodiment, the low contact area comprises an aerogel or batch of nanostructured materials disposed on a film having an effective refractive index less than the core layer in the region near the core layer. In one embodiment, the nanostructured material is 1000, 500, 300, 200, 100, 50, 20, 10, 5, and 2 nanometers: perpendicular to the core layer surface or smaller than that selected from the group Fibers, particles, or domains having a dimension or average diameter in a plane parallel to. For example, in one embodiment, the low contact area cover is a polymer material such as, but not limited to, cellulose, polyester, PVC, PTFE, polystyrene, PMMA, PDMS, or other light transmitting or partially light transmitting materials. It is a coating or material comprising nanostructured fibers comprising: In one embodiment, the low contact area is a paper or similar sheet or film (such as filter paper) comprising fibrous, microstructured, or nanostructured materials or surfaces. In one embodiment, the low contact area material is a straight material. In another embodiment, the low contact area material is a nonwoven material. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover has an average of greater than 5 microns with microstructures, nanostructures, or fibrous materials or surface features disposed within or on the outer regions of the “macro” surface features. It is a substantially transparent or translucent light-transmitting film comprising "micro" surface features having dimensions. In one embodiment, the “macro” surface features are perpendicular to the core surface or greater than those selected from the group 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 500 microns. Microstructures, nanostructures, or fibrous materials or surface features with average dimensions in a first direction parallel to the 20, 10, 5, 2, 1, 0.5, 0.3, 0.1, 0.05, and 0.01 microns: group Have an average dimension in the first direction smaller than that selected from.

In this embodiment, “macro” surface features can be patterned inside the surface (such as by extrusion embossing or UV cured embossing) and outside areas (such as by extrusion embossing or UV cured embossing) and Outermost surfaces) can be left, formed, coated, roughened, or otherwise modified to include microstructures, nanostructures, or fibrous materials or surface features when contacting inside the core layer It binds less light to the outside of the core layer due to the smaller surface area in contact with the core layer. In one embodiment, by coating only the tips of the “macro” protrusions, for example, a smaller nanostructure material is required than the coating of the entire low contact area film or flat film and “valleys” around the “macro” protrusions. Alternatively, the areas may be light transmitting, transparent, or translucent. In another embodiment, microstructure, nanostructure, or fibrous materials or surface features disposed on or within “macro” surface features create an effective lower refractive index region that functions as a cladding layer. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover comprises 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 2 of the light from the core layer in at least one area (or the entire area) in contact with the core layer or the area adjacent to the core layer. %, and 1%: extract less than that selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the low contact area includes standoffs, posts, or other protrusions that provide a separation distance between the low contact area cover and the core layer. In one embodiment, the standoffs, posts, or other protrusions are an area adjacent to the light emitting area, an area adjacent to the surface opposite to the light emitting surface, an area adjacent to the light mixing area, an area adjacent to the light input coupler, a combined light guide In a pattern on one surface of the low contact area cover, and in one or more regions of the low contact area cover selected from the group: in a pattern on one surface of the low contact area cover, and in a pattern on all surfaces of the low contact area cover. In one embodiment, the standoffs, posts or other protrusions of the low contact area cover are 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000 microns: perpendicular to the core layer larger than that selected from the group. Or have an average dimension in a direction parallel to the surface of the core layer. In another embodiment, the aspect ratio (height divided by the average width in a plane parallel to the core surface) is greater than that selected from the group: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 50, and 100.

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover includes an area around a light emitting area of the light guide, an area around the light guide radiating less than 5% of the total light flux emitted from the light guide, an area of the input coupler housing, and a cladding layer. Or region, standoff region, post region, protrusions region, “macro” surface feature region, nanostructured feature region, microstructured feature region, and chemical bonds, physical bonds, adhesive layer, magnetic force, Electrostatic force, Van der Waals force, covalent bonds, and ionic bonds: are physically bonded to the lightguide or core layer in one or more regions selected from plateau regions disposed between valley regions by one or more selected from the group. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is laminated to the core layer.

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover is paper, fibrous film or sheet, cellulosic material, pulp, low acid paper, synthetic paper, flashspoon fibers, flashspoon high-density polyethylene fibers, and micro-porous film: A sheet, film, or component comprising one or more selected from the group. In another embodiment, the film material of the area or the low contact area in the low contact area cover contacting the core layer of the light guide in the light emitting area is 1.6, 1.55, 1.5, 1.45, 1.41, 1.38, 1.35, 1.34, 1.33, 1.30 , 1.25, and 1.20: a material having a bulk refractive index or an effective refractive index in a direction perpendicular or parallel to the core surface smaller than those selected from the group.

Wrap around the low contact area cover (WRAP AROUND LOW CONTACT AREA COVER)

In a further embodiment, the low contact area cover is an inner surface or is physically coupled to the surface of the housing, holding device, or relative positioning element. In a further embodiment, since the low contact area cover is a film surrounding at least one combined light guide, at least one lateral edge and at least one lateral surface are substantially covered, so that the low contact area cover is a combination of the light guide and the device. It is placed between the outer surfaces.

In yet another embodiment, a film-based lightguide, wherein the low contact area cover is from a group of heat transfer elements by a light guide, a light guide film, a light input coupler, a light guide, a housing, and a low contact area cover physical coupling mechanism. And a low contact area cover surrounding the first group of coupling light guides physically coupled to the selected at least one. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a first cylindrical tension rod arranged to apply a tension to the low contact area cover film, and the coupling light guides are in close contact with each other and in close contact with the light guide. Hold, the optical input coupler has a lower profile. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover is a light guide by moving the first cylindrical tension rod away from the physical engagement point of the mechanism holding the tension bar, such as a brace, or away from the second tension bar, After physically engaging at least one selected from the light guide film, the light input coupler, the light guide, the housing, the heat transfer element, and another element or housing group, it may be pulled taut. Other formations and shapes for the tension-forming element include a rectangular cross-section, a hemispherical cross-section, or another element that is longer in a first direction that can provide tension when supporting or translating the tension held statically against other components. It can be used with a rod having In another embodiment, the first cylindrical tension rod can be translated in the first direction to provide tension while remaining within the brace area, the position of the cylindrical tension rod in place, for example by tightening the screw. It can be locked or pressed to remain. In another embodiment, the tension forming element and the physical coupling mechanism for coupling it to the brace or other component of the light input coupler is 1 past at least one edge of the lightguide in a direction parallel to the longer dimension of the tension forming element. It does not extend beyond those selected from the group of millimeters, 2 millimeters, 3 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 7 millimeters and 10 millimeters.

LOW HARDNESS LOW CONTACT AREA COVER

In another embodiment, the low contact area cover has an ASTM D3363 pencil hardness under a force of 300 grams weight less than the outer surface area of a combined lightguide disposed near the low contact area cover. In one embodiment, the low contact area cover comprises silicone, polyurethane, rubber, or thermoplastic polyurethane having a surface relief pattern or structure. In a further embodiment, the ASTM D3363 pencil hardness under a force of 300 grams weight of the low contact area cover is at least two grades less than the outer surface area of the combined lightguide disposed near the low contact area cover. In another embodiment, the low contact area cover has an ASTM D 3363 pencil hardness less than one selected from the 5H, 4H, 3H, 2H, H, and F groups.

Physical coupling mechanism for low contact area cover

In one embodiment, the low contact area cover comprises sawing (or fiber, wire, or thread) the low contact area cover to the light guide, light mixing area, or other component in the first contact area. Threading or feeding), welding the low contact area cover to one or more components (sonic, laser, thermo-mechanically, etc.), bonding the low contact area cover to one or more components ( Epoxy, glue, pressure sensitive adhesive, etc.), light emitting device, light input coupler, light guide, housing, low contact area by one or more methods selected from the group of securing the low contact area cover to one or more components. It is physically coupled to the second area of the cover, or to the heat transfer element. In a further embodiment, the fixing mechanism is a baton, button, clamp, clasp, clip, clutch (pin fastener), flange, grommet, anchor, nail, pin, nail, clevis pin, cotter pin, linch pin, R-clip , Retaining ring, circlip retaining ring, e-ring retaining ring, rivet, screw anchor, snap, staple, stitch, strap, tag, thread fastener, captive thread fastener (nut, screw, stud, thread insert , Thread rod), tie, toggle, hook and loop strips, wedge anchor, and zipper group.

In another embodiment, the physical coupling mechanism maintains at least one flexibility selected from the group of light emitting devices, lightguides, and coupling lightguides. In a further embodiment, the total surface area of the physical coupling mechanism in contact with at least one selected from the group of low contact area cover, coupling light guides, light guide region, light mixing region, and light emitting device is 70%, 50%, 30 %, 10%, 5%, and less than one selected from the group 1%. In another embodiment, the coupling light guides for the cross-sectional area in the first direction, the light mixing region or the low contact area cover physical coupling mechanism in the first direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light in the light guide region comprises the largest component. The total percentage of the cross-sectional area of the layers including light propagating under total reflection is less than one selected from the group 10%, 5%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.1%, and 0.05%. For example, in one embodiment, the low contact area cover is a flexible transparent polyurethane film having a surface comprising a constant two-dimensional array of embossed hemispheres disposed near a stack of coupling light guides and enclosing the stack, and is a 1-centimeter spacing It is physically bonded to the light mixing region of the lightguide comprising a 25 micron thick core layer by threading the film into the light mixing region using a transparent nylon fiber having a diameter less than 25 microns with 25 micron holes in the field. In this example, the largest component of the physical coupling mechanism are the holes in the core area that can scatter light from the lightguide. Therefore, the aforementioned cross-sectional area of the physical bonding mechanism (holes in the core layer) is 0.25% of the cross-sectional area of the core layer. In another embodiment, the fiber or material threaded through the holes in one or more components is that used in polymer fiber, polyester fiber, rubber fiber, cable, wire (such as thin steel wire), aluminum wire, and fishing line. And at least one selected from the same group of nylon fibers. In a further embodiment, the diameter of the fiber or material threaded through the pores is less than one selected from the group 500 microns, 300 microns, 200 microns, 100 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, and 10 microns. In other embodiments, the fiber or threaded material is substantially transparent or translucent.

In another embodiment, a physical coupling mechanism for a low contact area cover includes holes in the lightguide where an adhesive, epoxy or other adhesive material bonded to the low contact area cover is deposited. In another embodiment, an adhesive, epoxy, or other adhesive material is bonded to the low contact area cover and at least one selected from the core region, cladding region, and light guide group. In another embodiment, the adhesive material has an index of refraction greater than 1.48 and reduces scatter from the lightguide from the hole area through the use of an air gap, thread, or wire through the hole with an air gap or fiber. . In a further embodiment, the adhesive is applied as a coating on the fiber (for example, it can be UV activated, cured, etc. after threading) and the adhesive is applied to the fiber in the area of the hole so that the adhesive optically bonds the inner surfaces of the hole. And optically coupling the fiber to the inner surfaces of the hole to provide reduced scattering by at least one selected from the group.

The physical coupling mechanism, in one embodiment, is a film-based light guide in a light emitting device, a low contact area cover film, a housing, a relative positioning element, a light redirecting element or film, a diffuser film, a collimation film, a light extraction film, It can be used to physically bond together one or more elements selected from a protective film, a touchscreen film, a heat transfer element, and another group of films or components.

Light guide composition and characteristics

The use of a plastic film with a thickness less than 0.5mm for edge type lightguides can retain many advantages through the use of plastic plates or sheets. The flexible film can be shaped on the surfaces, folded up for storage, changed shape as needed, or waved in the air. Another advantage is that it can lower the cost. The reduction in thickness helps to reduce the cost of material, manufacturing, storage and shipping for a given width and length lightguide. Another reason is that the reduced thickness allows the surface to be added without significant change in shape, thickness and/or appearance. For example, it can be easily added to the surface of a window without changing the shape of the window. Another advantage is that the film or light guide can be rolled up. These aids in transportation can retain some functionality and can be particularly useful for handheld devices when a roll out screen is used. The fifth reason is that the film weighs less, and can also facilitate handling and transport, and the sixth reason is that the film is commonly extruded in large rolls, so that a large edge-type signal system can be produced. Finally, the seventh reason is that there are many companies setting up to coat, cut, stack and manipulate films as films are useful in many different industries. Plastic films are produced by blow or cast extrusion in widths up to 6.096 meters or more or in rolls of thousands of meters or more. Co-extrusion of different materials from 2 to 100 layers can be achieved with special extrusion dies.

Film or light guide thickness

두께, 최대 두께, 평균 두께, 필름의 전체 두께의 90%보다 큰 두께, 라이트가이드, 및 라이트가이드 영역 그룹으로부터 선택된 적어도 하나는 0.2 밀리미터보다 작다. 다른 실시예에 있어서, 광 방출 영역 내의 코어 영역의 평균 두께에 의해 나누어진 광 방출 영역의 평면에서 광 방출 영역의 최대 치수로서 정의된 사이즈 대 두께 비율은 100; 500; 1,000; 3,000; 5,000; 10,000; 15,000; 20,000; 30,000; 및 50,000 그룹으로부터 선택된 하나보다 크다. 일 실시예에서, 디스플레이는 디스플레이의 공간 광 변조기의 픽셀들보다 실질적으로 얇은 라이트가이드를 포함하여서 가장 큰 픽셀 치수 대 라이트가이드의 코어 영역의 두께의 비율은 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15 및 20:그룹으로부터 선택된 하나보다 크다.In one embodiment, the thickness of the light guide or the light guide region is in the range of 0.005 mm to 0.5 mm. In another embodiment, the thickness of the film or lightguide is in the range of 0.025 millimeters to 0.5 millimeters. In a further embodiment, the thickness of the film, lightguide or lightguide area is in the range of 0.050 millimeters to 0.175 millimeters. In one embodiment, the thickness of the film, light guide, or light guide area is less than 0.2 millimeters or less than 0.5 millimeters. In one embodiment, the average thickness of the lightguide or core region is less than one selected from the group 150 microns, 100 microns, 60 microns, 30 microns, 20 microns, 10 microns, 6 microns, and 4 microns. In one embodiment,

At least one selected from the group of thickness, maximum thickness, average thickness, thickness greater than 90% of the total thickness of the film, light guide, and light guide area is less than 0.2 millimeter. In another embodiment, the size-to-thickness ratio defined as the maximum dimension of the light-emitting area in the plane of the light-emitting area divided by the average thickness of the core area in the light-emitting area is 100; 500; 1,000; 3,000; 5,000; 10,000; 15,000; 20,000; 30,000; And greater than one selected from the 50,000 group. In one embodiment, the display includes a lightguide that is substantially thinner than the pixels of the display's spatial light modulator so that the ratio of the largest pixel dimension to the thickness of the core region of the lightguide is 1, 1.5, 2, 4, 5, 6 , 7, 8, 9, 10, 15 and 20: greater than one selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, wherein the combined lightguides within the film-based lightguide, the light mixing region, the lightguide region, or the average within the light emitting region The luminous flux density is greater than one selected from the group of 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 500, and 1000 lumens per cubic millimeter. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, wherein the combined lightguides within the film-based lightguide, a light mixing area, a lightguide area, or a maximum in the light emitting area The luminous flux density is greater than one selected from the group of 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 500, and 1000 lumens per cubic millimeter. The flux density within the area is determined by cutting the optical quality edge perpendicular to the surface in the area, masking off the area around the area (light is not reflected back into the film using light absorbing materials) and using a goniometer to determine the far field. It is measured by measuring the light intensity.

Optical properties of light guide or light transmitting material

Regarding the optical properties of the light guides or light transmitting materials for the embodiments, the optical properties specified in this application may be general properties of the light guide, core, cladding, or a combination thereof, or they may be a specific area (light emitting area, It can correspond to a surface (such as a light mixing area, or light extraction area), a surface (such as a light input surface, a diffuse surface, a flat surface), and a direction (such as measured perpendicular to the surface or measured in the direction of light travel through a light guide). have. In one embodiment, the average luminous transmittance of the light guide measured in at least one selected from the light emitting area, the light mixing area, and the light guide group according to ASTM D1003 with a BYK Gardner haze meter is 70%, 80%, 88%. , 92%, 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%. In another embodiment, the average luminous transmittance of the light guide measured within the main luminous area (area including more than 80% of the total light emitted from the light guide) according to ASTM D1003 with a BYK Gardner haze meter is 70%, 80 %, 88%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%.

In another embodiment, the average haze of the light guide measured in at least one selected from the light emitting area, the light mixing area, and the light guide group measured by the BYK Gardner haze meter is 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%. , Less than one selected from the group 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and 3%. In another embodiment, the average transparency of the light guide measured within at least one selected from the light emitting area, the light mixing area, and the light guide group according to the measurement procedure related to ASTM D1003 with a BYK Gardner haze meter is 70%, 80% , 88%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%.

In a further embodiment, the diffuse reflectance of the lightguide measured in at least one selected from the light emitting region, the light mixing region, and the lightguide group using a Minolta CM-508d spectrophotometer is from Edmund Optics Inc. on the inner walls. A light absorption 6"x6"x6" box containing a light absorption blackout material of 30%, 20%, 10%, 7%, 5 with the spectral component included and the spectral component excluded when placed on the box %, and less than one selected from the group 2% In another embodiment, measured within the main emission area (area containing greater than 80% of the total light emitted from the light guide) using a Minolta CM-508d spectrophotometer The diffuse reflectance of the lightguides included when placed over a light absorbing 6"x6"x6" box containing a Light Absorbing Black-Out Material from Edmund Optics Inc. on the inner wall. And the spectral component is less than one selected from the 30%, 20%, 10%, 7%, 5%, and 2% groups with excluded states.

In another embodiment, the average transparency of the light guide measured in at least one selected from the light emitting area, the light mixing area, and the light guide group measured by the BYK Gardner haze meter is 70%, 80%, 88%, 92%. , 94%, 96%, 98%, and 99%.

Factors that can determine the transmission of light through the film (in the thickness direction) are intrinsic material absorption, index of refraction (light loss due to Fresnel reflections), scattering from particles (refraction, reflection, or diffraction) or within a volume or Features on the surface or interface (size, shape, spacing, total number or density of particles in two orthogonal directions parallel to the film plane and a plane orthogonal to the film), other materials (additional layers, claddings, adhesives) Absorption/scattering/reflection/refraction due to, etc.), anti-reflective coatings, surface relief features.

In one embodiment, the use of a thin film for the lightguide enables a reduction in the size of the light extraction features as more waveguide modes will reach the light extraction feature as the film thickness decreases. In thin lightguides, the overlap of the modes increases as the thickness of the waveguide is reduced.

In one embodiment, the film-based light guide has a graded refractive profile in the thickness direction. In another embodiment, the thickness of the lightguide area or lightguide is less than 10 microns. In a further embodiment, the thickness of the lightguide area is less than 10 microns and the lightguide is a single mode lightguide.

In one embodiment, the light transmitting material used in at least one selected from the group of the combination light guide, light guide, light guide region, optical element, optical film, core layer, cladding layer, and optical adhesive group is 50 for the wavelength range of interest. , 100, 200, 300, 400, and 500 dB/km have less than one optical absorption (dB/km) selected from the group. The optical absorption value may be for all wavelengths across a range of interest or an average value across wavelengths of interest. The wavelength range of interest for high transmission through the light transmitting material may cover the light source output spectrum, the light emitting device output spectrum, optical functionality requirements (e.g. IR transmission for cameras, motion detectors, etc.), or some combination thereof. have. The wavelength range of interest is 400nm-700nm, 300nm-800nm, 300nm-1200nm, 300nm-350nm, 300-450nm, 350nm-400nm, 400nm-450nm, 450nm-490nm, 490nm-560nm, 500nm-550nm, 550nm-600nm, 600nm- It may be a wavelength range selected from the group of 650nm, 635nm-700nm, 650nm-700nm, 700nm-750nm, 750nm-800nm, and 800nm-1200nm.

Collimated light traveling through the light transmitting material may decrease in intensity after passing through the material due to scattering (scattering loss factor), absorption (absorption factor), or a combination of scattering and absorption (attenuation factor). In one embodiment, the core material of the lightguide is one selected from the group 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over a visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. It has a smaller average absorption coefficient for collimated light. In another embodiment, the core material of the lightguide is one selected from the group 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over the visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. It has a smaller average scattering loss factor for collimated light. In one embodiment, the core material of the lightguide is one selected from the group 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over a visible wavelength spectrum from 400 nanometers to 700 nanometers. It has an average attenuation factor for the smaller collimated light. In another embodiment, the lightguide is arranged to receive infrared light and the average of at least one selected from the group of absorption coefficient, scattering loss coefficient, and attenuation coefficient of the core layer or cladding layer for collimated light is at 700 nanometers. It is less than one selected from the groups 0.03 cm ^-1 , 0.02 cm ^-1 , 0.01 cm ^-1 , and 0.005 cm ^-1 over a wavelength spectrum up to 900 nanometers.

In one embodiment, the light guide has low absorption in the UV and blue regions, and the light guide further includes a phosphor film or a wavelength conversion element. By using a blue or UV light source and a wavelength converting element near the output surface of the light guide for generation of white light, the light transmitting material can be optimized for very high blue or UV light transmission. This can increase the range of materials suitable for light guides to include those with high absorption coefficients in the green and red wavelength regions, for example.

In another embodiment, the light guide is a substrate for display technology. Various high-performance films are known in the display industry as having sufficient mechanical and optical properties. These include, but are not limited to, polycarbonate, PET, PMMA, PEN, COC, PSU, PFA, FEP, and films made of blends and multilayer components. In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is that the film is used as a substrate for production or an OLED display, MEMs-based display, polymer film-based display, bistable display, electrophoretic display, electrochromic display, electro-optic display, passive matrix display It is formed in the light guide area of the film before or after being used as a substrate for a display, such as, or other displays that can be produced using polymer substrates.

Refractive index of light transmitting material

In one embodiment, the core material of the light guide has a high refractive index and the cladding material has a low refractive index. In one embodiment, the core is greater than one selected from the group 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, and 3.0. It is formed of a material having a refractive index (n _D ). In another embodiment, the refractive index (n _D ) of the cladding material is greater than one selected from the group 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5. small.

In one embodiment, the core region of the film-based lightguide includes a material having a refractive index difference in two or more orthogonal directions less than one selected from the group 0.1, 0.05, 0.02, 0.01, 0.005, and 0.001. In one embodiment, the light transmitting material is semi-crystalline with low refractive index birefringence. In another embodiment, the light transmitting material is substantially amorphous and has low stress induced birefringence.

The core or cladding or other light-transmitting material used in the embodiments may be a thermoplastic resin, a thermosetting resin, rubber, polymer, silicone or other light-transmitting material. Optical products can be prepared from high refractive index materials including monomers such as high refractive index (meth)acrylate monomers, halogenated monomers, and other high refractive index refractive monomers as known in the art. High refractive index materials such as these and others are described, for example, in US Pat. Nos. 4,568,445; 4,721,377; 4,812,032; 5,424,339; 5,183,917; 6,541,591; 7,491,441; Nos. 7297810, 6,355,754, 7,682,710; 7,642,335; 7,632,904; 7,407,992; 7,375,178; 6,117,530; 5,777,433; 6,533,959; 6,541,591; 7,038,745 and US Patent Application No. 11/866521; 12/165765; 12/307,555; And 11/556,432. High refractive index pressure sensitive adhesives such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/608,019 may be used as the core layer or layer component.

Low refractive index materials include sol gels, fluoropolymers, fluorinated sol gels, PMP, and other materials such as fluoropolyether urethanes such as those disclosed in 7,575,847, and U.S. Patent Application No. 11/972034 ; 12/559690; 12/294694; No. 10/098,813; No. 11/026,614; And US Patent No. 7,374,812; 7,709,551; 7,625,984; 7,164,536; 5,594,830 and 7,419,707 and other low refractive index materials.

Materials such as nanoparticles (eg titanium dioxide, and other oxides), blends, alloys, doping, sol gel, and other techniques can be used to reduce or increase the refractive index of a material.

In another embodiment, the refractive index or position of the lightguide or area of the lightguide area changes in response to environmental changes or controlled changes. These changes include current, electromagnetic field, magnetic field, temperature, pressure, chemical reaction, motion of particles or substances (such as electrophoresis or electrowetting), optical irradiation, orientation of an object to a gravitational field, MEMS devices, MOEMS devices, and Other techniques for altering mechanical, electrical, optical or physical properties such as those known to smart materials may be included. In one embodiment, the light extraction feature combines some light from the lightguide in response to an applied voltage or electromagnetic field. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a lightguide, wherein the characteristics of the lightguide (such as the position of the lightguide) are described in US Patent Application Serial No. 12/511693; 12/606675; 12/221606; 12/258206; No. 12/483062; No. 12/221193; 11/975411, 11/975398; No. 10/31/2003; 10/699,397 and US Pat. No. 7,586,560; 7,535,611; 6,680,792; 7,556,917; 7,532,377; And some light from a light guide such as those incorporated in MEMs type displays and devices disclosed in 7,297,471.

Edges of the light guide

In one embodiment, the edges of the light guide or light guide area are coated and coupled or disposed adjacent to the specular reflective material, partially diffusely reflective material, or diffuse reflective material. In this embodiment, the lightguide edges are coated with a specular reflective ink comprising nanosized or micron sized particles or flakes that substantially specularly reflect light. In another embodiment, a light reflective element (such as a specularly reflective multilayer polymer film with high reflectivity) is disposed close to the lightguide edge, and is disposed to receive light from the edge, reflect it, and direct it back in the lightguide. In another embodiment, the lightguide edges are circular, and the percentage of light diffracted from the edge is reduced. The method of achieving circular edges cuts the lightguide from the film and uses a laser to achieve edge rounding through control of processing parameters (cutting speed, cutting frequency, laser power, etc.). In another embodiment, the edges of the light guide are tapered, angular serrated, or cut or formed to reflect light from the light source traveling into the combined light guide from the edge to reflect a folded area, a bent area, a light guide, a light guide area, or It is directed towards the optical axis of the light emitting device at an angle close to the optical axis of the light source. In a further embodiment, the two or more light sources are a first and a first portion of the light from the light source at an angle close to the optical axis of the light source toward the fold or bend area, the light guide area, the light guide area, or the optical axis of the light emitting device. Each pair of light is arranged with two or more combined light guides comprising light turning regions for each of the two light sources comprising two reflective surfaces. In one embodiment, one or more edges of the combined lightguides, lightguide, light mixing region, or lightguide region comprise a curved or arcuate profile at the intersection between two or more surfaces of the film in the region. In one embodiment, the edges in the area have a curved profile instead of a sharp corner to reduce the effects of diffraction and extraction of light near the area. In one embodiment, the edges of the one or more regions are circular cutting edges, such as a semi-circle, to remove a corner that can act as diffractive elements in the traveling light. Very thin lightguides (eg, less than 150 microns thick) have a high potential for diffracting light when facing sharp corners. Circular corners can be achieved, for example, by laser cutting the acrylic film to leave a dissolved edge that resolidifies into a circular edge.

Light guide surfaces

In one embodiment, at least one surface of the lightguide or lightguide region is coated and bonded or disposed adjacent to a specular reflective material, partially diffusely reflective material, or diffusely reflective material. In one embodiment, at least one lightguide surface is coated with a specular reflective ink comprising nanosized or micron sized particles or flakes that substantially specularly reflect light. In another embodiment, a light reflective element (such as a specularly reflective multilayer polymer film with high reflectivity) is placed close to the lightguide surface opposite the light-emitting surface, receiving light from the surface, reflecting it, and directing it back in the lightguide. do. In another embodiment, the outer surface of the at least one lightguide or component associated with the lightguide includes microstructures to reduce the appearance of fingerprints. Such microstructures are known in the field and examples of hard coating of displays described in US Patent Application Serial No. 12/537,930.

Shape of light guide

In one embodiment, the light guide shape or at least one portion of the light guide surface is substantially flat, curved, cylindrical, substantially formed from a flat film, spherical, partially spherical, angular, twisted, round, secondary curved surface , Spheroid, rectangular parallelepiped, parallelepiped, triangular prism, rectangular prism, ellipse, oval, cone pyramid, tapered triangular prism, corrugated shape, and at least one selected from the group of other known geometric solids or shapes. In one embodiment, the light guide is a film formed into a shape by heat molding or other forming techniques. In another embodiment, the film or region of the film tapers in at least one direction. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a plurality of lightguides and a plurality of light sources (eg, such as tiled in a 1x2 array) physically coupled or arranged together. In other embodiments, the film includes a light guide area or is substantially rectangular, square, circular, donut-shaped (oval with holes in the inner area), oval, straight strips, and tubes (circular, rectangular, polygonal, or Has a different cross-sectional shape). In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide is one or more spaces (e.g., combined lightguides, lightguide areas, or light blending areas) that assist in maintaining a stamp, bend, fold, or position relative to other components. ) Or attaches or guides it to other components (such as, for example, without limitation, housing, frame, optical input coupler, device housing).

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light guide formed from a film in a hollow cylindrical tube comprising coupling light guide strips branching from the film at a short edge facing the inside of the cylinder. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a film light guide having a combined light guide cut into a film, and the coupling with the light guide region remains, and the center strip is not optically coupled to the light guide, and the center strip region or strip Provides a spine with increased intensity in at least one direction close to the light guide area close to. In a further embodiment, the light-emitting device includes a light guide having light input couplers arranged so that the light source is disposed in the central region of the edge of the light guide, and the light input coupler (or its component) cannot extend beyond the edge and is 1x2 , 2x2, 2x3, 3x3 or more, the light guides may be tiled on at least one of the arrays. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises light emitting lightguides, wherein the separation between the lightguides in at least one of the directions along the light emitting surface is less than one selected from the group 10mm, 5mm, 3mm, 2mm, 1mm and 0.5mm. .

In another embodiment, the lightguide is folded under or above the lightguide including a single fold or a bend close to the edge of the lightguide. In this embodiment, light, which may typically be lossy at the edge of the lightguide, can be further extracted from the lightguide after folding or bending, increasing the optical efficiency of the lightguide or device. In another embodiment, the light extraction features in the lightguide are placed in the optical path of light within the lightguide after folding or bending, and from the luminance, luminance uniformity, color uniformity, optical efficiency, and image or logo sharpness or resolution group. Provides light extraction features that increase at least one selected.

Fold of edges around the back of the light guide

In one embodiment, at least one edge selected from the group of light guides, light guide regions, and combined light guides is folded or bent by itself, and is optically coupled to the light guide, the light guide region, or the combined light guide. The part where the edge area starts is coupled to the light guide, the light guide area, or the rear surface of the combined light guide in a direction away from the edge area. The edge regions may be attached using adhesives such as PSA or other adhesives, thermal bonding, or other optical bonding to the back of the light guide, light guide area or bonding light guide. In one embodiment, by folding the edge regions of the light guide, the edge of the film can normally exit the rear surface of the light guide, thereby increasing the optical efficiency of the system.

In another embodiment, the thickness of the light guide, light guide area, or combined light guide is less than the average thickness of the light guide in the light emitting area or light guide area in the area near the edge. In another embodiment, the thickness of the light guide, light guide area, or combination light guide is 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40 of the average thickness of the light guide in the light emitting area or light guide area. %, 30%, 20%, 10%, and less than one selected from the 5% group.

In one embodiment, the thickness of the light guide, light guide area, or combined light guide tapers in the area near the edge. In one embodiment, by tapering the thickness in the region near the edge, it is possible to allow more light to be coupled to the back side within the lightguide when optically coupled with the surface of the lightguide or the lightguide region.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is 50%, 60%, 70%, 80, defined as the light emitting flux of light exiting the light emitting device in a light emitting region divided by the light emitting flux of light arranged to direct light to the input coupler. %, and an optical efficiency greater than one selected from the group 90%.

In another embodiment, the edge region of the light guide that is not arranged to receive light directly from the light source or the light input coupler is formed by a light output coupler comprising combined light guides that are folded or bent to produce a light output surface, or Are combined. In another embodiment, the light output surface is optically coupled to or disposed near the light input surface of the light input coupler for the same light guide or film, or a second light guide or film. In this embodiment, the light reaching the edge of the light guide may be combined into folded or bent bonding strips to direct the light to the back side within the light guide and reuse the light.

Reflective features cut to the edge of the lightguide

In one embodiment, one or more regions of the film-based lightguide include reflective features disposed to reflect light within a range of a first angle to a rear surface within the lightguide by total reflection. In one embodiment, the reflective features are angled features, triangular features, triangular features with a vertex angle of substantially 90 degrees, arcs, semicircular arcs, shapes with arcuate and straight features, polyhedral shapes, And one or more shape features cut along an edge selected from the group of polygonal shapes. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light input coupler disposed along one side and a plurality of “zig-zagged” angled cuts in a film on the opposite side having a 90 degree vertex angle. . In this embodiment, light in the film reaching angled cuts directly at about 0 degrees from the opposite side may be substantially retroreflected to the back side in the lightguide. The shape, angle, refractive index, and position of the angled cuts affect the range and percentage of the angle of the light reflected back in the light guide. The cuts may be "micro-cuts" so they do not substantially extend the lateral distance of the film based lightguide. In one embodiment, since the optical axis of light propagating through the film-based light guide is in the x direction, and the vertex angle of the reflective features is 90 degrees, the reflectance of light that is not extracted by the light extraction surface features is maximized and light emission that is reused It is directed backwards towards the area Other facet shapes or curved shapes can also be cut from the edge to achieve the desired reflective or light transmitting properties.

Light guide material

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light guide or light guide region formed of at least one light transmitting material. In one embodiment, the light guide is a film including at least one core region and at least one cladding region, and each including at least one light transmitting material. In one embodiment, the core material is substantially flexible (rubber or adhesive, etc.), and the cladding material is selected from the group of increased flexural modulus, increased impact strength, increased tear resistance, and increased scratch resistance for component elements. Support and provide at least one. In another embodiment, the cladding material is substantially flexible (rubber or adhesive, etc.), and the core material is selected from the group of increased flexural modulus, increased impact strength, increased tear resistance, and increased scratch resistance for component elements. Maintain and provide at least one.

The light-transmitting material used in the embodiments may be thermoplastic, thermosetting, rubber, polymer, high-transmissive silicone, glass, composite, alloy, blend, silicone, other light-transmitting material, or a combination thereof.

In one embodiment, the component or region of the light emitting device is a cellulose derivative (e.g., cellulose ethers such as ethylcellulose and cyanoethylcellulose, cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate), acrylic resins, styrenic resins ( For example, polystyrene), polyvinyl-series resins (e.g., poly(vinyl ester) such as poly(vinyl acetate), poly(vinyl halide) such as poly(vinylchloride), polyvinylalkylethers or Polyether-series resins such as poly(vinylmethylether), poly(vinylisobutylether) and poly(vinyl t-butylether)), polycarbonate-series resins (e.g., bisphenol A-type polycarbonate Aromatic polycarbonates such as), polyester-series resins (e.g. homopolyesters, for example polyalkylene terephthalates such as polyethylene terephthalate and polybutylene terephthalate, polyalkylene terephthalate) Phthalates and corresponding polyalkylene naphthalates; Copolyesters containing alkylene terephthalate and/or alkylene naphthalate as a main component; homopolymers of lactones such as polycaprolactone), polyamide-series resin ( For example, nylon 6, nylon 66, nylon 610), urethane-series resins (e.g. thermoplastic polyurethane resins), copolymers of monomers forming the resins (e.g. methyl methacrylate- Styrene copolymer (MS resin), acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer (AS resin), styrene-(meth)acrylic acid copolymer, styrene-maleic anhydride copolymer and styrene-butadiene copolymer, vinylacetate-vinyl chloride copolymer , Styrene-based copolymers such as vinylalkylether-maleic anhydride copolymers). Alternatively, the copolymer can be either a random copolymer, a block copolymer, or a graft copolymer.

Light guide material including glass

In one embodiment, the combined lightguides comprise a core material comprising a glass material. In one embodiment, the glass material is fused silica, UV grade fused silica (JGS1 from Dayoptics Inc., Suprasil® 1 and 2 from Heraeus Quartz America, LLC., Spectrosil® from Saint-Gobain Quartz PLC. A and B, and Corning 7940 from Corning Incorporated, Dynasil® Synthetic Fused Silica 1100 and 4100 from Dynasil Corporation), optical grade fused quartz, full spectrum fused silica, borosilicate glass, crown glass, and It is one selected from the group of aluminoborosilicate glass.

In another embodiment, the core material comprises glass having an organic material coated and applied to at least one selected from the group of edges, top surface, and bottom surface. In one embodiment, the coating on the glass functions at least one selected from the group of providing a cladding area, increasing impact resistance, and providing increased flexibility. In another embodiment, bonded lightguides comprising glass, polymeric material, or rubber material are heated at a temperature above their glass transition temperature or VICAT softening point prior to folding in the first direction.

Multi-layer light guide

In one embodiment, the lightguide includes at least two layers or coatings. In another embodiment, the layers or coatings are a core layer, a cladding layer, a tie layer (which promotes adhesion of two different layers), a layer that increases the bending strength, a layer that increases the impact strength (e.g., Izod, Charpy, such as Gardner), and at least one selected from the group of carrier layers. In a further embodiment, the at least one layer or coating comprises microstructures, surface relief patterns, light extraction features, lenses, or other non-planar surface features that divert a portion of the incident light at an angle from within the lightguide. And, as a result, it escapes the lightguide in the area near the feature. For example, the carrier film can be a silicone film with embossed light extraction features disposed to receive a thermosetting polycarbonate resin. In another embodiment, the carrier film is removed in contact with the core material in at least one area. For example, the carrier film can be an embossed FEP film and the thermosetting methacrylate-based resin is coated on the film and cured by heat, light, other radiation, or a combination thereof. In another embodiment, the core material comprises a methacrylate material and the cladding comprises a silicone material. In another embodiment, the cladding material is coated on the carrier film and the core layer material, such as substantially silicone, PC, or PMMA based material, is coated or extruded onto the cladding material. In one embodiment, the cladding layer is very thin to support itself in the coating line, so a carrier film is used. The coating can have surface relief properties on the side opposite to the carrier film, for example.

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a core material disposed between two cladding regions, wherein the core region comprises polymethylmethacrylate, polystyrene, or other amorphous polymer, and the lightguide comprises a first curvature. Is bent in the radius and core region, the cladding region fractures in the bend region, wherein the same core region comprises the same polymethyl methacrylate without breaking more than 50% of the cladding regions or layers when bent at the first radius of curvature . In another embodiment, the lightguide comprises a soft polymeric material disposed on both sides of a substantially brittle material of a first thickness, such as PMMA or polystyrene, substantially without impact modifiers, and the polymeric fracture toughness of the lightguide or ASTM D4812 not notched. The un-notched Izod impact strength is greater than a single layer of brittle material of the first thickness.

Core region containing thermosetting material

In one embodiment, the thermosetting material is coated on a thermoplastic film, wherein the thermosetting material is a core material and the cladding material is a thermoplastic film or material. In another embodiment, a first thermoset material is coated on a film comprising a second thermoset material, wherein the first thermoset material is a core material and the cladding material is a second thermoset plastic.

In one embodiment, an epoxy resin generally used as a molding material may be used as the epoxy resin (A). Examples include epoxidation products of novolac resins derived from phenols and aldehydes such as phenol novolac epoxy resins and ortho-cresol novolac epoxy resins; Diglycidyl ethers such as bisphenol A, bisphenol F, bisphenol S, and alkyl-substituted bisphenol; Glycidylamine epoxy resins obtained by reaction of polyamines such as diaminodiphenylmethane and isocyanuric acid having epichlorohydrin; Straight-chain aliphatic epoxy resins obtained by oxidation of an olefin bond having a peracid such as peracetic acid; And alicyclic epoxy resins. Any two or more of these resins may be used in combination. Examples of thermosetting resins include bisphenol A epoxy resins, bisphenol F epoxy resins, bisphenol S epoxy resins, diglycidyl isocyanurate, and triglycidyl isocyanurate, P(MMA-d8) material, fluorine Triazines derived from synthetic resins, deuterated polymers, poly(fluoroalkyl-MA), poly(deuterated fluoroalkyl-MA), triduterohexafluorobutyl-pentadeuteromethacrylate, and epoxy resins It includes more.

In another embodiment, the thermosetting resin is a thermosetting silicone resin. In a further embodiment, the thermosetting silicone resin composition includes a substituent-containing silicone compound capable of condensation reaction and a substituent-containing silicone compound capable of addition reaction. In another embodiment, the thermosetting silicone resin composition is a substituent-containing silicone compound capable of condensation reaction, including a double-ended silanol type silicone oil; Silicone compounds containing alkenyl groups; Organohydrogensiloxane as a substituent-containing silicone compound capable of addition reaction; Condensation catalyst; And a hydrosilylation catalyst. In one embodiment, the thermosetting resin is a methylphenyldimethyl copolymer or contains a silicone-based material as described in US Pat. No. 7,551,830. In another embodiment, the thermosetting resin is a polydiorganosiloxane having an average of at least two aliphatic unsaturated organic groups and at least one aromatic group per molecule; (B) branched polyorganosiloxane having an average of at least one aliphatic unsaturated organic group and at least one aromatic group per molecule; (C) a polyorganohydrogensiloxane having an average of at least two silicon-bonded hydrogen atoms per molecule and at least one aromatic group, (D) a hydrosilylation catalyst, and (E) a silylated acetylene inhibitor. In another embodiment, the thermoset comprises silicone, polysiloxane, or silsesquioxane materials such as those disclosed in US Patent Application Serial Nos. 12/085422 and 11/884612.

In a further embodiment, the thermosetting material comprises: a liquid crystal thermosetting oligomer containing at least an aromatic or alicyclic structure having a kink structure in the main chain and having one or two thermally crosslinkable reactive groups introduced at one or both ends of the main chain; Either or both of a crosslinking agent or an epoxy compound having thermally crosslinkable reactive groups at both ends thereof; And organic solvents. In a further embodiment, the thermosetting composition is at least one selected from the group of aluminosiloxanes, silicone oils containing silanol groups at both ends, epoxy silicones, and silicone elastomers. In this thermosetting composition, the silicone oil containing aluminosiloxane and/or silanol groups at both ends, and each of the hydroxyl groups of the highly reactive epoxy groups of the epoxy silicone react at the same time as the silicone elastomer is crosslinked by hydrosilylation It is thought to be crosslinked. In another embodiment, the thermosetting is a photopolymerizable composition. In another embodiment, the photopolymerizable composition comprises a silicone-containing resin comprising a silicone-bonded hydrogen and aliphatic unsaturation, a first metal-containing catalyst activated by actinic radiation, and a second activated by heat other than actinic radiation Metal-containing catalysts.

In another embodiment, the thermosetting resin comprises a silsesquioxane derivative or Q-containing silicone. In another embodiment, the thermosetting resin is US Patent Application Nos. 12/679749, 12/597531, 12/489881, 12/637359, 12/637359, 12/549956, and 12/759293, 12/553227, 11/137358, 11/391021, and 11/551323 resins with substantially high permeability.

In one embodiment, the light guide material for the core region includes a material having a glass transition temperature lower than that selected from the group -100, -110, -120, -130, -140, -150°C. In another embodiment, the material for the core region of the light guide is selected from the group of 2.8, 2, 1.8, 1.6, 1.5, 1.2, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.4, 0.2, 0.1, 0.08, 0.06, and 0.04 kilopascals. Includes materials with a smaller Young's modulus. In one embodiment, a material having a low Young's modulus and/or a low glass transition temperature is used to reduce tearing or tearing when folding the bonding lightguides, such as but not limited when using a relative positioning element. do.

In a further embodiment, the light guide is on the element of the light emitting device (coated carrier film, optical film, rear polarizer in LCD, brightness enhancing film, thermal transfer element such as a thin sheet comprising aluminum, or white reflector film). It contains a thermosetting resin to be coated, and is then cured or thermosetted.

Light guide material with adhesive properties

In another embodiment, the light guide is at least one element of the light emitting device (coated carrier film, optical film, rear polarizer in LCD, brightness enhancement film, other area of light guide, combined light guide, thin sheet including aluminum) And a material having at least one selected from the group of chemical attachment, dispersion attachment, electrostatic attachment, diffusion attachment, and mechanical attachment to a thermal transfer element such as a white reflector film). In a further embodiment, at least one of the core materials or the cladding material of the lightguide is an adhesive material. In a further embodiment, at least one selected from the group of materials disposed in the core material, the cladding material, and the cladding material of the lightguide is pressure sensitive adhesive, contact adhesive, hot adhesive, dry adhesive, multiple reactive adhesive, single reactive adhesive, natural Adhesive, and at least one selected from the group of synthetic adhesives. In a further embodiment, the first core material of the first combined lightguide is adhered to the second core material of the second combined lightguide by adhesion of the first core material, the second core material, or a combination thereof. In another embodiment, the cladding material of the first combined light guide is attached to the core material of the second combined light guide by adhesion of the cladding material. In another embodiment, the first cladding material of the first combined lightguide is adhered to the second cladding material of the second combined lightguide by adhesion of the first cladding material, the second cladding material, or a combination thereof. In one embodiment, the core layer is an adhesive and is selected from the group of a cladding layer, a removable retention layer, a protective film, a second adhesive layer, a polymer film, a metal film, a second core layer, a low contact area cover, and a planarization layer. It is coated on at least one. In other embodiments, the cladding material or core material has adhesive properties, and the bandwidth when attached to an element of a light emitting device without limitation, e.g., a cladding layer, a core layer, a low contact area cover, a circuit board, or a housing, etc. It has an ASTM D3330 peel strength greater than those selected from the group 8.929, 17.858, 35.716, 53.574, 71.432, 89.29, 107.148, 125.006, 142.864, 160.722, 178.580 kg per kilogram.

In another embodiment, the tie layer, primer, or coating has adhesion between at least one selected from the group of core materials and cladding materials, light guides and housings, core materials and elements of the light emitting device, cladding materials and elements of the light emitting device. It is used to promote. In one embodiment, the tie layer or coating comprises dimethyl silicone or a variant thereof and a solvent. In another embodiment, the tie layer includes a phenyl-based primer such as that used for bridged phenylsiloxane-based silicones with substrate materials. In another embodiment, the tie layer comprises a further-cured silicone primer such as used to bond platinum-catalyzed, plastic film substrates and silicone pressure sensitive adhesives.

In a further embodiment, at least one region of the core material or cladding material has adhesive properties and is optically coupled to a second region of the core or cladding material such that the ASTM D1003 luminous transmittance through the system defines the air gap disposed therebetween. Has at least one selected from the group 1%, 2%, 3%, and 4% greater than the transmission through the same two materials in the same area.

The outermost surface of the film or light guide

In one embodiment, the outermost surface, light guide or light guide area of the film matches the surface texture of the cladding, clothing or upholstery, or surface texture to simulate a soft feel, light extraction features (such as a microlens array). ) At least one selected from the group of refractive elements, an adhesive layer, a removable backing material, an anti-reflective coating, an anti-glare surface, and a rubber surface for parallelizing the light from)

Surface relief on the outermost surface of a film-based light guide or luminous film

*In one embodiment, the outermost surface of the film, light guide, light-emitting film, light turning element, or light-emitting device includes surface relief features and the ASTM D523-89 60 degree gloss of the surface is 100, 50, 25 , And at least one selected from the group 15. In one embodiment, the gloss on the exterior surface reduces the ambient glare light intensity that highlights the surface. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light guide having an outermost surface with a constant low gloss of 2 gloss units. When this light guide is placed on a wall with a matte or on a surface dispersed with gloss of about 2 gloss units, a light guide that is substantially transparent or translucent with high transmittance of visible light is glare from the light source by matching the gloss of the outermost surface. It is almost invisible even at angles. In an embodiment, the light emitting device is substantially less visible in the off state of an application such as a wall mounted to a luminaire. In one embodiment, the outermost surface having a small gloss is the surface of the anti-glare film, the embossed film, the cladding layer, the light turning element, the light turning optical element, the light collimating optical element, the light guide, the core area (core area If there is no cladding surface on the side of the), a light turning element, a light emitting device cover, a lens, or a housing element.

In one embodiment, the outermost surface of the film, light guide, light emitting film, light turning element, or light emitting device is ASTM D523-89 60 degrees greater than at least one selected from the group 50, 70, 90, 100, and 110. It has a gloss. In this embodiment, high gloss can match a glossy surface such as a window, a glass partition, a metal surface, and the like, so that the visibility is small in the off state of the glare angles. In another embodiment, the kit comprises a light emitting device and one or more films having a gloss level different from that of the outermost surface of the light emitting device to select a gloss level for the new outermost surface. Can be attached. For example, a film with the correct gloss label can be selected to match the gloss level of the light emitting device and adjacent walls.

LIGHT EXTRACTION METHOD

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group of light guides, light guide regions, and light emitting regions includes at least one light extraction feature or region. In one embodiment, a method of extracting light includes effectively coupling the light extracting features to a core region, a light guide region, or a material effectively coupled to the core region or to the light guide region. Effective coupling of light extraction features to a region includes adding, removing, or altering material within the surface of the region or within the volume of the region; Placing a substance within the surface of the region or within the volume of the region; Applying a substance to the surface of the region or the volume of the region; Printing or painting a material on the surface of the area or within the volume of the area; Removing material from the surface of the area or volume of the area; Modifying the surface or area of the area within the volume of the area; Stamping or embossing the surface or area of the area within the volume of the area; Scratching, sanding, ablating, or scribing the surface or area of the area within the volume of the area; Forming light extraction features in the volume of the region on the surface of the region; Bonding the material on the surface of the area or within the volume of the area; Adhering a material to the surface of the cladding area or within the volume of the cladding area; Optically coupling the light extraction features to the surface of the region or the volume of the region; It includes, without limitation, selective coupling or physical coupling of light extraction features to an intermediate surface, layer, or region by a material disposed between the light extraction features and the regions. In another embodiment, the light extraction feature is effectively combined with the region so that the portion of light that travels within the region incident on the light extraction feature exits the region or can be redirected for an angle less than the critical angle so that it It does not remain in the area, the combined light guide, the light guide, or any other area that proceeds by total reflection.

In one embodiment, the light extraction area or feature is defined by a high or low surface pattern or volume area. High and low surface patterns include scattering material, high lenses, scattering surfaces, pits, grooves, surface modulations, microlenses, lenses, diffractive surface features, holographic surface features, photonic bandgap features , Wavelength converting materials, holes, edges of the layers (such as the area where the cladding was removed from the core layer cover), pyramid shapes, prism shapes, and other geometric shapes with flat surfaces, curved surfaces Fields, random surfaces, quasi-random surfaces, and merging thereof. The volumetric scattering regions in the light extraction region are phase domains, voids, the absence of other materials or regions (gaps, holes), air gaps, dispersed in a volume of material different from a coplanar layer with parallel interfacial surfaces Borders between layers and regions, and other refractive index discontinuities. In one embodiment, the light extraction region includes an angled or curved surface or volume light extraction feature that redirects the first redirection percentage of light in an angular range within typically 5 degrees perpendicular to the light emitting surface of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the first redirection percentage is greater than at least one selected from the group 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, and 90. In one embodiment, the light extraction features are light turning features, light extraction regions or light output combining features.

In one embodiment, the light guide or light guide region includes light extraction features in a plurality of regions. In one embodiment, the light guide or light guide area comprises one outer surface, two outer surfaces, two outer and opposite surfaces, an outer surface and at least one area disposed between the two outer surfaces, at least one Light extraction features on or in at least one selected from the group in substantially two volume planes parallel to the outer surface or light emitting surface or plane of the. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light emitting region on a lightguide region of the lightguide comprising more than one of the light extraction features. In another embodiment, one or more light extraction features are disposed over another light extraction feature. For example, the grooved light extraction features include light scattering hollow microspheres that may increase the amount of light extracted from the lightguide or further scatter or redirect the light extracted by the groove. More than one type of light extraction feature may be used on a surface, within the volume of a lightguide or lightguide region, or in combination thereof.

In one embodiment, the lateral dimensions of the one or more light extraction features in the light emission region in a direction parallel to the optical axis of light in the lightguide in the light extraction feature are 1 mm, 500 microns, 250 microns, 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 Is less than one selected from the group of microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, 20 microns, 10 microns, 5 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.5 microns, and 0.3 microns. In another embodiment, the lateral dimensions of the one or more light extraction features in the light emission region in a direction parallel to the optical axis of light in the lightguide in the light extraction features are 1 mm, 500 microns, 250 microns, 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 Is less than one selected from the group of microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, 20 microns, 10 microns, 5 microns, 2 microns, 1 microns, 0.5 microns, and 0.3 microns.

In another embodiment, the dimension of the one or more light extraction features in the light emitting region in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light in the light guide in the light extraction features or in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide between the light extraction features is 1 mm, 500 micron, 250 micron, 200 micron, 150 micron, 100 micron, 75 micron, 50 micron, 25 micron, 20 micron, 10 micron, 5 micron, 2 micron, 1 micron, 0.5 micron, and 0.3 micron group small. In another embodiment, the average dimension of the light extraction features in the light emitting region in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light in the light guide in the light extraction features or in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide between the light extraction features is 1 mm, 500 Less than one selected from the group micron, 250 micron, 200 micron, 150 micron, 100 micron, 75 micron, 50 micron, 25 micron, 20 micron, 10 micron, 5 micron, 2 micron, 1 micron, 0.5 micron, and 0.3 micron group .

In one embodiment, the separation distance between the first light extraction feature and the closest neighboring light extraction feature is one selected from the group 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, and 20 microns. Less than In another embodiment, the average separation between two neighboring light extraction features in one or more light emission regions of the film-based lightguide in a direction substantially parallel to the optical axis of light traveling into the lightguide in the region of the light extraction features. Is less than one selected from the group 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns, 25 microns, and 20 microns. In one embodiment, the light emitting device illuminates a first light extraction feature disposed to illuminate a first area or pixel of the display, and a second area adjacent to the first area or pixel of the display or a pixel of the display. A film-based lightguide comprising a second light extraction feature (a light extraction feature closest to the first light extraction feature) arranged to achieve a percentage of the light flux received by the second region or pixel And the percentage of light flux from the second light extraction feature received by the first region or pixel is less than one selected from the group 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5%. In one embodiment, a very thin-film based lightguide (e.g., such as 25 microns) is placed in the closest proximity to the spatial light modulator, and the film-based lightguide is substantially aligned with each light modulating pixel of the spatial light modulator. And one light extraction feature disposed in close proximity. In this embodiment, for example, large light extraction features (compared to the thickness of the lightguide) such as 200 microns in a lateral dimension parallel to the optical axis direction of light in the lightguide in the area of the light extraction features are large. It is possible to divert and extract a very significant portion of the light propagating in the waveguide over a wide range of angles, which can make uniform illumination across the illumination area difficult. In one embodiment, the average thickness of the film-based lightguide in the light emission region with respect to the average lateral dimension of the light extraction features in the light emission region in a direction parallel to the optical axis of light traveling within the light guide in the light extraction features The ratio of is greater than one selected from the groups 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000. In one embodiment, the average thickness of the film-based lightguide in the light-emitting region versus the average lateral dimension of the light-extraction features in the light-emitting region in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of light traveling in the lightguide in the light-extraction features, or The ratio of dimensions in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the lightguide between the light extraction features is greater than one selected from the groups 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000. In another embodiment, the average thickness of the film-based lightguide in the light-emitting region versus two neighboring light-extraction features in the light-emitting region in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light traveling in the lightguide in the light-extraction features. The ratio of the average separation distance of is greater than one selected from the groups 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000. In another embodiment, the average separation distance between neighboring light extraction features in a direction parallel to the optical axis of light traveling to the light guide in the light extraction features versus the optical axis of light traveling in the light guide at the light extraction features. The ratio of the average lateral dimensions of the light extraction features in the light emitting region in a direction parallel to the is greater than one selected from the groups 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 80, and 1000.

In one embodiment, the ratio of the average separation distance between the light extraction features in the light emission region in the first direction to the pitch of the pixels or the pitch of the sub-pixels in the first direction is 0.1 to 0.5, 0.5 to 1, 1 to 2 , 2 to 4, 4 to 10, 10 to 20, 20 to 100, 0.1 to 100, 0.1 to 1, 1 to 100, 1 to 10, and 1 to 20. In another embodiment, the ratio of the average lateral dimension of the light extraction features of the light emitting region in the first direction to the pitch of the pixel or the pitch of the sub-pixels in the first direction is 0.1 to 0.5, 0.5 to 1, 1 to 2, 2 to 4, 4 to 10, 10 to 20, 20 to 100, 0.1 to 100, 0.1 to 1, 1 to 100, 1 to 10, and 1 to 20.

In one embodiment, the light extraction features are substantially directional, angled surface features, curved surface features, rough surface features, random surface features, symmetrical surface features, scripted surface features, cut surfaces. Features, non-planar surface features, stamped surface features, molded surface features, compression molded surface features, thermoformed surface features, milled surface features, extrusion mixtures, blended materials, materials Alloys, composites of symmetric or asymmetric shaped materials, laser-removed surface features, embossed surface features, coated surface features, injection molded surface features, extruded surface features, and volume of lightguides. And one or more selected from a group of one of the above-described features to be disposed. For example, in one embodiment, the directional light extraction features are formed by coating embossing UV curing on a lightguide film that directs a portion of the light incident into the lightguide toward substantially 0 degrees from the normal surface of the lightguide It is a faceted groove that is 100 microns long and 45 degrees angled.

The light extraction region, light extraction feature, or light emitting region is disposed on the upper and/or lower surface of the lightguide. For example, when reflective white scattering points are printed on one surface of a lightguide, most of the light scattered from points that typically leak through the lightguide may leak through the opposite surface. With the surface relief light extraction features, most of the light exits the side of the lightguide depending on the shape of the features due to the redirection from the surface relief light extraction features.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction features are grooves, marks, curved, or angled features that redirect a portion of light incident in the first direction in a second direction in the same plane through total reflection. In another embodiment, the light extraction features redirect a first portion of light incident at a first angle to a second angle greater than a critical angle in the first output plane, and in a second output plane orthogonal to the first output plane. Increase the intensity of the full width at half the angle. In a further embodiment, the light extraction feature is a region comprising grooves, marks, curved or angled features, and substantially dispersed voids, beads, microspheres, substantially spherical domains, or randomly shaped. And a symmetrical or isotropic light scattering region of the material, such as a collection of domains, wherein the average scattering profile is substantially symmetrical or isotropic. In a further embodiment, the light extraction feature is a region comprising grooves, marks, curved or angled features, and substantially dispersed and elongated voids, elongated beads, asymmetrically shaped elliptical particles, It further comprises an anisotropic or asymmetric light scattering area of the material, such as fibers, or collection of shaped domains, wherein the average scattering is a substantially asymmetric or anisotropic profile. In one embodiment, the Bidirectional Scattering Distribution Function (BSDF) of the light extraction feature is controlled by manufacturing a predetermined light output profile or a light input profile to the light turning element of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, the at least one light extraction feature is an array, a pattern or a fluorophore, a phosphor, a fluorescent dye, an inorganic phosphor, a photonic bandgap material, a quantum dot material, a fluorescent protein, a fusion protein, Fluorophores attached to proteins, quantum dot fluorophores, small molecule fluorophores, aromatic fluorophores, conjugated fluorophores, and fluorescent dye scintillators, phosphors such as calcium sulfide, for specific functional groups, It is an arrangement, pattern, or alignment of a wavelength converting material selected from the group of rare earth phosphors, and other known wavelength converting materials.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a combination of specular, diffusive, or reflective materials. For example, the light extraction feature may be a substantially specular reflective ink disposed on each (such as a coating on a groove), or a substantially specular reflective ink, such as an ink containing titanium dioxide particles in a methacrylate-based binder (white paint). It may be a diffuse reflective ink. For example, in one embodiment, the light-emitting device is a film-based device comprising an inkjet to which a tube scattering point or shape is applied to one or more surfaces of a film-based light guide for extracting light from the light guide toward a printing or reflective display. It is a reflective display with a light guide. Alternatively, the light extraction feature is an ink with small silver particles further comprising titanium dioxide particles (micron or sub-micron, spherical or non-spherical, plate-shaped or non-plate-shaped, or silver coated on flakes ( Or a partially diffusely reflective ink such as aluminum)). In another embodiment, the degree of diffuse reflection is controlled by optimizing at least one selected from the group of each input of the device, the degree of collimation of the light output, and the percentage of light extracted from the region.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a lightguide having light extraction features optically coupled to a core region of the lightguide. For example, in one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a white reflective film spatially and optically coupled by a pattern of light transmitting adhesive regions disposed on the core region of the lightguide. In this embodiment, the air gaps between the adhesive regions completely reflect the indirect light inside the core region-air interface, and the adhesive transmits the incident light to the white reflective film that redirects the light to angles outside the total reflection condition . In another embodiment, the lightguide comprises a spatial array of light transmitting regions that transmit light from a lightguide including light extracting features to light extracting features or to a secondary lightguide. For example, in one embodiment, the light transmissive regions comprise an adhesive spatially printed on the lightguide. In another example, the light-transmitting regions are of apertures cut from the film to provide air gaps for total reflection on the lightguide surface and the light-transmitting regions to transmit light to the light extraction features or other lightguide with light extraction features. It includes a light-transmitting film.

In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a protrusion from a film-based lightguide material or layer. In another embodiment, the light extraction feature is a recessed area in the film-based lightguide layer. In one embodiment, the light extraction feature is a concave area that allows light exiting the lightguide in the area. In another embodiment, the light extraction region is a concave region that reflects a portion of the incident light towards the opposite surface of the film-based lightguide so that it passes through the opposite surface and exits the lightguide. In one embodiment, the film-based light guide is a cladding area (such as a low refractive index coating or a pressure sensitive adhesive) disposed in contact with protrusions, or protrusions or one or more areas of the light guide on the first side and the air gap area. ).

In another embodiment, the film-based light guide includes a first light guide area including first protruding areas, and the first light guide area is optically coupled to one or more coupling areas to the second light guide area. In a further embodiment, the second light guide area includes first concave areas that partially confirm the first protruding areas but do not completely confirm the shape, so that the air gap area is a first light guide area and a second light guide area. Remains in between. For example, in one embodiment, the first light guide includes first protruding areas having a truncated triangular cross-section, and the second light guide area includes first concave areas having a concave triangular cross-section. Contiguously arranged and aligned, the truncated region is a light formed by first and second optically coupled lightguide regions by total reflection (such as reflecting light towards a reflective spatial light modulator in a frontlight application). An air gap region through which light can be extracted is formed outside the guide. In an embodiment, the combined regions of the first and second light guide regions are disposed between two or more light extraction features, so that light traveling between the light extraction features is between the first and second light guide regions. You can proceed. For example, in one embodiment, the first light guide region is a silicon layer of protruding features, the second light guide region is a silicon layer of concave regions, and substantially planar regions between the concave and protruding regions are silicon layers. Because of the natural adhesive between the and the adhesive, optically bonded and bonded together, or no index matched adhesive is required. In another embodiment, the first light guide area and the second light guide area are formed of materials that can be optically coupled by applying heat and/or pressure.

In a further embodiment, the concave regions of the film-based lightguide include an adhesive or a low-refractive-index material in the concave regions, so that the difference in refractive index between the film-based lightguide and the adhesive or low-refractive-index material is determined by By being reflected or totally reflected, it functions as a light extraction feature for the lightguide. In this embodiment, the adhesive or low refractive index coating is a part of the volume of the concave area in the light guide, one or more surfaces of the concave features in the light guide, one or more surfaces of the protruding features in the light guide, the concave area of the light guide. Substantially the entire volume, and one or more of the areas selected from the group of one or more planar areas of the lightguide.

The pattern or arrangement of the light extraction features may vary in size, shape, pitch, position, height, width, depth, shape, and orientation in x, y, or z directions. Patterns and formulas or equations are known in the art of edge illuminated backlights to aid in the determination of placement to achieve spatial luminance or color uniformity. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a film-based lightguide comprising light extraction features disposed under the lenticular, wherein the light extraction features are substantially disposed in the formation of dotted lines under the lenticular to provide line features. The light extracted from the minus has a low angle FHWM intensity after turning from the lenticular lens array light turning element, and the length of the dotted line is changed to assist with the uniformity of light extraction. In another embodiment, the dotted pattern of the light extraction features changes in x and y directions, where the z direction is the optical axis of the light emitting device. Similarly, a two-dimensional microlens array film (dense or regular array) or an arrangement of microlenses can be used as a light turning element, and the light extraction features can be sized, shaped in the x direction, y direction, or a combination thereof. , Or a regular, irregular, or other arrangement of circles, oval shapes, or other patterns or shapes that can be changed in position.

VISIBILITY OF LIGHT EXTRACTION FEATURES

In one embodiment, the at least one light extraction area is not illuminated by light from within the light guide (such as when the device is in the off state or when a specific light guide is not illuminated in a multi light guide device). , Including light extraction features with low visibility to the viewer. In one embodiment, a light guide area, a square centimeter measurement area of a light emitting surface corresponding to light redirected by at least one light extraction feature, a light emission area, a light extraction feature, and a light extraction surface feature, or The luminance at at least one first measurement angle selected from the collection group of light extraction features is black, 10 lux, 50 lux, 75 lux, 100 lux, 200 lux, 300 lux, 400 lux when placed over a light absorbing surface. , 500 lux, 750 lux, and when exposed to diffuse the illuminance from one integrating sphere selected from the group of 1000 lux, 0.5 cd/m ² , 1 cd/m ² , 5 cd/m ² , 10 cd/m ² , Less than one selected from the group 50 cd/m ^2, and 100 cd/m ² . Examples of light absorbing surfaces include black velor clothing materials, black anodized aluminum, materials with diffuse reflectivity less than 5% (including reflective components), Edmund Optics Inc.'s Light Absorbing Black-Out Material, and It includes, without limitation, a window of a light trap box (a box with light absorbing black velours that line the walls). In one embodiment, the first measurement angle for luminance is 0 degrees, 5 degrees, 8 degrees, 10 degrees, 20 degrees, 40 degrees, 0-10 degrees, 0-20 degrees, 0-30 degrees from normal to the surface. , And 0-40 are also one selected from the group. In one embodiment, the luminance of light emitted from a 1 cm ² measurement area of a light emitting surface corresponding to light redirected by at least one light extraction feature is a Light Absorbing Black material from Edmund Optics Inc. -Out Material), less than 100 cd/m2 when exposed to a 200 lux diffusion illuminance from the integrating sphere. In another embodiment, the luminance of light emitted from the 1 cm ² measurement face of the light emitting surface corresponding to the light diverted by at least one light extraction feature is a light absorbing blackout material from Edmund Optics Inc. -Out Material), less than 50 cd/m ² when exposed to a 200 lux diffusion illuminance from the integrating sphere. In another embodiment, the luminance of light emitted from a 1 cm ² measurement area of the light emitting surface corresponding to light redirected by at least one or average of all light extraction features is a light absorbing blackout material from Edmund Optics Inc. Light Absorbing Black-Out Material), less than 25 cd/m ² when exposed to a 200 lux diffuse illuminance from the integrating sphere. In one embodiment, the thin lightguide film allows small features to be used for light extraction features or light extraction surface features that would be spatially degraded due to the thickness of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the average maximum dimension size of light extracting surface features in a plane parallel to the light emitting surface corresponding to the light emitting area of the light emitting device is 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.25 mm, 0.1 Less than one selected from the group mm, 0.080mm, 0.050mm, 0.040mm, 0.025mm, and 0.010mm.

In one embodiment, individual light extraction surface features, regions, or pixels are not identifiable, such as individual pixels, when the device emits light on a state, and is 10 centimeters, 20 centimeters, 30 centimeters, 40 centimeters. When viewed from a distance greater than one selected from the group of 50 centimeters, 100 centimeters, and 200 centimeters, it is not easily discernible when the light emitting device is in the off state. In this embodiment, the area may appear to emit light, but individual pixels or sub-pixels are not easily known from each other. In another embodiment, the intensity or color of the light emitting region of the light emitting device is controlled by spatial or temporary dithering or halftone printing. In one embodiment, the average size of the light extraction areas in square centimeters of the light emission area on the outer surface of the light emitting device is less than 500 microns, and the color and/or luminance increases the number of light extraction areas within a predetermined area. It is changed by decreasing or decreasing. In one embodiment, the luminance of the light extraction area or the light extraction features is normal to the surface from the side of the light extraction features or the side without the light extraction features under 50 lux ambient illumination and with a light source that does not emit light. , 1, 5, 10, 20, and 50 Cd/m ² is less than one selected from the group.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a sign on a light emitting surface comprising at least one selected from the group of light emitting regions and light extraction regions, and the single light extraction feature comprises 200 of diffused light in front of the Edmund Optics Inc light absorbing blackout material When illuminated with lux, it is not easily discernible by a person with vision between 0.5 and 1.5 minutes at a distance of 20 cm.

In another embodiment, the fill factor of the light extraction features, defined as the percentage of the surface area including the surface or layer of the light extraction features, lightguide or film in the light emission region, is less than 80%, less than 70%. , Less than 60%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, and less than 10%. The fill factor may be measured within the full emission square centimeter surface area or area of the lightguide or film (bound by regions in all directions in the plane of the lightguide emitting light), or the emission areas of the lightguides. It can be average. The fill factor can be measured when the light emitting device is in an on or off state (not emitting light).

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a sign of a light emitting surface comprising light emitting areas, wherein when the device does not emit light, each is distinguishable when the device is on at a distance of 20 cm. According to the extraction features, 0.001 degrees, 0.002 degrees, 0.004 degrees, 0.008 degrees, 0.010 degrees, 0.015 degrees, 0.0167 degrees, 0.02 degrees, 0.05 degrees, 0.08 degrees, 0.1 degrees, 0.16 degrees, 0.2 degrees, 0.3 degrees, Is less than one selected from the group of 0.4 degrees, 0.5 degrees, 0.6 degrees, 0.7 degrees, 0.8 degrees, 1 degree, 2 degrees, and 5 degrees. In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a sign on a light emitting surface comprising light emitting regions, wherein when the device does not emit light, the angle is two neighboring light extraction features at a distance of 20 cm (the device is diffused When illuminated with 200 lux of light, it is not easily distinguishable when off) from the groups of 0.3 degrees, 0.4 degrees, 0.5 degrees, 0.6 degrees, 0.7 degrees, 0.8 degrees, 1 degree, 2 degrees, and 5 degrees. Is less than the selected one.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction features of the light emitting device comprise light scattering domains of a material having a different refractive index than the surrounding material. In one embodiment, the light scattering domain is more than one selected from the group 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 3%, 1%, 0.5%, and 0.1% by volume or weight. It has a density in a continuous area with small light scattering domains (such as an inkjet placed in a white ink pixel). It can vary in x, y, or z directions, and the pixel or region can be overprinted to increase the thickness. In another embodiment, the light extraction features have a light absorption region disposed between the light extraction features and at least one output surface of the light emitting device. For example, the light extraction features may be a titanium dioxide-based white inkjet deposited on the lightguide, and a light absorbing ink (such as a black dye or ink containing carbon black particles) is placed over the white ink and from the white pixel. 50% of the scattered light is transmitted through the light absorbing ink. In this example, the ambient light that can be reflected from the white ink is reduced by 75% (passed twice through 50% absorbing ink) by no light absorbing ink, while the visibility of the dots is reduced, while the light Sufficient light from the guide is emitted from the light emitting device in an area close to the white pixel. In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group of low light transmission, 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, and 70% of the light emitted from the first light extraction feature The absorbing light absorbing material is disposed between the light extraction feature and at least one outer surface of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, the optical axis of the light in the light guide or in a first direction perpendicular to the light emitting surface of the light guide, perpendicular to the optical axis of light in the light guide in the light extraction feature, and parallel to the direction of light traveling from the light guide The thickness of the lightguide or core layer in the light extraction feature in a first direction selected from the group perpendicular to the direction of light traveling in the lightguide in the light extraction feature divided by the length of one or more light extraction features parallel to Greater than one selected from the groups 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, and 50.

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a coating comprising light extracting features or a coating or layer disposed in optical contact with the lightguide. In one embodiment, for example, a UV curable methacrylate-based coating is coated on a plasma surface-treated silicone-based lightguide, and cured when in contact with the embossing drum such that the light extraction features are coated on the silicone-based lightguide. Is formed. Various UV curable coatings are suitable for use in this embodiment, and refractive index, light propagation properties, adhesion properties, and scattering properties are known in the optical film industry.

MULTIPLE LIGHTGUIDES

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a color sequential display, a local dimming backlight, red, green, and blue lightguides, animation effects, multiple messages of different colors, NVIS and a daylight mode backlight (e.g., in NVIS. One light guide for daylight, one light guide for daylight), tiled light guides or backlights, and one or more light guides to provide at least one selected from a group of large area light emitting devices consisting of small light emitting devices do. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a plurality of light guides optically coupled to each other. In another embodiment, at least one lightguide or component thereof comprises an area of blocking features such that the lightguides do not substantially couple light directly to each other because of touching. In some embodiments, the need for cladding may be reduced or mitigated by using anti-blocking materials to maintain separation (and air gap) through areas of the lightguide surfaces. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises first and second light emitting regions to receive light from the first and second group of respective coupling lightguides, wherein the bendings or The folds are 10 to 30 degrees, 25 degrees to 65 degrees, 70 to 110 degrees, 115 degrees to 155 degrees, 160 degrees to 180 degrees, and 5 to 180 degrees from the bends or folds in the second group of combined light guides. It is an angle selected from.

In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide comprises two separate light emitting regions into a first and second group of coupling lightguides arranged to couple light into each of the first light emitting region and the second light emitting region. Wherein the first and second groups of coupling lightguides are folded or bent to create a single light input coupler arranged to couple light from a single source or source package to both light emitting regions. In a further embodiment, the two separate light emitting areas are 0.1 millimeter, 0.5 millimeter, 1 millimeter, 5 millimeter, 10 millimeter, 1 centimeter, 5 centimeter, 10 centimeter, 50 centimeter, 1 meter, 5 meter, 10 meter, It is separated by a separation distance (SD) greater than one selected from the group of the width of the combined lightguide, the width of the folded area, the dimension of the first light emitting area surface area, and the dimension of the second light emitting area surface area.

In another embodiment, the two film-based light guides are disposed above the other in at least one selected from the group of light guide area, light emitting area, light input coupler, light input surface, and light input edge to provide a light source, a package of light sources, Light from an array of light sources, or an arrangement of light sources, is directed to one or more film-based light guides.

In a further embodiment, a plurality of light guides are disposed substantially parallel to the first light emitting regions closest to each other, and the light guides emit light of first and second colors. Colors may be the same or different, and additional color, additional luminance, white emitting lightguides, red, green, and blue emitting lightguides or different colors or the same, adjacent, or different corresponding light emitting regions or light extraction It provides a combination of light guides that emit light close to the features. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first lightguide and a second lightguide, wherein an area of the second lightguide is in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light emitting device or parallel to the normal of the light emitting surface of the device. It is disposed below the first light guide, and at least one combined light guide from the first light guide is inserted between the at least two combined light guides from the second light guide. In a further embodiment, the combined light guides from the first light guide film are inserted into the combined light guides in the second light guide area. For example, two film-based lightguides of combined lightguide strips in a direction parallel to each other along one edge may be folded together to form a single light input surface, where the light input edge forming the light input surface. Are alternated between light guides. Similarly, three or more lightguides of the light input edges 1, 2, and 3 are light input with alternating input edges in a 1-2-3-1-2-3-123... pattern along the light input surface. It can be collected through folding into a surface.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first lightguide and a second lightguide, wherein an area of the second lightguide is in a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light emitting device or parallel to the normal of the light emitting surface of the device. A second combination light guide disposed below the first light guide, the first set of combining light guides disposed to couple light from the first light input surface to the first light guide, and disposed to couple light to the second light guide It is placed adjacent to the set. The first and second sets of light guides may be the same light input coupler or different light input couplers disposed adjacent to each other, and they may be light from the same light source, collection of light sources, different light sources, or different collections of light sources. May be arranged to receive.

Multiple light guides to reduce band loss (MULTIPLE LIGHTGUIDES TO REDUCE BEND LOSS)

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first lightguide and a second lightguide, wherein the first overlapping region of the second lightguide is parallel to the optical axis of the light emitting device or with a normal of the light emitting surface of the device. A set of first and second combination light guides disposed under the first light guide in a parallel direction and arranged to couple light to each of the first and second light guides is a set of first and second combination light guides Covering the same input dimensions of each of the first and second combination light guides with the same radius of curvature as the core thickness equivalent to the total core thicknesses of the first and second light guides in the average of and the first overlapping area. It has less overall band loss than that of a set of combined lightguides optically coupled to the lightguide.

In a further embodiment, multiple lightguides are stacked and the light output from one lightguide passed through at least one area of the other lightguide and the radius of curvature for a fixed band loss (per combined lightguide or total loss). Are smaller than that of a single lightguide with the same light emitting area, the same radius of curvature, and the thickness of the combined lightguides. For example, for a band loss of 70%, a first light guide of a first thickness may be limited to a first radius of curvature. By using the second and third lightguides at half the thickness of the first lightguide, respectively, the radius of curvature of each of the second and third lightguides is to maintain only 70% band loss due to the reduced thickness of each lightguide. I can bow down. In one embodiment, each of a plurality of thin lightguides having a radius of curvature less than a thick lightguide with the same band loss reduces the volume and form factor of the light emitting device. The light input surfaces of the coupling lightguides from different lightguides are adjacent to each other in a first direction, on different sides of the light emitting device, in the same light input coupler, in different light input couplers, below each other, and each other. It may be arranged to receive light accordingly or from the same or different light sources.

Multiple light guides connected by combined light guides

In one embodiment, two or more light guides are optically coupled together by a plurality of combined light guides. In one embodiment, the film includes a first continuous light guide area and strip equal sections cut in an area disposed between the first continuous light guide area and the second continuous light guide area. In one embodiment, the strips are cut and the first and second continuous lightguide regions are translated relative to each other so that the strips (combined lightguides in this embodiment) are folded and overlapped. The final first and second light guide areas may be separate areas such as a keypad illuminator and an LCD backlight for the mobile phone connected by the combined light guides. The first and second lightguide regions may also intersect both light perpendicular to the film surface in the one or more regions to at least partially overlap the first and second lightguide regions. The first and second light guide regions may have at least one optical input coupler. By combining the first and second light guide areas together through the use of combined light guides, light from the input coupler coupled to the first light guide area is lost when reaching the end of the first light guide area, and is connected to the outside. , Or is not absorbed, and may further proceed on the second light guide area. This can allow multiple light extraction areas for a specific area, as the lightguides overlap the area. In one embodiment, at least one region arranged to receive light between the first and second lightguide regions comprises a light absorption filter such that the light reaching the second lightguide region comprises a different wavelength spectral profile. In addition, the second color may be extracted from a second light guide region different from the first color extracted from the first light guide extraction region. Two or more light guide areas illuminated by a first input coupler of one, two, or two or more emission colors may be used, and separate light guides (or light guide areas) having separate light input couplers S) may be disposed behind, in between, or above one or more of the lightguide regions illuminated by the first input coupler. For example, a first light input coupler directs white light from the LED to a first lightguide region, where the light extraction regions extract light that produces a first white image, and the light extracts the non-red portions of the spectrum. It is not extracted by passing through the coupling lightguides on the opposite end having the stripped region optically coupled to the substantially absorbing lightguide (such as a red ink strip). This light further proceeds from the red image to the second light guide area extracted outside the light guide like the red light. Similarly, other colors, including subtractive colors, can be used to generate multiple colors of light emitted from multiple lightguide regions, and the light extraction regions can overlap to create an additive color scheme. Two or more light guides or light guide areas may overlap each other by approximately 90 degrees of optical axes of light traveling in the light guide.

MULTIPLE LIGHTGUIDES TO PROVIDE PIXELDATED COLOR

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first lightguide and a second lightguide arranged to receive light from each of the first and second light sources through two different optical paths, wherein the light emitting device The light emitting regions of the first and second light sources and the light emitting regions of the first and second lightguides comprise the light output plane of the light emitting device in pixelated regions (e.g., separated in the thickness direction of film-based lightguides) It includes pixelated regions that are spatially separated on a plane. In one embodiment, the colors of the first and second pixelated light emitting regions are a diagonal (or diameter) of the light emitting region that is a false color of the sub-pixels merged at a distance of 2 times, with a visual acuity of one minute without enlargement. Perceived by the viewer. For example, in one embodiment, the colors of the different spatial regions of the display are different regions, similar to liquid crystal displays using red, green, and blue pixels and LED signs using red green and blue LEDs grouped together. Is spatially controlled to achieve different colors in. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a red light emitting light guide optically coupled to a green light emitting light guide optically coupled to a blue light guide. Various areas and light output of the light guides of this embodiment are described below. In the first light emitting region of the light emitting device, the blue and green lightguides do not have any light extraction features and the red lightguide has light extraction features so that the first light emission region is red in one or more directions. Emit (e.g., emit red light towards a spatial light modulator or from a light emitting device). In the second light emitting region of the light emitting device, the red and green lightguides do not have light extraction features, and the blue lightguide has light extraction features, so that the second light emitting region emits blue light in one or more directions. do. In the third light emitting region of the light emitting device, the blue and red lightguides have light extraction features, and the green lightguide does not have any light extraction features so that the third light emitting region produces purple light in one or more directions. Emit In the fourth light emitting region of the light emitting device, the blue, green, and red lightguides have light extraction features such that the fourth light emitting region emits white light in one or more directions. Thus, it may be a multicolor of different areas emitting different colors simultaneously or in succession, for example by using multiple lightguides to create light emitting areas that emit light to different colors, light emitting devices, displays, or signs. In another embodiment, the light emitting regions include light extraction features of the appropriate size and density on the plurality of lightguides, for example full color graphics, images, marks, logos, or photos are reproduced.

The percentage of light extracted from the first light guide light extraction feature reaching a second light extraction feature adjacent to the second lightguide is, for example, in the direction of the optical path between the first and second light extraction features. Distance in the first lightguide between the light extraction features and the cladding surface, total separation between the light extraction features in the optical path of light between the first and second light extraction features, between the first and second light extraction features The distance from the cladding of the optical path of, the refractive index of the first light guide, the refractive index of the cladding, the distance of the optical path from the cladding surface to the second light extraction feature, the refractive index of the second light guide, and the first light guide light extraction feature It is influenced by the directional reflectance (or transmission) characteristics. In an embodiment, the percentage of light passing through the first light guide from the first light pixel area crossing the second pixel area in the second light guide is 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and 1% groups. Is less than one selected from The amount of light from the first light guide reaching the adjacent pixel on the second light guide is the thickness of the light guide, the total separation in the thickness direction, the refractive index of the first light guide, the refractive index of the cladding, and the directionality of the first light guide light extraction feature. It is influenced by reflectance (or progression) characteristics. Light close to the critical angle in the light guide will travel longer distances in the thickness direction in the cladding area than angles greater than the critical angle. In one embodiment, the cladding region thickness is less than that selected from groups of 50, 25, 10, 5, 3, 2, and 1 micron(s). In another embodiment, the thickness of the core region is less than one selected from groups of 50, 25, 10, 5, 3, 2, and 1 micron(s). At the point reaching the interface between the first light guide and the cladding, the control of the refractive index (n ₁ ) and the thickness (t ₁ ) proceeding within the light guide at a critical angle between the first light guide and the cladding region of the refractive index (n ₂ ). 1 The lateral separation of light x ₁ from the edge of the first light extraction feature on the surface of the lightguide is as follows:

In one embodiment, the lateral separation between the first pixel in the first lightguide and the second pixel in the second lightguide is greater than one selected from the group 50%, 60%, 70%, and 80% of x ₁ , less than one selected from the group 150%, 200%, 250%, 300%, 400%, and 500% of x ₁ . For example, in one embodiment, the light extraction feature on the first lightguide is a first printed white ink pattern on the rear surface of the film-based lightguide with a refractive index of 1.49 50 microns thick. A second printed white ink pattern on a second lightguide separated by a first lightguide and optically coupled to a 25 micron cladding area with a refractive index of 1.33 is laterally from the first printed white area up to a distance of 100 microns. Is located (in a direction parallel to the film surface). In this example, x ₁ is 99 microns, and the separation distance is 101% of x ₁ .

In another embodiment, the light extraction feature is a directional light extraction feature that asymmetrically corrects the direction of incident light, and the lateral separation between the first pixel in the first light guide and the second pixel in the second light guide is x ₁ . Greater than one selected from the group 20%, 30%, 40%, and 50%, x ₁ of Less than one selected from the group 100%, 150%, 200%, and 300%.

In another embodiment, the dimensions of the light extraction features in the direction of the optical axis within the lightguide for one pixel are from 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, and 50% groups of the average thickness of the lightguide in that area. Is less than the selected one.

In a further embodiment, the first pixel on the first light guide is laterally separated from the second pixel on the second light guide to the first separation distance and is VESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standard version 2.0 (Appendix) of June 1, 2001. 201, page 249), the angle defined by the luminance of at least 70% of the luminance at 0 degrees of Δu'v' of a pixel measured on a 1976 u', v'Uniform Chromaticity Scale. Each color change within the field is less than one selected from the group 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 as measured using a spectrometer-based spot colorimeter.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a reflective display comprising a luminescent frontlight comprising a first light guide light extraction features and a second light guide comprising a second set of light extraction features , Wherein the areas of the first light extraction feature set in a plane parallel to the first light guide in a direction substantially perpendicular to the light emitting surface of the reflective display and the second light extraction features in a plane parallel to the second light guide The percentage of overlapping area between the areas of the set is less than those selected from the 80%, 60%, 40%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and 2% groups. Similarly, in another embodiment, the area of overlap between the three sets of light extraction features in three different lightguides is 80%, 60%, 40%, 20% for each merge of the lightguides. , 10%, 5%, and 2%. For example, in one embodiment, the reflective display is applied to the cladding layer from the LEDs of the first lightguide on the viewing site of the second lightguide and from the third lightguide disposed in the nearest reflective spatial light modulator. Each of the first, second, and third lightguides emitting red, green, and blue lights separated by the cladding layer from the second lightguide separated by In this embodiment, the area of overlap between the light extraction features in the lightguide emitting red light and the lightguide emitting green light when viewed perpendicular to the display is less than 10%. Further, in this embodiment, the area of overlap between the light extraction features of the lightguide emitting red light and of the lightguide emitting blue light when viewed as normal to the display is less than 10%. In this embodiment, the red light guided toward the reflective spatial light modulator from the light guide emitting red light is a large percentage of the light extraction feature area overlap, and the light extraction features from green or blue light guides rather than the light guide configuration. It is unlikely to reflect from the Budul.

LIGHTGUIDE FOLDING AROUND COMPONENTS

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: a light guide, a light guide area, a light mixing area, a plurality of light guides, a combination light guide, and a light input coupler are bent or folded so that components of the light emitting device and other components are It is hidden, partially or completely enclosed from other components or views located behind the light emitting area. These components around which they can bend or fold, including components of a light emitting device, such as light sources, electronics, drivers, circuit boards, thermal transfer elements, spatial light modulators, displays, housings, holders, or other components It is placed behind a folded or bent lightguide or other area or component. In one embodiment, a frontlight for a reflective display includes a light guide, combined light guides, and a light source in which one or more areas of the light guide are folded and the light source is positioned substantially behind the display. In one embodiment, the light mixing region comprises a fold, and the light source and/or combination lightguides are disposed substantially on the side of the film-based lightguide opposite the light emitting region of the device or reflective display. . In one embodiment, the reflective display includes a foldable light guide such that the light guide area is disposed behind the reflective spatial light modulator of the reflective display. In one embodiment, the folded angle is between 150 and 210 degrees in one plane. In another embodiment, the fold angle is substantially 180 degrees in one plane. In one embodiment, the fold is substantially between 150 and 210 degrees in a plane parallel to the optical axis of light traveling in the film-based lightguide. In one embodiment, the one or more input couplers or components are folded behind or around the light guide, light mixing area, or light emitting area. In this embodiment, for example, from opposite sides of the light emitting region of the same film, the two light input couplers may be placed adjacent to each other or using a common light source or folded behind a spatial light modulator of the display. In another embodiment, the tiled light emitting devices comprise folded light input couplers that are physically coupled to each other using adjacent or same or different light sources behind. In one embodiment, the light source or the light emitting area of the light source is disposed within a volume limited by the edge of the light emitting area and the normal of the light emitting area on the side of the light guide opposite the viewing surface. In another embodiment, the area of the at least one light source, light input coupler, combination light guides, or light mixing area is behind the light emission area (on the side of the light guide opposite the viewing surface) or at the edge of the light emission area. It is placed on the side of the light guide opposite the viewing plane normal to the light emitting area and within the volume reflected by.

CURLED EDGE OF LIGHTGUIDE TO RECYCLELIGHT

In one embodiment, the light guide edge region is curled back to itself and optically coupled to the region of the light guide so that the light traveling toward the edge follows the curl and travels back to the light guide. In one embodiment, the cladding area is moved from the lightguide from both surfaces that are optically bonded or bonded together. One or more of the edges may be curled or bent back to the reproduction light itself back into the light guide.

Registration holes and cavities (REGISTRATION HOLES AND CAVITIES)

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group of a light guide, a light guide region, a light mixing region, a light input coupler, a housing, a holding device, and a plurality of coupling light guides is at least one capable of passing through at least one opening or opening. It includes at least one suitable opening or opening for registration with one pin or other component of the device including the object. In another embodiment, one or more optical turning optical elements, combined light guides, optical redirecting optical elements, optical coupling optical elements, relative positions to hold the optical elements, circuit board, flexible connector, film-based touch screen, film-based The light guide, and the display film substrate, include registration openings, openings, holes, or cavities.

Alignment guide

In another embodiment, the optical turning optical element has an alignment guide physically coupled to the optical turning optical element so that the guides direct the coupling lightguide input surfaces to be aligned in at least one of the following directions: the film surface of the coupling lightguides. A direction perpendicular to, parallel to the combined light guide film surfaces, a direction parallel to the optical axis of the light source, and a direction perpendicular to the optical axis of the light source. In one embodiment, the alignment guide is physically coupled to one or more of the following: optical turning optical element, coupled light guides, optical turning optical element, optical coupling optical element, relative position holding the optical element, circuit board. , Light source, light source housing, optical element holder or housing, input coupler housing, placement mechanism, heat sink for light source, flexible connector, film-based touch screen, film-based light guide, and display film substrate. In one embodiment, the alignment guide comprises a placement arm, such as a metal or plastic bar or rod, having a flexural modulus of one of the following: arranged to guide a stack of coupling light guides (or optical elements) in a predetermined direction. 2, 3, 4, and 5 times the stacked array of combined light guides. The alignment guide may have one or more curved areas to aid in the guiding function without scratching or damaging the combined light guide through sharp edges. In another embodiment, the alignment guide is a cantilever spring capable of applying a force to one or more of the engaging lightguides to temporarily or permanently maintain the position of the engaging lightguide. In another embodiment, an additional, permanent relative positioning method is used in which the alignment guide maintains the relative position of the coupling lightguide close to the light input surface while substantially maintaining the relative position of the coupling lightguides to the light source or light input coupler. (Such as mechanically clamping, attaching using adhesives, epoxy, or optical adhesives, forming a housing around the bonding lightguides, or being bonded to and inserted into the housing). In another embodiment, a cladding layer (such as a low refractive index adhesive) is disposed on one or more of the upper surface, the lower surface, the lateral edges, and the input surface of the array of light-coupled lightguides such that the alignment guide is an array of coupled lightguides. When thermally coupled to, less light is absorbed by the alignment guide.

Alignment cavity in alignment guide

In one embodiment, the alignment guide includes a cavity within a mechanical coupler in which a stacked array of coupling lightguides may be disposed to align its light input edges to receive light from a light source. In one embodiment, the alignment guide aligns the combination lightguides in one dimension, and a normal force on the combination lightguides to assist in their holding in the cavity and in the correct lateral position where the input surface of the combination lightguides can be placed. They are arranged to receive light from the light source, including a thermal transfer element having an arm or rod extending to apply a. In another embodiment, the alignment guide is a thermal transfer element having a vertical cross section, each having an extended arm (functions as a cantilever spring to apply force) of the cross section of the stacked array of coupling light guides close to its light input surfaces. A cavity, a width dimension that is at least as large as vertical, and a width dimension.

Thermally Conductive Alignment Guide

In another embodiment, the alignment guide is thermally and physically coupled to the heat sink with respect to the light source. For example, an alignment guide may comprise a thermally coupled aluminum heat sink disposed around a light source having a placement cavity opening disposed to receive a combined lightguide so that they remain within the cavity. In this embodiment, the aluminum heat sink provides the placement function, and also reduces the heat load from the light source. In another embodiment, the alignment guide comprises a placement cavity with a thermally conductive material (such as a metal, aluminum, copper, a thermally conductive polymer, or a compound comprising thermally conductive materials) thermally coupled to the bonding lightguides. The alignment guide removes heat from the combined light guides received from the light source. When using high power LEDs, for example heat from the light source can potentially be damaged or cause problems with combined lightguides (softening, heat or optical degradation, etc.). By removing heat from the combined lightguides, this effect is reduced or eliminated. In one embodiment, the alignment guide is thermally coupled to the one or more bonding lightguides by physical contact such as a thermally conductive adhesive or grease or through the use of an intermediate thermally conductive material.

Other components

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a power source, batteries (which can be aligned for low profile or low volume devices), a heat transfer element (such as a heat sink, heat pipe, or stamped sheet metal heat sink), a frame , Housing, a heat sink extruded and aligned to extend parallel to at least one side of the light guide, a heat transfer element or a plurality of folding or holding modules along the heat sink, exposed to thermally couple heat to the outer surface of the light emitting device Thermal transfer elements, and solar cells capable of providing power, communication electronics (such as those needed to control light sources, color output, input information, remote communication, Wi-Fi control, Bluetooth control, wireless Internet control, etc.) , A magnet temporarily attaching the light emitting device to an iron or suitable metallic surface, a motion sensor, an adjacent sensor, a forward-backward motion sensor, an optical feedback sensor (including photodiodes or LEDs used in reverse to the detectors), Switches, dials, keypads (on/off, brightness, color, color temperature, presets (functions such as color, brightness, color temperature, etc.), wireless control), externally triggered switches (e.g. door Closing switch), co-integrated switches, and light blocking elements that block external light from reaching the light guide or light guide area or block light emitted from the area of the light emitting device from being viewed by the viewer; The same mechanisms include at least one selected from the control group.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first set of light sources including first and second light sources arranged to couple light to each of the first and second light input couplers, each of the first and second light sources. A second set of light sources comprising third and fourth light sources arranged to couple light to the two light input coupler, wherein the first set of light sources are thermally coupled to each other and the second set of light sources is a group They are thermally coupled to each other by one selected from a metal core printed circuit board, an aluminum component, a copper component, a metal alloy component, a thermal transfer element, or other thermally conductive element. In a further embodiment, the first and second sets of light sources are in the area closest to the light sources by a substantially thermally insulating material or an air gap such as a substantially polymer free metallic, ceramic, or thermally conductive components. It is substantially thermally insulated by separating the light sources (or substrates for light sources such as a PCB). In another embodiment, the first and third light sources are arranged closer to each other than the first and second light sources, and a lot of heat from the first light source reaches the third light source only when the first light source emits light. Rather than reaching the second light source. Two or more light sources arranged to couple light to the two or more coupling light guides may be thermally coupled together by a thermal transfer element, and from a second set of two or more light sources by an air gap or thermally insulating material. Can be separated.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a film light guide that emits light and also detects light changes within the light guide, and provides touch screen functionality. In one embodiment, the film light guide includes combination light guides arranged to receive light from a light source, directs light to the light guide to provide a backlight or a front light, and at least one combination light guide includes light intensity ( It is arranged to detect a change at the touched position (such as at low light levels due to the light being shifted and absorbed by combining light with the finger). One or more light intensities to detect the light guide may be used. Other configurations for optical light guides based on touch screens are known to those skilled in the art and can be used in combination with the embodiments.

In another embodiment, the touch screen includes at least two film light guides. In another embodiment, the touchscreen device includes a light input coupler that is used inversely to couple light from the film lightguide to the detector. In another embodiment, the light emitting device or touch screen is pressure sensitive when the first film or the first light guide is pressed or pressure is applied, and the first film is at least one light from the first light guide or the first light guide. Is transferred with sufficient optics to contact the second film or the second light guide that is bonded to the second film or the second light guide, and light from the second film or the second light guide is combined to the first film or the first light guide Or, light is bound to another from each lightguide or film.

Thermal transfer element coupled to a combined light guide

In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element is a cladding area, a light guide area, a light guide, a combination light guide, a stack or arrangement of combination light guides, a merge of areas folded into the combination light guide, an input coupler, a window of the optical input coupler The housing component, or thermally coupled to the housing. In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element is thermally coupled to the coupled lightguides or folded regions of the coupled lightguide so that a high power LED or other light source that emits toward the lightguides can be used with reduced thermal damage to the polymer. In the area, draw heat away from the polymer based lightguide film. In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element is physically and thermally coupled to the cladding region of the optical input couplers or the folded regions of the coupling lightguide. The heat transfer element may further provide to absorb light in one or more cladding regions by using a heat transfer element that is black or to absorb a significant amount of light (such as having a scattered reflectance spectral component contained below 50%). have. In another embodiment, the upper surface of the upper coupling lightguide and the lower surface of the lower coupling lightguide comprise cladding regions in the regions of the coupling lightguides or folded regions of the coupling lightguide near the light input edges. By removing (or not applying or disposing) the cladding between the combined lightguides or folded areas, much light can be combined into the folded areas from the combined lightguides or the light source. The outer cladding layers or regions can be disposed on the outer surfaces to prevent light absorption from contacting other elements or housing, or for example absorb light from the core region (possibly absorbing light within the core region). It may be used on the upper or lower surface to physically and thermally couple to the cladding area to the heat transfer element to couple heat without doing so.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a heat transfer element arranged to receive heat from at least one light source, wherein the heat transfer element is 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 4 millimeters, 3 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, And at least one selected from the group of total thickness, average total thickness, and average thickness in all directions perpendicular to the light emitting device less than one selected from the 0.5 millimeter group. In one embodiment, the thermal transfer element comprises a sheet or plate of metal disposed on opposite sides of a lightguide, such as a light emitting surface of a light emitting device. In a further embodiment, a low thermal conductivity component is disposed between the thermal transfer element and the light guide. In another embodiment, the low thermal conductivity component has a thermal conductivity k lower than one selected from the group 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1, and 0.05 W·m-1·K-1 at a temperature of 296 degrees Kelvin. Have. In a further embodiment, the low thermal conductivity component is a white reflective polyester based film (or PTFE based film). In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a low thermal conductivity component physically coupled to the thermal transfer element, wherein the light emitting device comprises a low refractive index material, a cladding region, and an area group of air gaps disposed between the low thermal conductivity component and the light guide. It further includes at least one selected from.

In a further embodiment, the heat transfer element is an elongated component dimensioned in the first direction at least twice as long as a dimension in a direction perpendicular to each other perpendicular to the first direction, wherein a portion of the heat transfer element is at least one light input It is disposed within the bending area of the coupler. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light input coupler, wherein a portion of the smallest rectangular cuboid comprising all of the coupling lightguides within the light input coupler comprises a heat transfer element. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light input coupler, wherein a portion of the smallest rectangular cuboid containing all the coupling lightguides in the light input coupler is a pipe from a heat pipe, an extended heat sink, a metal row with fins. A transition element, a rod in the thermal transition element, and an elongated thermal transition element selected from the group of metal frames.

In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element is at least one that provides at least one selected from the group of increased strength, suspension or frame support for mounting to prevent accidental contact, and frame support for a flat or predefined non-planar surface. A metal frame component or an elongated metal component. In a further embodiment, the heat transfer element comprises at least two regions or surfaces oriented at an angle to each other or opening through a volume forming at least a portion of a channel through which air can flow. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a plurality of channels formed by at least one surface of a thermal element through which air flows, and heats by active or passive air convection from a source generating heat (light source or processor). Convection. In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a plurality of air channels along the vertically oriented faces of the device through which air flows or convections heat through (naturally or forced convection air). In another embodiment, the thermal transfer element is 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 800, and 1000 W·m-1·K- at a temperature of 296 degrees Kelvin. It has a thermal conductivity greater than 1 selected from group 1.

Other optical films

In another embodiment, the light emitting device further comprises a polarization range with a light redirecting optical film, element, or a region that directs light projection back to the first range of angles, a wavelength range, and a second range of angles different than the first. do.

Light turning optical element

In one embodiment, the light turning optical element is disposed between at least one region of the light emitting region and an outer surface of the light emitting device (which may be the surface of the light turning optical element). In a further embodiment, the light redirecting optical element is shaped or configured to substantially conform to the shape of the light emitting region of the light emitting device. For example, the luminescent sign may include a substantially transparent light guide film around a light emitting area in the shape of a display; The light guide film includes light extraction features in the area of the display; And a cut in the shape of the light emitting region (such as a film of substantially hemispherical light collimating surface features) is disposed between the light emitting region of the light guide film and the light emitting surface of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the luminescent sign is a light redirecting optical element comprising a lens array formed from a film-based light guide and a lenticular, or microlenses (integrated images or 3D integrated displays) arranged to receive light from the light guide. Or substantially hemispherical lenses used in photography), wherein the lens array separates the light into images separated by two or more angles from the light guide so that the sign displays three-dimensional images or indications. In the shape of the lens array film or in a plane parallel to the light guide film, the component can be substantially conformal to the shape of the light emitting area or to one or more sub-areas of the light emitting areas so that the sign is in the entire light emitting area or in the light emitting area Emits information separated by angles in one or more sub-areas of. For example, the sign may have a first two-dimensional text area and a second area of a three-dimensional image.

In one embodiment, the light redirecting optical film, element, or region is refraction, prism, total reflection, specular reflection element or coating, diffusive reflective element or coating, reflective diffractive optical element, transmissive diffractive optical element, reflective holographic optical Element, transmissive holographic optical element, reflective light scattering, progressive light scattering, light scattering, multi-layer anti-reflective coating, Morse eye or substantially conical surface structured type anti-reflective coating, giant birefringent optical multi-layer reflective, specular polarizer, diffuse reflective polarizer , Cholesteric polarizer, waveguide mode resonance reflective polarizer, absorbing polarizer, progressive anisotropic scattering (surface or volume), reflective anisotropic scattering (surface or volume), substantially symmetrical or isotropic scattering, birefringence, optical delay, wavelength conversion, Collimating, light redirection, spatial filtering, angle dependent scattering, electro-optical (PDLC, liquid crystal, etc.), electrowetting, electrophoresis, wavelength range absorbing filter, wavelength range reflective filter, structured nano feature surface, light management components , Prism structured surface components, and at least one surface or staining feature selected from the group of two or more hybrids of films or components described above.

Some examples of light redirecting optical films of prismatic structured surfaces are Vikuiti™ Brightness Enhancement Film (BEF I, BEF II, BEF III, BEF III 90/50 5T, BEF III 90/50 M, BEF III 90/50 M2, BEF III 90/50 7T, BEF III 90/50 10T, BEF III 90/50 AS), Vikuiti™ Transparent Right Angle Film (TRAF), Vikuiti™ Optical Lighting Film Lighting Film) (OLF or SOLF), IDF II, TRAF II, or 3M™ Diamond Grade™ Sheeting, all of which are 3M Company, St. Available from Paul, Minn. Other examples of light management component configurations include the circular peak/valley films disclosed in US Pat. Nos. 5,394,255 and 5,552,907 (both Yokota et al.), Reverse Prism Film from Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd or in the US Other total reflection based prism films, lenticular lens array films, microlens array films, diffuser films, microstructure BEF, nanostructure BEF, from Rowland Technologies disclosed in patents 6,746,130, 6,151,169, 5,126,882, and 6,545,827. Rowlux microlens film, films of batches of optical precipitators such as disclosed in US Pat. No. 7,160,017, and hybrids of one or more of the aforementioned films.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device further comprises an angle-selected light absorbing film, element, or region. Each of the selective light-absorbing films can substantially propagate light within the first projection angle range, or can substantially absorb light within the second projection angle range. These films can absorb light or reduce unwanted reflections at specific angles (such as those required for military applications that can illuminate parts of a cockpit or windshield that cause off- or unwanted light-off reflections). I can. Louver films such as those produced by skiving a multi-layered material in a first angle are known in the display industry, and louver films such as 3M™ Privacy Film from 3M Company and US Pat. No. 7,467,873; 3,524,789; 4,788,094; 4,788,094; And other angular absorbing or redirecting films, such as those disclosed in 5,254,388.

Light reflective film

In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light guide disposed between the light reflective film and the light emitting surface of the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the light reflective film is a light reflective optical element. For example, a white reflective polyester film of at least the same size and shape of the light emitting region may have a light emitting surface or a light reflecting region of the light emitting device following one or all of the size and shape of the light emitting regions, or Since it may have a size or shape that occupies a smaller area than the light emission area, it may be disposed on the opposite side of the light guide. A substantially identical shape, such as a light reflective film or component, a light emitting region or region containing light extracting features, emit light in regions around or in between the light emitting regions or regions containing light extracting features. 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, and 110% by reflecting a portion of the received light towards the light emitting surface while being able to maintain the transparency of the device. Increases the average brightness in the area on the light emitting surface of the light emitting device by at least one selected from the group.

Angle extension element

* In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises: a light turning element arranged to collimate or reduce the angle FWHM of light from the light guide; Spatial light modulator; And an angular expanding element (such as a diffuser or light redirecting element) disposed on the viewing surface of the spatial light modulator to increase the angle FWHM of light passing through the spatial light modulator. For example, the light may be collimated to pass through or over the pixels or subpixels of the spatial light modulator, in which case the light may be angled to increase the angle of view of the device (angle FWHM). Increase). In a further embodiment, the angular expanding element is disposed within or above the component of the spatial light modulator. For example, a diffuser may be placed between the outer glass and the polarizer in a liquid crystal display to expand the collimated or partially collimated light after being spatially modulated by the liquid crystal layer. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device further comprises a light absorbing film, a circular polarizer, a microlens type projection screen, or other rear projection type screen to absorb the first portion of the ambient light projection on the light emitting surface to increase contrast. Can include.

Light extraction from cladding

In one embodiment, the cladding region is disposed or optically coupled to the core region of the light guide, and is operably coupled to the cladding region on the side of the first cladding region opposite to the light guide for extracting light from the cladding region. Includes a light extraction area. The operative coupling of the light extraction region to the cladding region or the light extraction features to the region includes adding, removing, or altering material on the surface of the cladding region or within the volume of the cladding region; Placing a material on the surface of the cladding area or within the volume of the cladding area; Applying a material on the surface of the cladding area or within the volume of the cladding area; Printing or painting a material on the surface of the material cladding area or within the volume of the cladding area; Removing material from the surface of the cladding area or from the volume of the cladding area; Modifying the surface of the cladding area or an area within the volume of the cladding area; Stamping or embossing the surface of the cladding area or an area within the volume of the cladding area; Scratching, sanding, ablating, or scribing the surface of the cladding area or an area within the volume of the cladding area; Forming a light extraction region on the surface of the cladding region or within the volume of the cladding region; Bonding the material on the surface of the cladding area or within the volume of the cladding area; Adhering the material within the surface of the cladding area or within the volume of the cladding area; Optically coupling the light extraction region on the surface of the cladding region or within the volume of the cladding region; Including, without limitation, optically or physically coupling the light extraction region to the cladding region by an intermediate surface, layer, or material disposed between the light extraction region and the cladding region; The part of the light advancing in the cladding area projection incident on the light extraction area exits the cladding area or is redirected at an angle less than the threshold value, so that it travels by the cladding area, core area, combined light guide, light guide, or total reflection. It does not remain within the other areas.

In one embodiment, by extracting light from the cladding area, the cladding area or other layers or objects (such as fingers or dust) in contact with the cladding area optically coupled to the cladding area within the light emitting area of the display are not disturbed or , To extract light from the cladding resulting in reduced luminance contrast or poor display or sign visibility. In one embodiment, the light is cladding either directly within the cladding or on the outer surface of the cladding (a surface opposite the core region) or indirectly or on the outer surface of the film or in an area optically coupled to the outer surface of the cladding. It is extracted from the cladding by absorbing light from or scattering the light. The distributed method of extracted light from the cladding scatters a portion of the incident light and is diverted to angles that do not reflect completely inwardly within the cladding region or in the region optically coupled to the cladding region opposite the core region. For example, in one embodiment, the outer surface of the cladding region includes surface relief features that extract light that is rough or traveling from the cladding. In another embodiment, the layer or region is optically coupled to the cladding region comprising the light extraction region. For example, in one embodiment, the black PET film is optically bonded to the core region of the lightguide using a pressure sensitive adhesive that functions like cladding in the region. In an embodiment, light traveling from the total reflection interface to the combined light guide at a first angle is folded at the combined light guide and then travels at a large angle, and is extracted from the first cladding region by the light extraction region.

Light absorbing or scattering regions or layers

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group: cladding, adhesive, lightguide or layer disposed between the lightguide region and the outer light emitting surface of the light emitting device, patterned region, printing region, and on one or more surfaces or The extruded region within the volume of the film includes a light absorbing material that absorbs a first portion of light in a first predetermined wavelength range. In one embodiment, the light absorbing region is a cladding layer such as an optically bonded black PET film using an adhesive to the cladding layer on the core layer of the light guide in the light mixing region or black coated on a light absorbing material or light absorbing It is ink.

In one embodiment, the light absorbing region or layer is optically coupled to the cladding region on one or more regions selected from the group of combining light guide regions, light mixing regions, and light emitting regions. In this embodiment, the light absorbing region is capable of extracting and absorbing a first portion of light traveling within the optically coupled cladding (or traveling at an angle within the core region and entering the cladding). In one embodiment, the first portion of the absorbed light is 1 selected from the group 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95%. Bigger than dog In one embodiment, light propagating in the cladding is substantially absorbed by the light absorbing region. In one embodiment, the light absorbing region further comprises a light scattering material that disperses a portion of the light advancing within the first cladding region at the angles so that it is extracted from the first cladding region or the first cladding region, a surface facing the light guide. The light is reflected at an angle smaller than the critical angle with respect to the second cladding region of the light guide or the core region of the light guide. In one embodiment, the light absorbing area comprises white ink or material that absorbs and reflects a larger portion of the light than absorbs it. In another embodiment, the light scattering region or layer is optically coupled or formed to the outer surface of the region of the cladding in one or more regions selected from the group of combining light guide regions, light mixing regions, light guide regions, and light emitting regions. Volume is within In this embodiment, light traveling within the cladding can be extracted substantially before the light emitting region (or the area of interest in the light emitting region) by scattering it outside of the cladding region. Fingerprints, smudges, oils, and residues on the outer surface of the cladding or display due to the light traveling in the cladding when the light source that removes the light propagating in the cladding emits light. ), dust and scratches, which may be irradiated or visible, may be desirable for, for example, frontlight applications. Light propagating through the cladding may propagate through the light guide at an angle less than a critical angle with respect to the interface between the core region and the cladding region. Light traveling in the core region at or above the critical angle may penetrate into the cladding in the dissipating field region. In one embodiment, less than 10% of the dissipating field light extends from the light propagating in the light guide, which reflects completely inward at the cladding region interface, into the light absorption region. Arranging the light absorption region close to the interface (e.g., less than 500 nm) between the core region and the cladding region absorbs a significant portion of the light traveling in the core region at angles greater than the critical angle because of penetration of the dissipation field into the light absorption region It is possible to reduce the light flux reaching the light emitting region and passing through the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the light absorbing region or light scattering region is on average greater than one selected from the group of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, and 3 microns away from the interface between the core regions and the cladding regions.

In one embodiment, the first predetermined wavelength range includes light from 300 nm to 400 nm, and the region absorbs UV light, which may be degraded, or a yellow light guide region, layer, or other region or layer. In one embodiment, the cladding region is disposed between the light absorption region and the light guide so that the evernecent portion of light traveling through the light guide and light traveling in the light guide does not pass through the absorption region unless it is extracted from the light guide. It is not absorbed due to the absorption area. In another embodiment, the light-absorbing region or layer is capable of producing luminance or color (such as a dye sublimation or injection printed overlay laminated or printed on a layer of film to provide a color image, graphic, logo, or indication). It is an arrangement of absorbing regions that selectively absorb light in a predetermined pattern to provide a spatially varying light emitting device. In another embodiment, the light absorbing region is disposed in close proximity to the light extraction region so that the light emitted from the light emitting device because of the specific light extraction feature has a predetermined color or luminous intensity. For example, inks containing titanium dioxide and light-absorbing dyes are disposed on the lightguide regions so that a portion of the light reaching the surface of the lightguide in those regions passes through the dye and is extracted due to the light extraction features, or It can be extracted by the light extraction feature and passed through the dye.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a five layer lightguide area of UV light absorbing material disposed on outer layers that are both optically coupled to cladding layers both optically coupled to the inner lightguide layer. In one embodiment, the five-layer film is a polycarbonate material in the center lightguide layer of low refractive index cladding layers of thickness between 1 micron and 150 microns optically coupled to the lightguide layer and UV light absorbing material in the outer layers of the film Includes.

In another embodiment, a light absorbing material is disposed on one side of the light emitting device such that the light emitted from the device is spatially contrasted against a dark background. In one embodiment, the black PET layer or region is disposed adjacent to one side or region of the light emitting device. In another embodiment, the white reflective regions are disposed adjacent to the light extraction region so that light exiting the light guide in the direction of the white reflective region is reflected back toward the light guide. In one embodiment, the light guide includes a light guide area and a cladding area; The light absorbing layer is disposed on the cladding area (laminated, coated, co-extruded, etc.). In another embodiment, the light absorbing material is a dye that is sublimated and injected into the volume of the cladding. In one embodiment, the light from the laser cuts (or removes) regions in the light absorbing layer and creates light extraction regions in the cladding region and/or the light guide region. A white reflective film, such as a white PET film of cavities, is placed after the light absorbing area. The white film can be laminated or spaced by air gaps, adhesives, or other materials. In this example, a portion of the light extracted from the light extraction regions formed by the laser is directed to the white film and is reflected back through the light guide, where the portion of the light exits the light guide on the opposite side, and the luminance of the region Increase This example illustrates that the registration of the white reflective region, black reflective region, and light extraction regions is not required as the laser creates holes in the black film and simultaneously creates light extraction features. In addition, this example illustrates the ability for a light emitting device to display an image, logo, or indication in the off state, where light is not emitted from the light source as the white reflective regions reflect ambient light. For example, this is useful in signage applications where power can be stored during the day as ambient light can be used to illuminate the signage. The light absorbing regions or layers may also be colored other than black such as red, green, blue, yellow, cyan, magenta, and the like.

In another embodiment, the light absorbing region or layer is part of another element of the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the light absorbing region is a portion of the black housing that includes at least a portion of the input coupler, optically coupled to the cladding region using an adhesive.

In another embodiment, the cladding, outer surface, or part of the light guide of the light emitting device is each of more than one selected from the group 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% of visible light traveling within the cladding area. It includes light absorbing regions, such as black strip regions or light scattering regions, that absorb or diffuse. In one embodiment, the light absorbing region absorbs light traveling within the cladding region from light coupled in the cladding region at the light input surface of the coupling light guides in the optical input coupler. In another embodiment, the lightguide is less than 200 microns in thickness, and the light-absorbing area is optically coupled to a cladding that passes through the lightguide and absorbs more than 70% of the light traveling within the cladding, where The width of the light absorption region in the direction of the light is smaller than that selected from the group of 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 3 millimeters, 2 millimeters, and 1 millimeter. In another embodiment, the light absorbing area has a width in the direction of propagation of light in the lightguide between one selected from the group of 0.5-3 millimeters, 0.5-6 millimeters, 0.5-12 millimeters, and 0.05-10 centimeters. In another embodiment, the light scattering area on the side opposite the core area, on the surface of the cladding area, or in the volume optically coupled to the cladding area is 0.5-3 millimeters, 0.5-6 millimeters, 0.5-12 millimeters, And a width in the direction of propagation of light in the lightguide between one selected from the group of 0.05-10 cm.

In one embodiment, the light-absorbing region is a material patterned as a line, a material patterned as a collection of shapes or shapes, or a collection of shapes, a material patterned on one or both sides of the film, cladding, or optically At least one is selected from the group of a combined layer, a material patterned on one or more light guide couplers, a material patterned in a light mixing area, a material patterned in a light guide, and a material patterned in a light guide area. In another embodiment, the light absorbing region is patterned during a cutting step for the film, combined lightguides, or cutting other regions, layers or elements. In another embodiment, the light absorbing area covers at least one percentage of the surface area of the combined lightguides selected from the group 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 20%, and 40%.

Attachment features of light guides, films, cladding or other layers

In one embodiment, at least one is selected from the group: the light guide, the light transmitting film, the cladding, and the layer disposed in contact with the layer of the film have adhesive characteristics. In one embodiment, the cladding is a "low tack" adhesive that allows the film to be removed from the window or substantially planar surface, during the "wetting out" interface. By the "wetting out" interface as used in this application, the two surfaces are optically joined so that the Fresnel reflection from the interfaces at the surface is less than 2%. The adhesive layer or region is a polyacrylate adhesive, an animal adhesive or an adhesive, a carbohydrate polymer such as an adhesive, a natural rubber adhesive, a polysulfide adhesive, a tannin-based adhesive, a lignin-based adhesive, a furan-based adhesive, an element formaldehyde adhesive, a melamine formaldehyde adhesive. , An isocyanate wood binder, a polyurethane adhesive, a polyvinyl and ethylene vinyl acetate, a hot melt adhesive, a reactive acrylic adhesive, an oxygen-free adhesive, or an epoxy resin adhesive.

In one embodiment, the adhesive layer or region is selected from the group 77 N/100 mm, 55 N/100 mm, 44 N/100 mm, 33 N/100 mm, 22 N/100 mm, and 11 N/100 mm. It has ASTM D 903 (limited to 72 hour residence time) peel adhesion strength to less than one standard window glass. In another embodiment, the adhesive will support the weight of the light emitting device when attached to the glass.

REMOVABLE PROTECTIVE LAYER

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a removable protective layer. In another embodiment, the light-transmitting film is disposed on the outer surface of the light emitting device, and the light guide has ASTM D 903 (modified for 72 hours residence time) peel adhesion strength of 77 N/100 mm, 55 N/100 mm , 44 N/100 mm, 33 N/100 mm, 22 N/100 mm, and 11 N/100 mm. In another embodiment, when the outer surface of the light emitting device is scratched, damaged, or reduced to the broad performance of the light emitting device, the outer layer of the film may be removed. In a further embodiment, the tag or extended area of the protective layer allows the individual layer to be removed while maintaining the integrity or position of the underlying lightguide, which may have one or more additional protective layers disposed thereon. In one embodiment, a thin film-based lightguide arranged as a frontlight for a reflective display includes removable protective layers. The protective layers can be thin or thick, and display screen protectors, anti-reflective coatings, anti-reflective coatings or surfaces, hard coatings, circular polarizers, or as disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/537930. Materials used such as surface structures that reduce the visibility of fingerprints may be included.

Light guide including circuit structure or electrical components

In one embodiment, at least one electrical component is physically disposed in a lightguide or layer physically coupled to the lightguide. By including the electrical components on the lightguide film, a separate substrate is not required for one or more electrical components (hence, low volumes and component costs), and the flexible roll-to-roll processing is used for manufacturing on the lightguide film. Or used to place electrical components. In another embodiment, the lightguide includes at least one electrical component physically coupled to a cladding region, a cladding layer, or a layer or region physically coupled to the core material or cladding material. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a flexible layer comprising a plurality of electrical components, the layer being physically coupled to the flexible lightguide film. In one embodiment, the light guide includes at least one electrical component or component used as an electrical component disposed thereon, wherein the at least one component is an active electrical component, a passive electrical component, a transistor, a thin film transistor, a diode, Resistor, terminal, connector, socket, cord, lead, switch, keypad, relay, reed switch, somerset, circuit breaker, limit switch, mercury switch, centrifugal switch, resistor, trimmer, potentiometer, heater, resistance wire, thermistor, varistor, fuse , Resettable fuse, metal oxide varistor, inrush current breaker, gas discharge tube, circuit breaker, spark gap, filament lamp, capacitor, variable capacitor, inductor, variable inductor, saturable inductor, transformer, magnetic amplifier, ferrite impedance, motor , Generator, solenoid, speaker, microphone, RC circuit, LC circuit, crystal, ceramic resonator, ceramic filter, surface acoustic wave filter, transducer, ultrasonic motor, power supply, battery, fuel cell, power supply, photovoltaic device, thermoelectric generator, electric generator, Sensor, buzzer, linear variable differential transducer, rotary encoder, inclinometer, motion sensor, flow meter, strain gauge, accelerometer, thermocouple, thermopile, thermistor, resistance temperature detector, bolometer, thermal cutoff, magnetometer, hygrometer, photoresistor, Solid State Components, Standard Diodes, Rectifiers, Bridge Rectifiers, Schottky Diodes, Hot Carrier Diodes, Zener Diodes, Transient Voltage Suppression Diodes, Varactors, Tuning Diodes, Varicaps, Variable Capacitance Diodes, Light Emitting Diodes, Lasers, Photodiodes, Solar Battery, photovoltaic cell, photovoltaic array, electron avalanche photodiode, AC diode, DIAC, trigger diode, SIDAC, power diode, Peltier cooler, transistor, bipolar transistor, bipolar junction transistor, phototransistor, Darlington transistor ) (NPN or PNP), Szikl ai pair, field effect transistor, junction field effect transistor, metal oxide semiconductor FET, metal semiconductor FET, high electron transfer transistor, thyristor, non-junction transistor, programmable non-junction transistor, silicon controlled rectifier, electrostatic induction transistor/thyristor, for AC Triode, Synthetic Transistor, Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, Hybrid Circuits, Optical Memory Circuit, Optoisolator, Optocoupler, Photocoupler, Photodiode, BJT, JFET, SCR, TRIAC, Open Collector IC, CMOS IC, Solid State Relay, Opto Switch, opto interrupter, optical switch, optical interrupter, photo switch, photo interrupter, lead display, vacuum fluorescent display, cathode ray tube, liquid crystal display (dot matrix, passive matrix, active matrix TFT, flexible display, organic LCD, monochrome LCD, Color LCD characteristics), diode, triode, quadrupole, pentapole, six pole, pentagrid, octal tube, verter, nubister, compactron, microwave, klystron, magnetron, assembled in devices used as components Multiple electronic components, oscillators, display devices, filters, antennas, elemental dipoles, biconical, yagi, phased arrays, magnetic dipoles (loop), wire wrap, breadboard, enclosure, heat sink, heat sink paste & Pads, fan, printed circuit boards, lamp, memristor, integrated circuit, processor, memory, driver, and electrical leads and interconnector group.

In another embodiment, the electrical component comprises organic components. In one embodiment, at least one electrical component is formed on the lightguide, on the component of the lightguide, or on a layer physically bonded to the lightguide material using a roll-to-roll process. In a further embodiment, the flexible lightguide film material is physically bonded to at least one flexible electrical component or a collection of electrical components such that the final lightguide is flexible and when bent to a radius of curvature less than one separated from the group, temporary Or it can emit light without permanent visible distinction, wrinkles, luminance non-uniformity, MURA, or blemishes: 100 millimeters, 75 millimeters, 50 millimeters, 25 millimeters, 10 millimeters, and 5 millimeters.

Light redirecting element arranged to redirect light from the light guide

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light guide having light turning elements disposed on or inside the light guide and light extraction features disposed in a predetermined relationship to one or more light turning elements. . In another embodiment, the first portion of the light redirecting elements are disposed on the light extraction feature in a direction substantially perpendicular to the light emitting surface, lightguide, or lightguide region. In a further embodiment, the light turning elements are arranged to redirect light diverted from the light extraction feature so that the light exiting the light turning elements is collimated rather than a similar light guide having a substantially planar surface. ; Having a full angular width at half maximum intensity less than 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, or 5 degrees within the first light output plane; Full angular width with half maximum intensity less than 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, or 5 degrees within the first light output plane and the second light output plane perpendicular to the first output plane Having; It is selected from those having a full angular width with half maximum intensity less than 60 degrees, 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, or 5 degrees in all planes parallel to the optical axis of the light emitting device.

In one embodiment, the lightguide is on at least one surface opposite to a substantially linear array of light extraction features in which the light turning element collimates a first portion of light extracted from the lightguide by the light extraction features. It contains a substantially linear array of lenticulars arranged in. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a lenticular lens film lightguide further comprising coupling lightguides, wherein the coupling lightguides are disposed substantially parallel to the lenticulars in the lightguide region or the light mixing region and The lens film further comprises linear regions of light reflecting ink light extraction features disposed substantially opposite the lenticulars on an opposite surface of the lenticular lens film lightguide and light exiting the light emitting device is collimated. In a further embodiment, the light extraction features are light redirecting features (TIR grooves or linear) that redirect light incident into one plane, significantly more than light incident from a plane perpendicular to the first plane. Diffraction gratings). In one embodiment, the lenticular lens film includes a groove on the opposite surface of the lenticulars oriented at a first angle greater than 0 degrees for the lenticulars.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a microlens array film lightguide having an array of microlenses on one surface and the film disposed substantially opposite to the microlenses on an opposite surface of the lenticular lens film lightguide. The light exiting the light emitting device further comprises regions reflecting the ink light extraction features that are substantially collimated or has an angular FWHM luminous intensity less than 60 degrees. For example, the microlens array film may collimate light in a radially symmetrical direction from the light extraction features. In one embodiment, the microlens array film is divided by the light guide by the air gap.

The width of the light extraction features (reflecting a line of ink in the lenticular lens lightguide film embodiment described above) contributes to the degree of collimation of light exiting the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the light turning elements are disposed substantially opposite the light extraction features and the average width of the light extraction features in the first direction divided by the average width in the first direction of the light turning elements is 1 , 0.9, 0.7, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, and 0.1. In a further embodiment, the focus of collimated visible light incident on the light turning element in a direction opposite from the surface comprising the light extraction feature is 5% of the width of the light turning element from the light extraction feature, 10 %, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50% and 60% are within at most one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the focal length of at least one light turning element or the average focal length of the light turning elements when illuminated by collimating light from a direction opposite to the light guide 1 millimeter, 500 microns, 300 microns, 200 Smaller than those selected from the group of microns, 100 microns, 75 microns, 50 microns and 25 microns.

In one embodiment, the focal length of the light turning element divided by the width of the light turning element is less than that selected from the group 3, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.8, and 0.6. In another embodiment, the f/# of the light turning elements are less than those selected from the group 3, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.8, and 0.6. In another embodiment, the light turning element is a linear Fresnel lens array having a cross section of refractive Fresnel structures. In another embodiment, the light turning element is a linear Fresnel-TIR hybrid lens array having a cross section of refractive Fresnel structures and generally internally reflective structures.

In a further embodiment, the light redirecting elements are arranged to redirect light diverted from the light extraction feature so that a portion of the light exiting the light redirecting elements is a light emitting area, a light guide area, a light guide, or a light emitting surface. It is diverted with the optical axis at an angle greater than 0 degrees from a direction perpendicular to. In another embodiment, the light turning elements are arranged to redirect light diverted from the light extraction feature so that the light emitted from the light turning elements is directed to the light emitting area, light guide area, light guide, or light emitting surface. It is redirected to an optical axis substantially parallel to a direction perpendicular to the. In a further embodiment, the light redirecting element reduces the overall angular width at half the maximum intensity of light incident on the area of the light redirecting element and the light redirecting element at a first angle for a second angle different from the first angle. It redirects the optical axis of light incident on the area.

In another embodiment, the angular dispersion of light redirected by the light extraction feature is controlled to optimize the light control factor. One light control factor is the percentage of light reaching neighboring light turning elements that can redirect light to an undesired angle. This can cause side lobes or light output to occur inside undesirable areas. For example, a strong diffuse reflection scattering light extraction feature placed directly under the lenticular in a lenticular lens array can scatter light into neighboring lenticulars, resulting in higher angular intensity, which is undesirable in applications where collimated light output is desired. There is a side lobe of light at. Similarly, a light extraction feature that redirects light into a large angular range, such as a hemispherical dome with a relatively small radius of curvature, can also redirect light into neighboring lenticulars and create side lobes. In one embodiment, the bidirectional scattering distribution function (BSDF) of the light extraction feature is a first angle within a second angular range inside the light redirecting element to produce a predetermined third angular range of light exiting the light emitting device. It is controlled to direct the first portion of the incident light into the range.

OFF-AXIS LIGHT REDIRECTION

In a further embodiment, the at least one light extraction feature is centered in a first plane off-axis from the axis of the light turning element. In this embodiment, some of the light extraction features may intersect the optical axis of the light extraction features or it may be disposed far enough away from the optical axis that does not intersect the optical axis of the light extraction features. In another embodiment, the distance between the centerings of the light extraction features and the light turning element in the first plane varies across the array or arrangement of light turning elements.

In one embodiment, the positions of the light extraction features with respect to the positions of the corresponding light turning elements change at least within the first plane and the optical axis of light emitted from different regions of the light-emitting surface is light turning. It varies with the orientation of the elements In this embodiment, for example, light from two different regions of the planar light emitting surface can be directed in two different directions. In another example of this embodiment, light from two different areas (e.g., lower and side areas) of a luminaire having a concave curved light emitting surface directed downwards is directed in the same direction (each area of optics). The axes are oriented downwards towards the lowest point, where the optical axis of the light turning element in the lower region is substantially parallel to the lowest point, and the optical axis of the light turning elements in the lateral region is at an angle equal to 45 degrees from the lowest point). In another embodiment, the location of the light extraction features is the center at which the light extraction regions are substantially coaxial from the optical axes of the corresponding light turning element within the outer regions of the light emitting surface and the light emitted from the light emitting device is more collimated. It is farther away in a direction perpendicular to the lenticulars than the regions. Similarly, if the light extraction features are positioned away from the optical axes of the light turning element in a direction perpendicular to the lenticulars from the first edge of the light-emitting surface, light emitted from the light-emitting surface can be directed substantially non-lateral. Another merger of the positions of the light extraction features relative to the light turning elements is to vary the distance of the light extraction features from the optical axis of the light turning element in a non-linear manner, closer to the axis and then further away from the axis. Then moving closer to the axis in the first direction, further away from the axis and then closer to the axis and then farther to the axis in the first direction, light extraction features substantially coaxial light extraction features The walls of the profile with light extraction features further away from the optical axis of the light turning elements and the lower and upper vertices of the curved regions of the light emitting surface with a sinusoidal cross-section (wave-like) profile with , By including regular or irregular deviations within the separation distances of the light extraction feature from optical axes, such as light turning elements.

Angle width control

In one embodiment, the widths of the light extraction features for corresponding widths of the light turning elements vary in at least a first plane and at half the maximum intensity of light emitted from the light turning elements the total angular width is at least first It changes within the plane. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device includes light extraction features in which the central region of the light emitting surface in a direction perpendicular to the lenticles has an average width of approximately 20% of the average width of the lenticles and The outer region of the light emitting surface in a direction perpendicular to the tessellation includes a light extraction feature having an average width of approximately 5% of the average width of the lenticulars, and at the maximum intensity of half the light emitted from the central region, each full width of the outer regions It includes a lenticular lens array light guide film larger than that.

OFF-AXIS AND ANGULAT WIDTH CONTROL

In one embodiment, the positions and widths of the light extraction features for respective corresponding positions and widths of the light turning elements vary within at least the first plane and are at least half the maximum intensity of light emitted from the light turning elements. The overall angular width at and the optical axis of light emitted from different regions of the light emitting surface vary within at least the first plane. By controlling the relative widths and positions of the light extraction features, the direction and angular width of light emitted from the light emitting device can be varied and controlled to achieve the desired light output profiles.

Light turning element

As used in the present application, the light redirecting element is an optical element that redirects a portion of light of a first wavelength range incident into a first angular range within a second angular range different from the first angular range. In one embodiment, the light redirecting element comprises refractive features, wholly reflective features, reflective surfaces, prism surfaces, microlens surfaces, diffractive features, holographic features, diffraction gratings, surface features, volume At least one element selected from a feature and a lens. In a further embodiment, the light turning element comprises a plurality of the aforementioned elements. The plurality of elements may be a 2-D array (such as a grid of microlenses or a dense array of microlenses), a one-dimensional array (such as a lenticular lens array), random arrangement, predetermined irregular spacing, semi-random arrangement, or other predetermined It can be in the form of a batch. The elements may include different features with different surface or volume features or interfaces and may be disposed at different thicknesses within the volume of the light turning element, lightguide, or lightguide area. Individual elements are in the x, y, or z direction by at least one selected from a group of height, width, thickness, position, angle, radius of curvature, pitch, orientation, spacing, cross-sectional profile, and position within the x, y, or z axis. It can be changed.

In one embodiment, the light turning element is optically coupled to the light guide within at least one area. In another embodiment, the light turning element, film, or layer comprising the light turning element is separated in a direction perpendicular to the light emitting surface of the light guide, light guide region, or air gap. In a further embodiment, the light guide, the light guide area and the light emitting surface of the light guide are substantially disposed between two or more light turning elements. In another embodiment, the cladding layer or region is disposed between the light guide or light guide region and the light turning element. In another embodiment, a light guide or light guide region is disposed between the light turning elements where light is extracted from the light guide or light guide region from all sides and is redirected by the light turning elements. In this embodiment, the backlight may be designed to emit light in opposite directions to illuminate the two displays, or the light emitting device transmits light emitted to the outside of the light guide in a direction opposite to the rear through the light guide. It can be designed to emit light from one side of the lightguide and out of the other by adding a reflective element to reflect.

In another embodiment, the average or maximum dimension of the elements of the light redirecting element within at least one output plane of the light redirecting element is 100%, 90% of the average or maximum dimension of the pixels or sub-pixels of the spatial light modulator or display. %, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, and less than or equal to one selected from the group 10%. In another embodiment, the backlight includes a light redirecting element that redirects light into a 30 degree FWHM towards the display, wherein each pixel or sub-pixel of the display receives light from two or more light redirecting elements. do.

In a further embodiment, the light redirecting element is arranged to receive light from the electro-optical element, wherein the optical properties can be altered in one or more regions selectively or entirely by applying a voltage or current to the device. In one embodiment, the light extraction features are regions of a polymer dispersed liquid crystal material, where light scattering from the lightguide in a diffuse state is diverted by a light redirecting element. In another embodiment, the light extraction feature has a smaller passive area and a larger active area arranged to change from substantially transparency to substantially transmissive diffusivity (forwardly scattering) when used with a light redirecting element. , The display can be changed from a narrow viewing angle display to a wider viewing angle display through the application or removal of voltage or current from the electro-optical region or material. For example, the lines of grooved light extraction features may be applied to a film comprising a wide-line polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC) material disposed to change from substantially transparent to substantially diffusible while applying a voltage across the electrodes. Are arranged adjacent to each other (x, y, or z direction). Other electro-optical materials such as electrophoresis, electrowetting, electrochromic, liquid crystal, electroactive, MEMS devices, smart materials and other materials that can change their optical properties through the application of voltage, current or electromagnetic fields are also available. Can be used.

In another embodiment, the light redirecting element is a collection of prisms arranged to refract light towards a spatial light modulator and reflect light completely inward. In one embodiment, the collection of prisms is a linear array of prisms having an apex angle between 50 and 70 degrees. In another embodiment, the assembly of prisms is a linear array of prisms having an apex angle between 50 degrees and 70 degrees in which the light transmitting material is applied or placed between the prisms and the light guide or light guide area inside the areas. Within these regions it is effectively flattened and the collection of prisms can instantly change the arrangement of prisms in two dimensions (so on the surface it no longer appears to be a linear array). Inverted prisms, hybrid elements, light turning elements or other forms of a combination thereof with refractive or fully internal reflection properties may be used in the embodiment. Changes in elements such as changes in wave shape, size, dimensions, shapes, spacing, pitch, curvature, orientation and structures in the x, y, or z direction incorporating curved and straight sections, etc. It is known in the art. Such elements are known in the field of backlights and optical films for displays and "Optical film to enhance cosmetic appearance and brightness in liquid crystal displays", Lee et al., OPTICS EXPRESS, 9 July 2007, Vol. 15, No. 14, pp. 8609-8618; "Hybrid normal-reverse prism coupler for light-emitting diode blacklight systems", Aoyama et al., APPLIED OPTICS, 1 October 2006, Vol. 45, No. 28, pp. 7273-7278; Japanese Patent Application No. 2001190876, "Optical Sheet", Kamikita Masakazu; US Patent Application No. 11/743,159; And U.S. Patent Nos. 7,085,060, 6,545,827, 5,594,830, 6,151,169, 6,746,130, and 5,126,882.

BACKLIGHT OR FRONTLIGHT

Typically, for displays including light-emitting light guides for illumination, the location of the light guide will be determined depending on whether a backlight or a front light is being considered for display, and a conventional front light ( frontlight) The light guide is a light guide placed on the viewing side of the display (or light modulator) and the backlight light guide is placed on the side of the display (or light modulator) opposite the viewing side. It is a light guide. However, the frontlight or backlight terminology used is in the definition of the display or display components, in particular where the illumination is from the display or from within the component of the spatial light modulator (liquid crystal cell and color filters in LCD). It can vary in the underlying industry), such as in the case of light guides placed between or between liquid crystal materials and a polarizer. In some embodiments, the lightguide is sufficiently thin that it can be placed in a spatial light modulator, such as between light modulating pixels and a reflective element in a reflective display. In such embodiments, the light may be directed towards the light modulating pixels either directly or indirectly by directing the light to a reflective element so that it is reflected towards the light modulating pixels and passes through the lightguide. In one embodiment, the lightguide emits light from one or both sides and with one or more light dispersion profiles that contribute to the “front” and/or “rear” of the light modulation components. In the embodiments disclosed herein, the light emitting region of the light guide is a spatial light modulator (or electro-optical of pixels, sub-pixels, or pixel elements) and a reflective display. When placed between the reflective components of the light emitting area, the light emitted from the light emitting area can either proceed directly towards the spatial light modulator or indirectly through directing the light towards the reflective element so that the reflected light passes back through the lightguide. It then passes into a spatial light modulator. In this case, the terms “frontlight” and “backlight” as used herein may be used interchangeably.

In one embodiment, the light emitting display backlight or frontlight includes a light source, a light input coupler, and a lightguide. In one embodiment, the front light or backlight is a liquid crystal display (LCD's), a MEMs based display, an electrophoretic display, a cholesteric display, a time- Time-multiplexed optical shutter display, color sequential display, interferometric modulator display, bistable display, electronic paper display, LED Display, TFT display, OLED display, carbon nanotube display, nanocrystal display, head mounted display, head-up display, segmented display (segmented display), passive matrix display, active matrix display, twisted nematic display, in-plane switching display, advanced fringe field switching Display (advanced fringe field switching display), vertical alignment display (blue phase mode display), zenithal bistable device, reflective LCD (reflective LCD), transmissive LCD (transmissive L CD), electrostatic display, electrowetting display, bistable TN displays, micro-cup EPD displays, grating aligned genisel display grating aligned zenithal display, photonic crystal display, electrofluidic display, and electrochromic displays: irradiate a display or spatial light modulator selected from the group.

LCD BACKLIGHT OR FRONTLIGHT

In one embodiment, a backlight or frontlight suitable for use with a liquid crystal display panel includes at least one light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide. In one embodiment, the backlight or front light comprises a single light guide in which the illumination of the liquid crystal panel is white. In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight comprises a plurality of lightguides arranged to receive light from at least two light sources having two different color spectras so that they emit two different colors. In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight includes a single lightguide arranged to receive light from at least two light sources having two different color spectras so that they emit two different colors. In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight comprises a single lightguide arranged to receive light from red, green and blue light sources. In one embodiment, the lightguide includes a plurality of optical input couplers and the optical input couplers emit light having different wavelength spectra or colors to the lightguide. In another embodiment, light sources emitting two different colors or wavelength spectra may be arranged to couple light into a single light input coupler. In this embodiment, more than one light input coupler can be used and the color can be directly controlled by modulating the light sources.

In a further embodiment, the backlight or frontlight comprises a light guide arranged to receive light from a blue or UV light emitting source and a wavelength converting material such as a phosphor film. It further includes a region including a. In another embodiment, the backlight includes three layers of film light guides, each light guide illuminating the display with substantially uniform luminance when the corresponding light source is turned on. In this embodiment, the color gamut can be increased by reducing the conditions of the color filters and the display can be in color sequential mode or all-colors-on simultaneously. mode). In a further embodiment, the backlight or frontlight comprises three layers of film lightguides with three spatially distinct light emitting regions including light extraction features, and each light extraction region for a particular lightguide is It corresponds to a set of color pixels. In this embodiment, color filters are not necessarily required by registering light extracting features (or regions) to the corresponding red, green and blue pixels (e.g.) in the display panel. And the display is more efficient. In this embodiment, however, color filters may be used to reduce crosstalk.

In a further embodiment, the light emitting device receives light from a plurality of light sources emitting light with different wavelength spectra (and thus light of different colors) and a corresponding spatial light modulator (LCD panel and And a plurality of light guides (such as red, green and blue light guides) arranged to emit light into sub-pixels of different colors of the same) and direct the light from the light guides toward the spatial light modulator. It further includes a plurality of light turning elements arranged to switch. For example, each light guide may include a cladding region between the light guide and a spatial light modulator, and light redirecting elements such as microlenses are light guides. The optical axis of light emitted within 50 degrees from perpendicular to the spatial light modulator output surface and placed between the light extraction features on the image and the spatial cavity modulator and is less than 60 degrees FWHM, less than 30 degrees FWHM. axis), light having an optical axis of light emitted within 30 degrees from perpendicular to the spatial light modulator output surface, and light having an optical axis of light emitted within 10 degrees from perpendicular to the spatial light modulator output surface. Directed towards the spatial light modulator. In a further embodiment, the arrangement of light redirecting elements is disposed within a region disposed between a plurality of light guides and a spatial light modulator to reduce the FWHM of light emitted from the plurality of light guides. . Light redirecting elements arranged in the same area as on the surface of the film layer may have similar or dissimilar light redirecting features. In one embodiment, the light redirecting elements are designed to redirect light from light extraction features, from a plurality of lightguides to FWHM angles or optical axes within 10 degrees of each other. For example, a backlight comprising red, green and blue film-based lightguides is a microlens with different focal lengths around 3 depths of substantially light extraction features on 3 lightguides. It may contain an array of (microlens). In one embodiment, lightguide films smaller than 100 microns thick are capable of bringing the light turning elements closer to the light extraction features and thus to capture more light from the light extraction features. In another embodiment, since the distance between the closest corresponding light extraction feature and the furthest corresponding light extraction feature in the thickness direction is small with respect to the diameter (or dimension) of the light turning element, pixel or sub-pixel, substantially As a result, light turning elements, such as a microlens array with the same light turning features (such as the same radius of curvature), are thin light guides with light extraction features at different depths. lightguides).

In one embodiment, the color sequential display is selected from the group: at least one light source, a light input coupler, a light guide and 150hz, 230hz, 270hz, 350hz, 410hz, 470hz, 530hz, 590hz, 650hz, and 710hz. It includes a display panel, which is a panel having a refresh rate faster than one.

In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight comprises at least one light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide, the light guide being substantially thinner than the film and comprising core regions printed on the film. The color or flux of light reaching the light extracting regions may be controlled.

In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight includes at least one light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide, the light guide forming a substrate or protection area within the display panel. In one embodiment, the light guide is a substrate for a liquid crystal display. In a further embodiment, the lightguide is optically coupled to the outer surface of the display and is disposed within the liquid crystal cell within the display and between the two substrates of the display.

In another embodiment, the backlight or frontlight is optically coupled to at least one light source and at least one display component (such as a substrate, film, glass, polymer or liquid crystal based display or other layer of another display). And a light input coupler including a light guide, wherein the component guides light received from at least one combined light guide under a waveguide condition. By optically coupling the coupling lightguides to a display component such as an LCD glass substrate for example, the component can function as a lightguide and alleviate the need for additional backlight films or components.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes one or more lightguides or lightguide regions for increased light output or to provide redundancy of light in case of difficulties with one backlight. In military and critical display applications (surgery rooms), people often want redundancy in the event of an electrical or light source or other component failure. The reduced thickness of the film-based lightguide in embodiments takes into account one or more light sources and one or more additional backlights, which may include drivers and electronic control circuitry. In a further embodiment, one or more photodetectors, such as a silicon photodetector or LEDs used in "reverse mode", may be of a redundant lightguide, color compensated lightguide, or high brightness. The backlight lightguide detects the light intensity (or color) of light within the area to determine if it should be turned on. In another embodiment, to provide redundancy (or color compensation or high brightness mode) within a single optical input coupler or redundancy within the same lightguide through multiple optical input couplers, the same or Multiple LEDs driven by the same or different circuits in different optical input couplers may be used. When using a plurality of optical input couplers on the same light guide, the couplers can be arranged on the same side of the first optical input coupler, on the opposite side, on an orthogonal side, or at different edges. .

MODES OF THE LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a normal viewing mode, a daytime viewing mode, a high brightness mode, a low brightness mode, and a nighttime viewing mode. mode), night vision or NVIS compatible mode, dual display mode, monochrome mode, grayscale mode, transparent mode, full Full color mode, high color gamut mode, color corrected mode, redundant mode, touchscreen mode, 3D mode, field sequential color mode (field sequential color mode), privacy mode, video display mode, photo display mode, alarm mode, nightlight mode, emergency lighting/ Emergency lighting/sign mode: Contains one or more modes selected from the group. Daytime viewing mode involves inducing a device (such as a display or luminaire) at high brightness (e.g. greater than 300 Cd/m2) and producing an increase in brightness. To do this, it may include using two or more light guides, two or more optical input couplers, or driving additional LEDs in one or more optical input couplers. The nighttime viewing mode may include deriving the device at low brightness (eg, less than 50 Cd/m 2 ). The dual display mode may include a backlight and the lightguide illuminates one or more spatial light modulators or displays. For example, in a cell phone with two displays in a flip configuration, each display can be illuminated with the same film light guide emitting light towards each display. In transparent mode, the light guide is designed to be substantially transparent so that people can see through the display or backlight. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes at least one light guide for a first mode and a second backlight for a second mode different from the first mode. For example, a transparent mode backlight lightguide on a device can have a low light extraction feature density but allows see-through. For a high brightness mode on the same device, the second light guide may provide increased display luminance for the transparent mode. An increased color gamut mode can provide an increased color gamut (greater than 100% NTSC) by using light sources or LEDs of one or more spectrally narrow colors. These LEDs used in high gamut can provide an increased gamut by illumination through the same or different light guides or light input couplers. The color corrected mode can compensate for light source color variations due to time (such as phosphor variation), LED color binning differences, or due to temperature or environment. . The touchscreen mode may allow one or more lightguides to operate as an optical frustrated TIR based touchscreen. The redundant backlight mode may include one or more light guides or light sources that can operate in case of failure or other need. The 3D mode for a light emitting device is a display and light turning elements or display and polarization-based, LC shutter-based, or spectral selection-based glasses (to enable a stereoscopic display). glasses). For example, modes include one or more separate film-based backlight lightguides for 3D mode or film-based lightguides and displays configured to display images in three dimensions. For example, a privacy mode can be placed under the light turning element to increase or decrease the viewing angle by switching to a substantially diffuse mode or a substantially clear mode, respectively. It may include a switchable region of a polymer dispersed liquid crystal disposed. In another embodiment, the light emitting device may further include a video display mode or a photo display mode in which a color gamut is increased in the corresponding mode. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device includes an alarm mode such that one or more lightguides are turned on to draw attention to the area or display. For example, when a cell phone rings, a light guide formed around or on the exterior of the cell phone may be illuminated to "light up" the phone when the cell phone rings. By using a film-based lightguide, the lightguide film can be formed into a phone housing (e.g., thermoforming) or it is a film inside or outside the housing (translucent or transparent housing). -Can be inserted mold (mold). In another embodiment, the light-emitting device has an emergency mode such that at least one lightguide is notified (such as displaying an illuminated word “EXIT”) or lighting (emergency lighting for corridors). )). The lighting in one or more modes may be of a different color to provide increased visibility through smoke (eg red).

NVIS COMPATIBLE MODE

Night vision or NVIS mode can be used to irradiate one or more light guides, two or more optical input couplers, or additionally in one or more optical input couplers to produce the desired luminance and spectral output. It may include driving LEDs. In this mode, the spectrum of LEDs for NVIS mode can be compatible with, for example, US military specifications MIL-STD-3009. In applications requiring NVIS compatibility mode, LEDs with different colors or a combination of different light sources will be used to obtain the desired color and compatibility in daytime mode and nighttime mode. I can. For example, a daytime mode can incorporate white LEDs and blue LEDs, and a night or NVIS mode can integrate white, red, and blue LEDs and one The relative output of the above LEDs can be controlled. These white or colored LEDs may be placed on the same light input coupler or different light input couplers, on the same light guide or different light guides, on the same side of the light guide or on the other side of the light guide. Thus, each lightguide may contain a single color or a mixture of colors, and feedback mechanisms are used to control the output relative to time or background (ambient) lighting conditions or to control color. It can be used to compensate for fluctuations. The light emitting device is an NVIS compatible filter to minimize unwanted light output, such as a white film based backlight lightguide with a multilayer dielectric NVIS compatible filter in which the white lightguide is illuminated by white LEDs or white LEDs and red LEDs. It may further include. In a further embodiment, the backlight is illuminated by light from one or more LEDs of a color selected from the group: red, green, blue, warm white, cool white, yellow and amber. Contains one or more light guides. In another embodiment, the aforementioned backlight further includes an NVIS compatible filter disposed between the backlight or light guide and a liquid crystal display.

FIELD SEQUENTIAL COLOR MODE

In a further embodiment, a backlight or frontlight receives light extraction features and a portion of light extracted from the lightguide and directs the portion of light within a predetermined angular range. It includes a light guide including a light turning element arranged for. In another embodiment, the light redirecting element substantially collimates a portion of the light from the light guide, and reduces each FWHM intensity (angular full-width at half maximum) by 60 degrees, or Reduce the FWHM intensity by 30 degrees, reduce each FWHM intensity by 20 degrees, or reduce each FWHM intensity by 10 degrees, and from one light extraction area reaching an unwanted neighboring pixel, sub-pixel, or color filter. Reduce the percentage of cross-talk light. When the relative positions of the light extraction features, light turning elements, and pixels, sub-pixels, or color filters are controlled, light from the predetermined light extraction feature can be controlled so that neighboring pixels, There is little light leakage with sub-pixels or color filters. The light is substantially collimated, and there is also a small percentage of light or any light extracted from the light guide by a light extraction feature on the red light guide below the pixel corresponding to the red pixel. This can be useful in a backlight or frontlight, such as a color sequential backlight, since it will not be directed to a neighboring blue pixel, and the three lightguides (one for red, green and blue) will light up the pattern. By extracting, no color filters are required. In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a reflective display comprising a front light comprising three light guides, each having a set of light extraction areas and the three light extraction areas being a viewing side of the display. ), when viewed under a magnification looking, are substantially non-overlapping and the light extraction regions are substantially aligned with the individual light modulating pixels on the light emitting display. In this embodiment, color filters are not required and the efficiency of the light guides and the light emitting device can be increased. In one embodiment, each lightguide includes a plurality of light extraction regions including substantially one light extraction feature substantially aligned over a light modulating pixel in a reflective spatial light modulator. In another embodiment, each lightguide includes a plurality of light extraction regions including a plurality of light extraction features having respective light extraction regions substantially aligned on a light modulating pixel in a reflective spatial light modulator. In one embodiment, the light emitting display is 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 1 or more, 2 or more, 5 or more, 10 or more, 20 or more, per spatial light modulating pixel when viewed perpendicular to the light emitting surface of the display, 50 or more light extraction features: include a film-based lightguide comprising an average of one or more selected from the group and a reflective or transmissive spatial light modulator.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a reflective spatial light modulator and a reflective display comprising a frontlight or a backlight comprising three light guides, each comprising a set of light extraction areas and a first light guide, The uniformity of light emitted from the second light guide and the third light guide is greater than one selected from the group: 60%, 70%, 80% and 90% when irradiated individually. In this embodiment, the intensity of the light source(s) directing light to each lightguide can be modulated to provide sequential color illumination for the reflective spatial light modulator.

Single or multi-color mode (SINGLE OR MULTI-COLOR MODE)

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a first light guide and a second light guide arranged to receive light from the first light source and the second light source respectively under the light guide condition, and the first light source is less than 0.004 with the second light source It has a large Δu'v' color difference. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises three light guides arranged to receive light from three light sources under light guide conditions, and each of the three light sources has a Δu'v' color difference greater than 0.004. . For example, in one embodiment, the reflective display comprises a frontlight comprising first, second and third light guides arranged to receive light from red, green, and blue LEDs, each light guide With a reflective spatial light modulator, the spatial luminance uniformity of the light emission pattern from each light guide is 60% when the light is spatially modulated and all pixels are induced in "ON" or reflective mode, Emit light towards greater than one selected from the group: 70%, 80%, and 90%

AUTOMATIC OR USER CONTROLLED COLOR ADJUSTMENT

In one embodiment, the light emitting device can operate in a black and white mode (such as only a blue mode). In another embodiment, the user of the light emitting device can selectively choose the color of light emitted from the display or light emitting device. In another embodiment, the user may choose to change the mode and relative light output intensities from one or more light sources. For example, in one embodiment, the user may switch from a full color 2D display to a three-dimensional 3D display mode using only the front light. In one embodiment, the user has a light input coupler and a film-based light guide arranged to combine light from the red LED and white LED into the combination light guides of the light guide by adjusting the light output of the red LED to the white LED. The color temperature of the white point of the included display can be adjusted. In another embodiment, the user can automatically adjust the white color temperature from a fixed white point color temperature frontlight only mode to adjust the color temperature of the white point of the frontlight and display to the "warm" lighting from "cold" fluorescent lighting and incandescent bulbs. Reflective display with ambient light mode that automatically adjusts the light output from the red LED to the white LED (or the relative intensities of blue, green, and red LEDs, etc.) to maintain the same various environmental ambient light spectral conditions. Can be switched. In another embodiment, the user may choose to change from a full-color RGB display mode to an NVIS combined display mode with less red light output. In another embodiment, the user may choose to change from RGB lighting with red, green, and blue LEDs to black and white mode with light from white LEDs.

In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguide is arranged to receive light from a substantially white light source and a red light source. For example, by combining light from a white LED and a red LED, the color temperature of the display can be adjusted. This can be changed, for example by the user (eg for color preferences) or automatically. For example, in one embodiment, the light emitting device detects the color or spectral intensity of light within one or more wavelength bandwidths, increases or decreases brightness, and/or adjusts the merged color of light emitted from the reflective display. Reflective display and photosensor (one or more photos with opposing color filters or LEDs) that adjust the overall and relative light output intensity of the frontlights (or LEDs arranged to couple light inside a single frontlight) to Such as diodes). In another embodiment, a photodetector (or photosensor) used to detect the color or spectral intensity of light within one or more wavelength bandwidths also determines the relative brightness of ambient light, and the intensity of light from the frontlight is predetermined or user-adjusted. It is increased or decreased based on the setting. In one embodiment, the photosensor includes one or more light sensors such as LEDs used in reverse mode. In one embodiment, the photosensor is at the rear of the display, at the rear of the front light, between the light emitting area of the display and the bevel, screen border, or frame, inside the frame of the display, in the housing or the light of the housing. It is disposed at one or more locations selected from the group in the transmissive window or behind the casting of the display or light emitting device, and within the area of the light emitting device separated from the display area. In another embodiment, the photosensor includes red, green, and blue LEDs that are driven inversely to detect the relative intensities of the red, green, and blue spectral components of ambient light. In another embodiment, the photosensor is an output coupled lightguide extending from or at the input surface of an arrangement of coupled lightguides arranged to transmit light from one or more light sources to the light emitting region of the film-based lightguide. They are placed on the output surface. In this embodiment, the photosensor can effectively collect the average intensity of light incident on the display and film-based lightguide frontlight, which can compare the relative output of light from light sources in the device. In this embodiment, the photosensor includes light extraction features that effectively act in a reverse mode as light input coupling features in which a region of light collection is directed toward the photosensor and a portion of ambient light is combined into the light guide in a waveguide condition. Because of the larger spatial area, it is larger and therefore less sensitive to shadows.

One or more modes of the light emitting device may be configured to be turned on in response to an event automatically. When used in mobile phone video mode, or when high ambient light levels are detected or film-based emergency lighting fixtures that are electrically coupled to a smoke detection system (internal or external to the device) to be turned on when smoke is detected Events such as turning on the high gamut mode in response to environmental conditions such as a high brightness display mode that turns on automatically can be directed by the user.

In another embodiment, the display mode is from a lower luminance, higher gamut mode (such as red, green, and blue LEDs for display joy) to a higher luminance, lower gamut mode (such as using white LEDs for joy). ) Can be changed. In another embodiment, the display switches from a higher gamut mode (such as a light emitting device that emits light from red, green, and blue LEDs) to a lower gamut mode (such as using white phosphor based LEDs). Can be done automatically or by user control). In another embodiment, the display is from a high electrical power mode (such as a light emitting device that emits light from red, green, and blue LEDs) to a relatively low electrical power mode (substantially only white LEDs) for equivalent display luminances. (Such as the mode used) can be switched automatically or by user control.

In a further embodiment, the display is switched automatically or by user control from a color-sequential or field-sequential color mode frontlight or backlight illumination mode to an ambient-light illumination mode that turns off or substantially reduces the light output from the frontlight. And ambient light contributes more than 50% of the flux leaving the display.

In one embodiment, the display is film-based with a light input coupler arranged to receive light from one or more light sources emitting light having one or more colors selected from the group of red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow. Includes light guide. For example, in one embodiment, the display includes a film-based lightguide including one or more light input couplers arranged to receive light from red, green, blue, cyan and yellow LEDs. In this embodiment, the color gamut of the display can be significantly increased on a display containing only red, green, and blue lighting LEDs. In one embodiment, the LEDs are placed inside one light input coupler. In another embodiment, two or more LEDs of two different colors are arranged to input light into the arrangement of the combination light guides. In another embodiment, the first light input coupler comprises one or more LEDs having a first spectral output profile of light entering the film-based lightguide and a second spectrum of light entering the film-based lightguide different from the first spectral output profile. A second optical input coupler having an output profile and coupling lightguides in the first or second optical input coupler are arranged to receive light at the input surface from the LED having the first peak wavelength and have a wavelength bandwidth of 100 nm or less. The coupling lightguides in the output and other optical input couplers are not arranged to receive light at the input surface from an LED having a substantially similar peak wavelength and a substantially similar output wavelength bandwidth. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes light input couplers comprising different configurations of different colored LEDs. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises substantially identical configurations of different colored LEDs.

STEREOSCOPIC DISPLAY MODE

In another embodiment, a display operable in a stereoscopic display mode comprises a backlight or a frontlight and at least one light guide or light extracting region is disposed within or above the film-based light guide , At least two sets of light emitting regions can be controlled separately to produce at least two sets of images with a three-dimensional display. A 3D display uses optical redirecting elements, parallax barriers, lenticular elements, or spatially separated light areas before or after spatially modulating light into angularly separated light areas. It may further include other optical components to change effectively.

*In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least one first lightguide emitting light in a first angular range and at least one second lightguide emitting light in a second angular range. By employing light guides that emit light in two different angular ranges, viewing angle dependent properties such as a dual view display, or a stereoscopic display or a backlight can be created. I can. In one embodiment, the first lightguide emits light having an optical axis substantially around +45 degrees from perpendicular to the light output surface and the second lightguide is substantially minus from perpendicular to the light output surface. Emits light with an optical axis around 45 degrees. For example, a display used in a car display dash between the driver and the customer can display different information to each other, or the display can send light more efficiently towards two viewers and have a vertical output on the surface. Do not waste light by doing it. In a further embodiment, the first lightguide emits light corresponding to the light irradiating the first regions of the display (or the first time period of the display) corresponding to the left image and the second lightguide is applied to the right image. The display becomes a stereoscopic 3D display by emitting light corresponding to the light irradiating the second regions of the corresponding display (or the second time period of the display).

In one embodiment, the first lightguide emits substantially white light in a first angular direction from a first set of light extraction features and a second lightguide below the first lightguide is a second set of light Emits substantially white light in the second angular direction from the extraction features. In another embodiment, the first set of light extraction features are disposed below the first set of pixels corresponding to the left image, and the second set of light extraction features are substantially spatial with the first light extraction features. Separated into and placed below a second set of pixels corresponding to the right display image, the display is autosterescopic. In a further embodiment, the aforementioned autostereoscopic display further comprises a third lightguide that emits light towards the first and second sets of pixels, and is illuminated at a 2D display mode display full resolution.

In one embodiment, the light-emitting display includes a film-based light guide and a reflective spatial light modulator, and is reflected from light incident from the light guide due to light extracted from the light guide traveling in the first direction. The light reflected by the reflective spatial light modulator is substantially superimposed from the light incident from the light guide due to the light extracted from the light traveling in a second direction different from the first direction. It doesn't work. In one embodiment, the light emitting display includes a reflective light modulator having diffuse reflective properties, and each FWHM intensity of the diffusely reflected light is a laser having a divergence less than 3 milliradians at an incidence angle of 35 degrees. Is less than one selected from the group: 50 degrees, 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees and 10 degrees when measured with light. In one embodiment, the diffuse reflection spatial light modulator is an optical axis oriented in substantially opposite directions. It travels within the lightguide with the beams and receives light in two peak directions from the light exiting the film-based lightguide. For example, in this embodiment, light traveling in a first direction within the lightguide can be extracted from the lightguide so that the light has an angle FWHM intensity of 10 degrees at the first output surface and is perpendicular to the reflective spatial light modulator. Light incident on the reflective spatial light modulator at an angle of +20 degrees of peak luminous intensity and traveling in a second direction opposite to the first direction within the light guide can be extracted from the light guide. 1 It is incident on the reflective spatial light modulator at an angle of -20 degrees peak luminous intensity from perpendicular to the reflective spatial light modulator with each FWHM intensity of 10 degrees at the output surface. In this embodiment, light originally traveling in the first direction in the lightguide is output at an angle of peak luminosity of about -20 degrees from the display perpendicular to the first output surface and originally in the lightguide. Light traveling in the second direction is output from the display at an angle of peak luminous intensity of about +20 degrees from the display perpendicular to the first output surface. Modulate the light output (such as generating light from two white LEDs coupled to two input coupling lightguides alternately on opposite sides of the light emitting area) and reflective spatial light. By synchronizing the light output with a modulator, alternating images from the display can be directed towards +20 and -20 degrees, allowing viewers to see three-dimensional 3D images, indicia, and graphics. , Or watch the video. In another embodiment, the angle of the peak intensity of light from the first and second directions is varied across the frontlight so that the viewing position relative to the average viewer's eyes at a particular viewing distance. The light will be focused towards the two "eyeboxes" that fall within the range of the viewing position. In one embodiment, the angle of peak luminous intensity at the center of the display from light initially traveling with its optical axis in a first direction within a film-based lightguide is from the first output surface to the display surface. -40 degrees to -30 degrees, -30 degrees to -20 degrees, -20 degrees to -10 degrees, -10 degrees to -5 degrees from the vertical: within a range selected from the group, and in the second direction in the film-based light guide The angle of peak luminous intensity at the center of the display from light initially traveling with its optical axis is +40 degrees to +30 degrees, +30 degrees to + from perpendicular to the display surface at the first output surface. 20 degrees, +20 degrees to +10 degrees, +10 degrees to +5 degrees: within a range selected from the group. In another embodiment, the first output plane is substantially parallel to the first and second directions.

In one embodiment, the light-emitting display comprises lenticular lenses arranged to direct light into two or more viewing zones for stereoscopic display of images, video, information or indicia, and Lenticular lenses are either a film-based lightguide or include a film-based lightguide substrate. In this embodiment, the thickness of the stereoscopic display can be reduced by incorporating a film-based lightguide into the lenticular lens film. In a further embodiment, the stray light reflection from the frontlight at the air-lenticule surfaces is a lenticular-air surface until after reflection from the reflective spatial light modulator. It will be reduced by directing the light from the lenticular lenses towards the reflective display without passing through the surface.

LIGHT COLLECTION FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC CHARING

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a film-based lightguide comprising light extraction features that extract a portion of incident light from one or more light sources disposed in the light input couplers from the film-based lightguide. And the light extraction features redirect the first portion of the ambient light outside the display into the lightguide under the lightguide condition. In one embodiment, a portion of ambient light diverted into the film-based lightguide by the light extraction features is close to the light source at the input surface of the light input coupler for the film-based lightguide. Or directed to a photovoltaic cell disposed adjacent to or adjacent to the output surface of the combined light guides of a light output coupler for a film-based light guide. In one embodiment, the light emitting device can be switched to a charging mode so that the display is turned off (immediately or after a short period of time) and the light reaching the solar cell can cause the battery, capacitor, or other energy storage device. Charge. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a mode of charging when the ambient light is sufficiently bright, when the light emitting device is turned on, or when the light emitting device is turned on or off, or charging the energy storage device. In another embodiment, when power reaches a threshold voltage or current or a combination thereof, electrical power from the solar cell supplies power to the display or device without passing through the energy storage device. In another embodiment, a photosensor that senses ambient light intensity for backlight or frontlight intensity adjustment is a threshold where the ambient light level is measured by voltage, current, or a combination thereof from the photosensor. When above the level, it can also send a signal to turn on the charging mechanism to charge the charging storage device using solar cells.

FIELD SEQUENTIAL COLOR & STEREOSCOPIC MODE

One or more of the lightguides are optionally different colors for an increased color gamut such as red, green and blue (and yellow) that can illuminate the spatial light modulator in Field Sequential Color (FSC) or Color Sequential (CS) mode. ) Can be irradiated by light. In addition, the display can be derived in fast mode so that when synchronized with liquid crystal based shutter glasses the display looks like 3D through a stereoscopic display. Other methods (such as those used by Dolby 3D), such as viewing glasses-based passive polarizers (linear or circular) and interference filter spectrally selective 3D methods, use film-based lightguides. It may also be employed with a containing field sequential color based backlight. In another embodiment, the light guides may be induced sequentially, or the light sources illuminating the separate light guides may be induced sequentially. In one embodiment, one or more light sources illuminating the first light guide are pulsed on, then one or more light sources illuminating the second light guide are pulsed on, and then the first light Pulse on one or more light sources to the guide. Multiple light guides, spatial regions of one or more light guides, and spectrally selected elements within the light guides increase the color gamut and reduce the percentage of light absorbed by the color filters. Or can be used in color-sequential displays to exclude color filters. In another embodiment, two separate lightguides can be illuminated with red, green and blue light and the lightguides have two spatially separated regions comprising light extraction features and the light emitting device is from the first lightguide. In the light turning element and spatial configuration, the light of the light is redirected to the first angle range corresponding to the left image, and the light from the second light guide is further redirected to the second angle range corresponding to the right image. It further comprises a liquid crystal panel induced to display three-dimensional information, and the display is an autostereoscopic 3D display. In a further embodiment, the two separate light guides are illuminated with red, green and blue light and the light guide has two spatially separate or overlapping regions including light extraction features and the light emitting device displays three-dimensional information. The three-dimensional display can be viewed with liquid crystal shutter based glasses by further including a liquid crystal panel that is induced at a frequency higher than 100 Hz. In a further embodiment, the red, green and blue light emitted from the first backlight has wavelength spectra R1, G1, and B1, respectively, and the red, green and blue light emitted from the second backlight Light has wavelength spectra R2, G2 and B2 respectively and R1 does not substantially overlap R2, G1 does not substantially overlap G2, and G1 does not substantially overlap G2 and is spatially selective viewing glasses (viewing glasses) can be used to view a display in stereoscopic 3D, such as those disclosed in embodiments of stereoscopic viewing systems in US Patent Application Publication Nos. US20090316114, US20100013911, US20100067108, US20100066976, US20100073769, and US2010006085.

Table 1 illustrates example embodiments including one or more lightguides, one or more color sources, 3D guidance techniques, and pixel arrangements for 2D and 3D displays.

[Table 1] Example modes for inducing 2D & 3D according to embodiments

Liquid crystal displays, MEMS-based displays, projection displays including Field Sequential Color drive or Color Sequential drive schemes of one or more embodiments ), drive techniques for other displays are described in US Patent Application No. 12/124317, US Patent 7,751,663; 7,742,031; 7,742,016; 7,696,968; 7,695,180; 7,692,624; 7,731,371; 7,724,220; 7,728,810; 7,728,514; US patent application publication numbers US20100164856; US20100164855; US20100164856; US20100165218; US20100156926; US20100149435; US20100134393; US20100128050; US20100127959; US20100118007; US20100117945; US20100117942; US20100110063; US20100109566; US20100079366; US20100073568; US20100072900; US20100060556; US20100045707; US20100045579; US20100039425; US20100039359; US20100039358; US20100019999; Including those disclosed in US20100013755.

In some embodiments shown in Table 1, the display shows information about one image and then shows information about a second image (eg, left and right images) subsequently. The display areas can display portions of the image for viewing by the left eye, and other areas of the display simultaneously show images corresponding to the right eye. The display may provide spatial light modulation corresponding to the first field of information in a region to which the second field information continues. Examples include standard pixel arrangement, 3D backlight and matrix, RGB Stripes, and PenTile sub-pixel arrangement and US Patents 6,219,025; 6,239,783; 6,307,566; 6,225,973; 6,243,070; 6,393,145; 6,421,054; 6,282,327; 6,624,828; 7,728,846; 7,689,058; 7,688,335; 7,639,849; 7,598,963; 7,598,961; 7,590,299; 7,589,743; 7,583,279; 7,525,526; 7,511,716; 7,505,053; 7,486,304; 7,471,843; 7,460,133; 7,450,190; 7,427,734; 7,417,601; 7,404,644; 7,396,130; 7,623,141; 7,619,637; And US patent application publication numbers US20100118045; US20100149208 US20100096617; US20100091030; US20100045695; US20100033494; US20100026709; US20100026704; US20100013848; US20100007637; US20090303420;; US20090278867; US20090278855; US20090262048; US20090244113; US20090081064; US20090081063; US20090071734; US20090046108; US20090040207; US20090033604; US20080284758; US20080278466; US20080266330; And backlight and pixel arrangements such as other arrangements such as those disclosed in US20080266329.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device emits light towards the display with reflective components so that the illumination is directed from the viewing side of the pixels towards the spatial ligh modulating pixels. . In another embodiment, the display includes a light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide that illuminates the display from the front, and the light extraction areas of the light guide are described in US Pat. Nos. 6,680,792; 7,556,917; 7,532,377 and 7,297,471, including an interferometric modulator, such as those disclosed in 7,297,471, or directing light towards an IMOD. The lightguide may be optically coupled to an external component to the display, an integral component of the display, or to a layer or surface of the display. In one embodiment, the frontlight includes a light guide film comprising a core material or a cladding material comprising silicon.

In another embodiment, the display includes a film-based light emitting device comprising a light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide that illuminates the display from a front, and the light extraction regions of the light guide are reflective. LCD (reflective LCD), electrophoretic display, cholesteric display, zenithal bistable device, reflective LCD (reflective LCD), electrostatic display, Electrowetting display, bistable TN displays, micro-cup EPD displays, grating aligned zenithal display, photonic crystal display photonic crystal displays, electrofluidic displays, and electrochromic displays: direct light toward at least one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the display comprises a film-based light emitting device comprising a light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide that illuminates the display, wherein the light extraction regions of the light guide are described in US Patent Application Nos. 12/050,045; 12/050,032; 12/050,045; 11/524,704; 12/564,894; 12/574,700; 12/546,601; It directs light towards a time-multiplexed optical shutter display such as disclosed in 11/766,007 and U.S. Patent Nos. 7,522,354 and 7,450,799.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a reflective spatial light modulator disposed between the light guide and a light source for the light emitting device. For example, a light guide may be disposed at the front of an electrophoretic display, a lightguide, a lightguide region, a light mixing region, or a combined light. At least one of the coupling lightguides can be wrapped around the electrophoretic display and the light source can be placed behind the display.

*In one embodiment, the light guide is a time-multiplexed optical shutter display by Unipixel Inc., a MEMS type display with a moving shutter, such as displays by Pixtronix Inc, or Qualcomm MEMS It serves as an illuminator for a frustrated total internal reflection type display such as a reflective MEMS based interferometric display such as those at Technologies, Inc. In some embodiments, a MEMS type display reflects the separation between one or more components, such as an interferometric based modulating device from Qualcomm MEMS Technologies, Inc. Light modulating pixels or regions that spatially modulate the intensity of light to emit (in the case of frontlights used with reflective displays) or emit (in the case of frontlights used with reflective displays).

In some reflective display technologies, such as an interferometric modulator (such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Application No. 12/340,497 filed December 19, 2008 and assigned to QUALCOMM MEMS Technology, Inc.) The spectrum and angle of incidence affect the intensity and color of a pixel at a particular viewing angle. In one embodiment, the reflective display includes an interfering reflective spatial light modulator and a film-based frontlight, and the angle of the peak intensity of light exiting the frontlight is the angle with respect to the peak wavelength of the light emitted from the light guide. It is within one selected from the group: 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees and 5 degrees. In another embodiment, the reflective display includes an interfering reflective spatial light modulator and a film-based light guide, wherein the wavelength of light extracted from the front light is 100 nm of the peak wavelength reflected at the angle of the peak intensity of light extracted from the light guide. , 50nm, 30nm, 20nm and 10nm: within one selected from the group. In a further embodiment, the reflective display comprises an interferometric reflective spatial light modulator and an angle of a first peak intensity and an angle of a first peak wavelength and a second peak intensity toward the reflective spatial light modulator. And first, second and third light guides arranged to emit light at angles of the second peak wavelength and the third peak intensity and at the third peak wavelength, respectively, wherein the first, second and third peak wavelengths are The peak angles of intensity from each lightguide after reflection from each other and from the reflective spatial light modulator are 40 degrees, 30 degrees, 20 degrees, 10 degrees, 5 degrees and 2 degrees from each other. Is within one selected from. For example, in this embodiment, light extraction features (and/or other features of the lightguide) are used to ensure that the reflectance angle is substantially aligned from the reflective spatial light modulator (interfering modulator reflective display). , Light sources, light collimating elements or other components in the system) can be designed.

In another embodiment, matching light sources with reflective properties and various configurations of light sources may be used as disclosed in US Patent Application No. 12/340,497 as known in the art and assigned to QUALCOMM MEMS Technology, Inc.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device has an average dimensions of less than 50 microns in a light input coupler, a film-based lightguide with a thickness less than 100 microns, and a light emitting panel parallel to the optical axis within the light guide. Includes light extraction features. In this example, the light extraction features can be placed closer to the light modulating pixels because of the thin film-based lightguide, and smaller light extraction features can be used so that they are less than the reflective light modulating pixels. Are smaller or the same size. In some embodiments, by using smaller light extraction features proximate the reflective spatial light modulating pixels, the divergence of light and the direction of light from the light extraction features are such that only modulated regions of the light modulating pixels are irradiated. 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5% and 2% of the light flux that can be controlled or redirected from the lightguide by the first light extraction feature: more than one selected from the group The small one can be made to arrive at the first light extraction feature or the second light extraction feature after reflection from a reflective spatial light modulator or a reflective light modulating pixel. In another embodiment, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5% and 2% of the total light flux redirected from the lightguide by light extraction features: more than one selected from the group The small one reaches the light extraction features after the reflective spatial light modulator or reflective light modulating pixel reflection.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a frontlight or backlight for an electrowetting display. In one embodiment, the reflective display comprises a frontlight and film-based lightguide comprising an electrowetting material and a light input coupler. For example, in one embodiment, the electrowetting display is an electrowetting display comprising an electrowetting material including a light absorbing or light scattering material. Examples of electrowetting displays include those discussed in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 12/303,487 and 12/814,803 assigned to Liquavista B.V. In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a reflective, transflective, transmissive display and the light extraction features are in spatial regions above or below substantially light transmitting or light reflective regions of the display pixels. It is disposed substantially so that no light is emitted to inactive or undesired locations. For example, in one embodiment, an electrowetting display includes a pixel area in which a liquid is drawn from a substantially planar area to a thicker area facing a corner and a substantially flat area in which the liquid was previously located. Light extraction features are disposed substantially over the area (for the frontlight). In this embodiment, the area of the light absorbing region that substantially changes from the light absorbing region to the transparent region is the region irradiated from the front substantially in the case of the front light and from the back in the case of the backlight.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a film-based lightguide and a light input coupler and the light extraction features are substantially transparent planar area areas of electrowetting material that are substantially planar or have no optical contact with the lightguide. Then it maintains the light guide conditions for the light within the light guide. In this embodiment, when the electrowetting material is pulled from a substantially planar area into a shape comprising curved surfaces (such as a drop or bead of liquid), the corresponding curved surfaces are Light is extracted from the light guide at In one embodiment, an electrowetting material that extracts light is disposed over a substrate that is optically coupled to a film-based lightguide. In one embodiment, the electrowetting material pulled to one side is brought into optical contact with the light guide so that the light passes through the electrowetting material, passes through the light guide, and from the light guide and an aluminum coated substrate or white reflective film. Is extracted over light reflective materials such as.

In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide is a substrate for fabricating an electrowetting layer or MEMs-based layers for spatial light modulation. In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide includes a fluoropolymer-based coating disposed between the lightguide and an electrowetting liquid. In this embodiment, the fluoropolymer-based coating provides a strong hydrophobic layer that ensures diffusion of the electrowetting material, such as an oil film, in the off-state, from LightGuide. Provides one or more features selected from the group: providing a low refractive index cladding area that prevents undesired out-coupling of the light of, providing an inert coating. In one embodiment, the fluoropolymer-based coating is a sub-micron thick amorphous fluoropolymer layer.

In another embodiment, the display comprises a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based light emitting device comprising providing a light guide for illuminating the display or a light guide for performing light extraction for the display, wherein the display or light emitting device US Patent Application Nos. 12/511693; 12/606675; 12/221606; 12/258206; 12/483062; 12/221193; 11/975411 11/975398; 10/31/2003; 10/699,397 or US Patent Nos. 7,586,560; 7,535,611; 6,680,792; 7,556,917; 7,532,377; 7,297,471; 6680792; 6865641; 6961175; 6980350; 7012726; 7012732; 7035008; 7042643; 7046374; 7060895; 7072093; 7092144; 7110158; 7119945; 7123216; 7130104; 7136213; 7138984; 7142346; 7161094; 7161728; 7161730; 7164520; 7172915; 7193768; 7196837; 7198973; 7218438; 7221495; 7221497; 7236284; 7242512; 7242523; 7250315; 7256922; 7259449; 7259865; 7271945; 7280265; 7289256; 7289259; 7291921; 7297471; 7299681; 7302157; 7304784; 7304785; 7304786; 7310179; 7317568; 7321456; 7321457; 7327510; 7333208; 7343080; 7345805; 7345818; 7349136; 7349139; 7349141; 7355779; 7355780; 7359066; 7365897; 7368803; 7369252; 7369292; 7369294; 7369296; 7372613; 7372619; 7373026; 7379227; 7382515; 7385744; 7385748; 7385762; 7388697; 7388704; 7388706; 7403323; 7405852; 7405861; 7405863; 7405924; 7415186; 7417735; 7417782; 7417783; 7417784; 7420725; 7420728; 7423522; 7424198; 7429334; 7446926; 7446927; 7447891; 7450295; 7453579; 7460246; 7460290; 7460291; 7460292; 7470373; 7471442; 7471444; 7476327; 7483197; 7486429; 7486867; 7489428; 7492502; 7492503; 7499208; 7502159; 7515147; 7515327; 7515336; 7517091; 7518775; 7520624; 7525730; 7526103; 7527995; 7527996; 7527998; 7532194; 7532195; 7532377; 7532385; 7534640; 7535621; 7535636; 7542198; 7545550; 7545552; 7545554; 7547565; 7547568; 7550794; 7550810; 7551159; 7551246; 7551344; 7553684; 7554711; 7554714; 7556917; 7556981; 7560299; 7561323; 7561334; 7564612; 7564613; 7566664; 7566940; 7567373; 7570865; 7573547; 7576901; 7582952; 7586484; 7601571; 7602375; 7603001; 7612932; 7612933; 7616368; 7616369; 7616781; 7618831; 7619806; 7619809; 7623287; 7623752; 7625825; 7626581; 7626751; 7629197; 7629678; 7630114; 7630119; 7630121; 7636151; 7636189; 7642110; 7642127; 7643199; 7643202; 7643203; 7643305; 7646529; 7649671; 7653371; 7660031; 7663794; 7667884; 7668415; 7675665; 7675669; 7679627; 7679812; 7684104; 7684107; 7692839; 7692844; 7701631; 7702192; 7702434; 7704772; 7704773; 7706042; 7706044; 7706050; 7709964; 7710629; 7710632; 7710645; 7711239; 7715079; 7715080; 7715085; 7719500; 7719747; And 7719752.

LOCATION OF THE FILM-BASED LIGHTGUIDE FRONTLIGHT

In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide frontlight is disposed between the touchscreen film and the reflective spatial light modulator. In another embodiment, the touchscreen film is disposed between the film-based lightguide and the reflective spatial light modulator. In another embodiment, the reflective spatial light modulator, the film-based lightguide frontlight and the touchscreen are all film-based devices and each individual films are laminated together. In another embodiment, a light transmissive electrically conductive coating for a touchscreen device or display device is coated over the film-based lightguide frontlight. In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguide is physically coupled to the flexible electrical connectors of the display or touch screen. In one embodiment, the flexible connector is a "flexible cable" comprising a rubber film, a polymer film, a polyimide film, a polyester film or other suitable film. )","Flex cable", "ribbon cable" or "flexible harness".

In another embodiment, the film-based light guide frontlight comprises at least one of a light guide area, a light mixing area, a combined light guide or a light input coupler attached to one or more flexible connectors, and the light input coupler is behind the reflective display. Folded. For example, in one embodiment, a flexible film-based light guide comprising a polydimethysiloxane (PDMS) core and a low refractive index pressure sensitive adhesive cladding connects the display driver to the active display area of the reflective display. Is laminated to a polyimide flexible display connector.

In one embodiment, a film-based frontlight and one or more light sources, a combined light guide, a non-folded combined light guide, an input coupler housing, an alignment guide, a light source thermal transfer. element), a light emitting device including a relative position maintaining element, a flexible circuit connector physically coupled to a flexible circuit connector for a reflective display, touch screen, or frontlight, or to a circuit board. Are combined into For example, in one embodiment, a light source for a film-based lightguide is placed over drivers for a reflective display and is electrically guided using the same circuit board as the driver. In another embodiment, the flexible film-based lightguide includes traces, wires, or other electrical connections for a display or frontlight and thus performs its function as a film-based lightguide with fewer Allows positive flexible connectors. In another embodiment, the light source for the film-based frontlight is a light source driver, a display driver, a touch screen driver, a microcontroller, an additional light source for an indicator, alignment or registration pins, alignment guides, Alignment or registration holes, openings or apertures, heat sink, thermal transfer element, metal core substrate, optical collimating Light collimating optical element, light turning optical element, bi-directional optical element, light coupling optical element, secondary optic, light input coupler, multiple lights The input couplers, and the light emitting device housing: are physically coupled or shared with one or more of a common circuit board or flexible circuit.

In one embodiment, the area between the touch screen layer and the reflective light modulating pixels, the area on the viewing side of the touch screen layer, the area between the diffusing layer and the reflective light modulating pixels, the field of view of the diffusing layer in a reflective display Viewing side, area between the diffusion layer and light modulating pixels, area between the diffusion layer and reflective element, area between light modulating pixels and reflective element, viewing side of the substrate for component or light modulating pixels, reflective display , Between color filters and spatial light modulating pixels, viewing side of color filters, between color filters and reflective element, substrate for color filter, substrate for light modulating pixels, touch screen substrate, protective lenses The area between the reflective display and the light extraction layer, the area between the light extraction layer and the light modulating pixels, the area on the viewing side of the light extraction layer, the area between the adhesive and the components of the reflective display, the reflective display known in the art Between two or more components of; The reflective display includes one or more film-based lightguides disposed within or adjacent to one or more areas selected from the group. In the previously mentioned embodiment, the film-based lightguide may include volumetric light extraction features or light extraction features on one or more surfaces of the lightguide, and the lightguide may include one or more lightguides. Regions, one or more cladding regions, or one or more adhesive regions.

Increasing the separation distance between spatially varying elements in the display will cause unwanted light absorption due to light or parallax entering at an angle to be absorbed by neighboring color filters or light modulating pixels. I can. In one embodiment, 150, 100, 75, 50, 25 and 15 microns: a front comprising a film-based lightguide having an average thickness in a light emitting region that is less than one selected from the group The display comprises a light or backlight, and a light emitting region is disposed between the color filter elements and the light modulating pixel elements or between the light modulating pixel elements and the light reflecting elements so that the two elements The light flux lost due to the increased separation between is less than one selected from the group: 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5% and 2%.

In one embodiment, the film-based light guide is a touchscreen connector, a touchscreen film substrate, a reflective spatial light modulator connector: at least one selected from the group and an active area of the reflective spatial light modulator behind the reflective spatial light modulator. area) is folded around, and the reflective spatial light modulator film substrate is folded behind the first edge or second edges substantially orthogonal to the first edge, edges opposite the first edge. . In the above-mentioned embodiment, the light guide area, the light mixing area or the portion of the combined light guide includes a bent area of a fold and a reflective spatial light modulator flexible connector, reflective It may extend beyond the type spatial light modulator substrate, the touch screen flexible connector, or the touch screen flexible substrate.

In one embodiment, the film-based lightguide frontlight includes a flexible connector, a display substrate film, or two optical input couplers disposed along the same or two different sides of a touch screen film. In another embodiment, the display connector or touchscreen connector is disposed between two optical input couplers of the film-based lightguide frontlight. In another embodiment, the combined lightguides of the film-based frontlight are folded into an array and stacked, in registration with a light source (which may be placed on a circuit or connector for a display or touchscreen). Aligned (eg pins, cavities, or alignment guides) and the film-based lightguide is subsequently laminated to the flexible connectors and/or the reflective display or touchscreen. In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide is laminated to the flexible connectors and/or the reflective display or touchscreen and then the combined lightguides of the film-based frontlight are folded and stacked into an array, and a light source (display Or aligned (eg pins, cavities, or alignment guides) in registration with a circuit for a touch screen or which can be placed on a connector. In a further embodiment, lamination and registration are performed substantially simultaneously. In a further embodiment, light extraction features are formed over (or within) a film-based lightguide following lamination (or adhesion) onto a touchscreen or spatial light modulator. In this embodiment, features can be easily registered (such as screen printed, etched, scribed, or laser ablated) after a lamination or gluing process, so the spatial light modulator is used. The registration of the light extraction regions (or light emitting regions) of the excitation film-based frontlight (or backlight) need not be performed prior to lamination or during lamination.

In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group: combination light guides, light mixing area, and light guide area is a lateral width within the area disposed between the light emitting area and the light input surface of the one or more combined light guides. ) Can be tapered to decrease. In one embodiment, the light mixing region is tapered and a hinge or support mechanism may be used to support the display comprising the light emitting region, such that the start of a hinge or support mechanism from the center of the display ( start) is before the end of the width of the light emitting area in a direction parallel to or perpendicular to the width of the display. In this embodiment, by using a tapered light mixing region, the support mechanism for the display can be used without the need to position the light emitting region of the display laterally past. In another embodiment, the tapered light mixing area, light guide area, or combination light guides are bound to hinges or support mechanisms for the display by opposite side edges of the light emitting area or light emitting area of the display. ) The areas or coupling lightguides are not disposed directly above or below the hinge or support mechanism so that they can be disposed at least partially laterally within the area.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a display, a film-based light guide, an optical input coupler, and a hinge or pivot connecting the region of the device including the display with the rest of the device including the optical input coupler and the optical mixing region. pivot) area is disposed substantially within the rest of the device, such that the light emitting area disposed proximate the display and the area of the lightguide in the hinge or pivot area are substantially the same thickness and are 200 microns, 150 microns, 100 microns, 50 Microns, and 25 microns: less than one selected from the group. In this embodiment, for example, a laptop comprising hinges on opposing lateral edges of the tapered light mixing region may comprise a 100 micron film extending from the laptop base to the display module, and The 100 micron film-based light guide functions as a backlight for a transmissive display. The thin optical connection from the laptop base to the backlight (or frontlight) can be smaller than the width of the display and hinges and a very thin display module for the laptop or can be repositioned or oriented. Other devices that have a display module can be considered. In another embodiment, one or more light sources for a backlight or frontlight for a portable computer may be disposed at the base of the computer and a flexible film-based lightguide It extends from the base to the display module. In this embodiment, the heat generated from a light source (such as an array of white LEDs) is an air current placed in the base of the computer, a heat sink, or the thermal path of a heat pipe ( thermal path) or adjacent, thermally coupled, by placing the light source and the first thermal transfer element (such as a metal core circuit board) efficiently. In one embodiment, the same heat pipe, fan, or heat transfer element used for one or more processors may be shared with one or more light sources providing illumination for the display.

Flexible light emitting device, backlight, or front light (FLEXIBLE LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE, BACKLIGHT, OR FRONTLIGHT)

In another embodiment, in a light emitting device such as a display, the light guide, light guide area, or combination light guides may be bent or folded to a radius of curvature of 75 times the thickness of the light guide or light guide area, and similar light guides or It includes a film-based light emitting device light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide that can similarly function for similarly non-bent light guide areas. In another embodiment, the lightguide, combined lightguide, or lightguide area may be bent or folded with a radius of curvature 10 times greater than the thickness lightguide or lightguide area and similar lightguide or similar non-bending lightguide area. Can function similarly for In another embodiment, the display is a light source, light input, that the display can bend or fold with a radius of curvature less than 75 times the thickness of the display or light guide area and function similarly to similar displays that are not similarly bent. It includes a film-based light emitting device including a coupler and a light guide. In other embodiments, the display may be bent or folded with a radius of curvature greater than ten times the thickness of the lightguide or lightguide area, and may function similarly for similar displays that are not similarly curved.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device or the display incorporating the light emitting device is substantially bent inside a non-planar light emitting device or a display incorporating the light emitting device. In one embodiment, the light emitting device or display incorporating the light emitting device has a substantially light emitting surface area in the shape of a cylindrical, spherical, pyramidal, toric, conical, arcuate surface, folded surface, and curved surface, and is cylindrical. , Spherical, pyramidal, toric, conical, arcuate surface, folded surface, and a light emitting surface area comprising a portion of at least one shape selected from the group of curved surfaces. By folding the input coupler behind the light emitting area and inside the curved or curved area of the light emitting device or display, the input coupler can be effectively “hidden” from the visibility and can create a substantially seamless display. In another embodiment, in the light emitting device, two or more regions of the light emitting region overlap each other in the thickness direction so that there is a continuous light emitting region as in the case of a cylindrical display or a display surrounding two or more sides of a rectangular solid. .

In another embodiment, the backlight or front light is a mobile phone, a smart phone, a personal digital assistant, a laptop, a tablet computer, a pad computer (such as available from Apple Inc.), an e-book, an e-reader, Or integrated into portable devices such as other computing devices.

KEYPAD & BACKLIGHT

In another embodiment, the light emitting device provides light as a frontlight or backlight of the display and also illuminates an object. For example, the light guide may extend from a display area for a laptop or cell phone to a keypad area. In another embodiment, the object for lighting is one or more selected from the wall or mountable object to which the display is attached, the surface of the keyboard keys to be pressed, other buttons and the second display: group. In another embodiment, the light emitting device provides light as a frontlight or backlight of the display and also provides external white or color illumination as an illuminating device such as a light fixture or flashlight. . In another embodiment, the light-emitting device displays a pattern of light emission lines, shapes, indicia or decorative shapes on the exterior or interior area of the device. to provide. For example, in one embodiment, the film-based lightguide illuminates the side areas of a thin cellular phone so that the sides emit light when the phone rings. In one embodiment, the film-based lightguide is physically or optically coupled to a housing material, such as a transparent polycarbonate material. In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide is insert-molded, film-insert molded, or laminated over the housing of the device.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes one or more film-based light guides and one or more light input couplers to provide illumination to two or more light emitting displays. For example, in one embodiment, the cell phone comprises a first set of combined lightguides disposed behind and extending from the first light emitting area, illuminating a transmissive LCD, and And a light input coupler comprising a second set of coupling light guides extending from a second light emitting area that illuminates the reflective display from the front.

In another embodiment, the film-based lightguide includes one or more cut or separated areas such that one or more areas of the film-based lightguide are aroung, under, over, between, and Or it can extend through the component. For example, in one embodiment, a cellular phone includes a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based light guide including a hole, and a lens housing or optical path for the camera passes through the hole. can do. In another embodiment, the transparent areas of the film-based lightguide are placed between the camera and the external environment to be imaged, and the haze of the lightguide is low so no optical distortion or noise is introduced. In another embodiment, a film-based lightguide comprises a linear cut within a lightguide area, a light mixing area, or one or more combined lightguide areas, and portions of the areas separated by the cut are one on top of the other. Overlap. In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a film-based lightguide comprising two lightguide regions substantially parallel to each other in two different substantially parallel planes. In this embodiment, the area between two substantially parallel lightguide areas may be angled, curved or perpendicular to the substantially parallel lightguide areas. For example, in one embodiment, the front light comprises a film-based lightguide so that the light emitting region disposed over the reflective element of the reflective spatial light modulator is substantially parallel and parallel to the film region on the circuit board. The film area between one area is arranged along the flexible display connector at about 90 degrees, so that the cross-section of the film-based lightguide covers two parallel areas connected by an area at about 90 degrees to both areas. In another embodiment, the cross-section of a film-based lightguide is in the shape of an "E" with no horizontal extensions inside of "Z", "N" or "E". . In a further embodiment the film region between parallel regions is curved.

FRONTLIGHT AND LIGHT FIXTURE

In one embodiment, the light emitting device is a frontlight and light fixture that emits light at two significantly different luminous intensities within two non-overlapping angular ranges. For example, in one embodiment, the luminous device emits a frontlight for a display (such as a wall-mounted self-luminous picture frame) and a high angle illumination of the ceiling by emitting light. Provided luminaires (such as wall-mounted uplights), the average luminance of the light-emitting surface perpendicular to the light-emitting surface is less than 500Cd/m2 (in the "on" state or with a diffuse white with 70% reflectivity). The average luminance of the light emitting surface at an angle selected from the range between 60 degrees and 90 degrees from perpendicular to the light emitting surface) and irradiating the reflective material is greater than 2,000 Cd/m2. In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a front light for a display (wall-mounted self-luminous picture frame) and a lighting fixture that emits light to provide high angle illumination of the ceiling (wall-mounted upright (such as a wall-mounted uplight), so that the luminous intensity of the light emitting device perpendicular to the light emitting surface is less than one selected from the group: 100 Candela, 200 Candela, 300 Candela, 400 Candela and 500 Candela ( The average luminance of the light emitting surface at an angle selected from the range between 60 degrees and 90 degrees from normal to the light emitting surface (in the "on" state or irradiating a diffuse white reflective material with 70% reflectivity) is 500, 750, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000 candelas: greater than one selected from the group. In another embodiment, the light emitting device has a light emitting surface that functions as a display with a first peak luminous intensity output within a first angular range (irradiating a white reflective material with an "on" mode, a white mode or a 70% diffuse reflectance), It includes a light-emitting surface that has a second peak luminous intensity and functions as a luminaire within a second angular range that does not overlap the first angular range, and the ratio of the second luminous intensity to the first luminous intensity is 2, 5, 7 , 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60, and 80: greater than one selected from the group. In one embodiment, one or more cladding regions include light extraction features on an opposing film-based lightguide surface, and light from the light source is combined in the cladding region(s) so that light from the cladding region(s) is illuminated. It provides illumination as an instrument and the light extracted from the core area provides backlight or frontlight illumination for passive or active displays. For example, in one embodiment, each cladding area on both sides of a film-based lightguide is three times as thick as the core area and extends from the film-based lightguide and is arranged to couple light into a stack of combined lightguides. The light from the plurality of LEDs is combined with a film-based lightguide to reach light extraction features placed on, within or adjacent to the lightguide's core area and travel within the lightguide's core area. More light proceeds within the more than one cladding region or within the cladding regions reaching light extraction features disposed on the outer surface.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device operates as a display backlight or frontlight and is oriented substantially horizontally so that when looking down (or looking up) over the display it displays information and the display is arranged to receive light. Examine walls, steps, and other surfaces. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device is a backlight for displays and lighting fixtures. In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a backlight or frontlight for a display and emits light from the edge of one or more regions selected from the group: a light guide, a core layer, a cladding layer and two or more cladding regions.

Light guide as a sound emitting device

In one embodiment, the lightguide is also a thin, flexible, capable of being vibrated by the transducer to emit sound such as disclosed in U.S. Patents 6,720,708 and 7,453,186 and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/755895. , Is a bulkhead. In one embodiment, the light guide is a front light for illuminating the reflective display and the light guide is also a speaker that emits audio. In one embodiment, the lightguide includes multiple layers of polymers (such as the core lightguide and two cladding layers) that increase the rigidity of the lightguide film and provide improved acoustic performance. In one embodiment, the light guide has at least one characteristic selected from the group of high light transmittance, low blurring, high clarity, and low diffuse reflectivity to reduce the visibility of the light guide or partition.

Also, the light guide is a touch screen. (LIGHTGUIDE IS ALSO A TOUCHSCREEN)

In one embodiment, the lightguide is also a touch screen for detecting haptic feedback, contact, proximity, or the location of a user input by a finger or stylus or other device. In one embodiment, the lightguide not only provides a frontlight, backlight, audio, or other function, but also delivers at least one of lighting or light that has been altered by the input. In one embodiment, the light guide is an optical touch screen. Optically based touchscreens are known in the art, and in one embodiment, optically based touchscreens are those disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 11/826,079, 12/568,931, or 12/250,108. In another embodiment, the light guide is an optical touch screen suitable for a night vision display or a night vision display mode. In a further embodiment, the lightguide is a Night Vision compatible touchscreen as described in US Patent Application Serial No. 11/826.23.

In yet another embodiment, the lightguide is a surface acoustic wave based touchscreen, such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,784,054, 6,504,530 or U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/315,690.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY

In another embodiment, a head-up display includes a film-based light emitting device comprising a light source, a light input coupler and a light guide. Head-up displays are used in automobiles, aircraft and marine craft. In one embodiment, the light guide of the head-up display is an integral part of a windshield, which extracts light before encapsulated within the windshield. After-market HUD (after-market HUD), an after-market HUD, formed on the inner or outer surface of the windshield, formed with the light extraction features, formed with the features, after encapsulated in the windshield automobile dashboard), a free-standing HUD (free-standing HUD) suitable to be placed on the automobile dashboard, where a light guide including PVB as a core or cladding material is formed: one selected from the group.

Small or substantially edgeless light emitting devices (SMALL OR SUBSTANTIALLY EDGELESS LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE)

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises: 20 millimeters, 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter and 0.5 millimeters: A border region is included between the light emitting region in the first direction orthogonal to the direction orthogonal to the output surface and the closest edge of the light guide. The border area is small enough such that a light emitting device, backlight, frontlight, lighting fixture or display incorporating a light emitting device appears to be edgeless or substantially edgeless. The light emitting device may have a small border area along one, two, three, four or more edges. The border area may comprise a small frame, bevel, housing or other structure or component. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a film-based lightguide and the light emitting region extends around the edge of the light emitting device front surface in the first borderless region. The light emitting device does not have a border or frame area in the first borderless area. For example, in one embodiment, a light emitting display having a substantially flat viewing surface comprises a flexible film-based lightguide and a first region of the light guide light emitting region is It is folded around behind the second area of the emission area and the light emission area extends to the edge and around the edge in at least one area of the display. By associating a flexible film-based lightguide with a flexible spatial light modulator such as a flexible LCD, displays and backlights including film-based lightguides can be bent around a corner or edge of the display.

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least two arrays of combined lightguides disposed along one edge or side of the light emitting device and light in the first array of combined lightguides is substantially in a first direction. Traveling and light in the second array of combined lightguides travels substantially in a second direction, directed greater than 90 degrees from the first direction. In another embodiment, two light sources are arranged along one side or side of the light emitting device with optical axes oriented in directions substantially opposite each other so that the light is combined into two arrays of combined light guides and which light source Nor is it disposed beyond the edge or side of the light emitting device and the intersection of the adjacent edge or side. In a further embodiment, one light source is arranged along one side of the light emitting device arranged to emit light in substantially opposite directions so that the light is combined into two arrays of combined light guides and the light source is at the edge of the light emitting device or It is not placed beyond the side and adjacent edges or crossings of sides.

In a further embodiment, the use of one or more light input couplers arranged to receive light from a light source in a direction directed away from the central region of the edge or side of the light emitting device is substantially less than the adjacent side or edge or edgeless border region. Allows to have a because the light source does not extend past a neighboring edge or border.

In a further embodiment, at least one light input coupler is folded behind at least one light mixing area or light emission area so that the distance (border region) between the edge of the light emission area and the light emitting device is 20 millimeters, 10 millimeters. Is less than one selected from the group:, 5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, and 0.5 millimeters.

In a further embodiment, the plurality of light input couplers are folded behind at least one light mixing region or light emitting region so that the distance between the light emitting device and the edge of the light emitting region along at least two sides or edges of the light emitting device (border region (border region)) is less than one selected from the group: 20 millimeters, 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, and 0.5 millimeter.

In a further embodiment, the plurality of light input couplers are folded behind at least one light mixing region or light emitting region so that the distance between the edge of the light emitting region and the light emitting device along all sides or edges of the light emitting device (border region ( border region)) is less than one selected from the group: 20 millimeters, 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, and 0.5 millimeters. In a further embodiment, the light input surfaces and/or combination lightguides are substantially folded behind at least one light mixing area and light emission area to emit light with an edge of the light emission area along at least three sides or edges of the light emitting device. The distance between the device and the border region is less than one selected from the group: 20 millimeters, 10 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, and 0.5 millimeter.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least one light input coupler disposed along one edge or side with a light source disposed within an inner area defined by an area between two adjacent edges or sides of the light emitting device. Include. In this embodiment, the light input coupler may be a middle input coupler and the light source is disposed substantially in the middle area of the inner area.

In a further embodiment, at least a portion of the array of coupling lightguides is disposed at the edge of at least one of the light mixing region and the light emitting region that directs light inward at a first coupling lightguide orientation angle. do. In one embodiment, the orientation angle of the first coupling lightguide is greater than zero and along at least one edge or side of the light emitting device, the border region is 20 millimeters, 10 Less than one selected from the group: millimeters, 5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, 1 millimeter, and 0.5 millimeters. In another embodiment, the combined light guides are oriented at any angle along one side of the light emitting device so that the light source may be disposed within the inner area of the edge without requiring one or more bent or folded portions of the combined light guides. .

In a further embodiment, the first portion of the border region between the light emitting region and at least one edge or side of the light emitting device around the light emitting region has a transmission greater than 80% and a haze less than 30%. have (haze). In a further embodiment, the first portion of the border region between the light emitting region and at least one edge or side of the light emitting device around the light emitting region has a transmission greater than 85% and a haze less than 10%. have (haze). In another embodiment, a border region between the light emitting region and at least one edge or side of the light emitting device around the light emitting region has a transmission greater than 85% and a haze less than 10%. Have. In another embodiment, a border region between the light emitting region and at least three edges or sides of the light emitting device around the light emitting region is greater than 85% transmission and less than 10% haze. ).

Brightness uniformity of backlight, front light, or light emitting device

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, in the film-based lightguide, June 1, 2001, VESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standard Version 2.0 (VESA The 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting surface of the light emitting device measured according to the Flat Panel Display measurements Standard version 2.0) is greater than those selected from the 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95% groups. In yet another embodiment, the display comprises a spatial light modulator, and a light emitting device including a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, wherein the 9-spot space of light reaches the spatial light modulator in the film-based lightguide. Luminance uniformity (placement of a white reflectivity standard surface, such as Spectralon by Labsphere Inc., where the spatial light modulator will be positioned to receive light from the lightguide, and on June 1, 2001, VESA flat panel type Panel Display Measurements (measured by measuring light reflecting off a standard surface at 9-spots according to standard version 2.0) is greater than those selected from the 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95% groups. In yet another embodiment, the display comprises a light emitting device including a spatial light modulator and a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, the VESA flat panel display on June 1, 2001 in a film-based lightguide. Measurements The 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity of the display measured according to standard version 2.0 is greater than those selected from the 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 95% groups.

Color uniformity of backlight, front light, or light emitting device

In one embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, and in the film-based lightguide, VESA Flat Panel Display Measurements Standard Version 2.0 (Appendix 201, 9-spot sampled spatial color non-uniformity of the light emitting surface of the light emitting device measured on 1976 u', v'uniform chromaticity as described in page 249), Δu'v' is a spectrometer-based spot colorimeter based spot color meter), which is smaller than those selected from the group 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, 0.004. In yet another embodiment, the display comprises a light emitting device including a spatial light modulator and a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, wherein a 9-spot sampled of light arriving at the spatial light modulator in the film-based lightguide. Spatial color non-uniformity, △u'v' (Place a white reflectivity standard surface such as Spectralon at the location where the spatial light modulator will be located to receive light from the lightguide, and on June 1, 2001, VESA flat panel display Measurements As described in Standard Version 2.0 (Appendix 201, page 249), the 1976 u', v'measured by measuring the color of a standard surface on a uniform chromaticity) is 0.2 when measured using a spectrometer-based spot colorimeter. , 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004. In another embodiment, the display comprises a light emitting device including a spatial light modulator and a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based lightguide, with the film-based lightguide measured June 1, 2001 VESA flat panel display. 9-spot of the display measured on 1976 u', v'uniform chromaticity, as described in standard version 2.0 (Appendix 201, page 249), sampled spatial color non-uniformity, Δu'v' is a spectrometer-based spot It is less than that selected from the group 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 when measured using a colorimeter.

The angular profile of light emitted from the light emitting device

In one embodiment, the light emitted from at least one surface of the light emitting device is angular half full width intensity (FWHM) less than one selected from the group 120 degrees, 100 degrees, 80 degrees, 60 degrees, 40 degrees, 20 degrees, and 10 degrees. : It has full-width at half-maximum intensity). In another embodiment, the light emitted from at least one surface of the light emitting device is from average to light emitting surface, 0-10 degrees, 20-30 degrees, 30-40 degrees, 40-50 degrees, 60-70 degrees, 70 degrees. It has an angular peak of at least one intensity within at least one angular range selected from the group of -80 degrees, 80-90 degrees, 40-60 degrees, 30-60 degrees, and 0-80 degrees. In another embodiment, the light emitting from at least one surface of the light emitting device has two peaks within one or more of the aforementioned angular ranges and the light output is illuminated to provide a uniform luminance over a predetermined angular range. It is similar to the "bat-wing" type profile known in the industry. In another embodiment, the light emitting device emits light from two opposite surfaces within one or more of the aforementioned angular ranges and the light emitting device is a backlight, up-illuminated and downwardly illuminating two displays on one side of the backlight. -A light fixture that provides illumination, light on the viewing side of the frontlight that illuminates the display and does not reflect from the modulating components of a reflective spatial light modulator with a peak angle of luminance greater than 40 degrees, 50 degrees, or 60 degrees. It is selected from the group of front lights that have output. In another embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitting device is 0-20, 20-40, 40-60, 60-80, 80-100, 100-120, 120-140, 140-160, 160- 180, 35-145, 45-135, 55-125, 65-115, 75-105, and 85-95 degrees are within an angular range selected from the group. In a further embodiment, the shape of the lightguide is substantially tubular and the light travels through the tube in a direction substantially parallel to the longer (length) dimension of the tube and the light exits the tube, where the light output flux At least 70% are included within the angular range of 35 degrees to 145 degrees from the light emitting surface. In a further embodiment, the light emitting device emits light from the first surface and a second surface opposite the first surface, wherein the light flux exiting each of the first and second surfaces is 5-15% and 85- 95%, 15-25% and 75-85%, 25-35% and 65-75%, 35-45% and 65-75%, 45-55% and 45-55% group. In another embodiment, the first light emitting surface emits light in a substantially downward direction and the second light emitting surface emits light in a substantially upward direction. In another embodiment, the first light emitting surface emits light in a substantially upward direction and the second light emitting surface emits light in a substantially downward direction.

OPTICAL REDUNDANCY

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes combined lightguides that provide a system for optical redundancy. Optical redundancy provides the ability for the device to function with acceptable luminance uniformity, luminance uniformity, or color uniformity levels through multiple optical paths from different light sources overlapping in at least one area. Optical redundancy allows the light guides to be stacked and coupled light from more than one light source to the light input coupler, or for the same light guide film on multiple sides of the light guide (such as on opposite sides of the light guide). This can be achieved through arranging input couplers. One or more methods of achieving optical redundancy may be used, for example, by stacking two or more lightguides each including light input couplers each disposed to receive light from a plurality of light sources.

Optical redundancy increases spatial or angular uniformity (luminance, illuminance, or color), and angular or spatial light output profiles (e.g., low angle output from one lightguide and high angle from a second lightguide). Output), provide increased luminance levels, and backup when component failure causes light from the first lightguide to fall below specifications (such as color uniformity, luminance uniformity or luminance) in the overlapping area. Provides a light emitting area and increases the color gamut (e.g., combining light output from white and red LEDs) or color mixing (e.g., from red, green, and blue LEDs) Can be used to provide a combination of the outputs of.

In one embodiment, optical redundancy is used to maintain or reduce unwanted effects of light source failure or component failure (such as an LED driver or solder joint failure). For example, two light guides can be coupled to a separate optical input coupler, each with a separate light source, and the light guides can be stacked in the light output direction, each of which has a light source to provide a uniform output in the light emitting area. It can be designed independently with extraction features. If the LED fails in the first optical input coupler, the second optical input coupler can still operate and provide a uniform light output. Similarly, if the color of the first LED in the first light input coupler changes due to temperature or drop, the effects (color changes such as off-white) will be less due to the optical redundancy of the stacked system.

In another embodiment, the light output from two or more light sources is combined into a light input coupler of a light emitting device including optical redundancy and the optical redundancy reduces the color or brightness binning requirements of the LEDs. In one embodiment, optical redundancy provides mixing of light from multiple light sources within an area (such as within combined lightguides) so that the color from each source receives light from each light source and lights it. It is spatially averaged with each combined lightguide directed to a guide or light mixing area.

In yet another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least one combined lightguide arranged to receive light from at least two light sources, wherein the light from the at least two light sources is one of the at least one combined light guide. Mixed within one area and the first area is selected from the group 100%, 70%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5% of the largest dimension of the light emitting device output surface or light emitting area. Is within a distance from the light emitting area of the light emitting device that is less than that.

In a further embodiment, the light emitting device comprises at least one combined lightguide arranged to receive light from at least two light sources, wherein light from the at least two light sources is at least one combined lightguide and a light horn. The combined length of at least one combined lightguide and light mixing area in the direction of travel of light exiting the combined lightguide and blended over the length of the summation area is 100%, 70% of the maximum dimension of the light emitting device output surface or light emitting area , 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5%.

In a further embodiment, a light emitting device comprising a plurality of light sources includes optical redundancy and the device can be darkened by adjusting the light output of the one or more LEDs while making the output drive pattern of the one or more LEDs substantially constant. For example, it includes a first string of LEDs (L1, L2, and L3) connected in electrical series, and optically couples light to the optical input couplers (LIC1, LIC2, and LIC3), respectively, and is electrically connected in series. A light emitting device further comprising a second string of LEDs L4, L5, and L6 and optically coupling the light to the optical input couplers LIC1, LIC2, and LIC3 respectively, adjusting the current to the second string of LEDs By doing so, for example, it can be darkened uniformly from 50% to 100% output luminance (for example, it can be darkened while maintaining the spatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting surface). Similarly, the color of the light output can be uniformly adjusted by increasing or decreasing the electrical current to the second string when the color of the light output of the second string is different from the color output of the first string. Similarly, three or more strings can be independently controlled to provide optical redundancy or uniform adjustment of brightness or color. Three or more groups with different colors (eg, red, green, and blue) can be independently adjusted to change the output color while providing spatial color uniformity.

Maintain uniformity

In one embodiment, the first color difference (Δu'v' ₁ ) of two light sources disposed to couple light to the light input coupler is a 9-spot sampling of the light emitting region disposed to receive light from the light input coupler. Is greater than at least one spatial color non-uniformity (Δu'v' ₂ ) selected from the group of color non-uniformity, the light output surface of the light emitting device, and light exiting the combined lightguides.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first group of light sources comprising at least one light source and a second group of light sources comprising at least one light source, wherein at least one light source from the first group and a second At least one light source from the group combines the light into the same light input coupler, and when receiving light from both the first group of light sources and the second group of light sources, the light emitting area or 9-spot of the light output surface Spatial color non-uniformity is less than that selected from the groups 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004 when measured using a spectrophotometer-based spot colorimeter, and only the light emitting area when receiving light from the first group of light sources. Or the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the light output surface is less than that selected from the group 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, and 0.004. In another embodiment, the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface is less than 0.05 when receiving light from both the first group of light sources and the second group of light sources, The 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface when receiving light from one group of light sources is less than 0.05. In a further embodiment, when receiving light from both the first group of light sources and the second group of light sources, the 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface is less than 0.05 and only the first The 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface is less than 0.1 when receiving light from a group of light sources.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device comprises a first group of light sources comprising at least one light source and a second group of light sources comprising at least one light source, wherein at least one light source from the first group and a first At least one light source from the second group combines the light into the same light input coupler and when receiving light from the first group of light sources and the second group of light sources, the 9-spot spatial luminance of the light emitting area or light output surface The uniformity is greater than that selected from the 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% group and is the 9-spot spatial luminance of the light emitting area or light output surface when receiving light from only the first group of light sources. The uniformity is greater than those selected from the 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% groups. In another embodiment, the 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface when receiving light from both the first group of light sources and the second group of light sources is greater than 70% and only the first group The 9-spot luminance uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface is greater than 70% when receiving light from the light sources of. In a further embodiment, the 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting area or the light output surface when receiving light from the first group of light sources and the second group of light sources is greater than 80% and only the first group of light sources The 9-spot spatial luminance uniformity of the light emitting area or light output surface when receiving light from is greater than 70%.

Stacked light guides

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes at least one film light guide or light guide region arranged to receive and transmit light from the second film light guide or light guide region, so that light from the second light guide is Improves consistency, improves illuminance uniformity, improves color uniformity, increases the luminance of the light emitting area, or component failure causes the light from the first light guide to be matched in the overlapping area (color uniformity, luminance Uniformity or luminance) provides a backup light emitting area when falling below.

Multiple light sources coupled to the optical input coupler

In another embodiment, a plurality of light sources are arranged to couple light to a light input coupler, such that a portion of the light from the plurality of light sources is coupled to at least one combined light guide, so that the light output is merged. By combining the light output from a plurality of light sources in the combined lightguides, the light is "mixed" in the combined lightguides and the output is more uniform in color, luminance, or both. For example, two white LEDs placed adjacent to the light input surface of the collection of combined lightguides in the light input coupler could have substantially the same spatial luminance or color uniformity in the light emitting area if one of the light sources fails. have. In another embodiment, light sources emitting two different colors of light are arranged to couple the light with the same light input coupler. The optical input coupler can provide mixing within the combined lightguides, and furthermore, the combined lightguides provide optical redundancy in case one light source fails. Optical redundancy can improve color uniformity when light sources of two or more colors are coupled to the same light input coupler. For example, three white LEDs, each with different color temperatures, can be combined with the same light input coupler, and if one of the light LEDs fails, the light output from the other two LEDs is still mixed and the two It provides more uniformity than single LEDs with different color outputs combined into two adjacent optical input couplers. In one embodiment, the light source comprises at least one selected from the group of 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 LED chips arranged in an array or array to couple light into a single light input coupler. In one embodiment, the light source comprises at least one selected from the group of 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 LED chips arranged in an array or array to couple light to more than one light input coupler. . In a further embodiment, a light source arranged to couple light to the optical input coupler is 0.25 millimeters, 0.3 millimeters, 0.5 millimeters, 0.7 millimeters, 1 millimeters, 1.25 millimeters, 1.5 millimeters, 2 millimeters, And a plurality of LED chips having a light emitting surface area having a light emitting dimension smaller than that selected from the group of 3 millimeters.

Light input couplers on different sides of the light guide

In yet another embodiment, a plurality of light input couplers are disposed on two or more edge regions of the lightguide in which the optical axes of light exiting the coupling lightguides are oriented at an angle greater than zero degrees relative to each other. In a further embodiment, the light input couplers are disposed on opposite or adjacent edges or sides of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a plurality of optical input couplers disposed on two or more edge regions of the light guide, and the luminance or color uniformity of the light emitting region is determined by the optical output of the first optical input coupler being the second optical input. It is substantially the same when increasing or decreasing with respect to the optical output of the coupler. In one embodiment, the light extraction features are within the light emitting area such that the spatial luminance uniformity is greater than 70% when receiving light from only the first light input coupler and receiving light from the first and second light input couplers. Is placed. In another embodiment, the light extraction features have a 9-spot spatial color non-uniformity less than 0.01 when receiving light only from the first optical input coupler and receiving light from the first and second optical input couplers. So that it is disposed within the light emitting area.

OTHER APPLICATIONS OF THE LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE

Since the present invention enables inexpensive coupling with a thin film, there are many general illumination and backlighting applications. A first example is general home and corporate lighting using roll-out films on walls or ceilings. In addition, the film can be bent to shape into non-planar shapes for general lighting. Additionally, it can be used as a backlight or frontlight in many thin displays that are developing or developing. For example, LCD and E-ink thin film displays can be improved using a thin back-lighting film or a thin front-lighting film; Handheld devices with flexible and scrollable displays are being developed and they need an efficient and inexpensive method to collect light with a backlighting film. In one embodiment, the light emitting device provides illumination for translucent objects or films such as stained glass windows or for displays such as point-of-purchase displays. It includes a light input coupler, a light guide, and light sources. In one embodiment, a thin film is capable of printing light extraction features such that they scatter light traveling perpendicular to the film face in a generally negligible manner. In this embodiment, when the film is not illuminated, objects can be clearly seen through the film without significant haze. When placed behind a transparent or partially transparent stained glass window, the overall assembly allows a low-scattering transmission of light through the assembly, if desired. In addition, because the film can be bent and adjusted to various stained glass window shapes, sizes and topologies, the flexibility of the film is comparable to that of conventional plate lightguide backlights They all take into account much greater positional tolerance and design freedom. In this embodiment, when not irradiated, the stained glass window looks like a normal non-irradiated stained glass window. When irradiated, the stained glass window shines.

Further embodiments include light emitting devices and the stained glass window is very aesthetic and there is no need to see objects through it (eg, cabinet stained glass windows or art displays), and the backlight The total see-through clarity of need not be obtained. In this embodiment, a diffuse or specular reflector may be placed behind the film to trap light irradiated from the film in a direction away from the stained glass. Diffusing films, light redirecting films, reverse prism films, diffuser films (volumetric, surface relief or a combination thereof) are It can be placed between the light guide and the objects to be illuminated. Other films may be used, such as other optical films known to be suitable for use in LCD backlights.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device is used as an indicia and an overlay to be illuminated. In one embodiment, the light guide area has a low degree of visibility in the off-state and can be clearly seen as an illuminated indication in the on-state. For example, the lightguide area examines indica such as “Warning,” “Exit,” “Sale,” “Enemy Aircraft Detected,” “Open,” “Closed,” “Merry Christmas,” and so on, and It can be printed with light scattering dots for display. The light guide area may be placed on the viewing side of the display (such as LCD, plasma, projection screen, etc.) or it may be a store or home window, table surface, road sign. ) On, vehicle or sky/water/land craft outside or on windows, on or in transparent, translucent or opaque objects, on a door, in a hallway, in doormats (within a doormat), etc. The indicia can also include icons, logos, other signs such as a cartoon-like figure of Santa Claus, a brand logo such as Nike Swoosh, a photo of a beach scene, a dither photo of a person's face. It could be (dithered photo). The marking can be full color, monochromatic, and can include a mixture of colored and monochromatic regions and include phosphors, dyes, ink to obtain color. Or pigments may be layered or employed.

By using a light guide film that is substantially invisible in off-state, a display, sign or light emitting device can be employed in more places without substantial interference of the appearance of the object in which it is placed. In another embodiment, the light emitting device provides illumination of space and the area emitting light in the on-state is not easily distinguishable from the off-state. For example, this may provide lighting fixtures or lighting devices that are substantially visible only in the on-state. For example, vehicle tail lights, seasonal window film displays, ceiling mounted light fixtures, lamps, closed signs , Road hazard signs, danger/warning signs, etc. may be virtually invisible in the off-state. In some situations, this enables signs to be posted and can only be turned on when needed and reduce delays caused by the required installation time. In another embodiment, the light emitting device is a luminaire that can be seen with the color of the background surface when it is in an off-state. In another embodiment, the light emitting area of the luminaire substantially absorbs black or light in the off state. These displays are useful in submarines or other aircraft under NVIS lighting conditions.

The light emitting device of one embodiment is used for backlighting or frontlighting in passive displays such as backlight or frontlight for illuminated advertising posters as well as for active (changing) displays such as LCD displays. I can. Suitable displays are mobile phone displays, mobile devices, aircraft displays, watercraft displays, televisions, monitors, laptops, watches (illuminated or “lighted up in a predetermined pattern by LEDs in the watch or watch band. (including having a band with a flexible light guide capable of lighting up), signs, advertising displays, window signs, transparent displays, automotive displays, electronic device displays And other devices for which the LCD display is known to be used, but is not limited thereto.

Certain applications generally require compact, low-cost white-light illumination of consistent brightness and color across the irradiated area. Mixing light from red, blue and green LEDs for this purpose is cost-effective and energy-efficient, but color mixing is often problematic. (problematic). In one embodiment, light from red, blue, and green light sources is directed to each stack of combined lightguides/input areas and is sufficiently mixed so that it looks like white light when it exits the lightguide area of the lightguide. . Light sources can be placed geometrically to better provide uniform intensities and colors across the lightguide area and can be adjusted in intensity. A similar arrangement can be achieved by providing stacked sheets and the colors in the sheets combine to provide white light. Because some displays are provided on flexible substrates, eg "E-ink" thin film displays, on printed pages, the sheets are backlit while maintaining the flexibility of the media of the display. ) To provide a means to allow

In some embodiments, the light emitting device includes a novel LCD backlighting solution, mixing multiple colors of LEDs into a single lightguide. In one embodiment, the length and geometry of the strips that uniformly mix light into the light guide area of the film light guide without special mention is a light mixing region located around the edge. The enhanced uniformity of colors can be used for static displays or color-sequential LCD and BLU systems. One method for a color-sequential system is based on pulsing between the red, green and blue backlight colors while being synchronized to the LCD screen pulsing. In addition, a layered version of red-, green- and blue-light films that combine to create white light is presented. The pixel-based display area may have a plurality of pixels designated as red, green, or blue. Behind it are three separate film lightguides, each with a separate color of light coupled to the pixels. Each of the lightguides has light extraction features that match the corresponding color of the pixel-based display. For example, red light is combined into a coupling lightguide and then into a lightguide or lightguide region and extracted from features into red pixels. The film lightguides are significantly thinner than the width of the pixels in order to ensure that a high percentage of light from a given color geometrically goes to its corresponding set of pixels. Ideally, there is no need to use a color filter within the pixels, but if there is cross-talk between the pixels, the color filters should be used.

The present invention has utility when operated "in verse"-that is, the light emitting outer surface(s) of the sheet collect light and pass through the combined lightguides to be photosensitive ( It is also noteworthy that it can be used as a light collector with a sheet through it as a photosensitive element. By way of example, the sheets according to the invention collect incoming light and reflect light internally to direct the light to a photovoltaic device for solar energy collection purposes. Such an arrangement is also possible because the sheet can collect and detect light across a large area, and the detector(s) in the combined lightguides can provide a measurement that is representative of the total area. It may also be useful for environmental monitoring sensing purposes. The sheet can perform original light collection in addition to light emission. For example, in a lighting application, a sheet can monitor ambient light and then activated to emit light when twilight or darkness is detected. Advantageously, since it is known that LEDs also "run in reverse"-that is, they can provide the output current/voltage when exposed to light-and the sheet is light emitting If LEDs can be used as an illumination source when used for light emission, they can also be used as detectors when a sheet is used for light collection. In one embodiment, the lightguide captures a portion of the incident light and directs it to sensing, and the detector includes a diode with a specific wavelength (e.g., a bandpass filter, a narrowband filter, or a specific bandgap used inversely). ) Is designed to detect. These photo-sensing devices use the collection of a percentage of light over a larger area while the film/sheet/lightguide/device remains substantially transparent and detects that light of a specific wavelength is directed towards the film. Lasers or light sources (sighting devices, aiming devices, laser-based weapons, LIDAR or laser based ranging devices), Target designation, target ranging, laser countermeasure detection, directed energy weapon detection, eye-targeted or dazzler laser detection Targeted or dazzler laser detection) or infrared illuminators (which can be used with night vision goggles) these may be useful in military operations.

In another embodiment, the light-emitting device includes a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based light guide, and the light-emitting device includes a can light, a troffer light, a cove light, a torch lamp. lamp, floor lamp, chandelier, surface mounted light, pendant light, scone, track light, under-cabinet light cabinet light, emergency light, wall-socket light, exit light, high bay light, low bay light, strip light (strip light), garden light, landscape light, building light, outdoor light, street light, pathway light, Bollard light, yard light, accent light, background light, black light, flood light, safelight, safety lamp (safety lamp), searchlight, security light, step light, strobe light, follow-spot light, or wall-washer light -washer light): one selected from the group.

In another embodiment, the light emitting device includes a light source, a light input coupler, and a film-based light guide, and the light emitting device includes a building mounted sign, a freestanding sign, an interior sign, and a wall sign. (wall sign), fascia sign, awning sign, projecting sign, sign band, roof sign, parapet sign, Window sign, canopy sign, pylon sign, joint tenant sign, monument sign, pole sign, high-rise pole sign high-rise pole sign), directional sign, electronic message center sign, video sign, electronic sign, billboard, electronic billboard ( electronic billboard), interior directional sign, interior directory sign, interior regulatory sign, interior mall sign, and interior point-of-pertures Interior point-of-purchase sign: One selected from the group.

Sheets are also very useful for use in signs, graphics, and other displays being investigated. For example, the film can be placed over walls or windows without significant change to the wall or window appearance. However, when the sign is irradiated, an image that is etched into the film light guide will be visible. The present invention is an insulation for combining light into films in front of some grocery store refrigerators. It can also be useful. Lighting applications in confined spaces, such as on ice in hockey links, may also require plastic film lighting. Because a sheet with light emitting area(s) that becomes visible when the light source(s) is activated can be installed on a wall or window without significant change in its appearance, displays are usually aesthetically pleasing. The present invention allows placing displays in areas that are not acceptable (eg, over windows). The sheets can be used in situations where spatial considerations are of paramount importance, e.g., in the ice sheet of skating links (discussed in US Pat. When desired, it can also be used. The flexibility of the sheets depends on curtains sometimes used for climate containment, e.g. film curtains sometimes used at the front ends of grocery store refrigerators to better maintain the internal temperatures of the refrigerators, instead of them. Allow this to be used. The flexibility of the sheets also allows use in moving displays, eg in light emitting flags that can be moved in a breeze.

METHOD OF MANUFACTURING LIGHT INPUT/OUTPUT COUPLER

In one embodiment, the lightguide and the light input or output coupler are formed from a light transmitting film by creating segments of the film corresponding to the combined lightguides and deforming and bending the segments so that the plurality of segments overlap. In a further embodiment, the input surfaces of the coupling lightguides are arranged to generate a comprehensive light input by deformation of the coupling lightguides to create at least one bend or fold.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler including a light-transmitting film having a light guide and a light guide region successively coupled to each of the combined light guides in an array of combined light guides, The method of manufacturing the optical input coupler, wherein the array includes a first linear fold region and a second linear fold region: (a) the first linear fold region and the first linear fold region perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface. Increasing the distance between the second linear fold area of the array of combined lightguides in the direction; (b) the distance between the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first linear fold region and parallel to the light transmitting film surface in the first linear fold region. Reducing the; (c) the distance between the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantially parallel to the first linear fold region and parallel to the light-transmitting film surface in the first linear fold region. Increasing the; (d) reducing the distance between the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array of coupling light guides in a direction perpendicular to the light-transmitting film surface in the first linear fold region. The guides are bent, placed substantially one over another, and aligned substantially parallel to each other. These steps ((a), (b), (c), and (d)) need not occur in alphabetical order, and the linear fold regions may be substantially parallel.

In one embodiment, the assembly method includes transforming the first and second linear folded regions of the array of coupling lightguides (segments) in relative directions such that the coupling lightguides are arranged in order; The sequential arrangement and the plurality of combined light guides include curved bends. Combined lightguides can overlap and can be aligned relative to each other to create a collection of combined lightguides. In addition, the first linear fold area of the collection of bonds can be bent, curved or folded, glued, clamped, cut, or otherwise the surface area will transfer the light from the light source to the combined light guides. It can be modified to create a light input surface suitable for receiving and transmitting. The linear folding regions are regions of the light transmitting film including folding after the combined light guides are bent in at least one direction. The linear folding regions have at least a width including at least one bending of the coupling light guide, and may further include a region of the film physically, optically, or mechanically coupled to the relative positioning element. The linear fold regions are substantially co-planar with the surface of the film within the region, and the linear fold regions have a length direction substantially greater than the width direction, such that the linear fold regions are the direction of orientation in the longitudinal direction parallel to the plane of the film. Have. In one embodiment, the array of combined lightguides is oriented at an angle greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees with respect to the first linear fold area.

As used herein, the first linear fold region or the second linear fold region may be disposed near or include the input or output ends of the combined lightguides. In embodiments where the device is used to collect light, the input end may be in the light mixing area, the lightguide area, or near the lightguide, and the output end is the combination lightguides received from the lightguide or lightguide area It may be near the emitting edges of the coupling lightguides, such as in the case of coupling light to a light emitting surface arranged to direct light to a photovoltaic cell. In the embodiments and configurations disclosed herein, the first linear fold region or the second linear fold region can be reversed to create additional embodiments for configurations in which the direction of light propagation is substantially reversed.

In one embodiment, the array of coupling light guides has a first linear fold region and a second linear fold region, and a method of manufacturing an optical input coupler includes the relative positions of the coupling light guides within the first and second linear fold regions. It includes deformation steps to create and bend the overlap while substantially maintaining the. In one embodiment, maintaining the relative position of the combined lightguides assists in ordered bending and alignment, and may allow the combined lightguides to fold and overlap without creating an unordered or entangled alignment of the combined lightguides. . This reduces the required volume and can significantly improve the assembly and alignment, especially for very thin films or combination lightguides and/or very narrow combination light strip widths.

In one embodiment, the above-described steps for a method of manufacturing a light input coupler including a light guide and a light transmitting film having a light guide region, at least one of the steps (a) and (b)) is substantially simultaneously Occurs; Steps ((c) and (d)) occur substantially simultaneously; Steps ((c) and (d)) are performed to occur following steps ((a) and (b)). In another embodiment, the above-described steps for a method of manufacturing a light input coupler including a light guide and a light transmitting film having a light guide region, steps (a), (b), and (c)) are substantially Is performed to occur simultaneously. The relative deformation of the first linear fold area and the second linear fold area of the combined light guides can be achieved by keeping the linear fold area fixed and deforming the other linear fold area. In a further embodiment, the relative positioning elements disposed in the first folded region remain substantially stationary while the second relative positioning element in the second linear folded region is deformed. The deformation may occur in an arc-like pattern in one or more planes, or in a direction parallel to the x, y, or z axis or at an angle to the x, y, or z axis.

In another embodiment, the above-described steps substantially maintain the relative position of the array of coupling lightguides in the first linear fold region with respect to each other in a direction parallel to the first linear fold region, and parallel to the first linear fold region. It is performed while substantially maintaining the relative position of the array of coupling light guides within the second linear fold region with respect to each other in a direction.

In a further embodiment, the distance between the first and second linear fold regions of the array of coupling lightguides is at least the total width (W _t ) of the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantially parallel to the first linear fold region. , Increases by the distance (D).

In another embodiment, the array of combined light guides includes a number (N) of combined light guides having substantially the same width (W _s ) in a direction parallel to the first linear fold area, and D=N×W _s to be.

Relative positioning element

In one embodiment, the at least one relative positioning element substantially maintains the relative position of the coupling lightguides in the region of the first linear fold region, the second linear fold region, or both the first and second linear fold regions. . In one embodiment, the relative positioning element is disposed adjacent to the first linear fold area of the array of coupling lightguides, such that the combination of the relative positioning element with the coupling lightguide is used to create an overlapping collection of coupling lightguides. 2 Provides sufficient stability or stiffness to substantially maintain the relative position of the coupling lightguides within the first linear fold region during translational movements of the first linear fold region relative to the two linear fold region and bendings in the coupling lightguides. . The relative positioning element may be attached, clamped, placed in contact, placed relative to the linear folded area, or disposed between the linear folded area and the light guide area. The relative positioning element may be a polymeric or metallic component that is attached or retained against the surface of the coupling light guides, light mixing region, light guide region or film during at least one of the translation steps. In one embodiment, the relative positioning element is attached to either side of the film proximate the first linear fold region, the second linear fold region, or both the first and second linear fold regions of the coupling lightguides. These are polymeric strips with flat or saw-tooth-like saw blades. By using serrated saw blades, the saw blade may facilitate or enable bending by providing angled guides. In yet another embodiment, the relative positioning element has a first clamp and a second clamp that maintains the coupling lightguides in a relative position in a direction parallel to the clamps parallel to the first linear fold area and translates the position of the clamps relative to each other. Being a mechanical device with a clamp, the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region are translated relative to each other and bent at the coupling lightguides to create overlapping coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, the relative positioning element maintains the relative position of the coupling lightguides in the first linear fold region, the second linear fold region, or both the first and second linear fold regions, and contains at least one of them. It provides a mechanism for applying a force to the ends of the coupling lightguides to translate in the direction of.

In another embodiment, the relative positioning element comprises angled saw blades or areas that redistribute the force when bending at least one coupling lightguide, or even redistribution of force after at least one coupling lightguide is bent or folded. Keep it. In yet another embodiment, the relative positioning element redistributes the force from bending and pulling the one or more mating lightguides from a corner point to the length of the substantially angled guide. In another embodiment, the edge of the angled guide is rounded.

In another embodiment, the relative positioning element redistributes the force from the bend during the bending operation, and provides resistance to maintain the force required to maintain a low profile (short dimension in the thickness direction) of the mating lightguides. do. In one embodiment, the relative positioning element operates as an area, cover, or low contact area material in physical contact with the area of the lightguide during the folding operation of one or more surface relief features and/or in use of the light emitting device. Surface relief areas, materials, or low contact area areas. In one embodiment, the low contact area surface relief features on the relative positioning element reduce the separation of light from the combined lightguides, lightguide, light mixing area, lightguide area, or light emitting area.

Further, in a further embodiment, the relative positioning element is a heat advance element. In one embodiment, the relative positioning element is an aluminum component with angled guides or saw blades thermally coupled to the LED light source.

In a further embodiment, the input ends and output ends of the array of coupling lightguides are physically with relative positioning elements during the steps (a), (b), (c), and (d) described above, respectively. Placed in contact.

In one embodiment, the relative positioning element disposed close to the first linear fold area of the array of coupling lightguides is substantially linear and the input cross-sectional edge in a plane parallel to the light transmitting film parallel to the first linear fold area. And the relative positioning element disposed close to the second linear fold region of the array of coupling light guides in the second linear fold region of the array of coupling light guides is substantially linear and a second linear fold parallel to the linear fold region. It has a cross-sectional edge in a plane parallel to the light transmitting film in the folded region.

In another embodiment, the cross-sectional edge of the relative positioning element disposed close to the first linear fold area of the array of combined lightguides is provided in steps ((a), (b), (c), and (d)). While remaining substantially parallel to the cross-sectional edge of the relative positioning element disposed close to the second linear fold area of the array of coupling lightguides.

In a further embodiment, the relative positioning element disposed proximate the first linear fold area comprises a substantially linear section oriented at an angle greater than 10 degrees to the first linear fold area for at least one combined lightguide. 1 has a cross-sectional edge in a plane parallel to the surface of a light-transmitting film placed close to the linear fold area. In a further embodiment, the relative positioning element has a serrated saw blade oriented substantially 45 degrees to the linear fold area of the coupling lightguides.

In one embodiment, the cross-sectional edge of the relative positioning element forms a guiding edge to guide the bending of at least one combined lightguide. In another embodiment, the relative positioning element is a relative positioning element (or saw blade or angled extended area) for localized stresses that can cut, break, or induce stress on the combined lightguide. It is thicker than a combined lightguide that folds around or near a relative positioning element so as not to cut or provide a narrow area. In another embodiment, the ratio of the thickness of the relative positioning element or component (such as an angled saw blade) to the average thickness of the mating lightguide(s) in contact during or after folding is 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, Greater than one selected from the group of 5, 10, 15, 20, and 25. In one embodiment, the relative positioning elements (or components thereof) in contact with the coupling lightguide(s) during or after folding are 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, and 1 millimeter. Is greater than that selected from the group of.

In yet another embodiment, the method described above further comprises cutting through the overlapping combination lightguides to provide an array of input edges of the combination lightguides terminating in one plane substantially perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface. do. Combining light guides can be formed by cutting the film into lines to form slits in the film. In yet another embodiment, the above-described manufacturing method further includes forming an array of combined light guides in the light-transmitting film by cutting substantially parallel lines in the light-transmitting film. In one embodiment, the slits are substantially parallel and equally spaced. In another embodiment, the slits have substantially non-parallel or non-uniform separations.

In another embodiment, the method described above is to clamp them together, limit movement by placing walls or housings around one or more surfaces of an overlapping array of coupling lightguides, and to limit movement to one or more surfaces or And maintaining the overlapping array of coupling lightguides in a relative position fixed by at least one selected from the group of attaching them together.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler including a light-transmitting film having a light guide region successively coupled to each combination light guide in an array of light guides and combination light guides, the array of combined light guides The method of manufacturing the lightride and the light input coupler, comprising: a first linear fold region and a second linear fold region substantially parallel to the first fold region: (a) of the light transmitting film in the first direction Forming an array of combined light guides physically coupled to the light guide area in the light-transmitting film by physically separating the at least two areas; (b) increasing the distance between the first linear folded region and the second linear folded region of the array of combined light guides in a direction perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface in the first linear folded region; (c) reducing the distance between the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first linear fold region and parallel to the light transmitting film surface in the first linear fold region. Letting go; (d) increasing the distance between the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in a direction substantially parallel to the first linear fold region and parallel to the light-transmitting film surface in the first linear fold region. Letting go; And (e) reducing the distance between the first linear fold region and the second linear fold region of the array of coupling lightguides in a direction perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface in the first linear fold region; The combined lightguides are bent and are arranged substantially one above the other, and aligned substantially parallel to each other.

In another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler including a light-transmitting film having a light guide region optically and physically coupled to each combined light guide in an array of light guides and combined light guides, wherein the combination The array of light guides includes a first folded region and a second folded region, wherein the method of manufacturing the light guide and the optical input coupler includes: (a) holding each other in a plane parallel to the film surface in the first folded region. Translating the first folded region and the second folded region away from each other in a direction substantially perpendicular to the film surface in the first folded region to move toward; (b) the first folded region and the second folded region move toward each other in a direction substantially perpendicular to the film surface in the first folded region, such that the coupling lightguides are bent and disposed substantially one over the other. And translating the first folded region and the second folded region apart from each other in a direction parallel to the first folded region.

STRESS INDUCED SCATTERING

Bending or folding of the film-based combined lightguide can result in stress induced scattering in the area causing the portion of the light in the combined lightguide to be scattered in one direction, such that it exits the lightguide close to the area. Stress induced scattering can be a type of stress cracking, stress whitening, shear bands, stress cracking, or other visible material deformation that causes a scattering area due to stress.

Stress induced strains, such as stress cracking, whitening, shear bands, and stress cracking, are described in ASM International (2003) "Characterization and failure analysis of plastics".

As used herein, stress cracking is a localized failure that occurs when a localized stress results in excessive localized strain. This localized fracture spreads rapidly over the entire local area, resulting in the formation of microcracks. Brittle materials tend to become more stress cracking, which is stress whitening. Efflorescence is a general term that describes a wide variety of microscopic phenomena that give rise to a cloudy, foggy, or white appearance in transparent or translucent polymers by stress. The cloudy appearance is the result of a polymer refractive index or localized deformation by the creation of air voids. Thus, the transmitted light is scattered. Microvoid clusters with dimensions close to or larger than the wavelength of light are thought to be the main cause of whitening. Microvoids may be due to delamination of fillers or fibers, or they may result in occlusions, such as rubber particles or other impact modifiers. It may be localized breakage around it. In addition, the shear bands are fine localized deformation regions that ideally proceed along shear planes. Like crazes, shear-strain bands, or slip lines, are traditionally thought to be the mechanism of irreversible tensile deformation of ductile amorphous polymers. Almost without exception, a state of compressive-stress will cause shear deformation in the polymers. Under monotonic tensile loading, polycarbonate is known to deform by shear banding. Stress crazing is microcracks sustained by plastic microfibrils, usually oriented in the direction of applied stress. The width of the craze is approximately 1-2 microns, and it can stretch to several millimeters in length, depending on its interactions with other heterogeneities. As it expands, the crazes stretch perpendicular to the applied tensile component of the stress field.

In one embodiment, stress induced scattering in the one or more coupled lightguides induced by bending or folding is reduced by bending or folding the coupled lightguides at high temperatures. In another embodiment, the stress induced scattering in one or more bonded lightguides induced by bending or folding is 10 degrees below the glass transition temperature, ASTM D1525 Vicat softening temperature, and glass transition temperature. It is reduced after being bent or folded by placing one or more combined lightguides or regions of the combined lightguides at a lower temperature and at a temperature higher than the melt temperature or higher than one selected from the group of same temperature.

Combined light guides heated during bending

In one embodiment, the combined lightguides bend or fold while being heated to a temperature of 30 degrees Celsius or higher. In one embodiment, when bent or folded at a first temperature of less than 30 degrees Celsius, the combined lightguides comprising at least one material that causes stress induced scattering are heated to a temperature of 30 degrees Celsius or more, and are substantially stress induced. Bent or folded to create curved or folded regions without scattering. When irradiated with light from a light input coupler, a combined lightguide that is substantially free of stress induced scattering is bent, folded, or is one of the lightguides in the stress region due to the stress-induced scattering of the light in the combined lightguide. It does not scatter more than 1% of the light traveling within. The combined lightguide is visible when transmitted by the eye on an axis off 5 degrees for the light incident on a conventional combined lightguide against the surface from a halogen light source collimated to less than 20 degrees at a distance of 3.048 meters. When lost, a combined lightguide that is substantially free of stress induced scattering has no bent, folded, or visible induced areas in the area of the stressed area.

In one embodiment, the bending or folding of the combined light guides is room temperature or higher, 27 degrees Celsius or higher, 30 degrees Celsius or higher, 40 degrees Celsius or higher, 50 degrees Celsius or higher, 60 degrees Celsius or higher, or higher than the glass transition temperature of the core material, cladding. At least one temperature selected from the group above the glass transition temperature of the material, above the ASTM D1525 Vicat softening temperature of the core material, above the ASTM D1525 Vicat softening temperature of the cladding material, and above the ASTM D1525 Vicat softening temperature of the bonded lightguide film or film composite. Occurs.

Combined light guide with folded areas

In one embodiment, the lightguide comprises a combined lightguide comprising fold areas defined by substantially overlapping fold lines and a reflective edge, such that the collection of light input edges forms a light input surface. In a further embodiment, the one or more fold areas are the light input edge of the film at an angle less than a threshold so as not to deviate from the light guide area at the outer edge (such as the edge away from the light source) or the combined light guide at the reflective edge. And a first reflective surface edge disposed to redirect a portion of light from the light source input at. In yet another embodiment, the one or more fold regions comprise a second reflective surface edge disposed to obliquely redirect a portion of the light input from the light input edge of the film so as not to deviate from the combined lightguide at the reflective edge. . In a further embodiment, the first and second reflective surface edges substantially collimate a portion of the light from the light source. In another embodiment, the first and second reflective surface edges have a parabolic shape.

The reflective surface edge can be the edge of the film formed through cutting, stamping, or other edge forming techniques, and the reflective properties are either total internal reflection or applied coating (reflective ink coating or sputter coated). (Such as aluminum coating). The reflective surface edge may be linear, parabolic, angled, arcuate, small faceted, or other shape designed to control the angular reflection of light received from the light input edge. The first and second reflective surface edges can have different shapes or orientations to achieve desired optical functions. Reflective surface edges can act to redirect light to angles less than a critical angle, collimate light, or redirect light flux to space, or to specific areas to improve angular brightness, color, or light output uniformity. have.

In one embodiment, the reflective edge is angled, curved, or has a small facet to direct a first portion of the light from the light source to the lightguide area by total internal reflection. In a further embodiment, the reflective edge includes a reflective coating.

In one embodiment, the fold lines are angled or curved so that the fold regions are at an angle to each other, at an angle to one or more edges of the light input coupler, light guide region, or light input surface, and at an angle. At least one selected from the group oblique to the optical axis of the light source greater than 0 degrees and less than 180 degrees.

One or more regions or edges of a film-based lightguide, such as reflective edges or reflective surface edges, may be stacked and coated. For example, one or more lightguides may be stacked to coat the reflective edges using sputter coating, vapor deposition, or other techniques. Similarly, the reflective surface edges can be folded and coated with a reflective material. Spacers, protective films or layers or materials may be used to separate the films or edges.

Lightguides with folded regions can reduce or eliminate the need for cutting and folding combined lightguides. By forming reflective surface edges, such as collimating surfaces for light incident from a light source cut from a single film, the light is directed out of the light guide at the angled edge (e.g., the light sources closest to the light guide area). Can be redirected so that it does not deviate from, and the light from the light source is at the opposite edge (such as light from the LEDs closest to the lightguide incident on the opposite edge of the lightguide area at an angle less than the threshold angle). Cannot be combined outside of the light guide. In a further embodiment, the shape of the first and second reflective surface edges changes from a light source closest to the light guide area or light emitting area toward the folded area furthest from the light guide area or light emitting area. In one embodiment, the light source furthest from the light guide area or the light emitting area has a second reflective surface edge formed by the reflective edge, and the first reflective surface edge does not reflect light from the light source from the reflective edge and the light guide area Or angled to allow it to reach the light emitting area. In a further embodiment, the second reflective surface edges divert light from a light source incident in a direction away from the light guide area or light emitting area (in an unfolded layout) toward the reflective edge at an angle greater than a critical angle, and 1 The reflective surface edges divert the light from the light source incident in the direction toward the light guide area or the light emitting area toward the reflective edge at an angle greater than the critical angle, or the light from the light source does not reflect from the reflective edge and the light guide area Or allow it to proceed directly towards the light emitting area.

In one embodiment, a film-based lightguide with a light input coupler including a combined lightguide with folded regions is formed by folding the lightguide film along fold lines and superimposing the fold regions at the first light input edge. In one embodiment, the film-based lightguide is folded prior to cutting. By folding prior to cutting, the edges of the inner layers will have improved surface qualities, for example when cutting mechanically. In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguide is cut prior to folding. By cutting prior to folding, multiple lightguide films can be stacked together to reduce the number of cuts required. Additionally, by cutting prior to folding, the first and second reflective surfaces can have different individual shapes, and the reflective edge can be angled or curved.

In a further embodiment, multiple film lightguides are stacked or disposed one over another in the light input coupler area, and the folded areas (or multiple combined lightguides) are intermingled or alternately. For example, two film-based lightguides can be stacked relative to each other, and the fold areas can be folded simultaneously in both lightguides by a mechanical film folder (such as folding machines used in the paper industry). . This can reduce the number of folding steps and allows multiple light guides to be illuminated by a single light input coupler or light source. In addition, interleaving the lightguides can increase uniformity because the light extraction features (position, size, depth, etc.) in each lightguide are different and can be controlled independently. Additionally, a plurality of light guides in which the light guide area or the light emitting areas do not overlap or only partially overlap may be irradiated by a single light input coupler. For example, by folding two lightguides together, the display and backlit keypad on a phone, a display and backlit keyboard on a computer, or a frontlight and keypad on a portable device such as an e-book are identical. It can be irradiated by a light source or a light source package.

In a further embodiment, two separate light emitting regions within a single lightguide film are illuminated by a folded light input coupler (or a light input coupler comprising a plurality of combined lightguides).

The fold areas may be folded with a similar radius of curvature for strips used in a combined lightguide or an optical input coupler comprising a plurality of combined lightguides. In another embodiment, the light guide is held in two or more areas, and a plurality of wires are provided towards each other, where the wires contact the film close to the fold lines in an alternating format and bend to the film. Form them. The input edges of the folded regions or the regions of the folded regions are then held together or bonded, so that the wires can be removed and the folds are maintained. In one embodiment, the folds along the fold lines are "crease" in that they do not form lines of sight or crease when the film is not folded. In another embodiment, saw blades or plates moving in directions toward each other press alternating fold lines in opposite directions, and "zig-zag", accordion in the film. Create -type or bellow-type folds. A fold holding element or housing, such as a holding device for holding a plurality of mating lightguides, can be used to hold the house together, or to protect a mating lightguide formed from a plurality of fold areas. Similar to the housing or retaining device for a plurality of combined lightguides, the housing is an optically coupled window, refractive lenses or other features, elements or elements used in a housing, folder or retaining device for a plurality of combined lightguides. Can include features. In a further embodiment, the housing, folder, or holding device comprises alternating rigid elements on two opposing portions, such that when the elements are assembled, the film disposed between the elements is a combined light guide It is folded in a bellow-like manner creating fold areas within.

Packaging

In one embodiment, a kit suitable for providing illumination includes a light source, a light input coupler, and a light guide.

Roll-up or refracting light guide

In one embodiment, the flexible light emitting device may be rolled up into tubes of smaller diameter than those selected from the group of 152.4 mm, 76.2 mm, 50.8 mm and 25.4 mm. In another embodiment, the flexible light emitting device is a spring or elastic-based take-up mechanism capable of attracting a light guide, a light emitting area, or a portion of the light guide area inside the house. Includes. For example, when a button on the device is pressed to provide a secure, protected storage, the light emitting area of the film can be tucked into a cylindrical tube.

Use with lamination or other films

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group of a light guide, a light transmitting film, a light emitting device housing, a heat proceeding element, and a component of the light emitting device is a reflective film, a prism film reflective polarizer, a low refractive index film, a pressure sensitive adhesive, a void. Laminated to or laminated to at least one selected from the group of light absorbing films, anti-glare coatings, anti-reflective coatings, protective films, barrier films, and low tack adhesive films Are placed adjacent to each other.

Film making

In one embodiment, the film or light guide is an extruded film, a co-extruded film, a cast film, a solvent cast film, a UV cast film, a compression film, Injection molded film, knife coated film, spin coated flim, and coated film. In one embodiment, one or more cladding layers are coextruded on one or both sides of the lightguide area. In another embodiment, tie layers, adhesion promoting layers, materials or surface modifications are disposed on or between the surface of the cladding layer and the lightguide layer. In one embodiment, the combined lightguides or core regions thereof are associated with the lightguide region of the film, such as formed during the film formation process. For example, combined light guides formed by slicing regions of the film at spaced intervals may form combined light guides leading to the light guide region of the film. In another embodiment, a film-based lightguide with combined lightguides leading to the lightguide area is molded into a mold comprising a lightguide area having combined lightguide areas with separations between the combined lightguides. It may be formed by injection molding) or casting. In one embodiment, the region between the coupling lightguides and the lightguide region is homogeneous, without limitation, voids, minor changes in refractive index, discontinuities in shapes or input-output areas, and molecular weight or There are no interfacial transitions, such as minor changes in material compositions.

In another embodiment, at least one selected from the group of a light guide layer, a light transmitting layer, a cladding area, an adhesion area, an adhesion promotion area, or a scratch resistant layer is one or more surfaces of the film or light guide. It is coated with a phase. In another embodiment, the light guide or cladding area is coated with a carrier film and extruded onto the carrier film or otherwise disposed on the carrier film. In one embodiment, the carrier film is easy to manipulate, less static problems, the ability to use a conventional paper or packaging folding device, surface protection (scratches, dust, creases, etc.), light during the cutting operation. It allows at least one selected from the group of helping to obtain the flat edges of the guide, UV absorption, transport protection, and the use of a film device and winding with a wider range of tension, flatness or alignment adjustments. In one embodiment, the carrier film may be used before coating the film, before bending the combined light guides, folding the combined light guides, before adding light extraction features, after adding light extraction features, before printing, and printing. After, before or after the conversion processes (additional lamination, bonding, die cutting, hole punching, packaging, etc.), immediately before installation, after installation (when the carrier film is on the outer surface), and during the removal process of the lightguide from the installation. , Is removed. In one embodiment, one or more additional layers are laminated in segments or regions of the core region (or layers bonded to the core region), so that there are regions of the film without one or more additional layers. For example, in one embodiment, an optical adhesive that functions as a cladding layer is optically bonded to the touch screen substrate; Optical adhesives are used to optically couple the touchscreen substrate to the light emitting region of the film-based lightguide, thus leaving the bonding lightguides without a cladding layer for increased input bonding efficiency.

In another embodiment, the carrier film is slit or removed over the area of the combined lightguides. In this embodiment, after the carrier film is removed from the linear fold area, the combined lightguides can be bent or folded with a smaller radius of curvature.

Separate combined light guides

In another embodiment, the combined light guides are discontinuous with the light guides and are optically coupled behind the light guides. In one embodiment, the combined light guides are extruded into the light guide, optically bonded to the light guide using an adhesive, and a light-transmitting material bonded to or in contact with the light guide is injection molded. (Injection molding) optically bonded to the light guide, thermally bonded to the light guide, solvent bonded to the light guide, laser welded to the light guide, sonic welded to the light guide, chemically bonded to the light guide, And other light guides and optically arranged, contacted, or combined. In one embodiment, the thickness of the combined lightguides is selected from the group of less than 80%, less than 70%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 20%, less than 10% of the thickness of the lightguide. In one embodiment, the light guide region and the combined light guides of the light emitting device are molded. This molding method may include, for example, solvent casting, injection molding, knife coating, and spin coating, but is not limited thereto. Examples of materials suitable for molding include, but are not limited to, solvent cast acrylic and silicone. In addition, this molding method may include in the mold inverse extraction features that form extraction features in the molded material. In one embodiment, the mold is one, for example, in the direction of travel, to form a wedge or tapered lightguide to increase extraction of light into a film-based lightguide at the end away from the inlet side. It has a thickness change in the above directions. In another embodiment, the light emitting area of the light guide is irradiated from opposite sides, and the taper is directed from both sides toward the middle. In a further embodiment, the film-based lightguide is tapered in a first number of directions from the lightguide with light incident into the light emitting area from the second number of sides, where the first number is the second number and Is the same, and the first number is 4 or the first number is greater than 4. In another embodiment, one or more surfaces of the film-based lightguide are non-linear, arcuate, stepped, random, optically designed, quasi-alternatively designed to achieve a particular spatial or angular light output profile of the lightguide and/or device. And one or more cross-sectional shapes selected from random and other shapes.

Glass laminate

In yet another embodiment, the lightguide is disposed within the glass laminate or on one side of the glass limenite. In another embodiment, the lightguide is disposed within a security glass laminate. In a further embodiment, at least one selected from the group of light guides, cladding, or adhesive layers comprises polyvinyl butyrate.

Patterned light guides

In yet another embodiment, at least one of the lightguide or the combined lightguide is a coated area disposed on a cladding, carrier film, substrate, or other material. By using the coated pattern for the lightguide, different paths for light can be achieved for combined lightguides or light directed to the lightguide. In one embodiment, the lightguide region comprises lightguide regions in which neighboring lightguide regions with light extraction features direct light to separate light emitting regions emitting different colors of light. In yet another embodiment, the light guide pattern is from two or more light sources combined into input couplers with a cladding layer, a carrier film, or a combination light guides arranged to face a corresponding patterned (or trace) light guide from a light source. It is disposed on another layer comprising regions arranged to emit light of two or more colors. For example, a red LED would be placed to couple the light to a light input coupler with coupling lightguides (which may be film-based or coating-based or the same material used for the pattern lightguide coating) in the lightguide pattern. Wherein the light extraction features emit light in a pattern to provide color to a pixelated color display. In one embodiment, the light guide pattern or the light extraction area patterns in the light guide pattern includes one or more selected from the group of curved sections, curved straight sections, shapes, and other regular and irregular patterns. The combined light guides may be composed of the same material as the patterned light guides, or the combined light guides may be of a different material.

Light extraction features

In one embodiment, the light extraction features are placed on or in the film, lightguide area or cladding area by embossing or using a "knurl roll" to imprint surface features on the surface. . In another embodiment, the light extraction features are generated by radiation (such as UV exposure) that cures the polymer while it contacts a drum, roll, mold or other surface having surface features disposed thereon. In yet another embodiment, the light extraction features are formed on or in a region where the cladding or low index material or other material is removed or formed as a gap on or within the lightguide. In yet another embodiment, the light guide region includes a light reflective region in which light extraction features from which the light reflective region is removed are formed. Light extraction comprises by adding scattering, diffusion, or other surface or volumetric prism, refraction, diffraction, reflection, or scattering elements within or adjacent to regions or light extraction features from which the cladding or other layer is removed, or Can be changed (such as the percentage of light reaching the area being extracted or the directional profile of the extracted light).

In one embodiment, the light extraction features are volumetric light that redirects features that refract, diffract, scatter, reflect, total internally reflect, diffuse, or otherwise divert light. Volumetric features may be placed within a lightguide, lightguide area, core, cladding, or other layer or area during creation of the layer or area, or the features may be placed on another surface or surface on which the layer is disposed thereafter. I can.

In one embodiment, the light extraction features are titanium dioxide, barium sulfate, metal oxides, microspheres, or other non-spherical particles including polymers (such as PMMA, polystyrene), rubber, or other Contains ink or material in a binder comprising at least one selected from the group of inorganic materials. In one embodiment, the ink or material is thermal inkjet printing, piezoelectric inkjet printing, continuous inkjet printing, screen printing (solvent or UV), laser printing, sublimation printing, dye-sublimation printing, UV printing, toner-based printing, LED toner Printing, solid ink printing, thermal printing, impact printing, offset printing, rotogravure printing, photogravure printing, offset printing, flexographic printing, hot wax dye processing Printing, pad printing, plate printing, letterpress printing, xerography, solid ink printing, foil imaging, foil stamping, hot metal typesetting, in-mold decoration , And in-mold labeling.

*In another embodiment, the light extraction features are mechanical scribing, laser scribing, laser ablation, surface scratching, stamping, hot stamping, sandblasting. , Radiation exposure, ion bombardment, solvent exposure, material deposition, etching, solvent etching, plasma etching, and chemical etching.

In a further embodiment, the light extraction features are in one selected from UV casting, solvent casting with a mold, injection molding, thermoforming, vacuum forming, vacuum thermoforming, and laminating or other combinations. By adding a material to a surface or region, and bonding the film or region including surface relief or volumetric features.

In one embodiment, masks, tools, screens, patterned films or components, photo resists, capillary films, stencils, and other patterned materials or elements At least one selected from the group is used to facilitate the progression of the light extraction feature to the light guide, film, light guide area, cladding area, or layer or area disposed on or within the light guide.

In another embodiment, more than one light extraction layer or region including light extraction features is used, wherein the light extraction layer or region is one surface, on two surfaces, within a volume, multiple regions of the volume. S, or in a film, lightguide, lightguide region, cladding, or a combination of the aforementioned positions within a layer or region disposed on or within the lightguide.

In another embodiment, the surface or volumetric light extraction features are within the lightguide at angles within 30 degrees from the average of the light emitting surface of the light emitting device or within 30 degrees from the average of the reflective surface, such as a reflective spatial light modulator. A light guide or cladding or area or surface directed to at least one selected from the group of 20%, 40%, 60%, and 80% of light incident from is disposed on or within the area or surface.

Folding and assembly

In one embodiment, the combined lightguides are heated to soften the lightguides during the folding or bending step. In another embodiment, the combined lightguides are folded while at one or more temperatures selected from the group of 50 degrees Celsius, 70 degrees Celsius, 100 degrees Celsius, 150 degrees Celsius, 200 degrees Celsius, and 250 degrees Celsius.

folder

In one embodiment, the combined lightguides are folded or bent using opposing folding mechanisms. In another embodiment, grooves, guides, pins or other counterparts facilitate assembling the corresponding folding mechanisms, such that folds or bends in the mating lightguides fold correctly. . In yet another embodiment, registration guides, grooves, pins or other counterparts are placed on a folder to hold or guide one or more combined lightguides or lightguides in place during the folding step. In one embodiment, at least one of the light guides or combination light guides comprises a hole, the holder comprises a registration pin, and when the pin is positioned through the hole before and during the folding step, the holder The position of the light guide or the combined light guide for is fixed in at least one direction. Examples of folding strips for combined lightguides or lightguides are International Patent Application No. PCT entitled "LIGHT COUPLING INTO ILLUMINATED FILMS" whose contents are incorporated herein by reference. /US08/79041.

In one embodiment, the folding mechanism has an opening arranged to receive a strip that does not fold in the folding step. In one embodiment, this strip is used to pull the coupling lightguides into the folded position, pull the two components of the folding mechanism together, align the folding mechanism components together, or tighten the fold, so that the curvature of the coupling lightguides The radius is reduced.

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group of folding mechanisms, relative positioning elements, holders, or housings is sheet metal, foil, film, rigid rubber, polymeric material, metallic material, synthetic material, And a combination of the aforementioned materials.

holder

In one embodiment, the light emitting device includes a folding mechanism that substantially maintains the relative position of the coupling lightguides following the folding operation. In another embodiment, the folder or housing is placed over the combined lightguides (such as slide on, fold on, hinge on, clip on, snap on, etc.), Includes a cover that provides substantial inclusion of combined light guides. In a further embodiment, after the coupling lightguides are folded and the holding mechanism is placed to maintain the relative position of the coupling lightguides, the folding mechanism is removed. In one embodiment, the holding mechanism is a tube having a circular, rectangular, or other geometric cross-sectional profile that slides over the combined light guides, and the combined light guides, light mixing area, or light guide exits the tube. I include a slit more. In one embodiment, the tube is selected from the group of transparent, black, has interior walls with a scattered light reflectance of 70% or more, and has a gloss of less than 50 in the area disposed near the combined lightguide, The surface area of the inner tube in contact with the is kept small.

In a further embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler and a light guide includes maintaining a combined light guide, maintaining a light guide, cutting regions in a film corresponding to the combined light guides, and a combined light guide. And at least one step from the group of steps of folding or bending them, wherein the relative positioning element retains the lightguide or combined lightguide during the cutting and folding or bending steps. In yet another embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler and light guide comprises cutting the combined light guides in the film followed by folding or bending the combined light guides, wherein the combined light guides during cutting Alternatively, the same component that holds the lightguide in place also holds the combined lightguide or lightguide in place during folding or bending.

In another embodiment, the relative position of the at least one area of the combined light guides is a band, wire, string, fiber, line around the combined light guides or a portion of the combined light guides. Wrapping a line, strap, wrap or similar tie material, placing a housing tube, case, wall or multiple walls or components around some of the combined light guides To enclose a heat-shrinkable material around the coupling lightguides and apply heat, adhesives to one or more regions of the coupling lightguides (such as near the input end for example), thermal bonding or Bonding the bonding lightguides using other bonding or bonding techniques, clamping the lightguides, applying a low refractive index epoxy, adhesive, or material around or between one or more areas of the bonding lightguides. It is substantially held by one or more selected from the group of placing, pressing together with bonding lightguides including a pressure sensitive adhesive (or UV cured or thermal adhesive) on one or both sides. In one embodiment, the bonding light guide area of the film comprises a sensitive adhesive, wherein after the bonding light guides are cut into a film with the adhesive, the bonding light guides are folded on top of each other and pressed together, so that the sensitive adhesive Keeps it in place. In this embodiment, the responsive adhesive may have a lower index of refraction than the film and acts as a cladding layer.

In yet another embodiment, the folder and/or holder directs the input surfaces of the combination lightguides to a light input surface arranged to receive light from the LED when the combination lightguides are translated into the folder or holder, and the combination lightguide They have multiple surfaces that are parallel or direct, align, and bring the combined lightguides together. In one embodiment, the combination lightguides are guided into a cavity that aligns the combination lightguides parallel to each other and places the input edges of the combination lightguides near the input window. In one embodiment, the window is open and includes a flat exterior surface, or includes an optical exterior surface suitable for receiving light from a light source. In yet another embodiment, the folder and/or holder includes a low contact area surface including a lightguide and surface relief features disposed between the folder and/or holder.

HOLD-DOWN mechanism

In one embodiment, the at least one coupling lightguide includes at least one hook area disposed near the input surface end of the coupling lightguide. The hook area is the relative position of the ends or areas near the ends of the combined light guides, the relative separations of the combined light guides with respect to each other in the thickness direction of the combined light guide, and the combined light with respect to the light guide in the thickness direction of the light guide. A guide, alignment mechanism, or pull-down to maintain the positions of the guides, and at least one selected from the positions of the ends or end regions of the coupling lightguides in one or more directions in a plane substantially parallel to the lightguide. Allow the mechanism. In one embodiment, the hook area includes at least one selected from the group of flanges, barbs, protrusions, holes, or opening areas in the coupling light guide. In one embodiment, the means for manufacturing a lightguide or film-based lightguide is a strap, strip, wire, or other film or object substantially locating the relative positions of the ends of the combined lightguide in at least one direction. To retain, two hook regions including flanges on either side of the at least one mating lightguide allowing the flanges to be positioned with respect to the strap, wire, or other film or object. It includes a hold down mechanism. In another embodiment, the hold down mechanism is a hold down mechanism or other in at least one direction relative to another component, such as a temporary or permanent base or holder, a relative positioning element, a housing, a heat advance element, a guide or tensioning element. It includes a physical restraint mechanism to sustain or maintain the hook area. In another embodiment, the means for manufacturing a lightguide or film-based lightguide comprises a hold down mechanism comprising a hook area comprising two holes on either side of the coupling lightguides or near the input end of the coupling lightguides. Including, the combined light guides can be stacked on top of each other and on top of the base element including two pins that are assigned with the holes. The pins and holes register at the ends of the coupling lightguides and substantially maintain their relative positions near the input end of the coupling lightguides. In another embodiment, after the hold-down mechanisms force the coupling lightguides together, the one or more coupling lightguides comprise a hook area that can be removed. In yet another embodiment, the hook area may be removed with a portion of the ends of the coupling lightguides. In one embodiment, after the coupling lightguides are physically coupled or strapped to a base or other element, the hook regions and ends of the coupling lightguides are cut off, peeled off, or peeled off. After the hook regions and coupling lightguides have been cut from the rest of the coupling lightguides, the new ends of the coupling lightguides are surface or input suitable for optical coupling to one or more optical elements, such as windows or secondary optics. Can form a surface.

In yet another embodiment, after removing the hook region, the one or more coupling lightguides include a detachable hook region including an aperture cut from the lightguide that forms a light input surface for the coupling lightguide. For example, in one embodiment, the array of coupling lightguides is cut into a film, wherein the end area of the coupling lightguide near the input edge is a shoulder-like flange extending past the average width of the coupling lightguides. And an opening cut extending at least 20% of the width of the combined lights. In this embodiment, the lateral edges and aperture cuts of the coupling lightguides may be cut during the same process step, both of which may include high quality surface edges. After stacking and aligning with shoulder-shaped flanges, when the edge area is removed from the ends of the mating lightguides using the opening cut as a separation guide, the stack of mating lightguides is the collection of edges formed by the opening cut. Has a light input surface formed from Similarly, pin and hole type hook areas may be used, and in one embodiment, the hook area does not extend beyond the width of the engaging lightguides. For example, holes near the width ends of the coupling lightguides can be used as hook areas.

In yet another embodiment, one or more coupling lightguides are physically coupled to the hold down mechanism, the hold down mechanism being translated in a first direction substantially parallel to the axis of the coupling lightguides such that the coupling lightguides are closer together, Move closer to the light guide or closer to the base. For example, in one embodiment, the end regions of the coupling lightguides include holes aligned with pins under low tension. After the coupling light guides are aligned on the pins, the pins and the base supporting the pins are translated in a direction away from the coupling light guides, so that the coupling light guides are pulled closer to each other and towards the base.

Transformation or secondary operations on film or optical input coupler

In one embodiment, at least one selected from the group of combined light guides, light guides, light transmitting film, light guide area, light emitting area, housing, folder, and holder component is stamped, cut, thermoformed or painted. do. In one embodiment, the cutting of components is a knife, scalpel, heated scalpel, die cutter, water jet cutter, saw, hot wire saw, laser cutter, or other blade or group of sharp edges. Performed by one selected from One or more components may be stacked prior to the cutting operation.

In one embodiment, the component is thermoformed (vacuum, under ambient pressure, or at another pressure) to create a curved or curved area. In one embodiment, the film is thermoformed into a curve, and the bonding lightguide strips are then cut from the curved film and folded in a light input coupler.

In one embodiment, at least one edge selected from the group of edges of a combined lightguide, a lightguide, a light transmitting film, a collection of combined lightguides, or another layer or material within the light emitting device is (e.g., near the LED The combined light guides direct light in a direction closer to the direction parallel to the plane of the combined light guides at the input surface) forming a Fresnel collimating lens on the surface of the collection of the arranged combined light guides. Formed with a predetermined structure to redirect light at the surface, such as forming Fresnel refractive features on the edges of the input coupling lightguides in the area of the collection of coupling lightguides to direct, roughened or , Or modified to be more planar (closer to the optically flat). In one embodiment, the edge modification is by laser cutting the edge, mechanically polishing the edge, thermally polishing (surface melting, flame polishing, embossing to a flat surface, flame polishing, surface melting), and chemically polishing (light Of caustics, solvents, methylene chloride vapor polishing, etc.), the edges are substantially polished.

Reflective coating or element

In one embodiment, at least one region of at least one edge selected from the group of coupling lightguides, films, and lightguides is optically coupled to the region or is provided with an element or a substantially specular reflective coating disposed at the proximal of the edge. Include. In one embodiment, a substantially specular reflective element or coating combines light guides, light guides, or portions of light and light exiting the film edge at an angle to travel within the light guide by a TIR. You can turn it back into film and turn it. In one embodiment, the specular reflective coating is selected from dispersions of a group of aluminum, silver, coated flakes, core-shell particles, glass particles, and silica particles. It is the dispersion of a light reflective material placed in ink or other binder. In another embodiment, the variance is one of the groups with an average size of less than 100 microns, an average size of less than 50 microns, an average size of less than 10 microns, an average size of less than 5 microns, an average size of less than 1 micron, and an average size of less than 500 nm. Particle sizes selected from In another embodiment, the variance is a flake surface selected from one of the group of average size less than 100 microns, average size less than 50 microns, average size less than 10 microns, average size less than 5 microns, average size less than 1 micron, average size less than 500 nm. Substantially planar flakes having an average dimension in a direction parallel to. In another embodiment, the combined lightguides are folded and stacked, and a light reflective coating is applied to the areas on the edges of the lightguide. In another embodiment, a light reflective coating is applied to the tapered area of the collection of combined lightguides. In a further embodiment, the film, the combined light guide, or the blade cutting through the light guide passes through the film during the cutting operation and makes contact with the well containing the reflective ink, and the ink is in contact with the blade film. It is applied to the edge when passing back by the edge of. In another embodiment, a multilayer reflective film, such as a specular reflective multilayer polymer film, is adjacent to or optically in contact with the coupling lightguides in an area covering at least the area near the edges of the coupling lightguides. Disposed, and the specular reflective multilayer polymer film is substantially formed with 90 bends forming the reflective side of the combined lightguide. Bending or folding of the reflective film may be achieved during cutting of the light guide, the combined light guides, or the tapered regions of the combined light guides. In this embodiment, the reflective film may or may not be attached to the film, a combined lightguide, a collection of combined lightguides, or physically bonded to the lightguide, and the folding is a lightguide, a film, a combined lightguide or a combined lightguide. The collection of them creates a flat reflective surface near the edge to reflect the light again. The folding of the reflective film can be achieved by bending the wall or edge to bend the reflective film, the pressure applied to the film, and pressing the light guide. The reflective film can be arranged such that it extends past the edge prior to folding. The folding of the reflective film can be performed substantially simultaneously on multiple stacked edges.

REFLECTIVE DISPLAY

In one embodiment, a method of producing a display comprises: extracting each combined lightguide from a lightguide region of a film including a core region and a cladding region. A step of forming an array of coupling lightguides by separating them from each other, which remain continuously with the lightguide region of the film and create a bounding edge at the end of the coupling lightguide. Forming an array of combined light guides comprising; Folding the combined light guides so that the bounding edges are stacked by folding the plurality of combined light guides; Directing light from a light source to the stacked bounding edges, wherein light from the light source passes through the light guide area and array of combined light guides within the core area by total internal reflection. Directing light from a light source to proceed; Forming a plurality of light extraction features on or in a core layer in a light emitting region of a light guide region of the film; Arranging a light extracting region on the cladding region in the light mixing region of the light guide region between the combined light guides and the light emitting region, or optically coupling the light extracting region to the cladding region And disposing a light emitting region adjacent to the reflective spatial light modulator.

The following are more detailed descriptions of various embodiments illustrated by the drawings.

1 is a top view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 100 including a light input coupler 101 disposed on one side of a film-based lightguide. )to be. The optical input coupler 101 is coupled to the coupling lightguides 104 through a light input surface 103 comprising an array of coupling lightguides 104 and one or more input edges of coupling lightguides 104. It includes a light source 102 arranged to direct light. In one embodiment, each coupling lightguide 104 terminates at a bounding edge. Each combined lightguide is folded so that the bounding edges of the combined lightguides are stacked to form the light input surface 103. The light emitting device 100 further includes a light mixing region 105, a light guide 107, and a light guide region 106 comprising a light emitting region 108. Light from the light source 102 exits the light input coupler 107 and enters the light guide area 106 of the film. In one embodiment, the light source 102 is configured to emit light to the light input surface 103 so that the light travels within each combined light guide 104 to the light guide area 106 and the light guide area 106 The light from each combination lightguide within merges with and total reflects light from one or more other combination lightguides in the array of combination lightguides 104.

As the light travels through the light guide 107, the light from the other combined ride guides 104 within the light mixing region 105 and this light are spatially mixed. In one embodiment, light is emitted from the light guide 107 in the light emitting region 108 because of light extraction features (not shown).

2 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an optical input coupler 200 having combined light guides 104 folded in the -y direction. Light from light source 102 is directed to a light input surface 103 comprising input edges 204 of coupling lightguides 104. The portion of the light from the light source 102 traveling in the combined light guides 104 having a directional component in the +y direction is the lateral edges 203 of the combined light guides 104 Will be reflected in the +x and -x directions from and will be reflected in the +z and -z directions from the top and bottom surfaces of the combined lightguides 104. Light traveling in the combined light guide 104 is diverted by the folds 201 in the combined light guides 104 facing the -x direction.

3 shows light emission with three light input couplers 101 on one side of the light guide area 106 including the light mixing area 105, the light guide 107 and the light emitting area 108 A plan view of an embodiment of the device 300.

4 is a plan view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 400 having two light input couplers 101 disposed on opposite sides of the light guide 107. In some embodiments, one or more input couplers 101 may be located along one or more corresponding sides of the light guide 107.

5 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 500 having two light input couplers 101 disposed on the same side of the light guide area 106. The light sources 102 are directed to have light directed towards each other in substantially +y and -y directions.

6 shows a light emitting device 600 defining an area 604 near a substantially planar light input surface 603 consisting of planar edges of coupling lightguides 104 arranged to receive light from a light source 102. Is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of. The combination light guides include core regions 601 and cladding regions 602. The light portion from the light source 102 input to the core region 601 of the coupling light guides 104 is an interface between the core region 601 and the cladding region 602 of the coupling light guides 104 Will be totally internally reflected. In one embodiment shown in FIG. 6, a single cladding region 602 is positioned between adjacent core regions 602. In another embodiment, two or more cladding regions 602 are located between adjacent core regions 601.

7 shows one or more planar surface features 701, one or more refractive surface features substantially parallel to the stack direction (z-direction shown in FIG. 7) of the combined lightguides 104 features) 702, and one or more planar input surfaces 703 and a combined light that totally reflects a portion of the incident light into the combined lightguide 104 similar to a hybrid refractive-TIR Fresnel lens. A cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 700 defining an area 704 near the light input surface of the light input coupler 101 having a bevel formed on the opposite surface of the guide 104.

8 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 800 defining an area 802 near the light input surface of the light emitting device 800. The coupling lightguides 104 are optically coupled to the light source 102 by an optical adhesive 801 or other suitable coupler or coupling material. In this embodiment, less light from the light source 102 is lost due to reflection (and absorption in the light source or other areas) and the positional alignment of the light source relative to the combined lightguide 104. alignment) can be easily maintained.

9 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 900 defining an area 903 near the light input surface of the light emitting device 900. In one embodiment the coupling lightguides 104 are held in place by a sleeve 901 having an outer coupling surface 902 and the edge surfaces of the coupling lightguides 104. The surfaces are effectively planarized by the optical adhesive 801 between the ends of the coupling lightguides and the sleeve 902 with the outer surface 902 adjacent the light source 102. In this embodiment, edges using an optical adhesive to reduce refraction (and scattering losses) that may otherwise occur at the air-input edge interface of the input edge due to incomplete cutting of the edges. Because the outer surface 902 of the sleeve 901 is optically coupled, the surface finish of the coupling lightguides is less important. In another embodiment, an optical gel, fluid, or non-adhesive optical material may be used in place of the optical adhesive to effectively planarize the interface at the edges of the bonding lightguides. In some embodiments, the difference in refractive index between the core region of the optical adhesive, optical gel, fluid, or non-adhesive optical material and the bonded rideguide is 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1,0.05 and 0.01: Is less than one selected from In one embodiment, the outer surface 902 of the sleeve 901 is substantially flat and planar.

10 is a top view of one embodiment of an emissive backlight 1000 configured to emit red, green, and blue light. The light-emitting backlight 1000 includes a red light input coupler 1001 and a green light input coupler 1002 configured to receive light from the red light source 1004, green light source 1005, and blue light source 1006, respectively. ), and a blue optical input coupler 1003. Light from each of the light input couplers 1001, 1002, and 1003 is light emitting region 108 due to light extraction features 1007 that redirect the light portion within the lightguide region 106 at an angle close to the surface normal. ), so that the light does not remain in the light guide 107 and exits the light emitting device 1000 in the light emitting region 108. The pattern of the light extraction features 1007 is one or more sizes, spaces, spacings, and pitches over the entire thickness of the light guide in the xy plane or z direction. ), shape and location.

FIG. 11 is a light source 102 having an optical axis in the +y direction disposed to face into the combined light guides 104, a reflective optical element disposed adjacent to a cladding region 602 A cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 1100 including a light guide 107 having 1101 and a light input coupler 101. The light from the light source 1102 passes through the coupling light guides 104 in the light input coupler 101 and passes through the light mixing region 105 and the light output region 108 in the light guide 106. Go through. Referring to FIG. 11, the first portion 1104 of light reaching the light extraction features 1007 turns toward the reflective light element 1101 at an angle less than a critical angle so that it is a light guide ( Exiting 107, reflecting from the reflective light element 1101, passing back through the light guide 107 and exiting the light guide 107 through the light emitting surface 1103 of the light emitting region 108. The second portion of light 1105 reaching the light extraction features 1107 turns towards the light emitting surface 1103 at an angle less than the critical angle, exits the lightguide 107, and exits the light emitting area 108 It passes through the light emitting surface 1103 of and exits the light guide 107.

12 shows protruding light extraction surface features protruding from the film-based lightguide 2701 on the first surface 2713 of the film-based lightguide 2701 closest to the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 ( This is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a reflective display 2710 including a frontlight 2702 having 2703. An air gap 2711 is disposed between the film-based light guide 2701 and the reflective spatial light modulator 2101. In the illustrated embodiment, the light extraction features 2703 maintain an air gap 2711 and a separation between the film-based lightguide 2701 and the reflective spatial light modulator 2101. Light 2712 from within the film-based lightguide 2701 is extracted by the protruding light extraction surface features 2703, and is spatially modulated and reflected by a reflective spatial light modulator 2101.

13 shows a frontlight 2822 and reflective spatial light modulator with light extraction features in the core region 601 of the film-based lightguide 107 disposed between the two cladding regions 602. A cross-sectional side view of a region of an embodiment of a reflective display 3005 including a (reflective spatial light modulator) 3090. The front light 2821 is disposed between the color filters 2822 on the substrate 2823 and the light modulating pixels 3002 in the reflective spatial light modulator 3090 of the reflective display 3005. In the reflective display 3005, external ambient light 3007 passes through the substrate 2823, passes through the color filters 2822, passes through the front light 281, and modulates light modulating pixels. It travels through 3002 and is reflected from reflective element 3001. The reflected light 3007 travels back through the light modulating pixels 3002, the frontlight 2822, the color filters 2822, the substrate 2822, and exits the reflective display 3005. Light 3006 traveling within the core region 601 of the lightguide 107 is directed towards the reflective element 3001 by light extraction features 1007. This light passes through the light modulating pixels 3002, is reflected from the light reflective element 3001, and before exiting the reflective display 3005, the light modulating pixels 3002, the front light 281, and the color filters. It passes back through 2822 and the board|substrate 2823. In this embodiment, the front light 2821 is in a reflective spatial light modulator 3090. In this embodiment, for example, the modulation pixels comprise liquid crystal materials, the display further comprises polarizers, and the reflective layer is on the outer surface of the cladding area 602. It is an aluminum coating. In another embodiment, cladding region 602 is a substrate for color filters 2822. In another embodiment, cladding region 602 is a substrate for light modulating pixels 3002.

FIG. 14 is a diagram of an embodiment of a reflective display 3008 including a frontlight 2821 with light extraction features 1007 in a film-based lightguide 107 disposed between two cladding layers 602. Sectional side view of the area. The front lights 2821 are disposed on light modulating pixels 3002 on the substrate 3009. The external ambient light 3011 on the reflective display 3008 travels through the front light 2822, is modulated and reflected by the light modulating pixels 3002, and is reflected back through the front light 2822. And exits the reflective display 3008. In this embodiment, the spectral intensity and color of light reflected by the light modulating pixels 3002 depends in part on the color of the light 3011 incident on the light modulating pixels 3002. Ambient light 3013 travels through the front light 2821 and after passing through the front light 2821 detects color or intensity within one or more wavelength bandwidths of the ambient light 3013. Proceed to the light detector 3010. Light 3012 (such as each of the red, green and blue light from red, green, blue LEDs) traveling within the core region 601 of the frontlight 2821 is by light extraction features 1007 It is redirected toward the light modulating pixels 3002. This light is modulated by the light modulating pixels 3002 and the reflected light travels through the frontlight 2821 and exits the reflective display 3008. In this embodiment, the reflective display 3008 has an ambient light only illumination mode (red, green, and blue LEDs are turned off), a frontlight only mode. ) (Red, green, and blue LEDs turn on and the ambient light level is very low) or in the ambient-frontlight combination mode where the ambient light and the ambient light are provided by the frontlight 2822. Can be used. In one embodiment, in the ambient-frontlight combination mode, the light detector 3010 may determine the color or spectral intensity through one or more wavelength bandwidths of the incident light 3013 and , A device comprising a reflective display (e.g., a cellular phone via a microprocessor or ASIC) is a color that is emitted by the light sources to the frontlight 2821 (e.g., red light). The relative intensity of the blue light relative to each other can be adjusted and the resulting light emitted from the reflective display 3008 is the combined reflected light (light 3012 from the frontlight and light 3011 from the ambient light). It may be controlled to adjust the white point or color saturation of).

FIG. 15 is between a cladding layer 602 and a low refractive index adhesive region 3014 comprising diffusive domains within a volume that functions as light extraction features. This is a cross-sectional side view of the area of one embodiment of a reflective display 3016 including a disposed film-based lightguide 107 and a frontlight 2821a. The front light 2822a is disposed on the light modulating pixels 3002 on the substrate 3009. The external ambient light 3018 on the reflective display 3016 travels through the front light 2821a, is modulated by the light modulating pixels 3002, is reflected, and is reflected back through the frontlight 2822a. And exits the reflective display 3016. The portion of light 3018 is a low refractive index adhesive region 3104 comprising diffusive domains 3015 before reaching the light modulating pixels 3002 and/or after reflection from the light modulating pixels 3002. Can spread while passing. Ambient light 3013 travels through the frontlight 2821a and after passing through the frontlight 2821a a light detector that senses color or intensity within one or more wavelength bandwidths of the ambient light 3013 ( 3010). Light 3017 (such as each of the red, green and blue light from red, green, blue LEDs) traveling within the film-based lightguide 107 of the frontlight 2821a is the light extraction diffusion domains 3015. ) To the light modulating pixels 3002. This light can be diffused when passing through the low refractive index adhesive 3014 comprising the diffusing domains 3015 and is modulated by the light modulating pixels 30002 and reflected so that the light 3017 is transmitted to the frontlight 2822a. ) And exits the reflective display 3016. In this embodiment, de-pixellating regions of light modulating pixels with high and low reflectance (such as supporting regions), angular color or luminance of the output light Optically diffusing incident and/or reflected light from light modulating pixels to increase uniformity, angle or color luminance uniformity near a viewing angle with peak luminance. Increasing, increasing the viewing angle of the display, increasing the spatial luminance uniformity of the display, and/or increasing the spatial color uniformity of the reflective display 3016, One or more advantages, without limitation, provide a diffusive layer.

16 shows a first lightguide layer 3020 having protruding surface features 3025 and a second including recessed features 3024 that partially firmly shape the protruding features 3025. Reflective display 3019 comprising a front light 3030 having a light guide region 3027 including light extraction features 3026 formed from a gap region 3040 between the light guide layers 3021 One embodiment of the area is a cross-sectional side view. Reflective display 3019 is a reflective spatial light modulator 2101 arranged to receive light 3022 from frontlight 3030 and reflect light back through frontlight 3030 and out of reflective display 3019. ). The external ambient light 3023 passes through the front light 3030 to the reflective display 3019, is modulated and reflected by the reflective spatial light modulator 2101, and is reflected back through the front light 3030. Exit the mold display 3019. In another embodiment, a gap region 3040 between the first light guide layer 3020 and the second light guide layer 3021 may include the first light guide layer 3020 and the second light guide layer 3021. ) And an adhesive or solid light transmitting material having an average refractive index less than the average refractive index of ).

17 is a red light guide core region 3604 irradiated by a red LED (not shown), a green light guide core region 3605 irradiated by a green LED (not shown), and a blue LED (not shown). A cross-sectional side view of an area of an embodiment of a reflective display 3600 including a front light 3611 including a blue light guide core area 3606 and cladding areas 602 to be formed. The light extraction features 1007 in the red light guide core area 3604, green light guide core area 3605, and blue light guide core area 3606 are respectively corresponding red spaces in the reflective spatial light modulator 3610. The light modulating pixels 3607, green spatial light modulating pixels 3608 and blue spatial light modulating pixels 3609 are substantially disposed. The red light 3601 extracted from the red lightguide core region 3604 incident on the light extraction feature 1007 is diverted toward the corresponding red spatial modulating pixel 307 and after reflection red spatial modulating pixel 3007. ) Is modulated according to the information to be spatially displayed, and before exiting the reflective display, the red light guide core area 3604, the cladding area 602, and the green light guide core area 3605 ), a cladding area 602, a blue light guide core area 3606, a cladding area 602, and a touchscreen 3611. Similarly, green light 3602 extracted from green lightguide core region 3605 by light extraction feature 1007 is redirected towards green spatial light modulating pixels 3608 and light extraction feature 1007 The blue light 3603 extracted from the blue light guide core region 3606 by) is diverted toward the blue spatial light modulating pixels 3609. Each of the red light 3601, green light 3602, and blue light 3603 is modulated and reflected so that the light passes through the light guides 3604, 3605 and 3606 and exits the reflective display 3600. Ambient light 3612 from outside the reflective display 3600 passes through the touchscreen layer 3611, the lightguide core regions 3606, 3605 and 3604 and the cladding regions 602 and, for example, a lightguide. It is modulated and reflected by the red spatial modulating pixel 3607 before passing back through the core regions 3604, 3605 and 3606, the cladding regions 602 and the touchscreen layer 3611. In this embodiment, the reflective display 3600 has an ambient light only illumination mode (red, green, and blue LEDs are turned off), a frontlight only mode. ) (Red, green, and blue LEDs turn on and the ambient light level is very low) or in the ambient-frontlight combination mode where the ambient light and the ambient light are provided by the frontlight 3611. Can be used. In one embodiment, the color light guides 3604, 3605, and 3606 (red, green, and blue, respectively) are arranged in any suitable order including RGB, RBG, GRB, GBR, BRG and BGR. In another embodiment, for example four or more lightguides, any suitable number of lightguides are used. In a further embodiment, one or more lightguides comprising light having a first wavelength bandwidth (FWHM intensity) less than about 100 nanometers are used to display spatial information with a portion of light from within the first wavelength bandwidth. It is used to irradiate spatial light modulating pixels corresponding to the first wavelength bandwidth. In a further embodiment, second and third lightguides having second and third wavelength bandwidths are used to illuminate spatial light modulating pixels corresponding to respective wavelength bandwidths.

FIG. 18 is a light emitting device 1800 comprising two light input couplers with two light sources 102 in an intermediate area oriented in opposite directions on the same edge and two arrays of combined light guides 104. ) Is a plan view of an embodiment of. As shown in FIG. 18, the +y and -y edges of the light-emitting device 1800 show that the light sources 102, including LEDs, have a light emitting area (as did the light source 102 in the embodiment shown in FIG. It can be very close to the border of the light emitting region 108 because it does not extend beyond the lower edge of 108. Thus, for example, the TV irradiated by the light emitting device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 may have a light emitting display area extending less than 2 millimeters from the edge of the light emitting device 1800 in the +y and -y directions. have. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 18, the light source 102 is disposed substantially in an intermediate region of the light emitting region 108 between the +y and -y edges of the light emitting device 1800.

Figure 19 includes one light input coupler with combined light guides 104 folded in the +y and -y directions and then folded in the +z direction (out of the page in the figure) towards a single light source 102. A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 1900.

20 is a light reflective optical element 2001 (shown in FIG. 20 as being transparent to illustrate a reflecting light ray), also a light collimating optical element and a light blocking element, And a perspective view of a light emitting device 2000 including a film-based light guide 2002 according to an exemplary embodiment. The light reflective optical element 2001 has an area 2005 that extends beyond the light guide area 106, and wraps around the stack of combined light guides 104 and forms a light collimating element 2006. It has tab regions 2003 folded toward (102). Light 2004 from light source 102 is reflected off of the tapped region 2003 of light collimating element 2006 and is more collimated in the yz and yx planes (smaller angular FWHM). And enters the input edges 204 of the combined lightguide 104. Stray light leaving the coupling light guide 104 is blocked by the light reflective optical element 2001 and from exiting directly from the stack of coupling light guides 104, which is also a light blocking optical element. Reflected or absorbed in the embodiment). In another embodiment, the light reflective optical element 2001 may be optically coupled to the film-based light guide 2002 by a pressure sensitive adhesive, and the light reflective optical element 2001 may include incident light ( A portion of the incident light can be diffused and reflected by diffusely reflecting, specularly reflecting, or a combination thereof. In a further embodiment, the light reflective optical element 2001 is a low contact area cover or includes surface relief features that contact the film-based lightguide 2002.

21 is a cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a spatial display 2100 including a front light 2103 optically coupled to a reflective spatial light modulator 2101. The front light 2103 includes a film-based light guide 2102 having light extraction features 1007 that direct light to the reflective spatial light modulator 201 at an angle near the surface perpendicular to the surface of the reflective spatial light modulator 2101. Include. In one embodiment, the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 is an electrophoretic display, a microelectromechanical systems-based display, or a reflective liquid crystal display. In one embodiment, the light extraction features 1007 transfer one of 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% and 90% of the light exiting the frontlight 2103 from the light emitting surface of the frontlight 2103. It is directed toward the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 within the angular range of degrees to 120 degrees.

22 is a diagram of an embodiment of a spatial display 2200 including a front light 2202 having an air gap between film-based light guides 2201 disposed adjacent to a reflective spatial light modulator 2101 It is a cross-sectional side view. In one embodiment, reflective spatial light modulator 2101 includes one or more color filters. In another embodiment, the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 includes one or more spatial regions that reflect a wavelength bandwidth (FWHM) less than 300 nm and the spatial regions are interferometric modulators or IMOD devices. Reflects one or more colors in the spatial pattern as in. In another embodiment, the film-based light guide 2201 is arranged to receive light from two or more light sources having different colors so that the illumination is performed with a reflective spatial light modulator 2101 and color sequential synchronization. synchronized), resulting in a full-color display.

23 is a side view 2303 of the light guide 2301 closest to the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 optically coupled to the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 using an optical adhesive 801 A cross-sectional side view of one embodiment of a spatial display 2300 including a frontlight 2302 having light extraction features 1007 in the.

24 shows an embodiment of a spatial display 2400 including a frontlight 2404 including a film-based lightguide 107 disposed within a reflective spatial light modulator 2401 including a reflective component layer 2402. It is a cross-sectional side view. In one embodiment, the film-based light guide 107 is a substrate for the reflective spatial light modulator 2401. In another embodiment, the intensity of light for the reflective spatial light modulator 2401 is controlled by frustrating the total reflection occurring within the film-based lightguide 107. In another embodiment, the light intensity for a transmissive spatial light modulator (not shown) is controlled by interfering with the total internal reflection occurring within the film-based lightguide.

FIG. 25 is a light emitting device 2500 comprising a stack of coupling lightguides 104 disposed adjacent to a light source 102 having a substrate 2502 and a collimating optical element 2501. ) Is a cross-sectional side view of a region of an embodiment. In one embodiment, the collimating optical element 2501 is a lens that refracts and totally reflects light to collimate light from a light emitting diode.

26 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 2600 including a light source 102 and combined light guides 104 oriented at an arbitrary angle on the x, y and z axes. The combined light guides 104 are from the +z axis (a first redirection angle 2601 from the light emitting device optical axis, a second redirection angle 2602 from the +x axis), and from the +y axis. It is directed at a third redirection angle 2603. In another embodiment, the light source optical axis and the combined lightguides 104 are +z axis (a first redirection angle from the light emitting device optical axis). It is directed at (2601), a second turning angle 2602 from the +x axis, and a third turning angle 2603 from the +y axis.

27 shows light extraction features 2703 protruding from the film-based lightguide 2701 on the side surface 2303 of the film-based lightguide 2701 closest to the reflective spatial light modulator 2101. It is a cross-sectional side view of an example area of the reflective display 2700 including the front light 2702. The film-based light guide 2701 is optically coupled to the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 using a low-refractive index optical adhesive 801 as a cladding layer.

FIG. 28 is a diagram of an embodiment of a reflective display 2820 including a frontlight 2821 with light extraction features 1007 in a film-based lightguide 107 disposed between two cladding layers 602. Sectional side view of the area. The front light 2821 is disposed between the color filters 2822 and the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 on the substrate 2823. Ambient light 2824 external to the display 2820 passes through the substrate 2823, passes through the color filters 2822, passes through the front light 281, and proceeds from the reflective spatial light modulator 2101. It is reflected and proceeds back through the front light 2822, the color filters 2822, and the substrate 2823, and exits the reflective display 2820. Light 2825 propagating within the core region 601 of the frontlight 2821 is redirected towards the reflective spatial light modulator 2101 by the light extraction features 1007. This light is reflected back through the front light 2821, color filters 2822, and substrate 2822 before exiting the reflective display 2820.

29A, 29B, 29B, 29D, and 29E illustrate an embodiment of a method of manufacturing a light guide 107 having light guides 104 successively coupled using a light-transmitting film. . 29A is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light guide 107 successively coupled to each of the combined light guides 104 in an array of combined light guides 104. The array of coupling lightguides 104 includes linear fold regions 2092 substantially parallel to each other, further comprising relative positioning elements 2901 disposed within linear fold regions 2902. In the configuration shown in FIG. 29A, the array of combined light guides is substantially in the same plane (xy plane) as the light guide 107 and the combined light guides 104 are regions of the light transmitting film. The total width W _t of the array of combined light guides in a direction substantially parallel to the linear fold regions 2902 is shown in FIG. 29A. In the embodiment shown in Fig. 29A, the combined lightguides have substantially the same width W _s in a direction 2906 parallel to the linear fold area. A direction 2903 perpendicular to the film surface 2980 in the linear fold area 2902 is shown in FIG. 29A.

As shown in Fig. 29B, the linear fold regions 2902 are translated relative to each other from their positions shown in Fig. 29A. Two linear fold regions 2902 of an array of coupling lightguides 104 in a direction 2902 (parallel to the z direction) orthogonal to the light transmitting film surface 2980 in the linear fold region 2902 The distance between them is increased. In addition, as shown in FIG. 29B, a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction 2906 of the linear folded region 2902 and parallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 (xy plane) in the linear folded region 2902 ( The distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array of coupling light guides 104 in the y direction) is reduced.

As shown in Fig. 29C, the linear fold regions 2902 are translated relative to each other from their positions shown in Fig. 29B. In FIG. 29C, the combined light guide in a direction (x direction) substantially parallel to the direction 2906 of the linear fold regions 2902 and parallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 in the linear fold regions 2902 The distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array of s 104 is increased.

29D is a combination light guides in a direction substantially parallel to the direction 2906 of the linear fold areas 2902 and parallel to the light-transmitting film surface 2980 in the linear fold areas 2902 (x direction). The distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array of 104 is increased and the coupling lightguides 104 in the direction 2902 perpendicular to the light transmitting film surface 2980 in the linear fold region 2902 Further translation of the linear folded regions 2902 is illustrated in which the distance between the linear folded regions 2902 of the array is reduced.

As shown in Fig. 29E, the linear folded regions 2902 are translated relative to each other from their position shown in Fig. 29D. In FIG. 29E, the combined light guide in a direction (x direction) substantially parallel to the direction 2906 of the linear fold regions 2902 and parallel to the light transmitting film surface 2980 in the linear fold regions 2902 The distance between the linear fold regions 2902 of the array of s 104 is further increased from that of FIG. 29D and the coupling in the direction 2902 perpendicular to the light-transmitting film surface 2980 in the linear fold region 2902. The distance between the linear fold areas 2902 of the array of light guides 104 is further reduced compared to that of FIG. 29D.

As shown in FIGS. 29A to 29E, as a result of the translational movements of the linear fold regions 2902, the corresponding edges 2981 of the linear fold regions 2902 are separated by a distance D. In one embodiment, the distance D is equal to the total width W _t of the array of coupling light guides 104 at least in a direction substantially parallel to the linear fold area 2902. In another embodiment, D=N×W _s , wherein the array of combined light guides 104 is a combined light guide having substantially the same width (W _s ) in a direction parallel to the linear fold area 2902 Includes the number (N). The array of combined lightguides 104 substantially one above the other represents an array of input edges of the combined lightguides 104 ending in one plane substantially perpendicular to the linear fold areas 2902. It can be cut along the first direction 2904 to provide. The cut can be at different angles and includes angled or arcuate cuts that can provide collimating or light redirection of light from a light source arranged to couple light to the input surface of the combining light guides. can do.

In a further embodiment, a method of manufacturing a light input coupler and light guide includes cutting the combined light guides such that two input couplers and two light guides are formed from the same film. For example, by cutting the combined light guides along the direction 2904, the light transmitting film can be divided into two parts, each comprising a light input coupler and a light guide.

FIG. 30 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 3000 including coupling light guides 104 optically coupled to a surface 107 of the light guide. In one embodiment, the combined light guides 104 optically coupled to the light guide are 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, and 5% of the thickness of the light guide 107: less than one selected from the group Have a thickness

FIG. 31 is a top view of one of the light guides 3100 with an input coupler and a combined light guide 104, wherein the array of combined light guides 104 has non-parallel regions. In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 31, the coupling light guides 104 have a tapered region 3101 comprising optical collimating edges 3181 and linear folded regions 2902 that are substantially parallel to each other. ). In another embodiment, the combined lightguides 104 have non-constant separations. In another embodiment, a method for manufacturing a light guide 3100 with combined light guides 104 with tapered regions 3101 of the combined light guides 104 is described in the tapered area 3101. Alternatively, when the array of the combined light guides 104 is folded, including cutting the combined light guides in the areas 3103 disposed near it, the combined light guides 104 will allow the light to be more collimated Overlaid to form a profiled, non-planar input surface capable of redirecting input light passing through the light input surface. In another embodiment, the coupling lightguides 104 are not substantially parallel such that the coupling lightguides 104 have regions having angles between edges that vary by about 2 degrees or more.

FIG. 32 is a perspective view of a portion of the light guide 3100 having the combined light guides 104 shown in FIG. 31. Combining lightguides 104 are disposed close to the tapered area 3101 and cut in the folded areas 3103 (shown in FIG. The tapered regions 3101 overlap to form profiled light collimating edges 3181 that can redirect the input light passing through the light input surface 103 to be collimated.

FIG. 33 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light guide 3300 including a relative positioning element 3301 disposed close to a linear fold area 2902 and an optical input coupler. In this embodiment, the relative positioning element 3301 is substantially oriented at an angle 3302 that is 10 degrees greater in a direction 2906 parallel to the linear fold area 2902 for the at least one coupling lightguide 104. A cross-sectional edge 2971 in a plane (xy plane as shown) parallel to the light-transmitting film surface 2970 disposed close to a linear folded region 2902 comprising a linear section 3303 as shown. In one embodiment, the substantially linear section 3303 is disposed at an angle of about 45 degrees in a direction parallel to the linear fold area 2902.

34 and 35 are optical input couplers configured to reduce the volume and/or size of the entire device while maintaining total reflection (TIR) light transfer from a light source (not shown) to a light guide. And light guides 3400 and 3500 are top views of specific embodiments, respectively. In FIG. 34, the light input coupler and light guide 3400 are folded twice (3402) and recombined (3403) in a plane substantially parallel to the film-based lightguide 107 (3401a, 3401b). Contains bundles of.

FIG. 35 is an optical input coupler including bundles 3401a and 3401b folded upward 3501 (+z direction) and merged in a stack 3502 substantially perpendicular to the plane of the film-based lightguide 107 And a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device having a light guide 3500.

* FIG. 36 is a perspective view of bundles 3401a and 3401b of the combined light guide folded upward 3501 in the +z direction. In another embodiment, the bundles are folded down (-z direction).

37 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 3700 including a light guide 107 including two cladding regions 602 and a core region 601 disposed between the optical input coupler 101. In this embodiment, the light emitting device 3700 includes a front light illumination to illuminate the display 3701 so that the light 3704 is reflected from the display 3701 and the display information is visible at an appropriate luminance for direct viewing. have. The light emitting device 3700 emits light 3703 at a steep angle from perpendicular to the light emitting surface 3706 at a flux significantly higher than the light 3704 emitted as display information, thereby illuminating light as a luminaire. illumination) is also provided. In one embodiment, the peak angle of the luminous intensity of light 3703 providing illumination is between 0 degrees and 45 degrees from the surface of display 3701. In this embodiment, the light emitting device 3700 is a self-luminous picture that also provides room illumination such as a wall sconce or an uplight directing light upwards towards a surface such as a ceiling. It may be placed against the wall 3702 as a self-illuminated picture frame.

FIG. 38 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 3800 including coupling light guides 104 optically coupled to an edge 3801 of the light guide 107. In one embodiment, the coupling lightguides 104 optically coupled to the edge 3801 of the light guide 107 are 90%, 80%, 70%, 60% of the thickness of the light guide 107 , 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10% have a thickness less than one selected from the group.

39 shows an optical input coupler 3908 including a light guide 3902 and an optical input edge 204 disposed between a first reflective surface edge 3906 and a second reflective surface edge 3907 within a single film, folded. A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 3900 including a single coupling lightguide including fold regions 3909 defined by lines 3902 and reflective edge 3904. The film of the light input coupler 3908 is folded along the fold lines 3902 so that the fold regions 3909 substantially overlay each other, and the light source 102 couples light to each light input edge 204 do. The optical system is shown as "un-folded" in FIG. 39 and the light sources 3901 correspond to the position of the light source 102 with respect to the folded regions 3909 when the film is folded. As shown in FIG. 39, light 3905 from light source 102 (and light sources 3901 when folded) is a reflective edge angled toward light emission region 108 of light guide 3903. Total reflection from (3904). The first reflective surface 3906 and the second reflective surface 3907 are formed by the shaped edges (e.g., angled or curved) in the film and are totally reflected from the angled edge 3904. It acts to redirect a portion of the light from the light sources 102 and 3901 at angles to the lightguide.

FIG. 40 is a light input coupler 3908 and light guide 3902 including the combined light guide and light source 102 of FIG. 39 as the film is folded along the fold lines 3902 in the direction 4001 shown in the drawing. ) Is a perspective view. Fold regions 3909 are substantially layered relative to each other so that the light input edges 204 are stacked and aligned to receive light from the light source 102.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the light input coupler 3908 and light guide 3902 of FIG. 39 including a combined light guide folded and formed from overlapping folded regions 3909 of the film light guide 3902. Fold regions 3909 are laid substantially layered relative to each other such that the light input edges 204 are stacked and aligned to receive light from the light source 102.

42 illustrates a first light emitting region 4201 disposed to receive light from a first set of combined lightguides 4203 and a second disposed to receive light from a second set of combined lightguides 4204 This is an elevation view of a specific film-based lightguide 4205 including a light emitting area 4202. The light emitting regions are separated from each other in the y direction by a distance ("SD") 4206. The free ends of the combined light guides 4203 and 4204 of the sets can be folded toward the -y direction so that both sets substantially overlap as shown in FIG. 43.

FIG. 43 is an elevated view of the film-based lightguide 4205 of FIG. 42, with the combined lightguides 4203 folded so that they substantially overlap and form the light input surface 103. In this embodiment, a single light source (not shown) can illuminate two separate light emitting regions within the same film. In yet another embodiment, two separate film-based lightguides have separate light input couplers that are folded and the light input edges are joined to form a stack of combined lightguides arranged to receive light from the light source. This type of configuration may be useful, for example, a first light emitting area illuminates a backlight to the LCD and a second light emitting area illuminates a keypad on the mobile phone device.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 4400 having optical redundancy including two light guides 107 stacked in the z direction. The light sources and the combined light guides in the holders 4402 arranged substantially adjacent in the y-direction direct the light to the core regions 601 so that the light 4401 is a light emission area from each light guide 107 It is output from (108).

45 is thermally insulated from the third light source 4503 and the second heat transfer element 4506 thermally coupled to the fourth light source 4504 (physically by an air gap in the illustrated embodiment). One implementation of a light emitting device 4500 with a first light source 4501 and a second light source 4502 that are separated) and thermally coupled to a first thermal transfer element 4505 (metal core printed circuit board (PCB)). It is a cross-sectional side view of an example. The first light source 4501 and the third light source 4503 are arranged to couple light to the first light input coupler 4507, and the second light source 4502 and the fourth light source 4504 are provided with a second light input coupler ( 4508 is arranged to couple the light. In this embodiment, heat dissipated from the first light source 4501 is dissipated along the first heat transfer element 4505 in the x direction toward the second light source 4502 so that heat from the first light source 4501 is conducted. The temperature in the third light source 4503 is not substantially increased by (conduction).

46 shows light emission including a plurality of combination light guides 104 having a plurality of first reflective surface edges 3906 and a plurality of second reflective surface edges 3907 within each combination light guide 104 A top view of one embodiment of device 4600. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 46, three light sources 102 are each light input edge defined at least in part by respective first reflective surface edges 3906 and second reflective surface edges 3907. Are arranged to couple the light into the field 204.

FIG. 47 is an enlarged perspective view of the combined lightguides 104 of FIG. 46 with light input edges 204 disposed between first reflective surface edges 3906 and second reflective surface edges 3907. Light sources 102 are omitted from FIG. 47 for clarity.

48 is disposed between the core regions 601 of the combination light guides 104 in the index-matched region 4803 of the combination light guides 104 disposed close to the light source 102 A cross-sectional side view of the light source 102 and the combination light guides 104 of an embodiment of a light emitting device 4800 including the index matching areas 4801. The light source 102 is located adjacent to the combination light guides 104 and the high angle light 4802 from the light source 102 proceeds through the combination light guides 104 and the index matching area 4801 and is combined. The light guides 104 are coupled to the combined light guides 104 at a location far from the light input edge 204. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 48, for example, light at 60 degrees from the optical axis 4830 of the light source 102 proceeds to the core area 601 near the light source, and the index matching area 4801 Since it travels through and is totally reflected in the core region 601 far away from the light source 102, the light from the light source 102 is combined into more combined light guides. In this embodiment, if there is a cladding present at or near the light input edge 204, some of the light is coupled into externally coupled lightguides 104 that do not typically receive light.

49 is a plan view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide 4900 including an array of tapered combined light guides 4902 formed by cutting regions in the light guide 107. The array of tapered combined light guides 4902 extends in a first direction (y-direction as shown) dimension d1 smaller than the parallel dimension d2 of the light emitting area 108 of the light guide 107 . A compensation region 4901 within the film-based light guide 4900 not included in the tapered combination light guides 4902 (when the tapered combination light guides 4902 are folded or not bent). In this embodiment, the compensation area provides a volume with a sufficient length in the y direction for placing the light source so that the light source (not shown) extends past the lower edge 4103 of the light guide 107. The compensation area 4901 of the light-emitting area 108 is extracted to compensate for the lower input flux received directly from the tapered combination lightguides 4902 to the light-emitting area 108. It may have a higher density of features (not shown) In one embodiment, for example, light extraction efficiency or light extraction features for an area without light extraction features within one or more areas of the compensation area. Increase the area ratio of, increase the width of the light mixing region between the combined light guides and the light emission region, and for an area without light extraction features in one or more regions of the light emission region outside the compensation region Notwithstanding the lower level of light flux received by the light extraction features within the compensation area 4901 of the light emitting region by reducing the average area ratio or light extraction efficiency of the parts, and by any suitable combination thereof. A substantially uniform luminance or light flux per area in the light emitting region 108 is achieved.

50 is a perspective plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 5000 including a film-based light guide 4900 and a light source 102 shown in FIG. 49. In this embodiment, the tapered combination light guides 4902 are folded in the -y direction toward the light source 102 so that the light input edges 204 of the combination light guides 4902 receive light from the light source 102. Arranged to receive. Light from the light source 102 that passes through the tapered combination light guides exits the tapered combination light guides 4902 and extends in the +y and -y directions, while generally proceeding in the +x direction, and the light emission area Go to (108). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 50, the light source 102 is disposed within an area that does not include the tapered combination light guide 4902 and the light source 102 passes the lower edge 4103 of the light emitting device 5000 in the y direction. Does not extend to. By not extending past the lower edge 4103, the light emitting device 5000 has a shorter overall width in the y direction. Moreover, when the tapered combined light guides 4902 and light source 102 are folded under the light emitting area 108 (-z direction and then +x direction) along the fold (or bend) line 5001 The light emitting device 5000 can maintain a shorter dimension d1 in the y direction (shown in Fig. 49).

FIG. 51 shows the light source 102 and tapered combination light guides shown in FIG. 50 folded (-z direction and then +x direction) behind the light emitting region 108 along a fold (or bend) line 5001 ( A perspective view of one embodiment of a specific light emitting device 5100 including the light emitting device 5000 shown in FIG. 50 with 4902). As can be understood from FIG. 51, the distance between the lower edge of the light emitting region 108 and the corresponding edge of the light emitting device 4103 in the -y direction is relatively small. When this distance is small, the light emitting area 108 may appear borderless, for example a display comprising a backlight in which the light emitting area 108 extends very close to the edge of the backlight will It can look like frameless or borderless.

52 is a first defined as the angle between the combination light guide axis 5202 and the direction 5203 parallel to the main component of the direction of the combination light guides 5201 with respect to the light emission area 108 of the light guide 107. 1 Film-based light guide 5200 comprising an array of angular, tapered combined light guides 5201 formed by cutting regions in light guide 107 at a combined light guide orientation angle (γ). ) Is a plan view of an embodiment of. By cutting the tapered combined light guides 5201 in the light guide 107 at the first combined light guide directing angle, when the angled, papered light guides 5201 are folded, a light source is installed. Provides a volume with dimensions of sufficient length to ensure that the light source does not extend past the lower edge 4103 of the film-based lightguide 5200.

FIG. 53 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5300 including the film-based light guide 5200 and light source 102 shown in FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 53, the angled, tapered combination light guides 5201 are folded in the -y direction toward the light source 102 so that the light input surfaces 204 of the stacked combination light guides 5201 ) Is arranged to receive light from the light source 102.

FIG. 54 shows a first array of angular and tapered combined light guides 5201 formed by cutting regions in the light guide 107 at a first combined light guide directing angle 5406 and a second combined light guide orientation A plan view of an embodiment of a film-based light guide 5400 including a second array of angular, tapered combined light guides 5402 formed by cutting regions in the light guide 107 at an angle 5407 . Each of the first array of combined light guides 5201 and the combined light guides 5402 within the light guide 107 at a first combined light guide directing angle 5406 and a second combined light guide directing angle 5407 By cutting the second array, the angled, tapered light guides 5201, 5402, when folded, provide a volume having a dimension of sufficient length to install one or more light sources 102 to provide a volume of one or more light sources. They 102 do not extend past the lower edge 4103 of the light guide 107.

FIG. 55 shows a light emitting device 5500 including a film-based light guide 5400 shown in FIG. 54 and (for example, as two LEDs are arranged back-to-back) +y A perspective top view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 5500 including a light source 102 that emits light in the direction and -y direction. The first array of combination lightguides 5201 is folded in the -y direction toward the light source 102 so that each light input surface 204 receives light from the light source 102 and the combination of the combination lightguides 5402 The second array is folded in the +y direction towards the light source 102 such that each light input surface 204 is positioned to receive light from the light source 102. The first and second arrays of combined lightguides 5201, 5402 are from the center of the light emitting area 108 to allow the light source 102 to be placed in the central area of the lightguide 107 (in the y direction). It is angled so that the light source 102 does not extend past the lower edge 4103 or the upper edge 5401 of the light guide 107. The light source 102, the first array of combined lightguides 5201, and the second array of combined lightguides 5402 are folded under the light emitting area 108 along the fold (or bend) axis 5001. The light emitting device 5500 may be substantially edgeless or has light emitting regions that extend very close to the edges of the light emitting device in the xy plane.

56 is a curved or arcuate reflective surface arranged to redirect light from light guide 107, combination light guides 104 and light source 102 to combination light guides 104, or A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5600 including a mirror 5601 that functions as a light redirecting optical element including a region. Light in the combined light guides 104 passes through the combined light guides 104 to the light guide 107 and exits the light guide 107 in the light emitting area 108.

FIG. 57 is a plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 5700 including a light guide 107, combined light guides 104 and a mirror 5701. In this embodiment, the mirror 5701 is two or more curved or arranged to divert light from one or more light sources to the combined light guides 104, such as two light sources 102 shown in FIG. Containing arcuate surfaces or regions, the mirror functions as a bidirectional light turning optical element. The light in the combined light guides 104 passes through the combined light guides 104 to travel to the light guide 107 and exits the light guide 107 in the light emitting region 108. As shown in Fig. 57, the light sources 102 are arranged to emit light with a corresponding light source optical axis 5702 oriented substantially parallel to the +x direction. The curved mirror redirects the light to an axis 5703 oriented in the +y direction and an axis 5704 oriented in the -y direction. In another embodiment, the optical axes of the light sources 102 are oriented substantially in the -z direction (into the page) and the curved mirrors light with axes 5703 and 5704 oriented in the +y and -y directions respectively. Switch direction.

58 shows frames or border regions 5830, 5831 between the light emitting region 108 and corresponding edges 5001, 5832 of the light emitting device 5800 in the +x direction, -x direction, and +y direction. On the opposite sides of the lightguide 107 that are folded behind the light emitting area 108 of the light emitting device 5800 according to the lateral sides 5001 (shown by the phantom lines in FIG. It is a top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5800 comprising a combination light guides 104 and a light guide 107 and the light emitting device 5800 has three sides or edges as shown in FIG. It can be substantially edgeless (or have a small frame) along any desired number of sides or edges.

FIG. 59 is a plan view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 5900 comprising a light guide 107, with combined light guides 104 on two orthogonal sides. In this embodiment, the light coupling optical element 5901 is arranged to increase the flux of light coupling from the light source 102 to the two sets of coupling lightguides 104. A first portion of light 5902 from light source 102 refracts when entering light coupling optical element 5901 and is directed into coupling lightguides 104 oriented substantially parallel to the x axis under waveguide conditions, and A second portion of light 593 refracts when entering the light coupling optical element 5901 and is directed into coupling lightguides 104 oriented substantially parallel to the y-axis under waveguide conditions.

60 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of one embodiment of a light emitting device 6000 including a light guide 107 and a light input coupler 101. In this embodiment, the low contact area cover 6001 is attached to the optical input coupler 101 (or one or more elements within the optical input coupler 101), as physically coupled as shown in FIG. One or more fibers that are operatively coupled and wrap around the optical input coupler 101 and stitch the low contact area cover 6001 in contact with or adjacent to the light guide 107 ), such as 6002, physically coupled or held in an area close to the light guide 107 by an appropriate fastening mechanism. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 60, the stitches pass through the low contact area cover 6001 and the light guide 107 and within the light emitting portion of the light guide 107, the primary direction (- x direction) very small surface area. The small surface physical coupling mechanism within the lightguide reduces optical efficiency or reduces scattering or reflections of light traveling within the lightguide, which can cause stray light. In the embodiment shown in Figure 60, the fiber (or wiring, thread, etc.) 6002 is a row having a small percentage cross-sectional area in the yz plane (orthogonal to the optical axis direction (-x direction) of light within the light guide area) Provides a contact area physical coupling mechanism.

FIG. 61 shows an enlarged view of the area of the light guide 107 shown in FIG. 60 in which the light guide 107 contacts the low contact area cover 6001. In this embodiment, the low contact area cover 6001 has convex surface features ( convex surface features) (6101). In other embodiments, the low contact area cover 6001 includes any suitable feature to reduce the contact area 6102.

62 is a side view of a portion of an embodiment of a light emitting device 6200 including light guides 107 and combined light guides 104 protected by a low contact area cover 6001. The low contact area cover 6001 includes two or more areas of the low contact area cover 6001 by a suitable binding mechanism, such as one or more sealed fibers 6002, as physically coupled as shown in FIG. 62. The low contact area cover is coupled to affect the light guides 1007 in the surroundings of the combined light guides 104. The non-adjustable cylindrical tesion rod 6205 and the adjustable cylindrical tightening film stage 6201 are disposed substantially parallel to each other in the y direction and substantially parallel to each other in the x direction. As if physically joined by two braces 6202, they are influently joined. The inner surface 6101 of the low contact area cover 6001 includes convex surface features. When the cylindrical tightening film stage 6201 is translated in the +x direction, the inner surface 6101 of the low contact area cover 6001 is the light guide 107 and the combined light guide 104 in the +z and -z directions. ) Is pulled inward. The surface relief features on the low contact area cover 6001 are the amount of light lost from within the combined light guide 104 and/or light guide 107 when the cylindrical tightening film stage 6201 is translated in the +x direction. Reduce Translating the tension rod in the +x direction also allows the light emitting device 6200 parallel to the z direction by moving the coupling lightguides 104 closer to the lightguide 107 and closer together. Reduce the height of the The low contact area cover 6001 is also protected from dust contamination and physical contact by the coupling lightguides 104 and/or other components coupling light out of the lightguide film 107. Provides protection.

63 is a perspective view of a portion of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide 6300 including coupling lightguides 6301 including one or more flanges. In this embodiment, each coupling light guide 6301 includes a flange 6306 on each opposing side of the end region 6307 of the coupling light guides 6301 as shown in FIG. 63. The strap 6302 is guided through two slits 6303 formed in the base 6304, and the area of the strap in the y direction (or, for example, in the -y direction) is the base ( 6304), it is pulled by both ends (in the +y direction). By tightening the strap 6302, the combination light guides 6301 are brought together toward the base 6304 in the z direction to facilitate protecting the combination light guides 6301 with respect to the base 6304. Urge closer. Further, hook regions formed by the strap 6303 and the flanges 6306 prevent or limit the coupling light guides 6301 from translating in the -x direction. In one embodiment, after the coupling lightguides 6301 are driven together, the end regions 6307 of the coupling lightguides 6301 and/or flanges 6306 are cut or otherwise cut off the cutting axis 6305. Are removed accordingly. The resulting new edge at the ends of the coupling lightguides 6301 along the cutting axis 6305 may be an input surface or may be coupled to an optical element or to form a new input surface for the coupling lightguide 6301 It is polished. The ends are a high gloss fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP) film or polished glass and a window or adhesive or ultraviolet (UV) cured epoxy disposed between the ends of the bonding light guide 6301 ( epoxy), which can be physically or optically bonded to an epoxy such as) and the film or its glass is also a glossy, polished, epoxy made of epoxy that helps keep the ends of the bonding lightguides 6301 together. It can be removed, leaving behind an input surface that has been modified. In another embodiment, the holding mechanism is removed after being attached to another component of the light emitting device 6300 together or with one or more of the combined lightguides 6301. In another embodiment, the end regions 6307 are not removed from the coupling lightguides 6301 and the ends of the coupling lightguides 6301 form a light input surface 204 as shown in FIG.

FIG. 64 is a work of a film-based light guide 6400 including a light guide 107 including a relative position maintaining element 3301 and an optical input coupler disposed close to a linear fold line or area. It is a perspective view of an embodiment. In this embodiment, the relative positioning element 3301 is a substantially linear angled guide edge oriented at an angle 3302 of about 45 degrees in a direction 6404 (+y direction) parallel to the linear folding direction (-y direction). It has a cross-sectional guide edge in a plane (xy plane as shown) parallel to the light guide 107 including 3303. When the combined light guide 6401 is folded without the relative position maintaining element 3301, the stress point for the folding or bending force pulling the combined light guide in the -y direction is the combined light guide 6401 It is in a nearby area 6402 that separates from 107. By using the relative positioning element 3301, when the coupling light guide 6401 is pulled in the -y direction, the force is distributed over the length area 6403 of the angled guide edge 3303 of the relative positioning element 3301 do. In one embodiment, the angled guide edges 303 on the relative positioning element 3301 increase the possibility of tearing the coupling lightguide 6401 because the coupling lightguide 6401 can be pulled with a relatively greater force. Reducing and enabling a lower profile (reduced height in the z direction). In yet another embodiment, the thickness and edge profile of the relative positioning element 3301 affects the minimum bending radius for folding in the coupled lightguide 6401 close to the length region 6403.

FIG. 65 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a relative positioning element 6501 including rounded angled edge surfaces 6502. By rounding the edge surfaces 6502, the surface area of contact with the folded film is increased for the rounded angled edge surface 6502. By spreading a pulling force in the -y direction for a larger area of the combined light guide 6401, for example, the combined light guide 6401 is less likely to be broken or torn.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a relative positioning element 6600 including rounded angled edge surfaces 6502 and rounded tips 6601. By rounding the edge surfaces 6502, the surface area of contact with the folded film is increased for the rounded angled edge surface 6502. By spreading the pulling force in the -y direction over a larger area of the combined light guide 6401, for example, the combined light guide 6401 is less likely to be broken or torn. By rounding the tips of the relative positioning element 6600, the edges are less sharp and the localized stress area in the bonding lightguide as if the bonding lightguide 6401 is folded (or bent) or while maintaining the fold or bending. (stress region) is less likely to be induced.

67 is a perspective view of a portion of one embodiment of a film-based lightguide 6700 including coupling lightguides 6301 including one or more flanges 6306. In this embodiment, each of the coupling light guides 6301 has a flange 6306 on each opposite side of the end regions 6307 of the coupling light guides 6301 as shown in FIG. Include. The strap 6302 is guided through two slits 6303 at the base 6304 and is in y directions (e.g., the area of the strap in the -y direction). If it remains fixed relative to the base 6304, it is pulled by both ends (in the +y direction). By tightly tightening the strap 6303, the coupling lightguides 6301 can move the base 6304 closer together and in the z direction to facilitate fixing the coupling lightguides 6301 relative to the base 6304. Urge. Further, the hook regions formed by the strap 6303 and the flanges 6306 prevent or limit the coupling light guides 6301 from translating in the -x direction. In one embodiment, after the coupling light guides 6301 are driven together, the end regions of the coupling light guides 6301 and/or the flanges 6306 are cut or otherwise cut the opening along the cutting axis 6305 The (aperature cut) (6701) and the regions between the flanges 6306 are removed along the aperture cut (6701) by tearing or cutting. The edge (6702) of the aperture cut (6701) is then combined with the light guide Becomes the light input surface of the strip 6301. For example, in one embodiment, the cutting device used to cut the bonding lightguides 6301 from the film also cuts the light input surface on the bonding lightguides. And the flanges 6306 and strap 6302 aid in assembly.

FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a portion of one embodiment of the light emitting device 6200 shown in FIG. 62 including a light input coupler and light guide 107 protected by a low contact area cover 6001. In this embodiment, the low contact area cover 6001 passes through the light guide 107 and the two layers of the low contact area cover 6001 in a sewing or threading type operation and passes through the fiber 6002. As a result, the two regions of the low contact area cover 6001 are physically coupled to the light guide 1007 by the fiber 6002.

FIG. 69 is a light emitting device 6900 with two light input couplers including light guides 104 and a first light source 6902 and a second light source 6902 disposed on opposite sides of the light guide 107. ) Is a plan view of an embodiment of. An aluminum bar type thermal transfer element 6901 is arranged to thermally couple heat from the first light source 6902 and the second light source 693, and the light emitting device ( 6900) to dissipate heat. In other embodiments, one or more suitable heat transfer elements may be incorporated into the light emitting device 6900 to facilitate dissipating heat from the light emitting device 6900.

Figure 70 is an implementation of a light-emitting device 7000 including a light guide 107, a light input coupler 101, and a light reflective film 7004 disposed between the light input coupler 101 and the light emission region 108 It is a perspective view of an example. The circuit board 7001 for the light source in the optical input coupler 101 couples heat from the light source to a thermal transfer element heat sink 7002 thermally coupled to the circuit board 7001. In this embodiment, the thermal transfer element 7002 includes fins 7003 and has an increased surface area to conduct heat away from the circuit board 7001 and the light source at the optical input coupler 101. It extends in the xy plane behind the light reflective film 8004 and light emitting region 108 that provide and occupy a volume that does not extend beyond the edges 7030 of the light guide 107.

FIG. 71 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7100 including a light collimating optical element 7102 and a stack 7101 of combined lightguides arranged to receive light from a light source 102 . The output surface 7103 of the light collimating optical element 7102 corresponds in shape to the light input surface of the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides. Light 7104 from light source 102 is collimated by a light collimating optical element 7102 and enters the stack 7101 of combined lightguides. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the output surface 7103 has a rectangular shape that substantially matches the rectangular shape of the light input surface 7105 of the stack of combined lightguides 7101.

72 is a cross-sectional side view of the light emitting device 7100 shown in FIG. 71. Light 7104 collimated by a light collimating optical element 7102 enters the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides 7201.

73 is a plan view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7300 including a stack 7101 of coupling lightguides physically coupled to an optical collimating optical element 7102. The physical coupling region of the stack 7101 of coupling light guides defines a cavity 7331 in which the optical collimating optical element physical coupling region 7302 is disposed therein. In the illustrated embodiment, the optical collimating optical element physical coupling region 7302 is a ridge 7330 on the optical collimating optical element 7102 and the physical coupling region of the stack 7101 of coupling light guides is a stack. The area partially surrounding the opening or cutting of the aperture in each of the combined lightguides forming a cavity 7331 that substantially constrains and aligns the optical collimating element 7102 in the x and y directions. (7301).

74 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7400 including a light-switching optical element 7401 optically coupled to a stack 7101 of bonding lightguides using an index matching adhesive 7402. The light 7403 from the light source 102 is totally reflected at the light turning surface 7405 of the light turning optical element 7401, passes through the index matching adhesive 7402 to the stack 7101 of coupling lightguides, and the light source The optical axis of light 7403 from 102 is rotated. Light 7404 from light source 102 passes directly to the stack 7101 of combined lightguides without reflecting off the light turning surface 7405 of the light turning optical element 7401.

FIG.75A is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device 7500 including a light source 102 disposed adjacent to a lateral edge 7503 of a stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with a light turning optical edge 7502 to be. The optical turning optical edges 7502 reflect a portion of the incident light from the light source 102 having the optical axis 7504 in a first direction (eg, -y direction) so that the optical axis 7504 is in the first direction. It is rotated by an angle 7506 from to the optical axis 7505 in the second direction (eg, -x direction).

FIG.75B shows a light emitting device comprising a light source 102 disposed adjacent a light input surface edge 7507 of an extended area 7508 of a stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges 7502. 7530) is a plan view of a region of an embodiment. In this embodiment, the extended area 7508 is not necessary outside the lateral edges 7503 of the stack 7501 of the light-input surface 7507 bonding lightguides (e.g., with overflow adhesive). Bonded or cut, trimmed, and/or polished to a light collimating optical element without or without light coupling or damage (e.g., scratching or distortion) (Like collection) is allowed.

76 shows two light turning optical elements optically coupled to two stacks 7101 of bonding lightguides using an adhesive 7402 (e.g., such as an index matching adhesive or optical adhesive). A top view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7600 including a light source 102 arranged to couple light to elements 7401.

Figure 77 includes a light source 102 arranged to couple light with a bidirectional light-switching optical element 7701 optically coupled to two stacks 7101 of coupling lightguides using an index matching adhesive 7402 Is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7700. In this embodiment, a single bi-directional light-switching optical element 7701 divides and directs the optical axis of light in two different directions (-x and +x directions) from a single light source in a first direction (-y direction). Rotates, replaces two unidirectional light converting optical elements, reduces part count and associated costs.

Figure 78 shows two light sources 102 arranged to couple light with a bidirectional light turning optical element 7801 optically coupled to two stacks 7101 of coupling lightguides using an index matching adhesive 7402. ) Is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of the light emitting device 7800 including. In this embodiment, a single bi-directional light turning optical element 7701 divides the optical axes of light from two light sources and from the first direction (-y direction) to two different directions (+x and -x directions). It is designed to rotate.

FIG. 79 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 7900 including a light source 102 arranged to couple light into two stacks 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges 7502 to be. In this embodiment, two stacks 7501 of combined lightguides are divided and rotated in two different directions (+x and -x directions) from the optical axis first direction (-y direction) of light from the light source. Let it.

FIG. 80 is a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8000 including a light source 102 arranged to couple light to two overlapping stacks 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges 7502. It is a top view. In this embodiment, two stacks 7501 of combined lightguides divide and rotate the optical axis of light from the light source in two different directions (+x and -x directions) from a first direction (-y direction). Let it.

FIG. 81 is a plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8100 including a light source 102 arranged to couple light to a stack 7501 of coupling lightguides having light turning optical edges 7502. In this embodiment, the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides has tabs 8102 with tab alignment openings or openings 8101. Tab-aligned openings or openings 8101 are coupled lightguides with pins extending from the circuit board containing the light source to enable efficient light coupling into the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides (and Their light input surface).

82 is a plan view of a region of an embodiment of a light emitting device 8200 that includes a light source 102 disposed to couple light to a stack 7501 of coupling lightguides with light turning optical edges 7502. In this embodiment, the stack 7501 of coupling lightguides has alignment openings or openings 8201 in low light flux density regions 8202. Alignment openings or openings 8201 may be used, for example, to register a stack 7501 of lightguides coupled to the light source 102 and are located in the low light flux density area 8202 and are tabs. ) Is not required and any light loss due to the location of the alignment openings or openings 8201 within the stack of combined lightguides 7501 is minimized.

FIG. 83 shows a combined light having a light source overlay tab area 8301 including an alignment cavity 8302 for registration of a light input surface 8303 of a stack 7501 of combined light guides with a light source 102. A plan view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8300 including a light source 102 arranged to couple light to a stack of guides 7501. In this embodiment, for example, the alignment cavity 8302 in the stack of combination lightguides 7501 may be located above the light source 102 so that the light input surface 8303 of the stack of combination lightguides 7501 Is substantially registered and aligned in the x and y directions with the light source 102.

84 is a plan view of one embodiment of a light guide 8400 including a film-based light guide 107 with combined light guides 8401 with light turning optical edges 7502. The combination light guides 8401 are folded in the +z direction and can be translated laterally in the +x direction 8402 (shown folded in FIG. 85) so that the combination light guides 8401 are stacked on top of each other Are aligned.

FIG. 85 shows a light guide area of the film-based light guide 107 with the combined light guides 8401 folded and translated to form a stack 7501 of the combined light guides 8401 A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8500 including a light guide 8400 shown in FIG. 84 extending past the lateral edge 8501 of 106. The light 8502 from the light source 102 has an optical axis in the -y direction rotated in the -x direction by the light turning optical edges 7502 of the stack of combined light guides 7501 and combined light guides 8401 A fold in the stack 7501 of) has an optical axis through which the light exits the combined lightguides in the -y direction by redirecting the combined lightguide orientation in the -y direction. Light 8502 then proceeds to the light guide area 106 of the film-based light guide 107 and exits the film-based light guide 107 in the light emitting area 108.

FIG. 86 is a film-based lightguide with a non-folded coupling lightguide 8603 and coupling lightguides 8401 having light turning optical edges 7502. It is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide 8600 including 107. The non-folding combined light guide 8603 has a width 8601 extending from the edge of the light guide area 106 along the edge of the combined light guides 8401 and the combined light guides 8401 to the light guide area 106 ) And has a length 8602 in a direction perpendicular to the edge connected.

87 is a stack of combined lightguides 8401 that do not extend past the lateral edge 8501 (or the plane including the lateral edge 8501) of the lightguide region 106 of the film-based lightguide 107 ( A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 8700 including a light guide 8600 shown in FIG. 86 with combined light guides 8401 folded and translated to form 7501 ). The light 8502 from the light source 102 has an optical axis in the -y direction rotated in the -x direction by the light turning optical edges 7502 of the stack 7501 of the combining light guides 8401 and has an optical axis in the -y direction. The folding in the stack 7501 of the guides 8401 changes the direction of the combined light guide orientation in the -y direction, so that the light exits the combined light guides 8401 in the -y direction. ). Light 8502 then proceeds to the light guide area 106 and exits the film-based light guide 107 in the light emitting area 108. Light 8702 from the light source 102 has an optical axis in the -y direction and passes directly to the light guide area 106 past the non-folding combined light guide 8603. In this embodiment, the non-folding combination lightguide 8603 is a combination light guide 8603 because it does not need to be folded and translated in the +x direction to receive light from the light source 102. Allows the stack 7501 of s 8401 to not extend past the lateral edge 8501 of the lightguide region 106 of the film-based lightguide 107.

FIG. 88 is an illustration of a light guide 8800 comprising a film-based light guide 107 having optical turning optical edges 8803 and combined light guides 8801 having optical collimating optical edges 8802 It is a plan view of an embodiment. The combined light guides 8801 are folded in the +z direction and can be translated laterally in the +x direction 8402 (shown to be folded in FIG. 89) so that the combined light guides 8801 are stacked on top of each other. Are aligned.

FIG. 89 shows a stack 8902 of combined light guides 8801 with combined light guides 8801 folded and translated to form a stack 8902 of combined light guides 8801 A plan view of an embodiment of a light emitting device 8900 including a light guide 8900 shown in FIG. 88 extending past the lateral edge 8501 of the light guide region 106 of the guide 107. Light 8901 from light source 102 is collimated by light collimating optical edges 8802 and -x by light turning optical edges 8803 of stack 8902 of combining lightguides 8801. It has an optical axis in the -y direction that rotates in the -y direction, and the folding in the stack 8902 of the combined light guides 8801 changes the direction of the combined light guide orientation in the -y direction, and the light is combined in the -y direction. It has an optical axis that exits the light guides 8801. Light 8901 then proceeds to the light guide area 106 of the film-based light guide 107 and exits the film-based light guide 107 in the light emitting area 108.

FIG. 90 shows a film-based lightguide with optical turning optical edges 8803, optical collimating optical edges 8802, and combined lightguides 9001 with extended regions 7508 ( 107) is a plan view of an embodiment of the light guide 9000. The combined light guides 9001 may be folded in the +z direction and are translated laterally in the +x direction 8402 (shown to be folded in FIG. 91), so that the combined light guides 9001 are stacked on top of each other. And aligned.

91 shows that the stack 9101 of the combination light guides 9001 is folded to form a stack 9101 of the combination light guides 9001 so that the stack 9101 of the combination light guides 9001 is formed in the light guide region of the film-based light guide 107. A plan view of one embodiment of the light guide 9000 shown in FIG. 90 with coupling light guides 9001 extending past the lateral edge 8501 of 106. The extended regions 7508 of the stack 9101 of the combination light guides 9001 extend past the lateral edges 7503 of the combination light guides 9001, and the stack 9101 damages the lateral edge 7503 It can be cut and/or polished along the cutting line 9102 without causing it (or can be attached to an optical element or light source).

92 shows a first set of combined light guides 8401 and a second set of combined light guides 9203 with light turning optical edges 9230 directed to divert light in a plurality of directions, and A top view of one embodiment of a light guide 9200 including a film-based light guide 107 having a non-folding combined light guide 9201. The combination lightguides 8401 are folded in the +z direction and can be translated laterally in the +x direction 8402 (shown folded in FIG. 93) so that they stack and align on top of each other. The combined lightguides 9203 can be folded in the +z direction and translated laterally in the -x direction 9202 (shown folded in FIG. 93) so that they are stacked and aligned on top of each other.

FIG. 93 is shown in FIG. 92 having a first set of combined light guides 8401 folded and translated in the +x direction and a second set of combined light guides 9203 folded and translated in the -x direction. Is a perspctive top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 9300 including a light source 102 arranged to couple light to a light guide 9200. In this embodiment, the first set of combined light guides 8401 is folded over a non-folding combined light guide 9201 disposed to receive light from the light source 102 and transmit the light through the light guide area 106. It is folded over and translated over a second set of combined light guides 9203 that are loaded and translated.

FIG. 94 is shown in FIG. 92 with a first set of combined light guides 8401 folded and translated in the +x direction and a second set of combined light guides 9203 folded in the -x direction and translated. A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 9400 including a light source arranged to couple light to a light guide 9200. In this embodiment, the first set of combined light guides 8401 is folded and translated so that the first set of combined light guides 8401 is folded over the non-folding combined light guide 9201 and translated. It is interleaved with two sets of combined light guides 9203. In one embodiment, interleaving the combined lightguides 8401, 9203 close to the light source 102 is undesirable in light source alignment and/or light output profile by improving the uniformity of light within the lightguide area 106. It facilitates preventing or limiting unchanged changes.

FIG. 95 is a film including combining light guides 8401 having light turning optical edges 7502 having combined light guides extending in inverted shapes along a first direction 9501 -It is a plan view of an embodiment of a light guide 9500 including a base light guide 107.

96 is a perspective view of an embodiment of folded light guides 9600 including the light guide 9500 shown in FIG. 95. The combination light guides 8401 use two relative position maintaining elements 2901 to form a stack 7501 of the combination light guides 8401 in the +z direction, +x, and -y directions, It is then folded (9602) by translating one end (top end shown in FIG. 95) in the -z direction. In a further embodiment, the stack 7501 of the combination light guides 8401 may be cut along the cutting lines 9601 to form two stacks 7501 of the combination light guides 8401.

97 shows alignment cavities for registration of the light input surface of the stack of light-turning optical edges 8803, light collimating optical edges 8802, and combination lightguides with a light source ( A top view of one embodiment of a lightguide 9700 including a film-based lightguide 107 having combined lightguides 9702 with light source overlay tab regions including 8302. The lightguide 9700 also provides for registration of the light input surface of the non-folding coupling lightguide 9703 with a collimating optical edge 8802, and a non-folding coupling lightguide 9703 with a light source It includes a light source overlay tab area 8301 including an alignment cavity 8302. Coupling lightguides 9702 reduce the likelihood of stress concentrating on sharp corners (e.g. resulting from torsional or lateral bendign) and thus reduce the possibility of film It further includes curved regions 9701 on the edge of the coupling lightguides 9702 to reduce the likelihood of film fracture. Combined lightguides 9702 can be folded in the +z direction and translated laterally in the +x direction 8402 (shown folded in FIG. 98) so that they are stacked and aligned on top of each other.

FIG. 98 is a diagram of FIG. 97 with combined light guides 9702 folded and translated to form a stack 9803 of combined light guides 9702 aligned along one edge of the light guide area 106. A top view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 9900 including a light guide 9700 and a light source 102 (shown in FIG. 99) shown. Light 9802 from light source 102 is collimated by light collimating optical edges 8802 and in the -x direction by light turning optical edges 8803 of stack 9802 of combining lightguides 9702 The folding in the stack 9803 of the combined lightguides 9702 having an optical axis in the -y direction rotated by -y direction changes the direction of the combined lightguide orientation in the -y direction so that the light is- It has an optical axis that exits the coupling light guides 9702 in the y direction. Light 9802 then proceeds to the light guide area of the film-based light guide 107. Light 8702 from light source 102 has an optical axis in the -y direction, passes through non-folding coupled lightguide 9703 and passes directly to film-based lightguide 107.

99 is an enlarged side view close to the light source 102 in the y-z plane of the light emitting device 9900 shown in FIG. 98. Alignment guide 9803 includes alignment arm 9801, which is a cantilever spring having a curved front edge disposed over light source 102. Alignment arm 9801 is a stack of combination lightguides 9702 to maintain the position of the light input surfaces 103 of the combination lightguides 9702 close to the light output surface 9901 of the light source 102. 9803). In this embodiment, the alignment arm 9801 is inserted through the alignment cavities 8302 and the coupling lightguides 9702 can be pulled in the +y direction and downward (-z direction) so that the alignment cavities 8302 Is positioned relative to the light source 102 and the opposite end of the alignment guide 9803 (the free end of the alignment arm 9801 can be lifted slightly during this movement if necessary). In this embodiment, the alignment cavities 8302 register the position of the light input surfaces 103 of the coupling lightguides 9702 relative to the light output surface 9901 of the light source 102 in the x and y directions. The alignment arm 9801 in the alignment guide 9903, which is registration and substantially retains, is a light source base 9902 (which may be a circuit board for example) and a combined light guide relative to each other. The relative position in the z direction is maintained by applying a force in the -z direction to position the stack 9803 of the fields 9702. Light 9904 from the light source 102 exits the light output surface 9901 of the light source 102 and passes through the light input surface 103 to the combined lightguides 9702.

FIG. 100 is a yz of one embodiment of a light emitting device 10000 including an alignment guide 9803 having an optical collimating optical element 7102 and an alignment arm 9801, which is a cantilever spring with a curved edge disposed over the light source 102. It is an enlarged side view of the area close to the light source 102 in a plane. Alignment arm 9801 includes coupling lightguides 9702 to maintain the position of light input surfaces 103 of coupling lightguides 9702 close to light output surface 10002 of optical collimating optical element 7102. ) To apply force. In this embodiment, the alignment arm 9801 is inserted through the alignment cavities 8302 and the coupling light guides 9702 can be pulled in the +y direction. In this embodiment, the alignment cavities are not long enough to cover the alignment guide 9803 and the coupling lightguides 9702 are still held in place in the z direction by the alignment arm 9801. In this embodiment, the alignment cavities 8302 are the light input surfaces 103 of the coupling lightguides 9702 relative to the light output surface 10002 of the light collimating optical element 7102 in the x and +y directions. ) Registers and substantially maintains the position of the alignment arm 9801 on the alignment guide 9903, the light source base 9902 (which may be, for example, a circuit board) and coupling lightguides 9702 relative to each other. ) Maintains its relative position in the z direction by applying a force in the -z direction to position the stack 9803 The friction with the stack of the coupling light guides 9702 and the light source base 9902 and the alignment arm 9801 due to the force from the alignment arm 9801 in the -z direction and the inner walls of the cavities 8302 and the light collie Friction from the mating optical element 7102 and/or light source 102 helps prevent the coupling lightguides 9702 from translating in the -y direction. In yet another embodiment, the light input surface 103 of the coupling lightguides 9702 is optically bonded to the light output surface 10002 of the light collimating optical element 7401 (or they are 102) or optically bonded to the light output surface of the light turning optical element). Light 10003 from light source 102 exits the light output surface 9901 of light source 102 and travels to light collimating optical element 7102 where the light is collimated in the xy plane and light collimating optical element ( It exits to the light output surface 10002 of 7102 and enters the light input surface 103 of the combination lightguides 9702 and proceeds to the lightguide area 106 (not shown).

101 shows interior light directing edges 10101 disposed near the input edge of the stack 7501 of combined light guides and disposed near the light guide area 106 of the film-based light guide 107 Is a cross-sectional side view of an area of one embodiment of a light emitting device 10100 comprising a stack 7501 of combined lightguides having internal light directing edges 10104 formed therein. Light from light source 102 10102 enters the stack of combined lightguides 7501 and is reflected and redirected by inner light directing edges 10101 disposed near the input edge surface of the stack of combined lightguides 7501. Light 10103 from light source 102 is reflected and redirected by internal light directing edges 10101 disposed near the input edge of stack 7501 of combined lightguides, and film-based lightguide 107 It is further reflected and redirected by an inner light directing edge 10104 disposed near the lightguide area 106 of the.

FIG. 102 is a film-based light guide 2102 frontlight and reflective spatial light modulator attached to a flexible display connector 10206 of a reflective spatial light modulator 10209 using an optical adhesive cladding layer 801 ( A cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting display 10200 including 10209. The film-based lightguide 2102 further includes an upper cladding layer 10201 on the side opposite to the reflective spatial light modulator 10209. The flexible display connector 10206 performs electrical connection between the display driver 10205 and the active layer 10203 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209, and the bottom substrate of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 10204). Light 10207 from a side emitting LED light source 10208 physically coupled to the flexible display connector 10206 is directed to the film-based lightguide 2102 and light extraction features 1007. It is redirected by the optical adhesive cladding layer 801, the top substrate 10202 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and is reflected in the active layer 10203, and the top substrate 10202, the optical adhesive It passes back through the cladding layer 801, the film-based light guide 2102, and the upper cladding layer 10201 and exits the light emitting display 10200.

103 is a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a light emitting display 10300 having a film-based light guide 10301 physically coupled to the flexible display connector 10206, and the film-based light guide 10301 is a reflective spatial light modulator ( 10209). Light 10302 from the light source 102 physically coupled to the flexible display connector 10206 is directed into the film-based lightguide 10301 and redirected to the active layer 10203 by light extraction features, and Is reflected back through the film-based lightguide 10301 and the upper cladding layer 10201 and exits the light-emitting display 10300.

104 shows a flexible connector 10206 for a reflective spatial light modulator 10209 with a light source 102 disposed on a circuit board 10401 physically coupled to a flexible connector 10206 A perspective view of one embodiment of a light emitting device 10400 including a film-based light guide 2102 physically coupled to the device.

105 shows a light emitting device comprising a film-based light guide 2102 physically coupled to a flexible connector 10206 for a reflective spatial light modulator 10209 with a light source 102 disposed on the flexible connector 10206. It is a perspective view of an embodiment of (10500).

FIG. 106 is the light-emitting device 10400 shown in FIG. 104 further comprising a reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and a flexible touchscreen 10601 disposed on opposite sides of the film-based lightguide 2102. ) Is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light-emitting display 10600 including. In this embodiment, the film-based lightguide 2102 extends in the -x direction from the light emitting area 10603 of the light emitting display 10600 and is folded behind the light emitting area 10603. The flexible touch screen 10601 extends in the +y direction from the light emission area 10603 of the light emitting display 10600 and is folded behind the light emission area 10603. The flexible touch screen 10601 further includes touch screen drivers 10602 disposed on the flexible touch screen 10601.

FIG. 107 is a light-emitting display 10700 including a light emitting device 10400 shown in FIG. 104 further comprising a flexible touch screen 10601 disposed between a film-based light guide 2102 and a reflective spatial light modulator 10209. ) Is a perspective view of an embodiment. In this embodiment, the film-based light guide 2102 extends in the -x direction from the light emitting area 10603 of the light emitting display 10600 and is folded behind the light emitting area 10603. The flexible touch screen 10601 extends in the +y direction from the light emission area 10603 of the light emitting display 10600 and is folded behind the light emission area 10603. The flexible touch screen 10601 further includes touch screen drivers 10602 disposed on the flexible touch screen 10601.

FIG.108 is a relative positioning element comprising a flexible connector 10206 connecting reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and display drivers 10205 on a circuit board 10401 and having substantially linear sections 3303 Reflective display 10800 further comprising a film-based light guide front light including a film-based light guide 2102 having combined light guides 104 folded in a linear folded area 2902 using 3301 It is a perspective view of an embodiment. The registration pins 10804 physically coupled to the light source circuit board 10805 (physically coupled to the light source 102) are aligned openings or apertures in the relative positioning element 3301 and coupling light guides. Alignment openings at 104 or through openings 8101. In one embodiment, a portion of the film-based lightguide 2102 disposed near the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 in the +z and +x directions to create a folded light emitting display. It can be translated and folded 10801 along the fold line 10802. Once folded, the film-based lightguide 2102 directs the light in the -z direction towards the active display area 10803 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 is in the +z direction. Reflects part of the light from

109 shows a relative positioning element having substantially linear sections 3303 and comprising a flexible connector 10206 connecting the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and the display drivers 10205 on the circuit board 10401 ( Reflective display further comprising a film-based light guide front light including a film-based light guide 2102 having a combined light guide 104 folded in a linear fold region 2902 using 3301) A perspective view of an embodiment of 10900. Registration pins 10804 physically coupled to the relative positioning element 3301 pass through the tab alignment openings or openings 8101 in the coupling lightguides 104. The reflective display further includes a flexible touch screen film 10501 laminated on the film-based light guide 2102. The touch screen drivers 10502 and the light source are disposed on the flexible touch screen film 10501. In one embodiment, a portion of the film-based light guide 2102 disposed near the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 and the flexible touch screen film 10501 and the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 form a folded light emitting display. For example, it can be translated and folded 10801 along the fold line 10802 in the +z and +x directions. The film-based frontlight 2102 directs the light in the -z axis and the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 reflects a portion of the light in the +z direction.

110 is a top view of an embodiment of a light guide 11000 including a film-based light guide 107 including an array of combined light guides 104. Each of the combination light guides 104 of the combination light guides array further includes a sub-array of combination light guides 11001 having a smaller width than the corresponding combination light guide 104 in the y direction.

FIG. 111 is a perspective top view of a light emitting device 11100 including a light guide 11000 shown in FIG. 110 according to an exemplary embodiment. The combination lightguides 104 are folded so that they overlap and are aligned substantially parallel to the y direction and the sub-array of the combination lightguides 11001 is subsequently folded so that they overlap and from the light source ( 102) arranged to receive light and aligned substantially parallel to the x direction. The sub-array of the combined light guides 11001 couples the light into the combined light guides 104 that couple the light to the film-based light guide 107.

FIG. 112 is a side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 11200 comprising a stacked array of combined light guides 104 including core regions 601 and cladding regions 602. Core regions 601 include vertical light turning optical edges 11201. The cladding regions 602 in the inner regions of the stack of combined lightguides 104 do not extend to the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 and the core regions 601 are regions near the light source 102 Is not separated by the cladding layer. The light source 102 and the light collimating optical element 11203 are disposed on the light input surface 11206 on a stacked array of combined lightguides 104. Light 11207 from the light source 102 is collimated by the reflective surface 11202 of the light collimating optical element 11203, enters the stack of combined lightguides 104 and is The optical axis 12130 is rotated toward the +x direction by the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 of the core regions 601 of the combined light guides. Light 11207 travels in core regions 601 near light source 102 and totally internally reflects in the core region when encountering air gap 11208 or cladding layer 602. In one embodiment, the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 are formed by cutting the stack of core regions 601 at an angle 11205 from the normal 11204 to the surface of the stack of coupling lightguides 104. . In another embodiment, the outer cladding regions 602 near the light source 102 do not extend between the optical collimating optical element and the stack of core regions 601 near the optical collimating optical element 11203. In another embodiment, the cladding area 602 near the optical collimating element 11203 is a low refractive index optical adhesive that bonds the optical collimating optical element 11203 to the stack of coupling lightguides 104.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 11300 comprising a stacked array of combined light guides 104 including core regions 601 and cladding regions 602. The core regions 601 include vertical light turning optical edges 11201 and vertical light collimating optical edges 11301. The cladding regions 602 in the inner regions of the stack of coupling lightguides 104 do not extend to the vertical optical turning optical edges 11201 or the vertical optical collimating optical edges 11301 and the core regions 601 is not separated by the cladding layer in the area near the light source 102. The light source 102 is disposed on the light input surface 11206 on the stacked light guides 104. Light 11302 from light source 102 enters the stack of combined lightguides 104 and collimated by the vertical light collimating optical edges 11301 of the core regions 601 of the combination lightguides 104. Mated. The light 11302 is rotated toward the +x direction at the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 of the core regions 601 of the combined light guides 104. Light 11302 travels in core regions 601 near light source 102 and totally reflects in core region 601 when it encounters an air gap 11208 or cladding region 602.

FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional side view of a region of one embodiment of a light emitting device 11400 comprising a stacked array of combined light guides 104 including core regions 601 and cladding regions 602. The core regions 601 include vertical light turning optical edges 11201 and vertical light collimating optical edges 11301. The cladding regions 602 in the inner regions of the stack of coupling lightguides 104 do not extend to the vertical optical turning optical edges 11201 or the vertical optical collimating optical edges 11301 and the core regions 601 is not separated by the cladding layer in the area near the light source 102. The combined light guide 104 near the vertical light collimating optical edges 11301 defines a cavity 1141. Light source 102 is disposed within cavity 11401 and light 11402 from light source 102 enters the stack of combination lightguides 104 and core regions 601 of combination lightguides 104 Are collimated by the vertical light collimating optical edges 11301 of the. The light 11402 is rotated toward the +x direction at the vertical light turning optical edges 11201 of the core regions 601 of the combined light guides. Light 11402 travels in the core regions 601 near the light source and totally reflects in the core region when it encounters an air gap 11208 or cladding region 602. In this embodiment, the cavity 11401 facilitates registration and increases the optical efficiency of the light emitting device 11400. Cavity 1401 provides light source 102 at a predetermined position (x,y, and +z registration) with respect to vertical light collimating optical edges 11301 and/or light turning optical edges 11201. It can also serve as an alignment cavity for placement. By installing the light source 102 in the cavity 11401 of the stacked array of combination light guides 104, the areas that are directed into the stacked array of combination light guides 104 and have cladding regions 602 The light flux from the light source 102 remaining near the light guide area (not shown) in the stacked array of coupling light guides 104 or further in the +x direction under total reflection conditions at It is increased for the placed light source. In another embodiment, the cavity 1141 extends through two or more combined lightguides 104 or core regions 601 of the combined lightguides 104.

FIG. 115 is a combination disposed within the alignment cavity 1151 of a thermal transfer element 7002, such as physically coupled, effectively coupled to a base 9902 for a light source (not shown in FIG. 115). A perspective view of an embodiment area of a light emitting device 11500 including a stacked array of light guides 104. Thermal transfer element 7002 includes elongated fins 7003. Heat from the light source disposed within the heat transfer element 7002 is transferred away from the light source by the heat transfer element 7002. The light source is arranged to couple light into a stack of combining light guides 104. The alignment cavity 1151 can register a stack of coupling light guides 104 in the y and z directions, and the light source can provide registration in the +x direction (combined light guides (104) is prevented from translating past the light source in the +x direction). Friction or other mechanical or adhesive means may facilitate registration and/or maintaining the position of the stacks with respect to the light source 102 in the -x direction (prohibit pulling the stack out of the cavity. do.). In another embodiment, the internal ridge or end of the cavity 1151 inhibits or limits the lateral movement of the combined lightguides 104 in the +x direction and the light source 102 ) And the stack of coupling lightguides 104 (which can reduce the maximum operating temperature at the ends of the coupling lightguides 104 due to heat from the light source).

FIG. 116 is a light emitting device 11600 comprising a stacked array of coupling lightguides 104 disposed within an alignment cavity 1151 of an alignment guide 11601 including an elongated alignment arm 11602. It is a side view of an embodiment area of. A stack of coupling lightguides 104 may be inserted into an alignment cavity that registers the light input surface of coupling lightguides 104 in the x and z directions. The inner end 11603 of the alignment cavity 11501 is the stack of the combination light guides 104 and of the combination light guides 104 setting a minimum separation distance for the light source 102. It can provide a stop. Light 9993 from light source 102 is directed into combined light guide 104.

Figure 117 includes a film-based light guide 2102 and a reflective spatial light modulator 10209 attached to the flexible display connector 10206 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 using an optical adhesive cladding layer 801 A cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of the light-emitting display 11700. The film-based light guide 2102 further includes an upper cladding layer 10201 on the side opposite to the reflective spatial light modulator 10209. The flexible display connector 10206 performs an electrical connection between the display driver 10205 and the active layer 10203 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209, and physically connects to the bottom substrate 10204 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209. Are combined into The active layer 10203 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209 includes an active display area 10803 in which light is spatially modulated to form an image. Light 10207 from the side emitting LED light source 10208 (at the light input coupler 102) physically coupled to the flexible display connector 10206 is transferred from the light input coupler 102 to the coupling lightguides 104 as well. Then, it is directed to the film-based light guide 2102 and is redirected by a plurality of light extraction features 1007 and an optical adhesive cladding layer 801, a top substrate 10202 of the reflective spatial light modulator 10209. ), is reflected in the active display area 10803 of the active layer 10203, the top substrate 10202, the optical adhesive cladding layer 801, the film-based light guide 2102 and the upper cladding layer 10201 It passes back and exits the light emitting display 10200. The light extracting layer 11717 (such as a light absorbing or light scattering layer) is an upper cladding layer in the light mixing region 1730 (the region between the coupling light guides (not shown) and the light emitting region). Optically coupled to (10201). Light 11702 from the LED light source 10208 traveling in the upper cladding layer 10201 at an angle less than the critical angle between the upper cladding layer 10201 and the film-based light guide 2102 is transmitted to the light extraction layer 11717 Is extracted by In this embodiment, the film at an angle less than the critical angle of the upper cladding layer 10201 and the film-based lightguide 2102 entering and passing directly through the upper cladding layer 10201 or entering the upper cladding layer 10201 Light traveling in the base light guide 2102 is extracted by the light extraction layer 11701. In one embodiment, the light extraction layer 11711 is a light absorbing region that extracts and absorbs light from the cladding or at angles such that light from the cladding leaves the cladding region and/or lightguide. It is a light scattering region that redirects light. In a further embodiment, the light scattering and light absorbing regions are used to extract light from the cladding. In one embodiment, the light absorbing or light scattering extraction region is disposed on the sides of the two cladding regions opposite the film-based lightguide. One or more absorption or scattering extraction regions may be used to extract light from the cladding region or layer.

118 is a block diagram of a method 11800 of producing a display, the method being a lightguide region of a film including a core region and a cladding region. A step of forming an array of coupling lightguides by separating each of the coupling lightguides from the array of coupling lightguides from each other, wherein each coupling lightguide is continuous with the lightguide area and at the end of the coupling lightguide. forming 11801 an array of combined light guides, including a bounding edge at (end); Folding 11802 the array of combined light guides, causing the bounding edges to be stacked by folding the array of combined light guides; Positioning a light source that directs light to the stacked bounding edges, wherein the light passes through the light guide area and the array of combined light guides within the core area by total internal reflection. On-going, positioning (11803) of the light source; Forming (11804) a plurality of light extraction features on or in a core layer in a light emitting region of the lightguide region; Arranging a light extracting region on the cladding region in the light mixing region of the light guide region between the array of combined light guides and the light emitting region, or optically attaching the light extracting region to the cladding region. Coupling (11805); and positioning (11806) of the light emitting region adjacent to the reflective spatial light modulator.

A light emitting device for front illumination of a reflective display is disclosed. In one embodiment, the reflective display includes a front light including a light guide area of the film having combined light guides continuously extending from the light guide area of the film, at least one light source, and a light emitting area on the light guide area of the film. (light emitting region). In one embodiment, the combined lightguides are folded and stacked at their bounding edge to receive light from the light source, directing the light through the lightguide into the light emitting region and the light being reflected by the light extraction features. It is extracted towards the reflected spatial light modulator. In one embodiment, a light extracting region is placed in a cladding region over a lightguide core region on one or more regions (such as, without limitation, combined lightguides, lightguide regions, light mixing regions). Or is optically coupled to the cladding area and extracts light traveling within the cladding area.

In one embodiment, the portion of light extracted from the cladding region includes light traveling at a greater angle in the lightguide after the folded region than before the fold region. In another embodiment, the light extraction area extracts light from a first cladding area disposed over an area of the film-based lightguide (e.g., combined lightguides, light mixing area, or lightguide area). do. In one embodiment, the light scattering region includes a plurality of surface relief features on the surface of the cladding region. In another embodiment, a reflective display includes a cladding layer optically coupled to a light emitting region of a lightguide disposed adjacent to the reflective spatial light modulator. In one embodiment, the cladding layer optically coupled to the core region of the lightguide comprises an adhesive material. In a further embodiment, the light extraction region comprises a light absorbing material that extracts and absorbs light from the cladding region. In one embodiment, the light emitting region of the lightguide has an average luminous transmittance of greater than 70% measured according to ASTM D1003 when at least one light source does not emit light. Have. In another embodiment, the light emitting region of the lightguide has an average luminous transmittance of greater than 80% measured according to ASTM D1003 when at least one light source does not emit light. Have. In one embodiment, the light emitting region of the lightguide has an average haze of less than 30% or less than 10% measured according to ASTM D1003 when at least one light source does not emit light. haze). In another embodiment, the reflective display has a film-based lightguide and at least one light source is a black, light absorbing material that does not emit light and forms a film on the walls. When irradiated with 1000 lux of diffuse light arranged in the opening of an optical trap box including, luminance less than 10 cd/m 2 when irradiated with 100 cd/m 2 or 50 cd/m 2 or 400 lux Includes a region of the lightguide that includes light extraction features with luminance. In another embodiment, the average lateral dimension of the light extraction features in the light emission area in a direction parallel to the optical axis of light traveling at the light extraction features in the lightguide is 500. It is smaller than a micron. In another embodiment, the lightguide is folded so that the area of the lightguide is placed behind the reflective spatial light modulator. In one embodiment, the light guide comprises a light mixing region of the light guide disposed between the folds of the combined light guides and the light emitting region, and the light from each combined light guide The light mixing region combines with light from one or more other combination light guides and is totally reflected within the light mixing region. In one embodiment, the light guide is folded in the light mixing area so that the area of the light guide is placed behind the reflective spatial light modulator. In one embodiment, the reflective display includes a reflective spatial light modulator having an active display area and a frontlight, wherein the front light is 0.5 millimeters between them. A first array of coupling lightguides extending from a lightguide region of the lightguide comprising a lightguide formed from a film having a thickness not greater than) ( array), the array of combined lightguides is folded in a fold region and stacked to form a light input surface. In this embodiment, the reflective display is at least one light source arranged to emit light on the light input surface, the light traveling to the light guide area within the array of combined light guides, and each combined light The at least one light source coupled with light from the guide and for total reflection within the light guide area of the light guide; As a plurality of light extraction features that interfere with the total reflection of light in the light guide area of the light guide, the light is directed toward the reflective spatial light modulator in the light emitting region. The light extraction features exiting the frontlight toward the side; A cladding region optically coupled to the light guide; A light extracting region optically coupled to the cladding region on a first side surface of the cladding region opposite to the light guide; further comprising, at a first angle from an interface of total internal reflection Light propagating in the combined lightguide travels at a larger angle after the folded area in the combined lightguide and is extracted from the cladding area by the light extraction area. In one embodiment, the at least one light source does not extend past lateral edges of the display or light emitting area. In another embodiment, the reflective display includes a plurality of film-based lightguides arranged to receive light from one or more light sources having one or more colors.

In one embodiment, a method of producing a display includes each of an array of combined lightguides from a lightguide region of a film including a core region and a cladding region. A step of forming an array of the coupling lightguides by separating the coupling lightguides from each other, wherein each coupling lightguide is continuous with the lightguide region and bound at an end of the coupling lightguide. Forming an array of the combined light guides, including a bounding edge; Folding the array of combined light guides to allow the bounding edges to be stacked by folding the array of combined light guides; positioning a light source to direct light to the stacked bounding edges, wherein the light (light) is a step of determining a position of the light source, which passes through the light guide area and the array of combined light guides within the core area by total internal reflection; a light emission area of the light guide area forming a plurality of light extraction features on or in the core layer in a light emitting region; Arranging a light extracting region on the cladding region in the light mixing region of the light guide region between the array of combined light guides and the light emitting region Optically coupling to the cladding region; and positioning the light emitting region adjacent to a reflective spatial light modulator.

In one embodiment, a method of producing a display includes optically coupling a film-based lightguide to a reflective display or a component within the reflective display. In one embodiment, the at least one relative positioning element substantially maintains the relative position of the coupling lightguides from the area of the first linear folded region.

Examples

Specific embodiments are illustrated in the following example(s). The following examples are provided for purposes of illustration, but are not intended to limit the spirit or scope of the present invention.

In one embodiment, the combined lightguides cut strips at one or more ends of the film, forming the combined lightguides (strips) and the lightguide area (remainder of the film). It is formed by doing. The strips on the free end of the strips are tied together in an arrangement much thicker than the thickness of the film itself. On the other hand, they are physically and optically attached to the larger film lightguide and remain aligned. Film cuitting is stamping, laser-cutting, mechanical cutting, water-jet cutting, local melting, or other film processing methods. Achieved by Preferably, the cutting results in an optically smooth plane to promote total reflection of light to improve light guiding over the length of the strips. The light source is coupled to bundled strips. The strips are arranged so that the light travels through them through total reflection and is transferred to the light guide area. The bound strips form a light input edge with a much greater thickness than the film light guide area. The light input edge of the bound strips allows for a more efficient transition of light from the light source to the lightguide, compared to conventional methods of defining a light input surface and bonding it to the edge or top of the film. The strips can be either melted together at the input or mechanically applied to improve bonding efficiency. If the bundle is square, the length (I) of one of its sides is given by I~√(w×t), where w is the total width of the lightguide input edge. of the lightguide input edge), and t is the thickness of the film. For example, a 0.1mm thick film with a 1m edge would provide a square input bundle with dimensions of 1cm x 1cm. Considering these dimensions, silence is a film when using conventional light sources (e.g., incandescent, fluorescent; metal halide, xenon and LED sources). It is much easier to combine light compared to combining along the length of. The improvement in coupling efficiency and cost is particularly pronounced at film thicknesses below 0.25 mm (below) because this is the approximate size of LED and laser diode chips with many thicknesses. Therefore, it will be difficult and/or expensive to fabricate a micro optics to efficiently couple light from the LED chip to the film edge due to etendue and manufacturing tolerance limitations. It should also be noted that the folds in the slots are not creases to allow efficient light propagation, but rather a radius of curvature. Typically, the fold radius of curvature will be at least 10 times the thickness of the film.

An example of an embodiment that may be practiced is given herein. The assembly starts with a 0.25 mm thick polycarbonate film that is 40 cm wide and 100 cm long. Cladding layers of low refractive material approximately 0.01 mm thick are disposed on the upper and lower surfaces of the film. The cladding layer can be added by coating or co-extruding a material with a lower refractive index on the film core. The edge of the film is mechanically cut into 40 strips 1 cm wide using a sharp cutting tool such as a razor blade. The edges of the slots are then exposed to a flame to improve the smoothness of the optical transfer. The slots are merged into bundles of approximately 1 cm x 1 cm cross section. At the end of the bundle, a number of different types of light sources can be combined (eg, xenon, metal halide, incandescent, LED or laser). Light travels through the bundle into the film and out of the image area. Light can be extracted from the film light guide by laser etching into the film, which adds a surface roughness that results in total reflection disturbance. Multiple layers of film can be merged to create multi-color or dynamic signs.

An example of an embodiment of an implemented film-based light emitting device is described herein. The device starts with a 381 micron thick polycarbonate film that is 457 mm wide and 762 mm long. The 457mm edge of the film was cut into 6.35mm wide strips using an array of razor blades. These strips are grouped into sets of three 152.4 mm wide strips, which are also separated into two identical sets folded towards each other and stacked individually into 4.19mm x 6.35mm stacks. . Each of the three pairs of stacks is then merged together at the center in a method for forming a combined single input stack of size 8.38mm x 6.35mm. The LED module, the MCE LED module from Cree Inc., is combined into each of the three input stacks. The light emitted from the LED enters the film stack with an even input, and a portion of this light remains within each of the 15 mil strips through total reflections while traveling through the strip. Before light enters the larger lightguide, it continues to progress down each strip as if it were separating in their individual configurations. Moreover, a finned aluminum heat sink is placed down the length of each of the three coupling devices to dissipate heat from the LED. This assembly shows a compact design that can be arranged in a linear array to produce uniform light.

A light emitting device for reflective display front lighting is constructed using a 0.125 millimeter thick polycarbonate film formed in a light guide. Polycarbonate is first laminated on one side with a 0.025 mm thick silicone pressure sensitive adhesive (PSA). Facted surface features are patterned using a diamond-tipped scribe on the surface of the polycarbonate on opposite sides of the PSA in a rectangle of about 7.6 cm x 10.2 cm. Features are approximately 50 micron wide lines separated by 100 to 400 microns apart. The film is cut into the desired shape using a drag-knife. The ten combined light guides 1 cm wide are cut leaving an approximately 5 cm mixing region between the combined light guides and the scribed light extraction area. A bar of acrylic is attached near the ends of the bonding lightguides to assist in folding and to maintain the position of the strips after folding. The protective layer over the PSA is removed and the combined lightguides are folded and stacked to form an optical light input area of 1 cm x 1.5 mm in size. An aluminized PET film with silicon PSA wraps around a portion of the light mixing area as well as the bonding lightguides. The wrap serves to protect the combined lightguides, adds some rigidity, and absorbs the part of the light that moves in the cladding. A white LED, approximately 0.5mm high and 2.5mm wide, is coupled to the input surface of a stack of combined lightguides. The light emitting area of the light guide is laminated to an electrophoretic display. A portion of the light mixing region is laminated to a light absorbing border of the display that provides extraction of moving light in the cladding region before reaching the display area. The film is folded at about a 3.8 mm radius in the light mixing regions and the strips and LED are folded behind the electrophoretic display.

A method of manufacturing an embodiment of a multilayer frontlight including three film-based light guides is as follows. The three layers of thin film lightguides (< 250 microns) provide a layer of lower refractive index material between them (e.g., methyl-based silicone PSA). And are laminated to each other. The angled beam of light, ions or mechanical material (ie particles and/or fluid) then forms a pattern of lines or spots in the film. If necessary, the photosensitive material should be layered on each material in advance. The angle of the beam causes the extraction features on the layers to have an appropriate offset. The angle of the beam is affected by the light guide thickness and the width of the pixels and is given by θ=tan ^-1 (t/w), where θ is the relative angle of the light to the plane of the light guide, and t is the light guide. And the cladding thickness and w is the width of the pixels. Ideally, the extraction features primarily direct light towards the intended pixels, minimizing cross-talk. Light from the red, green, and blue LEDs is input to three light input couplers formed of each of the three light guides by folding the combined light guides.

Representative embodiments of the light emitting device and methods for making or making the same are described in detail above. Devices, components, and methods are not limited to the specific embodiments described herein, but rather the steps of devices, components of devices and/or methods are other devices, components and/or methods described herein. It can be used independently and individually for the steps. In addition, the described devices, components and/or the described methods steps may also be defined in other devices and/or methods or used in combination, and only devices and methods as described herein. It is not limited to carry out with.

While the invention includes various specific embodiments, those skilled in the art will recognize that the embodiments may be practiced with variations within the spirit and scope of the disclosure and claims.

EQUIVALENTS

One of skill in the art will recognize or be able to ascertain, using only routine experimentation, a number of equivalents to the specific procedures described herein. These equivalents are considered to be within the scope of the present invention. Various substitutions, changes, and modifications may be made to the invention without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Other aspects, advantages, and variations are within the scope of the invention. This application is intended to cover any adaptations or variations of the specific embodiments discussed herein. Therefore, it is intended that the present invention be limited only by the claims and their equivalents.

Unless otherwise indicated, all numbers expressing feature sizes, quantities, and physical properties used herein are to be understood as being modified by the term “about”. Thus, unless otherwise indicated to the contrary, the numerical parameters set forth in the foregoing specification and appended claims are approximations that may vary depending on the desired characteristics desired to be obtained by those skilled in the art using the teachings disclosed herein. Conversely, unless otherwise indicated, all tests and characteristics are measured at an ambient temperature in or close to the device when powered on (when indicated) at an ambient temperature of 25 degrees Celsius or a constant ambient room temperature of 25 degrees Celsius.

Claims (20)

Reflective spatial light modulator;
A lightguide formed from a film having a core area and opposing faces with a thickness not greater than 0.5 millimeters interposed therebetween, the lightguide being a combined lightguide continuing with the lightguide region of the lightguide. have an array of (coupliing lightguides),
Each combined light guide of the array of combined light guides terminates at a bounding edge; And
A light guide, wherein each combined light guide is folded in a fold region so that the bounding edges of the array of combined light guides are stacked;
At least one light source positioned to emit light to the light input surface, where the light travels to the light guide area of the light guide within the array of combined light guides, merges with the light from each combination light guide within the light guide area, and total reflection Which, the light source; And
Comprising a plurality of light extraction features, wherein the light exits the light guide area in the light emission area of the film by interfering with the light totally reflected within the light guide area,
A light guide is a reflective display that is folded so that the area of the light guide is placed behind a reflective spatial light modulator. The method according to claim 1,
A reflective display including an array of combined light guides in the area of the light guide disposed behind the reflective spatial light modulator. The method according to claim 2,
At least one light source is a reflective display located behind a reflective spatial light modulator. The method of claim 3,
A reflective display wherein the light emitting area is defined by a side edge and at least one light source does not extend beyond the side edge of the light emitting area. The method according to claim 1,
A reflective display in which at least one light source does not extend beyond the edge of the light guide adjacent to the light emitting area of the light guide. The method according to claim 1,
The light guide area of the light guide is a reflective display comprising a light emitting area and a light mixing area between the array of combined light guides. The method of claim 6,
A light guide is a reflective display that folds at the fold of the light mixing area to place the area of the light guide behind the reflective spatial light modulator. The method of claim 7,
The light-emitting area is defined by a side edge and at least one light source is a reflection placed within a volume limited by the side edge of the light-emitting area and the normal of the light-emitting area on the side of the lightguide opposite the viewing surface of the reflective display. Type display. The method according to claim 1,
A reflective display having at least one light source and an array of combined light guides positioned behind a reflective spatial light modulator. The method according to claim 1,
An array of combined lightguides defines a light input coupler, the light input coupler is folded behind the light emitting area, the lightguides are folded around the edge of the reflective spatial light modulator, and the distance is less than 20 millimeters. A lightguide formed from a film having a core area and opposing faces with a thickness not greater than 0.5 millimeters interposed therebetween, the lightguide being a combined lightguide continuing with the lightguide region of the lightguide. have an array of (coupliing lightguides),
Each combined light guide of the array of combined light guides terminates at a bounding edge; And
A light guide in which each combined light guide of the array of combined light guides is folded in a fold region so that the bounding edges are stacked;
At least one light source positioned to emit light to the light input surface, wherein the light travels from within the combined light guides to the light guide area of the light guide and from each combined light guide of the array of combined light guides within the light guide area. A light source for total reflection; And
Comprising a plurality of light extraction features, wherein the light exits the light guide area in the light emission area of the film by interfering with the light totally reflected within the light guide area,
A light guide is a light-emitting device that is folded so that the area of the light guide is disposed behind the light emission area. The method of claim 11,
At least one light source is a light emitting device located behind the light emitting area. The method of claim 11,
A light emitting device wherein the light emitting area is defined by a side edge and at least one light source does not extend beyond the side edge of the light emitting area. The method of claim 11,
A light emitting device including an array of combined light guides in a region of the light guide disposed behind the light emitting region. The method of claim 11,
An area of the light guide disposed behind the light emission area includes an array of combined light guides, and at least one light source is located behind the light emission area. As a lightguide formed from a film having opposite faces with a core region of a first material having a first refractive index and a thickness not greater than 0.5 millimeters therebetween, the light guide is a lightguide of the lightguide. region) and an array of continuous coupling lightguides,
Each combined light guide of the array of combined light guides terminates at a bounding edge; And
A light guide in which each combined light guide of the array of combined light guides is folded in a fold region so that the bounding edges are stacked;
At least one light source positioned to emit light to the light input surface, wherein the light proceeds to the light guide area of the light guide within the combined light guides and the light from each combination light guide is totally reflected in the light guide area;
A light mixing area of the film between the light emitting area and the array of combined light guides; And
Comprising a plurality of light extraction features, wherein the light exits the light guide area in the light emission area of the film by interfering with the light totally reflected within the light guide area,
The light mixing region includes a fold for positioning at least one light source behind the light emitting region. The method of claim 16,
At least one light source comprises an array of light emitting diodes. The method of claim 16,
A light emitting device in which the array of combined light guides is disposed behind the light emitting area. The method of claim 16,
A light emitting device wherein the light emitting area is defined by a side edge and at least one light source does not extend beyond the side edge of the light emitting area. The method of claim 16,
A light-emitting device in which the region of the light mixing region is disposed behind the light emission region.

Images